Habakkuk’s Two Tables #41

PART SIX: 1989

Presented by Jeff Pippenger

Invocation by Brother Jeff Pippenger: Heavenly Father, we thank you for a night’s rest and another day of life. And as we begin the next section in this study of Habakkuk’s Tables, we ask that you would grant us your wisdom and your understanding that we might discern these truths as you would have us discern them. I ask that you take control of my thoughts this morning, my words that they may be words designed to edify your people and glorify and honor you. And I ask that you prepare those that are hearing these things, their minds and their hearts, to receive them as you see fit. We want the Latter Rain poured out upon us. We ask you to accomplish that for us at this time by opening our understanding to Daniel 11, verse 40, its significance and its purpose in the Scriptures. And we thank you for these things in Jesus’s name. Amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: We are dealing with Habakkuk’s Two Tables as typified in the Scriptures. And years ago, the first time we ever organized our own meeting in this ministry in 2004, we organized a meeting in order to get the presentation of the last six verses of Daniel 11 recorded where they would be available. And we, our ministry, haven’t ever gone back and addressed the last six verses Daniel 11 specifically since then. So, that is eight years ago, and much new information about those last six verses has just come to light. So, even though one aspect of those last six verses of Daniel 11, 1989, and verse 40, is connected with William Miller’s and Nebuchadnezzar’s dream as far as the terminal point, when the Dirt Brush Man comes in and begins to sweep out the traditions and customs that have been handed down from generation to generation in Adventism, in order to do it justice we are going to take some time on the last six verses of Daniel 11. In 2004 that presentation was 40 hours. So, we are not going to take 40 hours, Lord willing; but, we are going to spend a great deal of time and not be directly referencing Habakkuk’s Tables until we get to the conclusion, probably, and then move beyond this subject.

So, if you have not ever studied the last six verses of Daniel 11 for yourself in depth, this will be your opportunity.

In this little room, I know some of you are newer in this message than 2004. So, put your thinking caps on and get your pen so you can take some notes and ask some question in between if you need to.

So, we are going to go around a lot of mountains before we get to where we want to be.

Repeat and Enlarge

Daniel 8:1-2

In Daniel 8, verses 1 and 2, it says,

“¹In the third year of the reign of king Belshazzar a vision appeared unto me, even unto me Daniel, after that which appeared unto me at the first. ² And I saw in a vision; and it came to pass, when I saw, that I was at Shushan in the palace, which is in the province of Elam; and I saw in a vision, and I was by the river of Ulai.” Daniel 8:1-2 (KJV).

What I want you to see, if you will, in the first verse, verse 1, it says “first.” And in your notes it defines that word first.

FIRST: Strong’s Concordance H8462—in the sense of opening; a commencement; relatively original (adverbially originally):—begin (-ning), first (time).

It is in the sense of opening; a commencement; the original.

So, in verse 1, you have two options; either works. It says,

“¹In the third year of the reign of king Belshazzar a vision”—

And in Daniel 8 there are two visions. There is the mareh vision and the châzôn [pronounced khaw-sone’] vision; but, in verse 1 it is the châzôn vision. It says,

—“¹In the third year of the reign of king Belshazzar a [châzôn] vision appeared unto me, even unto me Daniel, after that which appeared unto me at the first.”—

At the commencement.

So, you can either determine that Daniel is referencing the commencement of Belshazzar reign as king, or the commencement of this vision.

Daniel 7:1-2

But, in either case, if you go back to Daniel 7, verses 1 and 2, you will see the commencement of one or the other, either the commencement of Belshazzar as king or the commencement of this vision. It does not matter. It all works out the same in the wash.

Verse 1 of Daniel 7 says,

“¹In the first year of Belshazzar king of Babylon”—

And in Daniel 8 it is the third year of Belshazzar.

“¹In the first year of Belshazzar king of Babylon Daniel had a dream and visions of his head upon his bed: then he wrote the dream, and told the sum of the matters. ²Daniel spake and said, I saw in my vision by night, and, behold, the four winds of the heaven strove upon the great sea.” Daniel 7:1-2 (KJV).

So, what I want you to see here at the beginning is Daniel, in chapter 8, verses 1 and 2, he purposely ties together Daniel 7 and Daniel 8. They are operating upon the principle of repeat and enlarge.

And in Daniel 7 you have the kingdoms of Bible prophecy, and in Daniel 8 you have the kingdoms of Bible prophecy.

And in Daniel 7 you have the political manifestation of the kingdoms of Bible prophecy; therefore, those kingdoms are represented by beasts. And in Daniel 8 you have the spiritual manifestation of those kingdoms of Bible prophecy; therefore, the beasts are represented in sanctuary animals and terms throughout Daniel 8.

One of the primary themes in Bible prophecy is the combination of church and state; and, in Daniel 7 and 8, you see the church and state manifestations of the kingdoms of Bible prophecy.

Two Visions

So, in Daniel 8, the vision that Daniel sees here in the opening is the châzôn vision; and, we want to look at the châzôn vision in contrast with the mareh vision in Daniel 8 so we can draw some conclusions about it.

In verses 1 and 2 in Daniel 8, he introduces us to the fact that he has a vision that is connected with his first vision in Daniel 7.

And then in verse 3—let us go to verse 3 just to put it in context—it says,

“³Then I lifted up mine eyes,”—

Chapter 8, verse 3, here is where the vision begins.

“³Then I lifted up mine eyes, and saw, and, behold, there stood before the river a ram . . .” Daniel 8:3 (KJV).

So from this point on, Daniel is telling us about the châzôn vision; and, it is a sequence of historical events.

And when you get to verse 12 of this châzôn vision, it is still going on, and you can argue that verse 13 is still the châzôn vision. But, instead of seeing an illustration of symbolic history as he sees verses 3 through 12, when he gets to verse 13 he hears a heavenly dialogue.

In verse 13 it says,

“¹³Then I heard one saint speaking, and another saint said unto that certain saint which spake, How long shall be the vision concerning the daily sacrifice and the transgression of desolation, to give both the sanctuary and the host to be trodden under foot? ¹⁴And he said unto me, Unto two thousand and three hundred days; then shall the sanctuary be cleansed.” Daniel 8:13-14 (KJV).

So, this vision is symbolic history, then two verses of a heavenly dialogue which is the foundation of Adventism, as we know.

The Châzôn

Daniel 8:15, 16-19, 26-27; 1-2

Then in verse 15 it says,

“¹⁵And it came to pass, when I, even I Daniel, had seen the vision,”—

This is the châzôn vision. When he had seen the châzôn vision—which in the Hebrew means complete—when he had seen the châzôn vision,

—“and sought for the meaning, then, behold, there stood before me as the appearance of a man.” Daniel 8:15 (KJV).

And it is worth noting, what Daniel is seeking to understand, here is the châzôn vision.

—“¹⁶And I heard a man’s voice between the banks of Ulai, which called, and said, Gabriel, make this man to understand the vision.”—

Who is the man between the banks of the river? Who is it in the Scriptures that walks on the water? This is Palmoni, Christ.

And Daniel hears this Man’s voice telling the angel that replaced Lucifer, Gabriel the Light Bearer, to make this man understand the vision. In verse 15 Daniel is wanting to understand the châzôn vision; but, Christ tells Gabriel, “Make Daniel understand the mareh vision.”

So, if you do not see that, if you do not understand the job description that has been assigned to Gabriel, you will miss some of the details of this passage of Scriptures.

Verse 17,

“¹⁷So he [Gabriel] came near where I [Daniel] stood: and when he came, I was afraid and fell upon my face; but he said unto me, Understand, O son of man: for at the time of the end shall be the [châzôn ] vision.”—

This is going to take place at the Time of the End.

Okay. That is worth noting because of where we are heading is Daniel 11, verse 40, which is at the Time of the End.

Verse 18 says,

“¹⁸Now as he was speaking with me, I was in a deep sleep on my face toward the ground: but he touched me, and set me upright. ¹⁹And he said, Behold, I will make thee know what shall be in the last end of the indignation: for at the time appointed the end shall be.” Daniel 8:16-19 (KJV).

In verse 19, Gabriel tells Daniel, “Now, I’m going to make you know what’s going to be in the last end of the indignation.” There are two indignations that are referenced and the last one ends in 1844, and there is a reason that Gabriel tells him that; but, we are just looking at the word vision at this point.

Drop down to verses 26 and 27. In verse 26 you will see both visions. It says,

“²⁶And the vision”—the mareh vision; this is the mareh vision—“of the evening and the morning which was told is true; wherefore shut thou up the vision; for it shall be for many days.”—

The vision that is shut up is the châzôn vision.

CHÂZÔN : Complete—Time of the End; shut up

Okay. That is what happens to the châzôn vision in Daniel 12. Daniel is told to seal it up. And here in Daniel 8, the same characteristics are associated with the châzôn vision.

The Mareh

Daniel 8:26, 14, 16

—“²⁶And the vision of the evening and the morning”—the mareh vision of the evening and the morning—“which was told is true; wherefore shut thou up the vision; for it shall be for many days. ²⁷And I Daniel fainted, and was sick certain days; afterward I rose up, and did the king’s business; and I was astonished at the vision, but none understood it.” Daniel 8:26-27 (KJV).

MAREH: Daniel 8:14

EREB and bôqerS: Of the evening and of the morning.

Okay. In verse 26 the vision of the evening and of the morning, this expression, “evening and morning” in the Hebrew is repeatedly used in the Scriptures: “And the evening and the morning were the first day. . . . And the evening and the morning were the second day.”

And here in verse 26, it says, “. . . the vision”—the mareh vision—“of the evening and the morning is true; . . .” And the only place this Hebrew ereb and bôqers is found in the Scriptures where it is not translated as “evening and morning,” is Daniel 8:14, the foundation of Adventism.

If you look at verse 14, it says, “And he said unto me, Unto two thousand and three hundred days.” That days is ereb and bôqers. It would have been correct to translate verse 14 as “unto 2300 evenings and mornings, then shall the sanctuary be cleansed.” This is the only place this expression in the Bible is not translated as evenings and mornings; it is translated as simply days. And what it does is that it puts an emphasis on the fact that verse 26 says, “And the [mareh] vision of the evening and the morning which was told is true; . . . ,” so, you know that Daniel 8:14, the foundation of Adventism, is the mareh vision.

And if you will go back to verse 16, Gabriel has been told to explain the mareh vision to Daniel, even though Daniel wanted to understand the châzôn vision; and, the châzôn vision is this complete vision of prophetic history from verse 3 to verse 14.

The Time Appointed and the Time of the End

In Daniel 8:17, we have already noted that this châzôn vision is shut up till the Time of the End.

1798

“¹⁷So he came near where I stood: and when he came, I was afraid, and fell upon my face: but he said unto me, Understand, O son of man: for at the time of the end shall be the [châzôn ] vision.” Daniel 8:17 (KJV).

We want to put that characteristic in place.

1844

And now we want to deal with the indignation; because, in verse 19, Gabriel is going to make Daniel know what will be at “the last end of the indignation.”

“And he said, Behold, I will make thee know what shall be in the last end of the indignation: for at the time appointed the end shall be.” Daniel 8:19 (KJV).

There are two indignations of God in the Bible. We will look at both of them quickly,

Isaiah 26:20-21; 30:27-33; Zephaniah 3:8; Revelation 14:9-11

Isaiah 26:20-21 says,

“²⁰Come, my people, enter thou into thy chambers, and shut thy doors about thee: hide thyself as it were for a little moment, until the indignation be overpast. ²¹For, behold, the Lord cometh out of his place to punish the inhabitants of the earth for their iniquity: the earth also shall disclose her blood, and shall no more cover her slain.” Isaiah 26:20-21 (KJV).

There is an indignation of God against the wicked of the world, and we understand this to take place during the Seven Last Plagues.

Isaiah 30:27-33, it says,

“²⁷Behold, the name of the Lord cometh from far, burning with his anger, and the burden thereof is heavy: his lips are full of indignation, and his tongue as a devouring fire: ²⁸And his breath, as an overflowing stream, shall reach to the midst of the neck, to sift the nations with the sieve of vanity: and there shall be a bridle in the jaws of the people, causing them to err. ²⁹Ye shall have a song, as in the night when a holy solemnity is kept; and gladness of heart, as when one goeth with a pipe to come into the mountain of the Lord, to the mighty One of Israel. ³⁰And the Lord shall cause his glorious voice to be heard, and shall shew the lighting down of his arm, with the indignation of his anger, and with the flame of a devouring fire, with scattering, and tempest, and hailstones. ³¹For through the voice of the Lord shall the Assyrian”—

That is the King of the North that we are going to deal with in Daniel 11. It is the Papacy.

—“³¹For through the voice of the Lord shall the Assyrian be beaten down, which smote with a rod. ³²And in every place where the grounded staff shall pass, which the Lord shall lay upon him, it shall be with tabrets and harps: and in battles of shaking will he fight with it. ³³For Tophet is ordained of old; yea, for the king it is prepared; he hath made it deep and large: the pile thereof is fire and much wood; the breath of the Lord, like a stream of brimstone, doth kindle it.” Isaiah 30:27-33 (KJV).

This is the punishment of the wicked at the end of the world.

Zephaniah 3:8. We are looking at the two indignations in the Scriptures. One is against the wicked at the end of the world, the other is against God’s people. We need to understand this; because, Gabriel told Daniel he was going to make him understand what was the last end of the indignation.

In Zephaniah 3:8, it says,

“⁸Therefore wait ye upon me, saith the Lord, until the day that I rise up to the prey: for my determination is to gather the nations, that I may assemble the kingdoms, to pour upon them mine indignation, even all my fierce anger: for all the earth shall be devoured with the fire of my jealousy.” Zephaniah 3:8 (KJV).

Go to Revelation 14:9-11, as we finish up with four witnesses that there is an indignation against the wicked at the end of the world. Revelation 14:9-11 says,

“⁹And the third angel followed them, saying with a loud voice, If any man worship the beast and his image, and receive his mark in his forehead, or in his hand, ¹⁰The same shall drink of the wine of the wrath of God, which is poured out without mixture into the cup of his indignation; and he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the holy angels, and in the presence of the Lamb: ¹¹And the smoke of their torment ascendeth up for ever and ever: and they have no rest day nor night, who worship the beast and his image, and whosoever receiveth the mark of his name.” Revelation 14:9-11 (KJV).

So, there is an indignation against the wicked, and there is also an indignation against God’s people for breaking the covenant.

Deuteronomy 29:25-29; Isaiah 10:5-6; Lamentations 2:1-9; Ezekiel 22:23-31; Daniel 11:36; Zechariah 1:12

Go to Deuteronomy 29, verses 25 through 29.

“²⁵Then men shall say,”—

Men will ask why this happened to God’s people.

—“²⁵Then men shall say, Because they have forsaken the covenant of the Lord God of their fathers, which he made with them when he brought them forth out of the land of Egypt: ²⁶For they went and served other gods, and worshipped them, gods whom they knew not, and whom he had not given unto them: ²⁷And the anger of the Lord was kindled against this land, to bring upon it all the curses that are written in this book: ²⁸And the Lord rooted them out of their land in anger, and in wrath, and in great indignation, and cast them into another land, as it is this day. ²⁹The secret things belong unto the Lord our God: but those things which are revealed belong unto us and to our children for ever, that we may do all the words of this law.” Deuteronomy 29:25-29 (KJV).

There are no accidents in the Word of God. This is the indignation against God’s people for breaking the covenant, speaking about them being scattered to the other nations; and, it is emphasized that this truth is a secret thing that has been revealed to us and our children forever, thus implying that there will be some of us that recognize it and some of us do not.

Isaiah 10:5-6. We are now looking at the indignation against God’s people.

We have already looked at the indignation against the wicked. And, in one of those passages in Isaiah, God is referencing that He is going to punish the Assyrian, the Papacy, the King of the North; but, the Assyrian does a work for the Lord. He is the rod of His indignation. It is The Sunday Law that is going to be used to produce the two classes on Planet Earth, and the Lord uses the Papacy to accomplish this work. That is why he is called the rod of God’s anger.

Beginning at verse 5 of Isaiah 10:

“⁵O Assyrian, the rod of mine anger, and the staff in their hand is mine indignation. ⁶I will send him”—

He will send the Papacy.

—“against an hypocritical nation,”—

Against the Seventh-day Adventist Church.

—“and against the people of my wrath”—

The people that receive the mark of the beast.

—“will I give him a charge, to take the spoil, and to take the prey, and to tread them down like the mire of the streets.” Isaiah 10:5-6 (KJV).

There is an indignation against God’s people.

Lamentations, who wrote Lamentations?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Jeremiah.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Where do you find the book, Lamentations?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: After Jeremiah.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Right after Jeremiah.

Lamentations 2, verses 1 through 9:

“¹How hath the Lord covered the daughter of Zion with a cloud in his anger, and cast down from heaven unto the earth the beauty of Israel, and remembered not his footstool in the day of his anger! ²The Lord hath swallowed up all the habitations of Jacob, and hath not pitied: he hath thrown down in his wrath the strong holds of the daughter of Judah; he hath brought them down to the ground: he hath polluted the kingdom and the princes thereof. ³He hath cut off in his fierce anger all the horn of Israel: he hath drawn back his right hand from before the enemy, and he burned against Jacob like a flaming fire, which devoureth round about. ⁴He hath bent his bow like an enemy: he stood with his right hand as an adversary, and slew all that were pleasant to the eye in the tabernacle of the daughter of Zion: he poured out his fury like fire. ⁵The Lord was as an enemy: he hath swallowed up Israel, he hath swallowed up all her palaces: he hath destroyed his strong holds, and hath increased in the daughter of Judah mourning and lamentation. ⁶And he hath violently taken away his tabernacle, as if it were of a garden: he hath destroyed his places of the assembly: the Lord hath caused the solemn feasts and sabbaths to be forgotten in Zion, and hath despised in the indignation of his anger the king and the priest. ⁷The Lord hath cast off his altar, he hath abhorred his sanctuary, he hath given up into the hand of the enemy the walls of her palaces; they have made a noise in the house of the Lord, as in the day of a solemn feast. ⁸The Lord hath purposed to destroy the wall of the daughter of Zion: he hath stretched out a line, he hath not withdrawn his hand from destroying: therefore he made the rampart and the wall to lament; they languished together. ⁹Her gates are sunk into the ground; he hath destroyed and broken her bars: her king and her princes are among the Gentiles: the law is no more; her prophets also find no vision from the Lord.” Lamentations 2:1-9 (KJV).

That is the indignation of God against His people.

Ezekiel 22:23-31. All the prophets speak about the end of the world; so, this indignation that was accomplished against Ancient Israel is prefiguring the indignation that is accomplished against the Seventh-day Adventist Church in the very near future at The Sunday Law.

Ezekiel 22:23-31:

“²³And the word of the Lord came unto me, saying, ²⁴Son of man, say unto her, Thou art the land that is not cleansed, nor rained upon in the day of indignation. ²⁵There is a conspiracy of her prophets in the midst thereof, like a roaring lion ravening the prey; they have devoured souls; they have taken the treasure and precious things; they have made her many widows in the midst thereof.”—

The conspiracy came into Adventism in the early part of the 20^th Century.

^—6Her priests have violated my law, and have profaned mine holy things: they have put no difference between the holy and profane, neither have they shewed difference between the unclean and the clean, and have hid their eyes from my sabbaths, and I am profaned among them. ²⁷Her princes in the midst thereof are like wolves ravening the prey, to shed blood, and to destroy souls, to get dishonest gain. ²⁸And her prophets have daubed them with untempered morter, seeing vanity, and divining lies unto them, saying, Thus saith the Lord God, when the Lord hath not spoken. ²⁹The people of the land have used oppression, and exercised robbery, and have vexed the poor and needy: yea, they have oppressed the stranger wrongfully. ³⁰And I sought for a man among them, that should make up the hedge, and stand in the gap before me for the land, that I should not destroy it: but I found none. ³¹Therefore have I poured out mine indignation upon them; I have consumed them with the fire of my wrath: their own way have I recompensed upon their heads, saith the Lord God.” Ezekiel 22:23-31 (KJV).

Daniel 11:36: This is a very controversial verse in Advent history. This is where Uriah Smith made the wrong turn in Thoughts on Daniel and Revelation that negatively impacted Adventism from that point on to this very day. Verse 36 of Daniel 11 says,

“³⁶And the king”—

This is the Papacy. It is the king in the previous passage. Uriah Smith says at this point, “If we could say ‘a king,’ we could see a new power introduced into the verse.” But, it does not say “a king.” It says, “the king.”

And “the king,” the same king that is in verse 35, the King of the North, the Papacy, the one that has persecuted God’s people since it was placed on the throne in AD538 in verse 31.

—“³⁶And the king shall do according to his will;”—“the [Papacy] shall do according to his will; and he shall exalt himself, and magnify himself above every god, and shall speak marvellous things against the God of gods, and shall prosper till the indignation be accomplished:”—there is an indignation—“for that that is determined shall be done.” Daniel 11:36 (KJV).

How long did the Papacy prosper for? Until AD1798. There is an indignation that comes to a conclusion in AD1798. Of course, that is the first 2520 that began in 723BC; it concludes in AD1798.

Zechariah 1:12:

“¹²Then the angel of the Lord answered and said, O Lord of hosts, how long wilt thou not have mercy on Jerusalem and on the cities of Judah, against which thou hast had indignation these threescore and ten years?” Zechariah 1:12 (KJV).

His indignation was demonstrated when He carried them to Babylon for 70 years. Sister White compares those 70 years with the 1260 years of Papal bondage to spiritual Israel that ended in 1798, at the end of the first indignation, at the point where the Papacy’s prospering ended in 1798.

So, when it comes to Gabriel coming to Daniel in Daniel 8:19, and says, “I will show thee what shall be in the last end of the indignation,” it is telling us that there is a first end of the indignation, 1798, and a last end of the indignation, 1844.

And Gabriel’s command was to make Daniel understand the mareh vision of Daniel 8:14. So, in verse 19, Gabriel comes and says, “Okay. I am going to give you a second witness to 1844. I am going to make you understand what shall be in the last end of the indignation, which ends in 1844.” He is giving him a second witness to the year 1844, but he is also answering Daniel 8:13, because the indignation that ends in 1844 is talking about the reestablishment of the host. Daniel 8:14 is talking about the reestablishment of the sanctuary.

And, Daniel 8:13 asked the question, “How long shall be the châzôn vision concerning Paganism and Papalism trampling down the sanctuary and the host?”

And the 2520 that ends in 1844 is answering when the host will be restored, and Daniel 8:14 that ended in 1844 is telling when the sanctuary will be restored.

We are not dealing with that, but we just cannot pass by it.

What I am wanting you to see, even though you do not know it at this point, is that in Daniel 8:17, which is still in your notes, it says that the time of the end shall be the châzôn vision. And what we are trying to do here this morning is work our way through to show that Daniel defines what the Time of the End is.

The châzôn vision in Daniel 8:17, it is shut up. It is going to take place at the Time of the End. We want to show you that the Time of the End is a term that Daniel uses to mark the conclusion of a time prophecy.

You have in your notes Daniel 11:24. It says,

“²⁴He shall enter peaceably even upon the fattest places of the province; and he shall do that which his fathers have not done, nor his fathers’ fathers; he shall scatter among them the prey, and spoil, and riches: yea, and he shall forecast his devices against the strong holds, even for a time.” Daniel 11:24 (KJV).

Period that Pagan Rome Ruled the World

31BC AD330

Battle of Actium Constantine divides Kingdom

360 years in half, East and West

Figure No. 82.

Okay. He will “forecast his devices against his strongholds, even for a time.” We are going to find that this is talking about how long Pagan Rome would rule the world, and it is going to last for a time—a time being a year—360 years. And Pagan Rome ruled the world supremely, beginning with the Battle of Actium in 31BC, and ending in the year AD330 when Constantine divided the kingdom in half.

TIME: Strong’s Concordance H6256—From H5703; time. H5703—From H5710; properly a (peremptory) terminus, that is, (by implication) duration, in the sense of perpetuity (substantially as a noun, either with or without a preposition).

This word TIME here is what you get the 360 years out of. A time is a year, and a year in Bible prophecy is 360 days, and a day is a year.

This word TIME means time; and, it also means terminus, or duration, perpetuity. It is talking about a time prophecy.

God’s Helping Hand

Let me put in the record here what Sister White says about Uriah Smith’s book, Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation: Manuscript Releases, volume 21, page 444.

Within the past couple of weeks we had a Bible study and were confronted with a common argument that you know: “I thought that there is so much error by Uriah Smith, and I thought that Uriah Smith rejected the message of Righteousness by Faith by Jones and Waggoner; therefore, I thought that we should not use his book at all.”

And I referred the person to this quote here. And if you really understand this book, Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation, then you see that there has been an orchestrated attack against this book for almost 120 years, to keep it out of the hands and the minds of God’s people.

This is what Sister White says about Uriah Smith’s book, Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation, in spite of the humanity that is in that book. There are some mistakes in it. He was not a prophet; he was a human being.

“The Lord calls for workers to enter the canvassing field that the books containing the light of present truth may be circulated. The people in the world need to know that the signs of the times are fulfilling. Take to them the books that will enlighten them. Daniel and Revelation, The Great Controversy, Patriarchs and Prophets, and The Desire of Ages should now go to the world. The grand instruction contained in Daniel and Revelation has been eagerly perused by many in Australia. This book has been the means of bringing many precious souls to a knowledge of the truth. Everything that can be done should be done to circulate Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation. I know of no other book that can take the place of this one. It is God’s helping hand.

“Those who have been long in the truth are asleep. They need to be sanctified by the Holy Spirit. The third angel’s message is to be proclaimed with a loud voice. Tremendous issues are before us. We have no time to lose. God forbid that we should allow minor matters to eclipse the light which should be given to the world.” Manuscript Releases, volume 21, 444.

So, I am going to read some from Uriah Smith now concerning Daniel 11:24, where he is going to tell us that Daniel 11:24 that we are dealing with here is Pagan Rome, and that it is the time prophecy on how long Pagan Rome would rule the world supremely, from the Battle of Actium in 31BC, until Constantine divided the Roman Empire into East and West in the year AD330.

Most Seventh-day Adventists did not know there was a time prophecy for Pagan Rome. They know about Papal Rome, barely; but, Pagan Rome they did not know. But, right here in “God’s helping hand,” this is Uriah Smith.

“The usual manner in which nations had, before the days of Rome, entered upon valuable provinces and rich territory, was by war and conquest. Rome was now to do what had not been done by the fathers or the fathers’ fathers;”—

It is going to conquer differently.

—“namely, receive these acquisitions through peaceful means. The custom, before unheard of, was now inaugurated, of kings’ leaving by legacy their kingdoms to the Romans. Rome came into possession of large provinces in this manner.

“And those who thus came under the dominion of Rome derived no small advantage therefrom. They were treated with kindness and leniency. It was like having the prey and spoil distributed among them. They were protected from their enemies, and rested in peace and safety under the aegis of the Roman power.

“To the latter portion of this verse, Bishop Newton gives the idea of forecasting devices from strongholds, instead of against them. This the Romans did from the strong fortress of their seven-hilled city. ‘Even for a time;’ doubtless a prophetic time, 360 years. From what point are these years to be dated? Probably from the event brought to view in the following verse.

“‘VERSE 25. And he shall stir up his power and his courage against the king of the south with a great army; and the king of the south shall be stirred up to battle with a very great and mighty army; but he shall not stand: for they shall forecast devices against him.’

“By verses 23 and 24 we are brought down this side of the league between the Jews and the Romans, B.C. 161, to the time when Rome had acquired universal dominion. The verse now before us brings to view a vigorous campaign against the king of the south, Egypt, and the occurrence of a notable battle between great and mighty armies. Did such events as these transpire in the history of Rome about this time?—They did. This was the war between Egypt and Rome; and the battle was the battle of Actium. . . .

“The battle was fought September 2, B.C.31, at the mouth of the gulf of Ambracia, near the city of Actium. The world was the stake for which these stern warriors, Antony and Caesar, now played. The contest, long doubtful, was at length decided by the course which Cleopatra pursued; for she, frightened at the din of battle, took to flight when there was no danger, and drew after her the whole Egyptian fleet.”—

She just left Antony there.

—“Antony, beholding this movement, and lost to everything but his blind passion for her, precipitately followed, and yielded a victory to Caesar, which, had his Egyptian forces proved true to him, and had he proved true to his own manhood, he might have gained.

“This battle doubtless marks the commencement of the ‘time’ mentioned in verse 24. And as during this ‘time’ devices were to be forecast from the stronghold, or Rome, we should conclude that at the end of that period western supremacy would cease, or such a change take place in the empire that the city would no longer be considered the seat of government. From B.C.31, a prophetic time, or 360 years, would bring us to A.D.330. And it hence becomes a noteworthy fact that the seat of empire was removed from Rome to Constantinople by Constantine the Great in that very year. (See Encyclopedia Americana, art. Constantinople.) . . .

“‘VERSE 29. At the time appointed he shall return, and come toward the south; but it shall not be as the former, or as the latter.’” —

And here is where I am wanting to get to.

Verse 24 gives us a time prophecy of 360 years; but, verse 27 and verse 29 talk about a time appointed, the time appointed being when this prophecy is going to be fulfilled. And this is what I want to put in the record here.

This is still Uriah Smith.

—“The time appointed is probably the prophetic time of verse 24, which has been previously mentioned. It closed, as already shown, in A.D.330, at which time this power was to return and come again toward the south, but not as on the former occasion, when it went to Egypt, nor as the latter, when it went to Judea. Those were expeditions which resulted in conquest and glory. This one led to demoralization and ruin. The removal of the seat of empire to Constantinople was the signal for the downfall of the empire. Rome then lost its prestige. The western division was exposed to the incursions of foreign enemies. On the death of Constantine, the Roman empire was divided into three parts, between his three sons, Constantius, Constantine II, and Constans.”—

Constantine was really good at picking names for his children, right?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Laughter.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“Constantine II and Constans quarreled, and Constans, being victor, gained the supremacy of the whole West. He was soon slain by one of his commanders, who, in turn, was shortly after defeated by the surviving emperor, and in despair ended his own days, A.D.353. The barbarians of the North now began their incursions, and extended their conquests till the imperial power of the West expired in A.D.476.”—

When he says the Barbarians of the North now began their incursions, what is that? That is the Trumpets of Revelation.

—“This was indeed different from the two former movements brought to view in the prophecy; and to this the fatal step of removing the seat of empire from Rome to Constantinople directly led.” Uriah Smith, Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation, 273, 275, 279–280.

The Time Appointed

Now, I have verses 27 and 29 in your notes. I want you to see something, and this is this history that we just went over, the history of this 360 years.

And verse 27 says,

“²⁷And both these kings’”—Antony and Caesar—“hearts shall be to do mischief, and they shall speak lies at one table; but it shall not prosper: for yet the end shall be at the time appointed.”—

AD330 is called by Daniel in this verse two things: the end and the time appointed.

That word END there, is the same word that you will find in the expression “time of the end.”

The “time of the end,” that expression is found five times in God’s Word, all in Daniel; but, this END, the same word.

The Hebrew word for time appointed is mô‛êd [pronounced mo-ade'], and it means in an appointed time. That is verse 27.

Verse 29 says [beginning at verse 28],

—“²⁸Then shall he return into his land with great riches; and his heart shall be against the holy covenant; and he shall do exploits, and return to his own land. ²⁹At the time appointed he shall return, and come toward the south; but it shall not be as the former, or as the latter.” Daniel 11:27–29 (KJV).

What is the time appointed? AD330, this is the time appointed.

END: Strong’s Concordance H7093—Contracted from H7112; an extremity; adverbially (with prepositional prefix) after:— + after, (utmost) border, end, [in‑] finite, X process.

The END there, you can see the definition of it.

APPOINTED: Strong’s Concordance H4150—properly an appointment, that is, a fixed time or season.

You can see the definition of TIME APPOINTED: an appointment, or a fixed time or season.

The Time of the End:

TIME: Strong’s Concordance H6256—From H5703; time. H5703—From H5710; properly a (peremptory) terminus, that is, (by implication).

END: H7093—Contracted from H7112; an extremity; adverbially (with prepositional prefix) after:— + after, (utmost) border, end, [in-] finite, X process.

The Time of the End, the expression “time of the end,” it is the same word for END that we have already looked at. And it means the conclusion of a time prophecy.

So, what am I saying? Go back to Daniel 8:17, and I will try to pull this together for us.

Daniel 8:17 says,

“¹⁷So he [Gabriel] came near where I [Daniel] stood: and when he came, I was afraid and fell upon my face; but he said unto me, Understand, O son of man: for at the time of the end shall be the [châzôn] vision.” Daniel 8:17 (KJV).

This expression, “time of the end,” is marking the end of a time prophecy.

The end of the châzôn vision was going to be AD1798. And this châzôn vision here, it is shut up until 1798; and, you have more than one witness of this in the Book of Daniel. Daniel 12 gives you two more witnesses to this.

And Daniel 8:26 says, “. . . shut thou up the vision; . . .”

The end of this time prophecy of 1260 years [AD538 to AD1798] is marked as the time of the end. The end of this time prophecy of 360 years [31BC to AD330] is identified as the time appointed. But, these are two different time prophecies.

So, what I am saying is that when Daniel marks the end of a time prophecy, he calls it either “the time appointed” or “the time of the end” or “the end.” There is nothing real profound about that, but it is worth taking note how Daniel identifies the end of a time prophecy is with those expressions: It is the end; it is the time of the end; it is the time appointed.

But, for the student of prophecy, if you are going to determine what the Time of the End is, then what do you have to determine? Which time prophecy is being discussed.

This time prophecy, 360 years, is different from this time prophecy of 1260 years. So, you have to determine, when he says “the time of the end” which time prophecy is under discussion.

Daniel 11:31

Now, Uriah Smith is going to comment on Daniel 11:31. At some point we will go through Daniel 11:31 in detail, and Uriah Smith comments on Daniel 11:31 at great length; but, I just simply want to take his last point. Look at Daniel 11:31.

Daniel 11:31 says,

“³¹And arms shall stand on his part,”—

This is Pagan Rome standing up for the Papacy.

—“and they [Pagan Rome] shall pollute the sanctuary of strength,”—

Uriah Smith just let us know the sanctuary of strength for Pagan Rome was the City of Rome. When they ruled from the City of Rome, they were invincible. When they left for Constantinople, they began to fall apart.

“Arms,” Pagan Rome shall stand up for the Papacy, verse 31, and those arms will pollute the City of Rome, as the warfare that takes place in that history destroys it over and over again.

—“and [they, Pagan Rome] shall take away the daily sacrifice, [Paganism] and they [the arms] shall place the abomination that maketh desolate.” Daniel 11:31 (KJV).

Pagan Rome is going to place the Papacy on the throne of the Earth in AD538.

And here is just that last thought about that abomination of desolation is what Uriah Smith is commenting on from Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation, page 289. He says,

“Thus the Gothic horn, the last of the three, was plucked up before the little horn of Daniel 7. Nothing now stood in the way of the pope to prevent his exercising the power conferred upon him by Justinian five years before. The saints, times, and laws were now in his hands, not in purpose only, but in fact. And this must therefore be taken as the year [538] when this abomination was placed, or set up, and as the point from which to date the predicted 1260 years of its supremacy.” Uriah Smith, Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation, 289.

Period that Papal Rome Ruled the World

AD538 1798

360 years

Figure No. 83.

So, the very last phrase of Daniel 11:31 is marked the year AD538, and its supremacy would go to there [1798], and we know that this is 1260 years.

Daniel 11:35

In Daniel 11:35, after the Papacy is placed on the throne of the Earth in AD538, verses 32, 33, 34, and 35 are telling us the history that follows once the Papacy takes control of the world.

And in verse 35 it says,

“³⁵And some of them of understanding shall fall, to try them, and to purge, and to make them white, even to the time of the end: because it is yet for a time appointed.” Daniel 11:35 (KJV).

So, now you have got Daniel using both of these terms: the time of the end and a time appointed.

And what is the subject now? Is he just discussing Pagan Rome here in verse 35?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Negative responses.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: He is discussing Papal Rome.

So, what is the time of the end and a time appointed for Papal Rome?

Well, it has got to be the end of a time prophecy. Daniel has already put that in place. So, there has to be a time prophecy associated with Papal Rome, and that time prophecy is mentioned specifically seven times in the Scriptures; not specifically many, many more times than that. And it ends in 1798. So, the time appointed in this passage, the Time of the End in this passage is 1798.

Are you with me?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmative responses.)

1260 Years

Daniel 7:25; (11:33); 12:7, (11); Revelation 11:2, 3; 12:6, 14; 13:5

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Underneath in your notes you will see that this 1260 years is specifically addressed in Daniel 7:25.

And the reason I have Daniel 11:33 in parentheses there is that it is not specifically addressed in verse 33. Notice verse 33 in Daniel 11.

“³³And they that understand among the people shall instruct many: yet they shall fall by the sword, and by flame, by captivity, and by spoil, many days.” Daniel 11:35 (KJV).

This “many days” here is a reference to the 1260 years of Papal persecution. The Papacy is placed on the throne of the Earth in AD538; and, at the very last phrase of Daniel 11:31. And here in verse 33 it is describing the persecution of this time period, and it is called “many days.” So, in verse 33, it is inferred.

Now, in Daniel 7:25, the 1260 years is definitely marked.

“²⁵And he shall speak great words against the most High, and shall wear out the saints of the most High, and think to change times and laws: and they shall be given into his hand until a time and times and the dividing of time.” Daniel 7:25 (KJV).

Daniel 12:7, definitely marked the 1260 years:

“⁷And I heard the man clothed in linen, which was upon the waters of the river, when he held up his right hand and his left hand unto heaven, and sware by him that liveth for ever that it shall be for a time, times, and an half; and when he shall have accomplished to scatter the power of the holy people, all these things shall be finished.” Daniel 12:7 (KJV).

In verse 11 of Daniel 12, you have the 1260 years inferred. The reason I have that in parentheses is because it is the 1290, which begins in AD508, but also ends in 1798.

“¹¹And from the time that the daily sacrifice shall be taken away, and the abomination that maketh desolate set up, there shall be a thousand two hundred and ninety days.” Daniel 12:11 (KJV).

Revelation 11, verse 2 and verse 3 both reference the 1260.

“²But the court which is without the temple leave out, and measure it not; for it is given unto the Gentiles: and the holy city shall they tread under foot forty and two months. ³And I will give power unto my two witnesses, and they shall prophesy a thousand two hundred and threescore days, clothed in sackcloth.” Revelation 11:2-3 (KJV).

And Revelation 12, verses 6 and 14, specifically reference the 1260, and Revelation 13:5.

“⁶And the woman fled into the wilderness, where she hath a place prepared of God, that they should feed her there a thousand two hundred and threescore days. . . .

“¹⁴And to the woman were given two wings of a great eagle, that she might fly into the wilderness, into her place, where she is nourished for a time, and times, and half a time, from the face of the serpent.” Revelation 12:6, 14 (KJV).

“⁵And there was given unto him a mouth speaking great things and blasphemies; and power was given unto him to continue forty and two months.” Revelation 13:5 (KJV).

So, what you have there is seven direct references to this 1260-year time period.

And in verse 35 of Daniel 8, Daniel tells us that the end of this time period is the time appointed; it is the Time of the End.

Daniel 11:40

“⁴⁰ And at the time of the end shall the king of the south push at him: and the king of the north shall come against him like a whirlwind, with chariots, and with horsemen, and with many ships; and he shall enter into the countries, and shall overflow and pass over.” Daniel 11:40 (KJV).

Then in Daniel 11:40, there is no change. It does not matter what Uriah Smith says; there is no historical or grammatical change from verse 31, all the way to verse 40. The subject of these verses is the King of the North, and the King of the North from verse 31, all the way to the end of the chapter, is the Papacy.

So, when you get to Daniel 11, verse 40—and this is what we are dealing with this morning—it says, “And at the time of the end.” You have to determine what time prophecy is being associated with the Papacy there.

What time prophecy is associated with the Papacy?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The 1260.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The 1260.

So, when verse 40 says, “And at the time of the end,” where does verse 40 begin?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: 1798.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: 1798; verse 40 begins in 1798.

And what is 1798?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Time of the End.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: It is the Time of the End. It is the time appointed.

The Time of the End

In The Great Controversy, page 356, Sister White says this:

“But at the time of the end, says the prophet, ‘Many shall run to and fro, and knowledge shall be increased.’ Daniel 12:4. . . . Since 1798 the book of Daniel has been unsealed, knowledge of the prophecies has increased, and many have proclaimed the solemn message of the judgment near.” The Great Controversy, 356.

Daniel 8:17; 11:35, 40; 12:4, 9

In your notes you have Daniel 8:17, which is referencing the Time of the End that is shut up. Daniel 8:17 is referencing this 1260 years.

“¹⁷So he came near where I stood: and when he came, I was afraid, and fell upon my face; but he said unto me, Understand, O son of man: for at the time of the end shall be the vision.” Daniel 8:17 (KJV).

The châzôn vision is shut up until 1798.

Daniel 11:35, the time appointed, the time of the end; that is 1798.

“³⁵And some of them of understanding shall fall, to try them, and to purge, and to make them white, even to the time of the end: because it is yet for a time appointed.” Daniel 11:35 (KJV).

Daniel 11:40, at the time of the end, the King of the South pushes against him. That is 1798.

“⁴⁰ And at the time of the end shall the king of the south push at him: and the king of the north shall come against him like a whirlwind, with chariots, and with horsemen, and with many ships; and he shall enter into the countries, and shall overflow and pass over.” Daniel 11:40 (KJV).

And in Daniel 12:4 and 9, you have the time of the end in both of those verses, identifying when the Book of Daniel would be unsealed. It was going to be sealed up until the Time of the End.

“⁴But thou, O Daniel, shut up the words, and seal the book, even to the time of the end: many shall run to and fro, and knowledge shall be increased. . . .

“⁹And he said, Go thy way, Daniel: for the words are closed up and sealed till the time of the end.” Daniel 12:4, 9 (KJV).

Those are the five places in God’s Word that you will find the expression, “time of the end,” referenced.

Okay. What I said yesterday you may not remember. It is not that important that you remember everything that I say. But what I said was that Daniel 11:40 is the most—I personally have never found a verse that has this much truth in it. There is no verse.

Now, I acknowledge that if we are faithful and we get to live for eternity that every verse is going to have that kind of depth; but, Daniel 11, verse 40, we are going to show you, the Lord willing, over the next couple of weeks that this verse has such depth that it is just overwhelming. Okay?

Wounded to Death?

And you have in your notes, “Wounded to Death?” In Revelation 13:3, it says,

“³And I saw one of his heads as it were wounded to death; and his deadly wound was healed: and all the world wondered after the beast.” Revelation 13:3 (KJV).

What do we understand this to be?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Papacy.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: That is the Papacy receiving the deadly wound in 1798. Right? And that is correct. We are not arguing that. That is the only place that you are going to find that referenced though, the Papacy receives a deadly wound.

But, where is it in the Bible where the actual deadly wound that the Papacy receives is identified? There is only one place.

Here it is mentioned that the Papacy, one of the heads, would receive a deadly wound; and, through prophetic study you determined that that head is the Papacy, and at some point in time it is going to receive a deadly wound; but, there is only one verse that tells you how the Papacy receives a deadly wound.

What verse is that? Daniel 11:40.

Daniel 11:40

“⁴⁰And at the time of the end shall the king of the south push at him: and the king of the north shall come against him like a whirlwind, with chariots, and with horsemen, and with many ships; and he shall enter into the countries, and shall overflow and pass over.” Daniel 11:40 (KJV).

You see, if you do not understand that 1798 is the Time of the End in verse 40, and it says “And at the time of the end shall the king of the south push at him,” if you think, as some people do, that the King of the North and the King of the South is some foolish idea that does not square with God’s Word, if you do not think the King of the North is the Papacy receiving a deadly wound in 1798, then you cannot understand that the King of the South is atheistic France that delivers this deadly wound.

And if you cannot understand where the deadly wound is delivered in God’s Word, how can you be the one that stands before the world and explains who the beast is? You do not even know where he got his deadly wound.

And Daniel 11:40 is where he gets his deadly wound.

You go look it up. You go look in the places where it is mentioned that he is going to rule for 1260 years, and there is no Scripture other than Daniel 11, verse 40, that tells you that the Papacy receives its deadly wound from atheistic France in 1798. This is the verse: Daniel 11:40.

So, it seems worthwhile as Seventh-day Adventists, those that are going to give the Loud Cry, the Third Angel’s Message, that are going to tell the world who the beast is, so the world does not receive the mark of the beast, it seems important to understand what the Time of the End in verse 40 is, along with who the King of the North is and who the King of the South is.

At that point I am just trying to give some of the significance of verse 40.

The Events Connected with the Close of Probation

Notice this next quote. Usually, I quote this quote often, often; and, others do, too. And maybe mine is a bad example, but we generally cut this paragraph in half and we start in the middle, which is good; but we are going to start the whole paragraph here.

From The Great Controversy, page 595, it says,

“Before His crucifixion the Saviour explained to His disciples that He was to be put to death and to rise again from the tomb, and angels were present to impress His words on minds and hearts.”—

All the prophecies are speaking about the end of the world; so, who are His disciples in this passage?
FROM THE AUDIENCE: Seventh-day Adventists.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Seventh-day Adventists. We are His disciples at the end of the world. And, He explained the prophetic message to them in advance, but the Disciples do not know the prophetic message when it arrives.

—“But the disciples were looking for temporal deliverance from the Roman yoke, and they could not tolerate the thought that He in whom all their hopes centered should suffer an ignominious death.”—

Huh. They had preconceived ideas from false education. They were holding onto the Mystery of Iniquity, so they could not understand the prophecies.

—“The words which they needed to remember were banished from their minds; and when the time of trial came, it found them unprepared. The death of Jesus as fully destroyed their hopes as if He had not forewarned them.”—

Now notice what it says.

—“So in the prophecies the future is opened before us as plainly as it was opened to the disciples by the words of Christ. The events connected with the close of probation and the work of preparation for the time of trouble, are clearly presented. But multitudes”—

Who are the multitudes? The disciples: Seventh-day Adventists.

—“But multitudes [of Seventh-day Adventists] have no more understanding of these important truths”—

What important truths? The events connected with the close of probation.

—“But multitudes have no more understanding of these important truths than if they had never been revealed.”—

But, they have been revealed.

—“Satan watches to catch away every impression that would make them wise unto salvation,”—

Wow! These events connected with the close of probation are salvational! That is what she just said. You have an opportunity to understand these events, and Satan is there trying to snatch that truth from you; because, that truth would make you wise unto salvation. The events connected with the close of probation are salvational!

—“Satan watches to catch away every impression that would make them wise unto salvation, and the time of trouble will find them unready.” The Great Controversy, 595.

They are lost!

So, where is the close of probation? Well, it is Daniel 12:1, when Michael stands up.

Notice what Sister White says about Daniel 12:1 in The Great Controversy, page 613.

“‘At that time shall Michael stand up, the great Prince which standeth for the children of thy people: and there shall be a time of trouble, such as never was since there was a nation even to that same time: and at that time thy people shall be delivered, everyone that shall be found written in the book.’ Daniel 12:1.

“When the third angel’s message closes, mercy no longer pleads for the guilty inhabitants of the earth. The people of God have accomplished their work. They have received ‘the latter rain,’ ‘the refreshing from the presence of the Lord,’ and they are prepared for the trying hour before them. Angels are hastening to and fro in heaven. An angel returning from the earth announces that his work is done; the final test has been brought upon the world, and all who have proved themselves loyal to the divine precepts have received ‘the seal of the living God.’ Then Jesus ceases His intercession in the sanctuary above. He lifts His hands and with a loud voice says, ‘It is done;’ and all the angelic host lay off their crowns as He makes the solemn announcement: ‘He that is unjust, let him be unjust still: and he which is filthy, let him be filthy still: and he that is righteous, let him be righteous still: and he that is holy, let him be holy still.’ Revelation 22:11. Every case has been decided for life or death.” The Great Controversy, 613.

When Michael stands up, He makes this pronouncement. Daniel 12:1 is the close of probation.

The events connected with the close of probation are the verses that lead up to Daniel 12:1, and these verses have been clearly revealed. The multitudes in Adventism have no more understanding of these verses as if they had never been revealed. And this is salvational.

Warnings

Now, you have these people that fight against this message, and they say, “Oh, Brother Pippenger and the others are putting the wrong emphasis on this passage from The Great Controversy about the events connected with the close of probation.” And they go to the very next paragraph which says, right here,

“When God sends to men warnings so important that they are represented as proclaimed by holy angels flying in the midst of heaven, He requires every person endowed with reasoning powers to heed the message. The fearful judgments denounced against the worship of the beast and his image (Revelation 14:9–11), should lead all to a diligent study of the prophecies to learn what the mark of the beast is, and how they are to avoid receiving it.”—

One of the champions of this argument that I am going to explain to you here is a guy by the name of Eugene Pruitt. He says here, where it says “events connected with the close of probation,” the very next paragraph is saying that these events are the Three Angels’ Messages of Revelation 14, and that these people that are emphasizing that these events are the last six verses of Daniel 11, they are wresting the meaning of this passage in The Great Controversy.

Well, not so. Sister White says in that previous paragraph, “the events connected with the close of probation.” But, in this paragraph she is talking about warnings. Revelation 14 is not portraying a sequence of events. It is giving us three Angels that are identifying warning messages.

The events connected with the close of probation are illustrated in the last six verses of Daniel 11.

And because these men do not understand that Daniel 11:44, tidings out of the East and the North, is Daniel’s representation of the Three Angels’ Messages, they separate these truths from one another. Satan has just taken those impressions out of their minds that would make them wise unto salvation, and they lead others to do the very same thing.

Continuing on:

—“But the masses of the people turn away their ears from hearing the truth and are turned unto fables.”—

The very thing that is done with this paragraph is what gets accomplished by those that twist this paragraph. They lead their listeners to fables.

—“The apostle Paul declared, looking down to the last days: ‘The time will come when they will not endure sound doctrine.’ 2 Timothy 4:3. That time has fully come. The multitudes do not want Bible truth, because it interferes with the desires of the sinful, world-loving heart; and Satan supplies the deceptions which they love.

“But God will have a people upon the earth to maintain the Bible, and the Bible only, as the standard of all doctrines and the basis of all reforms. The opinions of learned men, the deductions of science, the creeds or decisions of ecclesiastical councils, as numerous and discordant as are the churches which they represent, the voice of the majority—not one nor all of these should be regarded as evidence for or against any point of religious faith. Before accepting any doctrine or precept, we should demand a plain ‘Thus saith the Lord’ in its support.

“Satan is constantly endeavoring to attract attention to man in the place of God. He leads the people to look to bishops, to pastors, to professors of theology, as their guides, instead of searching the Scriptures to learn their duty for themselves. Then, by controlling the minds of these leaders, he can influence the multitudes according to his will.” The Great Controversy, 594–595.

What is my point? My point here is this: Daniel 11, verse 40, begins in 1798, and it leads into Daniel 12:1, where Michael stands up; therefore, where we consider the last six verses of Daniel 11, we are considering the history that begins in 1798 and goes all the way until human probation closes. And those verses are describing the events that lead to the close of probation; whereas, Revelation 14, the Three Angels’ Messages, they are warning messages. They are not events.

But, when you see the King of the North capturing the King of the South; and the King of the North capturing the glorious land; and Edom, Moab and [the chief children of] Ammon escaping the hand of the King of the North; and, then the King of the North captures Egypt, these are events connected, leading to the close of probation; and, they are salvational.

So, this message, it is the message of the events connected with the close of probation.

Miller and John the Baptist

I am going to change gears a little bit here. We have looked at this in this worship series, what we are going to look now, previously.

In Early Writings, beginning at page 229, it says,

With trembling, William Miller began to unfold to the people the mysteries of the kingdom of God, carrying his hearers down through the prophecies to the second advent of Christ. With every effort he gained strength. As John the Baptist heralded the first advent of Jesus and prepared the way for His coming, so William Miller and those who joined with him proclaimed the second advent of the Son of God.” Early Writings, 229–230.

What I want you to see here, this is one of several places where Sister White compares William Miller with who?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: John the Baptist.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: John the Baptist. Okay.

Miller

So, what was William Miller’s message? Because, William Miller’s was the message of the First Angel. All right? He is the messenger of the First Angel.

And Sister White tells us in The Great Controversy, page 310, speaking of Miller,

“It was needful that men should be awakened to their danger; that they should be roused to prepare for the solemn events connected with the close of probation. The Great Controversy, 310.

Whoa! That is what the last six verses of Daniel 11 are. That is what multitudes in Adventism do not understand.

William Miller presented a message identifying the events connected with the close of probation.

John the Baptist

What about John the Baptist?

Matthew 3:7 says,

“⁷But when he saw many of the Pharisees and Sadducees come to his baptism, he said unto them, O generation of vipers, who hath warned you to flee from the wrath to come?” Matthew 3:7 (KJV).

What is the wrath to come? The destruction of Jerusalem.

Who warned the Jews to flee from the wrath to come?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: John the Baptist.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: No. John the Baptist asked the question. It is John the Baptist saying, “Who warned you to flee from the wrath to come?

Who warned them to flee from the wrath to come?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Indiscernible response.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Pardon me?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Daniel.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Daniel. Daniel 9, “490 years are given to you, and then the wrath is coming”: The stoning of Stephen.

So, was Miller’s message identifying the events connected with the close of probation?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmations.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Yes.

What book was it based upon?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Daniel.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Daniel.

Was John the Baptist identifying the events connected with the close of probation? Yes.

What book was it based upon? Daniel.

The same message, the same messengers.

Of course, William Miller’s message we would say is Daniel 8, the 2300 years; but, really, if you do not have Daniel 9 to explain the 2300 days of Daniel 8:14, then you do not have anything in Daniel 8:14.

Daniel 9 says, “From the going forth of the command to restore and rebuild Jerusalem.” If you do not have the starting point for that 2300 days, as noted in Daniel 9, then you do not have anything. Right?

So, you can say that Miller’s message was based upon Daniel 9, and John’s message was based upon Daniel 9. John’s message was based upon the 70 weeks of Daniel 9.

But, our message is based upon Daniel 11.

The beginning of Adventism is Daniel 9; the end of Adventism is Daniel 11. The message of Adventism is Daniel 9 and 11.

In The Great Controversy, page 22:

“Christ saw in Jerusalem a symbol of the world hardened in unbelief and rebellion, and hastening on to meet the retributive judgments of God. The woes of a fallen race, pressing upon His soul, forced from His lips that exceeding bitter cry. He saw the record of sin traced in human misery, tears, and blood; His heart was moved with infinite pity for the afflicted and suffering ones of earth; He yearned to relieve them all. But even His hand might not turn back the tide of human woe; few would seek their only Source of help. He was willing to pour out His soul unto death, to bring salvation within their reach; but few would come to Him that they might have life.

The next paragraph:

“The Majesty of heaven in tears! the Son of the infinite God troubled in spirit, bowed down with anguish! The scene filled all heaven with wonder. That scene reveals to us the exceeding sinfulness of sin; it shows how hard a task it is, even for Infinite Power, to save the guilty from the consequences of transgressing the law of God. Jesus, looking down to the last generation, saw the world involved in a deception similar to that which caused the destruction of Jerusalem. The great sin of the Jews was their rejection of Christ; the great sin of the Christian world would be their rejection of the law of God, the foundation of His government in heaven and earth. The precepts of Jehovah would be despised and set at nought. Millions in bondage to sin, slaves of Satan, doomed to suffer the second death, would refuse to listen to the words of truth in their day of visitation. Terrible blindness! strange infatuation!” The Great Controversy, 22.

AD70 is an illustration of the end of the world. It is the events connected with the close of probation.

The Judgment Message of Daniel

The Great Controversy, page 353, you see Sister White comparing the Millerite message with the message of the Disciples, both based upon Daniel 9. We have just explained that.

“Those who proclaimed this warning gave the right message at the right time. But as the early disciples declared, ‘The time is fulfilled, and the kingdom of God is at hand,’ based on the prophecy of Daniel 9, while they failed to perceive that the death of the Messiah was foretold in the same scripture, so Miller and his associates preached the message based on Daniel 8:14 and Revelation 14:7, and failed to see that there were still other messages brought to view in Revelation 14, which were also to be given before the advent of the Lord. As the disciples were mistaken in regard to the kingdom to be set up at the end of the seventy weeks, so Adventists were mistaken in regard to the event to take place at the expiration of the 2300 days. In both cases there was an acceptance of, or rather an adherence to, popular errors that blinded the mind to the truth. Both classes fulfilled the will of God in delivering the message which He desired to be given, and both, through their own misapprehension of their message, suffered disappointment.” The Great Controversy, 353.

Okay. I want to put one more thing in the record, and then we will close.

Manuscript Releases, number 13, page 394—The Lord willing, we will spend a great deal of time on this quote; but, we are just going to take one point out of here in closing—Sister White says,

“We have no time to lose. Troublous times are before us. The world is stirred with the spirit of war. Soon the scenes of trouble spoken of in the prophecies will take place. The prophecy in the eleventh of Daniel”—the prophecy in the eleventh of Daniel—“has nearly reached its complete fulfillment.”—

She does not say the prophecy in Revelation 13. She does not say the prophecy in Revelation 17. She does not say the prophecy in Daniel 8.

—“The prophecy in the eleventh of Daniel has nearly reached its complete fulfillment. . . .”—

So, what verses is Sister White speaking of?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The last six verses of Daniel 11.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: How do you know that?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Indiscernible response.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: 1 Corinthians 14:32, “³²And the spirits of the prophets are subject to the prophets. ³³For God is not the author of confusion, but of peace, as in all churches of the saints.” (KJV)

The prophets have to agree with one another.

Do they have to agree with themselves?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: In The Great Controversy, page 356, Sister White says the Time of the End is 1798, and she said that in the middle of the 19^th Century, long after 1798. So, Sister White knows that verse 40 of Daniel 11 begins in 1798; so, Sister White knows that the first 39 verses of Daniel 11 are past history. Right?

So, when she references the future fulfillment of Daniel 11, what verses is she identifying? Verses 40 through 45.

See, there are some principles in this passage that we will deal with in depth, the Lord willing; but, I am going to bring this to a close here, and this is where I wanted to close.

Daniel 11, verse 40, is going to be fulfilled with the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989, and this will mark the end of Nebuchadnezzar’s and Miller’s dreams. The Dirt Brush Man arrives in 1989, because it is the Time of the End for the 144,000, when the book of Daniel is going to be unsealed and the Dirt Brush Man is going to begin sweeping the rubbish out the window; and, there is going to be an increase of knowledge and God’s people are going to run to and fro in God’s Word and begin to understand the increase of light.

And this increase of light comes from where?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Daniel 11.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Daniel 11, verse 40. Okay?

So, as we begin to look at Daniel 11:40, what we have done here today is identified from the Book of Daniel what the Time of the End is [1798] from the Book of Daniel; and, we put Sister White on top of it: The Great Controversy, page 356.

—“We have no time to lose. Troublous times are before us. The world is stirred with the spirit of war. Soon the scenes of trouble spoken of in the prophecies will take place. The prophecy in the eleventh of Daniel has nearly reached its complete fulfillment. Much of the history that has taken place in fulfillment of this prophecy will be repeated. In the thirtieth verse a power is spoken of that ‘shall be grieved, and return, and have indignation against the holy covenant: so shall he do; he shall even return, and have intelligence with them that forsake the holy covenant. And arms shall stand on his part, and they shall pollute the sanctuary of strength, and shall take away the daily sacrifice, and they shall place the abomination that maketh desolate. And such as do wickedly against the covenant shall he corrupt by flatteries: but the people that do know their God shall be strong, and do exploits. And they that understand among the people shall instruct many: yet they shall fall by the sword, and by flame, by captivity, and by spoil, many days. Now when they shall fall, they shall be holpen with a little help: but many shall cleave to them with flatteries. And some of them of understanding shall fall, to try them, and to purge, and to make them white, even to the time of the end: because it is yet for a time appointed. And the king shall do according to his will; and he shall exalt himself, and magnify himself above every god, and shall speak marvellous things against the God of gods, and shall prosper till the indignation be accomplished: for that that is determined shall be done.’ Daniel 11:30–36.

“Scenes similar to those described in these words will take place. We see evidence that Satan is fast obtaining the control of human minds who have not the fear of God before them. Let all read and understand the prophecies of this book, for we are now entering upon the time of trouble spoken of:

“‘And at that time shall Michael stand up, the great prince which standeth for the children of thy people: and there shall be a time of trouble, such as never was since there was a nation even to that same time: and at that time thy people shall be delivered, every one that shall be found written in the book. And many of them that sleep in the dust of the earth shall awake, some to everlasting life, and some to shame and everlasting contempt. And they that be wise shall shine as the brightness of the firmament; and they that turn many to righteousness as the stars for ever and ever. But thou, O Daniel, shut up the words, and seal the book, even to the time of the end: many shall run to and fro, and knowledge shall be increased.’ Daniel 12:1–4.” Manuscript Releases, number 13, 394.

Verse 40 of Daniel 11 begins in 1798, but it goes all the way to Daniel 12:1, until Michael stands up and human probation closes. We have just identified the history that we are going to be looking at, and we have just seen Sister White referencing that very history of verses 40 through 45. We have identified those verses as events connected with the close of probation that parallel the message of the cross that was given to the Disciples, but the Disciples did not remember the message of the cross because they had been infected by bad education.

And we have been instructed that these events are salvational: the last six verses of Daniel 11 are salvational.

We have identified the first message in the time of Christ was the message that identified the events connected with the close of probation, and that the First Angel’s Message in the history of the Millerites was the message that identified the events connected with the close of probation; and, therefore, we are saying that the last is verses of Daniel 11 is the First Angel’s Message for God’s people at the end of the world, because it is the message that identifies the events connected with the close of probation.

We are initially in our study of Daniel 11, verse 40, and 1989. We are going to spend some time just trying to emphasize the significance of this verse, before we proceed with a point-by-point description of the last six verses. But, we will do that, Lord willing.

Shall we pray?

Benediction: Heavenly Father, we want to be benefitted by the increase of knowledge that you as the Dirt Brush Man and the Lion of the tribe of Judah have been opening to us, as you remove the Seals one at a time. But we know that we are bound that preconceived ideas, false education, by the Mystery of Iniquity, and that we need to be freed up from those influences in our personal experience that prevent us from correctly recognizing this light. We ask that through the power of your Holy Spirit and the work of your Angels, and our own diligent efforts, in this regard that you would remove these things that are prohibiting us from understanding this truth as we should. We thank you for allowing us to come together and start the day studying your Word. We set this day before you and ask that you would bless our service for you, and whatever we take up that you would make it safe for us today and that what we do will be something that glorifies you and honors you. We thank you for the work that is being accomplished. We ask a blessing upon that as well. In Jesus’s name, amen.

Habakkuk’s Two Tables #42

PART SIX: 1989

Presented by Jeff Pippenger

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Before we have our opening prayer, you will notice two sets of notes this morning. This [holding up a document from the podium] is taken from Stephen Haskell’s Bible Handbook, and it gives a brief overview of the Seven Churches of Revelation. I will give this a brief point of reference for the time periods of these Seven Churches which we are going to consider this morning.

This is on the website for those that are following this on LiveStream.

Also, we have put on the website for those that are following it LiveStream, we have referenced somewhere in there in this worship series that in September 2001 the Seventh-day Church implemented a policy that if you are going to be an ordained Seventh-day Adventist pastor that you are required to take a course on the Jesuit’s techniques of Spiritual Formations. So, that document is now—or should be; I emailed it to my grandson this morning—it should be on the website today, if not already. You can download that document if you need that.

All of this is from Haskell, except for page 4. And we will talk about page 4 once we begin.

Shall we begin with a word of prayer.

Invocation by Brother Jeff Pippenger: Heavenly Father, we thank you for bringing us together once again this morning for a time that we can consider your Word as we start a day of service for you. We ask that you would grant us the presence of your Holy Spirit to take us through this study and to open our hearts and our minds to what you have for us. We want the Latter Rain poured out upon us, so we ask that you would accomplish that at this time. And we know that we need to be prepared for the Latter Rain, so we ask that you forgive us our sins that our vessels are qualified to receive the outpouring that you have for us. We thank you for the presence in this series so far. We ask or a continued blessing in Jesus’s name. Amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: We are launching into a long study of 1989. We are going to eventually identify 1989 as the Time of the End for the Reform Movement of the 144,000.

And let me remind you, when I say “the 144,000,” I am saying that in a very general, generic way. The 144,000 are those that have the Seal of God that are still alive when Michael stands up, and I am using this term “144,000” to represent the wise virgins in Adventism that receive the Seal of God at The Sunday Law. But if an Adventist receives the Seal of God at The Sunday Law in the United States, there is no guarantee that he is not going to get laid to rest before human probation closes. We know that.

So, when I am talking about the Reform Movement of the 144,000, it is in a generic way.

The Seven Churches

HISTORY OF THE SEVEN CHURCHES

L A O D I C E A

Figure No. 84A.

We are going to look at the Seven Churches of Revelation, in connection with identifying Daniel 11, verse 40, as the Time of the End in 1989.

And I took from Stephen Haskell’s Bible Handbook a brief summary of the Seven Churches of Revelation that will give us the times, Ephesus being the first church. Smyrna, he has marked from the year 100 to 323; Pergamos, 323 to 538, all the way to the beginning of the Papacy—I am not going to go through these in detail. This is just for your own reference if you want it—Thyatira, 538 to 1798; Sardis, 1798 to 1833; Philadelphia, 1833 to 1844; and, then he has Laodicea, 1844, onward.

Now, there are some—I personally do not adhere completely to these dates. I mean, they may be accurate, but there are some overlaps and that is what I want to show you here.

On page 4 of your notes, it says, “I will give him the ‘morning star’.” {SpTB07 62.1}

This is speaking of Thyatira, and I know that Jesus is the Bright and Morning Star. Okay?

But, in Revelation 2:28, in the time period of Thyatira, which is the Papacy, from AD538 to 1798, there is a promise of giving the morning star; and, in The Great Controversy, page 80, Sister White says, “In the fourteenth century arose in England the ‘morning star of the Reformation.’” So, for me, in this history of Thyatira you have the beginning of the Reformation marked, and John Wycliffe can be identified as the morning star of the Reformation; and, therefore, it could be also marked as the morning star in this history.

And at this point, God’s people begin to wake up, even though still a few hundred years before 1798. But, those people that are waking up are the Sardisians (or whatever you would call them). So, you can trace the roots of Sardis farther back into Thyatira.

That is what I am, saying. There are some overlaps in these churches, from my perspective.

And Wycliffe, it says here, was born in 1320; some people say 1330. That is Wycliffe, the “morning star of the Reformation’.”

And who is the symbol of the Reformation?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Luther.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Luther, Martin Luther.

You will see for Martin Luther that he was born in 1483. There are some historians who argue that he was born in 1484. That is not a problem, really; but, what I want you to see— just briefly; we are not going to deal with this—but, the seven times of Leviticus 26 is premised upon the land resting in Leviticus 25. They were to let the land rest every seventh year.

And over a seven-year cycle, six years they would work the land; the seventh year they would let the land rest. And then they were to repeat that cycle for 49 years, until they reached the [Great] Jubilee.

So, in a cycle of 49 years of the land working and resting, how many days would the land rest if they would have kept that statute?

Well, in a Jubilee cycle, the land would have rested 2520 days. That is in Leviticus 25; therefore, when you get to Leviticus 26, and the curse for not keeping that statute is understood to be 2520 years, that is in agreement with the principle that was identified by William Shea, Adventist theologian, that Leviticus 25 was the first reference of the year-day principle in God’s Word. They were to let the land rest in a Jubilee cycle for 2520 days. Because, they did not keep that statute, their punishment was 2520 years, the year-day principle.

But all of this 2520 is based upon land resting in every seventh year. So, I just want you to see something—we are not at this point in our study: There are two 2520s, and the one that concludes in 1844, the one that is represented by Isaiah’s son Shearjashub (a remnant shall return), in 1844 the Lord is going to raise up modern Israel. He is going to gather them at the end of the scattering time.

Well, that 2520-year period is seven 360-year periods: 7 × 360 = 2520. But, this whole thing is premised upon letting the land rest every seventh year.

So, if you go back 360 years from 1844—bam!—you come to the birth of Martin Luther; thus marking that this last 360-year period is the time when the Lord is going to begin to develop the remnant. And, of course, you can identify the Millerites in this history, leading up to 1844, what that was, was the climax of the Protestant Reformation.

So, when you go back 360 years from 1844, you come to the birth of these reformers that are going to initiate the Reformation.

And, of course, if you go back 360 years form 1798, you come to—what is that? In 1428—and we will dig this out for you at some other time—in 1428 the nation of France passed the first law that put a restriction upon the Papacy. So, that 360 years marks the beginning of the delivery of the deadly wound in 1798 at the end of that 2520.

So, I am wanting you to see that we are using Haskell. We are not arguing with him. But, these dates that we have, there is a little bit of wiggle room because there is more than one thing going on in these histories. Okay? There is more than one line.

Do you follow me?

And then at the bottom, you have a statement from Sister White that says, “The state of the Church represented by the foolish virgins, is also spoken of as the Laodicean state.” {RH August 19, 1890, par. 10} The Laodicean Church here at the end, the experience represented by Laodicea is the foolish virgins. So, the experience represented by the wise virgins is what?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Philadelphia.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Philadelphia.

So, do the wise virgins and the foolish virgins live together until the separation?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Yes.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: So, Philadelphia and Laodicea, they can be overlaid upon one another. So, there is more than one thing going on with the Seven Churches of Revelation.

We just wanted to put that in place, because we are starting—and what does this have to do with 1989 and Daniel 11, verse 40?

But, go to your notes now of Habakkuk’s Tables, #42.

The Gospel of Revelation

We are going to deal with the Seven Churches of Revelation, of which all of us in this room and everyone watching LiveStream—I mean, as Seventh-day Adventists—are totally familiar with Revelation 2 and 3. We know this passage like the back of our hand; because, this is the milk of becoming a Seventh-day Adventist student of prophecy.

Sister says in Signs of the Times, July 4, 1906,

“As we near the close of this world’s history, the prophecies relating to the last days especially demand our study. The last book of the New Testament is full of truth that we need to understand. Satan has blinded the minds of many, so that they have been glad of any excuse for not making the Revelation their study.

“The book of Revelation, in connection with the book of Daniel, demands close study. Let every God-fearing teacher consider how most clearly to comprehend and present the Gospel that our Saviour came in person to make known to His servant John,—’”—

Sister White does not quite understand the mentality of Seventh-day Adventists today. If she did, she would not have said what she just said; because, in Adventism today, we think the Gospel and Prophecy are two different things, and evidently she thinks they are the same thing because she just said that Revelation is the Gospel of Christ.

—“‘The revelation of Jesus Christ, which God gave unto Him, to show unto His servants things which must shortly come to pass.’ None should become discouraged in their study of Revelation because of its apparently mystical symbols. ‘If any of you lack wisdom, let him ask of God, that giveth to all men liberally, and upbraideth not.’ ‘Blessed is he that readeth, and they that hear the words of this prophecy, and keep those things which are written therein; for the time is at hand.’ We are to proclaim to the world the great and solemn truths contained in the book of Revelation.”—

This phrase, “great and solemn,” is a key phrase in the writings of the Spirit of Prophecy.

—“We are to proclaim to the world the great and solemn truths contained in the book of Revelation.” Into the very designs and principles of the church of God these truths are to enter. There should be a closer and more diligent study of this book, a more earnest presentation of the truths it contains, truths which concern all who are living in these last days. All who are preparing to meet their Lord should make this book the subject of earnest study and prayer. It is just what its name signifies,—a revelation of the most important events that are to take place in the last days of this earth’s history. John, because of his faithful trust in the word of God, and the testimony of Christ, was banished to the Isle of Patmos. But his banishment did not separate him from Christ. The Lord visited His faithful servant in his banishment, and gave him instruction regarding what was to come upon the world.

“This instruction is of the greatest importance to us; for we are living in the last days of this earth’s history. Soon we shall enter upon the fulfilment of the events which Christ showed John were to take place. As the messengers of the Lord present these solemn truths, they must realize that they are handling subjects of eternal interest, and they should seek for the baptism of the Holy Spirit, that they may speak, not their own words, but the words given them by God.

“The book of Revelation must be opened to the people. Many have been taught that it is a sealed book, but it is sealed to those only who reject truth and light.”—

But, it is sealed only to those who reject light and truth.

—“The truths that it contains must be proclaimed, that people may have an opportunity to prepare for the events which are so soon to take place. The Third Angel’s Message must be presented as the only hope for the salvation of a perishing world.

“The perils of the last days are upon us, and in our work we are to warn the people of the danger they are in. Let not the solemn scenes that prophecy has revealed are soon to take place be left untouched. We are God’s messengers, and we have no time to lose. Those who would be co-workers with our Lord Jesus Christ will show a deep interest in the truths found in this book. With pen and voice they will strive to make plain the wonderful things that Christ came from heaven to reveal.” Signs of the Times, July 4, 1906.

So, we have been commanded to study the Book of Revelation, teach the Book of Revelation. And if we will study it, we will be blessed.

The Solemn Events

The solemn events that Sister White emphasizes often in her writings, she says,

“That time is at hand. Today the signs of the times declare that we are standing on the threshold of great and solemn events.” Education, 179.

We have gone through this previously in this worship. We are just emphasizing it once again: “. . . we are standing on the threshold of great and solemn events.”

Which We Must Know

Selected Messages, book 2, page 109, she says,

“In the Revelation the Lion of the tribe of Judah has opened to the students of prophecy the book of Daniel, and thus is Daniel standing in his place. He bears his testimony, that which the Lord revealed to him in vision of the great and solemn events which we must know as we stand on the very threshold of their fulfillment.” Selected Messages, book 2, 109.

We have to understand what these great and solemn events are in advance of these great and solemn events taking place.

The Closing of Probation

Prophets and Kings, pages 715 – 716:

“Today, in the spirit and power of Elias and of John the Baptist, messengers of God’s appointment are calling the attention of a judgment-bound world to the solemn events soon to take place in connection with the closing hours of probation and the appearance of Christ Jesus as King of kings and Lord of lords. Soon every man is to be judged for the deeds done in the body. The hour of God’s judgment has come, and upon the members of His church on earth rests the solemn responsibility of giving warning to those who are standing as it were on the very brink of eternal ruin.” Prophets and Kings, 715–716.

And what did we deal with yesterday; what was the quote? The events connected with the close of probation in the need of preparation for the time of trouble have been clearly revealed, but multitudes [in Adventism] have no more understanding of these important truths than if they had never been revealed because they have been listening to the pastors and the theologians, and the famous guys in Adventism that tell them that these events in the last six verses of Daniel 11 are not significant. We cannot understand them. That is what we looked at yesterday; and, those solemn events are the events connected with the close of probation that a judgment-bound world needs to understand.

Nothing Else

Testimonies, volume 8, beginning on page 301:

“The solemn messages that have been given in their order in the Revelation are to occupy”—the secondary place?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The first place.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“the first place in the minds of God’s people. Nothing else is to be allowed to engross our attention.” Testimonies, volume 8, 301–302.

Okay. So, there are solemn messages in the Book of Revelation that are to have first place in our study.

Seven Churches

So, we are going to look at some of the truths in Revelation, in the Seven Churches,

Acts of the Apostles, starting at page 585:

“The names of the seven churches are symbolic of the church in different periods of the Christian Era. The number 7 indicates completeness, and is symbolic of the fact that the messages extend to the end of time, while the symbols used reveal the condition of the church at different periods in the history of the world.

“Christ is spoken of as walking in the midst of the golden candlesticks. Thus is symbolized His relation to the churches. He is in constant communication with His people.”—

How is He in constant communication?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Through the angels.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Through the angels, through that ladder, through the two golden pipes, He is in constant communication.

And where is He at when He sends that Golden Oil down? He is walking in the candlesticks.

What are the candlesticks: it is a seven-branch candlestick? He is pouring that oil down that is feeding those candlesticks.

—“He is in constant communication with His people. He knows their true state. He observes their order, their piety, their devotion. Although He is high priest and mediator in the sanctuary above, yet He is represented as walking up and down in the midst of His churches on the earth.” Acts of the Apostles, 585–586.

Now, I am not prepared to argue this; but, I do want to put this in place, at least here. At this next point we can at least put it here.

What am I saying? I am going to mark 1856 as the beginning of Laodicea, and I am not trying to mark that because I know there are people that have evidence that it arrives before 1856. Okay? But, my point is, is that I just want to keep it simple and clean for this presentation, that this particular testimony that we are going to read was written in 1856. So, at least by 1856 Seventh-day Adventists had become Laodicea.

And I know that there are some of you out here in LiveStream Land that will give me the evidence that it arrived before 1856. But, we are not making that issue now.

1856

Testimonies, volume 1, page 144, Sister White says,

“Some, I saw, would gladly return. Others will not let this message to the Laodicean church have its weight upon them. They will glide along, much after the same manner as before, and will be spewed out of the mouth of the Lord. Those only who zealously repent will have favor with God.” Testimonies, volume 1, 144.

Now, it is obvious by the context here that the Laodicean message has already been presented to Adventism, because she is commenting on fact that there are some that are not going to let it impact them; but, she made this statement in 1856.

HISTORY OF THE SEVEN CHURCHES

Sunday

1856 Law

Ephesus Smyrna Pergamos Thyatira Sardis Philadelphia Laodicea

L A O D I C E A

Figure No. 84B.

So, in this flow of events of these Seven Churches, because these Seven Churches represent the history of the Christian Church from the time of the Apostles to the end of the world; and, at minimum we can start Laodicea in 1856.

Does everyone see that?

Is everybody with me on that?

And when do the Laodiceans get spewed out of the mouth of the Lord?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Sunday Law.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Sunday Law.

Miller’s Rules

Sister White says in Review and Herald, November 25, 1884:

“Those who are engaged in proclaiming the third angel’s message are searching the Scriptures upon the same plan that Father Miller adopted.” Review and Herald, November 25, 1884.

They are not searching the Scriptures upon apostate Protestantism’s Biblical interpretation that was brought into Adventism in the 1930s. They are searching the Scriptures based upon the method adopted by William Miller. If you are not using William Miller’s approach to the study of the Scriptures, then based upon this quote you are not giving the Third Angel’s Message.

But, that is not what we are dealing with here.

Early Writings, page 231:

“Preachers and people have looked upon the book of Revelation as mysterious and of less importance than other portions of the Sacred Scriptures. But I saw that this book is indeed a revelation given for the especial benefit of those who should live in the last days, to guide them in ascertaining their true position and their duty. God directed the mind of William Miller to the prophecies and gave him great light upon the book of Revelation.” Early Writings, 231.

Sister White here says that William Miller was given great light upon the Book of Revelation, and then William Miller taught the first beast of Revelation 13 was Pagan Rome. But, we know the first beast of Revelation 13 was Papal Rome.

And William Miller taught that the second beast of Revelation 13 was Papal Rome, and we know that the second beast of Revelation 13 is the United States.

So, the great light that was given to William Miller, evidently, was not Revelation 13. Right?

Have you ever looked at what William Miller and the Millerites understood about Revelation 17? Sorry, but it does not square with end-time Bible prophecy. Okay. It just does not.

And, Miller was thinking that Revelation 14 was identifying the end of the world. There is not really great light there, is there?

And, I am not trying to be derogatory about William Miller. I am trying to focus in; because, even in looking at William Miller’s analysis of Revelation 13, 14, and 17, there is wonderful principles to be gleaned. The way that he identified the first beast of Revelation 13 as Pagan Rome and the second beast as Papal Rome is still worth understanding. Okay? Because, Papal Rome is an image of Pagan Rome, just as the United States is going to form an image to Papal Rome. So, I am not being derogatory in that sense; but, what I am saying is, where the great light was given to William Miller is on the Churches, the Seals, and the Trumpets. There are no problems there. That is where he was given great light: Churches, Seals, and Trumpets.

So, we are going to look at a brief statement of the Churches by William Miller here.

This is William Miller, Miller’s Lectures, volume 2, lecture 12, page 178.

“The seven churches of Asia is a history of the church of Christ in her seven forms, in all her windings and turnings, in all her prosperity and adversity, from the days of the apostles down to the end of the world.’”

The Seven Churches of Asia is a history of the Church, from the Apostles to the end of the world. That is what Miller taught, and Miller was correct.

—“The seven seals”—

Now, I hope you realize there are Seven Churches, followed by Seven Seals, followed by Seven Trumpets.

—“The seven seals are a history of the transactions of the powers and kings of the earth over the church, and God’s protection of his people during the same time.”

So, William Miller is saying that the Seals are repeating and enlarging the Churches. He is identifying it without saying it as we say it today, the principle of repeat and enlarge.

Do you follow me?

—“The seven trumpets are a history of seven peculiar and heavy judgments sent upon the earth, or Roman kingdom.”—

So, now he is going to tell us that the Trumpets and repeating and enlarging upon the history of the Seals and the Churches.

—“And the seven vials”—

And this is the Seven Last Plagues.

—“are the seven last plagues sent upon Papal Rome.”—

And, of course, Miller did not understand the Seven Vials correctly, because he understood that the Seven Last Plagues were going to come in 1844; but, the Seven Last Plagues are going to come here in the near future. But, nevertheless, he was operating upon the principle of repeat and enlarge with the Churches, the Seals, and the Trumpets.

Continuing on:

—“Mixed with these are many other events, woven in like tributary streams, and filling up the grand river of prophecy, until the whole ends us in the ocean of eternity.

“This, to me, is the plan of John’s prophecy in the book of Revelation. And the man who wishes to understand this book, must have a thorough knowledge of other parts of the word of God. The figures and metaphors used in this prophecy,”—

In the Book of Revelation. And the scholars tell us that two out of three words in the Book of Revelation are derived from the Old Testament; and, this is what Miller is saying here.

—“And the man who wishes to understand this book, must have a thorough knowledge of other parts of the word of God. The figures and metaphors used in this prophecy are not all explained in the same, but must be found in other prophets, and explained in other passages of Scripture. Therefore it is evident that God has designed the study of the whole, even to obtain a clear knowledge of any part.” William Miller, Miller’s Lectures, volume 2, lecture 12, 178.

Internal and External

Okay. Uriah Smith comments on the Churches and the Seals, and I include this here because I like the way he expresses a thought here.

Uriah Smith, The Biblical Institute, page 253:

“The seals are introduced to our notice in the 4th, 5th, and 6th chapters of Revelation. The scenes presented under these seals are brought to view in Revelation 6, and the first verse of Revelation 8. They evidently cover events with which the church is connected from the opening of this dispensation to the coming of Christ.

“While the seven churches present the internal history of the church, the seven seals bring to view the great events of its external history.” Uriah Smith, The Biblical Institute, 253.

Okay. This is a nice way to explain the repeat and enlarge. The Seven Churches are the internal history of the Church, what is going on between you and me as church members; the Seven Seals, what is happening to us from the outside: internal/external; repeat and enlarge.

It is the same history, though, right? Except that there is a break in the last three. The Seven Churches are structured upon 4:3, the Seven Seals are structured upon 4:3, and the Seven Trumpets are structured upon 4:3. Okay? But, nevertheless, it is repeated and enlarged, and the first four Seals are going to follow the first four Churches, point by point.

The Same Period of Time

James White said in Review and Herald, February 12, 1857:

“We have now traced the churches, the seals, and the beasts, or living beings, as far as they will compare as covering the same periods of time.”—

He has just been discussing how the first four Seals covers the history of the first four Churches.

—“The seals are seven in number, the beasts but four.”—

What does he mean by that?

With the first four Seals you have a beast that is associated with each of the Seals; but, when you get to the fifth, sixth, and seventh Seals there is no beast. James White is now going to give us a little bit of insight about this 4:3 breakdown in the Churches, the Seals, and the Trumpets.

What are the last three Trumpets?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Woes.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: They are Three Woes. Okay?

But, the first four Seals have a beast associated with them, and there is a comment made in the first four Seals, “Come and see.” Okay? The last three Seals, no beast, no “Come and see.”

Back to James White:

—“The seals are seven in number, the beasts but four. And it may be well here to notice, that at the opening of the first, second, third and fourth seals the first, second, third and fourth beasts are heard to say ‘Come and see;’ but when the fifth, sixth and seventh seals are opened, there is no such voice heard. Neither do the last three churches, and the last three seals, compare, as covering the same periods of time, as the first four churches, and the first four seals do. But, as we have shown, the churches, seals and beasts do agree, as covering the same periods of time for the space of nearly 1800 years, till we come down to a little more than half a century of the present time.” James White, Review and Herald, February 12, 1857.

He is saying, until you get to 1798.

Pergamos and Thyatira, Revelation 2:12-29

HISTORY OF THE SEVEN CHURCHES

Sunday

1856 Law

Ephesus Smyrna Pergamos Thyatira Sardis Philadelphia Laodicea

L A O D I C E A

Figure No. 84C.

The Mystery of Iniquity

Okay. So, now with that in mind, I am going to look a little bit in the Scriptures at the relationship between Pergamos and Thyatira. All right? Because, in the Scriptures—and that is what Miller said. If you are going to understand these Scriptures, where do you have to go? You have to go to the rest of the Bible.

In the Scriptures, Pergamos and Thyatira are connected like “soup and sandwich” or “a hand and a glove.”

Okay. 2 Thessalonians, chapter 2, verses 5 through 8, is the history of Pergamos and Thyatira. It says,

“⁵Remember ye not, that, when I was yet with you, I told you these things? ⁶And now ye know what withholdeth that he might be revealed in his time.”

Pagan Rome is withholding the rise of the Papacy.

Okay. Pagan Rome is Pergamos. The Papacy is Thyatira.

—“⁷For the mystery of iniquity doth already work: only he who now letteth”—

Pagan Rome is the one that is restraining. This word letteth is restraining.

—“only he who now letteth will let, until he be taken out of the way.”

Paganism will restrain the Papacy until it is taken away in AD508, when the Daily is taken away in 508.

—“⁸And then shall that Wicked be revealed, whom the Lord shall consume with the spirit of his mouth, and shall destroy with the brightness of his coming.” 2 Thessalonians 2:5–8 (KJV).

After Pagan Rome, Papal Rome.

After Pergamos, Thyatira.

What am I doing here? I am showing you that in the Scriptures these two Churches are connected by cause and effect, cause and effect, and that they are referenced many times in the Scriptures.

Power (AD496), Seat (330), and Authority (533)

Look at Revelation 13:2.

“²And the beast which I saw was like unto a leopard,”—

And the beast that we see in Revelation 13:2 that is like unto a leopard is the Papal beast, the Papacy.

—“²And the beast which I saw was like unto a leopard, and his feet were as the feet of a bear, and his mouth as the mouth of a lion: and the dragon”—

And who is the dragon? Pagan Rome. Sister White says the dragon in Revelation 12 is Satan, but in a secondary sense it is Pagan Rome.

Pagan Rome (Pergamos) is going to give three things to the leopard beast, to the Papacy. It says,

—“and the dragon gave him his power, and his seat, and great authority.” Revelation 13:2 (KJV).

He gave him is power in AD496, when Clovis formed a church/state relationship with the Papacy. He gave him his seat in 330 when Constantine moved the capital to Constantinople, and Justinian gave him his civil authority in the year 533.

But, this is the relationship between Pergamos and Thyatira that is here being marked.

A Host was Given Him—AD31, 508, 330, 496, 538 - 1260

Daniel 8:11-12 says,

“¹¹Yea, he magnified himself even to the prince of the host,”—

Pagan Rome, this is the masculine little horn in Daniel 8. This is Pagan Rome; magnified himself to Christ, who is the Prince of the Host, at His birth when they tried to kill him and at His death when they did kill Him.

—“¹¹Yea, he [PAGAN ROME] magnified himself even to the prince of the host [Christ], and by him [by Pagan Rome] the daily sacrifice [Paganism] was [lifted up and exalted] taken away [rum], and the place of his [Pagan Rome’s] sanctuary”—

And Pagan Rome’s sanctuary was the Pantheon Temple. It was located in the City of Rome.

—“and the place of his sanctuary [the City of Rome] was cast down [by Constantine as the capital in the year 330]. ¹²And an host [military strength] was given him”—

This is the feminine little horn.

—“[military strength] was given him [the Papal Power in 496] against [from]”—

Against [from]; we looked at that yesterday, this word against, did we not? It can be understood to mean from.

—“[from] the daily sacrifice”—

The former Pagan powers provided the military strength that removed the three horns, allowing the Papacy to be placed upon the throne of the Earth,

—“by reason of transgression,”—

And the transgression that allowed this to happen was the combination of church and state between Clovis and the Papacy in AD496.

—“and it [the Papacy] cast down the truth to the ground; and it practiced, and prospered [for 1260 years, from 538 to 1798].” Daniel 8:11–12 (KJV).

So, here again we are seeing the relationship in prophecy of Pergamos and Thyatira.

Sister White has an interesting quote. Sometimes I remember it word for word, sometimes I do not, where it says, “The Lord does not repeat things that are of no great consequence. {Ms107-1897 (September 15, 1897) par. 2}” When you see something repeated in the Scriptures often, it is because the Lord is emphasizing it; and, you see this relationship between Pergamos and Thyatira often mentioned.

The Daily Taken Away (AD508) (538)

Daniel 12:11:

“¹¹And from the time [AD508] that the daily sacrifice [Paganism] shall be taken away [shall be removed], and the abomination that maketh desolate [the Papacy] set up, there shall be a thousand two hundred and ninety days [1290 days].” Daniel 12:11 (KJV).

Once again, this is about Paganism (Pergamos) being set aside in order to place the Papacy [Thyatira] for 1260 years.

They Place the Abomination that Maketh Desolate—AD496, 395-538, 508, 538

Daniel 11:30-31:

“³⁰For the ships of Chittim shall come against him: therefore he shall be grieved, and return,”—

This is Pagan Rome. We have read this in Uriah Smith.

—“therefore he [Pagan Rome] shall be grieved, and return, and have indignation against the holy covenant: so shall he [Pagan Rome] do; he shall even return, and have intelligence with them that forsake the holy covenant.”—

And those that forsake the holy covenant is the Papacy. Pagan Rome is going to now have intelligence with the Papacy. This is Pergamos and Thyatira.

—“³¹And arms [Pagan Rome] shall stand on his part [on the Papacy’s part], and they [those arms] shall pollute the sanctuary of strength [the City of Rome],”—

And the warfare that takes place prior to the Papacy being placed upon the throne of the Earth.

—“and [those arms, Pagan Rome] shall take away the daily sacrifice [Paganism and they will set it aside], and they shall place the abomination that maketh desolate [to prepare the way for the abomination of desolation being placed on the throne of the Earth in AD538].” Daniel 11:30–31 (KJV).

Once again, this is the history of Pergamos and Thyatira.

Daniel 11:40-45

We closed yesterday with reading of just a part of a passage from Sister White that we will spend probably a great deal of time on. We are going to take one little snippet out of this again.

Manuscript Releases, number 13, page 394:

“We have no time to lose. Troublous times are before us. The world is stirred with the spirit of war. Soon the scenes of trouble spoken of in the prophecies will take place. The prophecy in the eleventh of Daniel has nearly reached its complete fulfillment.”—

And what we were doing yesterday is showing that Sister White understood that the part of Daniel 11 that was still to be fulfilled was verses 40 through 45. That is all we were doing with that quote yesterday.

But here, I want you to see that she is talking about Daniel 11; but, then she is going to mark a specific principle that is to be recognized in your study of Daniel 11 in the next sentence. She says,

—“Much of the history that has taken place in fulfillment of this prophecy will be repeated.”—

When you are studying Daniel 11, Sister White is saying the future fulfillment of it is verses 40 through 45, but there are histories in verses 1 through 39 that will be repeated when verses 40 through 45 are fulfilled. So, therefore, as a student of prophecy, she is saying, “You need to understand those histories in the first 39 verses so that you have a point of reference for identifying verses 40 through 45.”

And after she emphasizes that principle, then she really marks the history that you need to wrap your mind around. She says,

—“In the thirtieth verse a power is spoken of that ‘verses 30 through thirty-six quoted.’”—

And then she quotes verses 30 to 36 of Daniel 11; and, as soon as she finishes quoting those verses, she says,

—“Scenes similar to those described in these words will take place.” Manuscript Releases, number 13, 394.

So, Sister White just now in this passage tells us that the histories of verses 30 to 36 of Daniel 11 will be repeated in the last six verses of Daniel 11. And what I want you to see is that verses 30 to 36 include verses 30 and 31; and, verses 30 and 31 are the history of Pergamos and Thyatira.

HISTORY OF THE SEVEN CHURCHES

Sunday

1856 Law

Pagan Rome Papal Rome

Ephesus Smyrna Pergamos Thyatira Sardis Philadelphia Laodicea

Righteous Living Persecution

JEWISH NATION

PHILADELPHIA

EPHESUS AND SMYRNA

SARDIS

PERGAMOS AND THYATIRA

L A O D I C E A

Daniel 11:40-45

1798 - 1856

Figure No. 84D.

So, what Sister White is saying, what Sister White is saying, what she is saying here, is that the history of Pergamos and Thyatira, it is repeated in the history of Laodicea.

Did you get that?

You should get that; because, she is saying that this history here [of Pergamos and Thyatira] that will be repeated in the history of Laodicea¹, that it is going to be fulfilled in the history represented by Daniel 11:40 to 45 [Laodicea]. Check that out. Do not let me misguide you on that one.

The Third and Fourth Seals

Okay. The third and fourth Seals are the third and fourth Churches, and the third and fourth Churches are Pergamos and Thyatira.

Pergamos and Thyatira are the internal history of the Church; but, the third and fourth Seals are the external history of that time. And you will find the third and fourth Seals in Revelation 6:6-8.

“⁶And I heard a voice in the midst of the four beasts say, A measure of wheat for a penny, and three measures of barley for a penny; and see thou hurt not the oil and the wine. ⁷And when he had opened the fourth seal, I heard the voice of the fourth beast say, Come and see. ⁸And I looked, and behold a pale horse: and his name that sat on him was Death, and Hell followed with him. And power was given unto them over the fourth part of the earth, to kill with sword, and with hunger, and with death, and with the beasts of the earth.” Revelation 6:6-8 (KJV).

But, I just want to show you something here from Manuscript Releases, volume 9, page 7. Sister White says,

“The same spirit is seen today that is represented in Revelation 6:6‑8.”—

That is the history of the third and fourth Seals. She is saying the same spirit is represented today as was represented in the history of the third and fourth Seals; and, then she says this:

—“History is to be repeated. That which has been will be again.” Manuscript Releases, volume 9, 7.

She just said that the history of the third and fourth Seals is repeated in Laodicea, and the history of the third and fourth Seals is the history of Pergamos and Thyatira, which she just said is going to be repeated in the history of Laodicea.

Did you get that?

Ephesus and Smyrna

Ephesus and Smyrna.

Okay. This here, Pergamos and Thyatira, Brothers and Sisters, this is cause and effect. Okay? There had to be a falling away first in the time of Pergamos in order to place the Papacy on the throne of the Earth. Pagan Rome was restraining the Papacy, and Pagan Rome had to be set aside for the Papacy to be established. This is a cause-and-effect relationship.

And in Ephesus and Smyrna, a cause-and-effect relationship.

2 Timothy 3:12:

“Yea, and all that will live godly in Christ Jesus shall suffer persecution.” 2 Timothy 3:12 (KJV).

Was the Ephesus Church living godly in Christ Jesus?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmations.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Yes. They carried the Gospel to the world.

So, because they were living godly in Christ Jesus, what do we know is going to happen to them?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Persecution.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Smyrna, cause and effect: righteous living – persecution. Ephesus and Smyrna, cause and effect.

Sister White says, in Selected Messages, book 3, page 397,

“Many will be imprisoned, many will flee for their lives from cities and towns, and many will be martyrs for Christ’s sake in standing in defense of the truth.” Selected Messages, book 3, 397.

What is Smyrna, what does it represent? The persecution of Pagan Rome against the Christian Church.

Maybe you have not settled into this, but it is: What is the primary symbol of the dragon power in the Scriptures? We will deal with this, the Lord willing, as we proceed: the number 10. Okay?

In Smyrna it was Pagan Rome. And in Daniel 7 how many nations does Pagan Rome disintegrate into? Ten.

Okay. And Pagan Rome accomplished a persecution in this history [of Smyrna] for how many days?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Ten.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Ten.

And what does history tell us about this history? It tells us that in this history, Pagan Rome actually carried out ten different periods of persecution; but, there was one that was worse than all of them, and that was the persecution of Diocletian that lasted how long?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Ten years.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Ten years.

So, when it comes to the dragon, Pagan Rome, the number 10 is a symbol.

And at the end of the world down here in the Laodicea time period with us, in Revelation 17 there are Ten Kings that are going to make war against the Lamb. Okay?

So, this warfare of the Ten Kings, this blood spilling that we just read about that there will be many martyrs, that is Smyrna being repeated in Laodicea.

And why is it being repeated in Laodicea? Because the Lord is going to lift up an ensign at The Sunday Law, an ensign that has been made up of the wise virgins of Adventism; and, when they are lifted up, all that lived godly in Christ Jesus are what?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: They are persecuted.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: They are going to suffer Smyrna.

See, Ephesus and Smyrna, it is repeated in Laodicea. And if it is repeated in Laodicea, it is repeated in the last six verses of Daniel 11.

Ephesus and Laodicea

Early Writings, 259-260²; The Great Controversy, 611; Joel

Now, you can see a relationship between Ephesus and Philadelphia and Laodicea often, often marked by Ellen White.

And we have read these next two references more than once in this worship series.

In Early Writings, page 259 and onward, Sister White gives a warning to Laodicea, that there was going to be an attack made upon the foundations. That is the first paragraph.

The next paragraph in Early Writings, page 259, she talks about a progressive testing process in the time of Christ. She says, “All those that would not receive the message of John the Baptist could not be benefitted by the teachings of Jesus”; and, it concludes with the Jews being left in perfect darkness.

And the third paragraph, she goes to the history of the Millerites, and she says, “All those that would not receive the First Angel’s Message could not be benefitted by the Second Angel’s Message.”

And what she is doing here, the first paragraph is our history, a warning that the foundations are going to come under attack. The second paragraph is Ephesus; the third paragraph is Philadelphia. These three histories, in The Great Controversy, page 611, she says, the Mighty Angel of Revelation 18 is going to come down and the Earth is going to be lightened with His glory, and it will be a work similar to what took place in 1840 and 1844 in Philadelphia. And then she says it will be similar as to Pentecost [pointing to the Church of Ephesus on the whiteboard], these three histories.

Okay. In the history of Laodicea, you have repeated the history of Ephesus and also Philadelphia.

Now, I did not put those references in, because if you do not understand this, this far in this worship series, if you do not understand that the Millerite history is repeated in the history of our day and age, if you do not understand that the Seven Thunders represented the delineation of events that transpired under the First and Second Angels’ Messages and that they also represent future events that will be disclosed in their order, if you have not already settled into the fact that the history of Philadelphia is repeated in the history of Laodicea, then go back to the beginning of this worship study. There is plenty of evidence of this.

So, what I am saying is, Ephesus, Philadelphia, Smyrna, Pergamos, and Thyatira are all repeated in the time period of Laodicea.

Notice Christ’s Object Lessons, page 170.

“‘Judgment is turned away backward, and justice standeth afar off; for truth is fallen in the street, and equity cannot enter. Yea, truth faileth; and he that departeth from evil maketh himself a prey.’ Isaiah 59:14, 15. This was fulfilled in the life of Christ on earth.”—

This was fulfilled in Ephesus. Okay? Right? Sort of?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (No audible responses.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“He was loyal to God’s commandments, setting aside the human traditions and requirements which had been exalted in their place. Because of this He was hated and persecuted. This history is repeated.” Christ’s Object Lessons, 170.

Ephesus is repeated in Laodicea.

Southern Watchman, March 21, 1905:

“The work of John the Baptist, and the work of those who in the last days go forth in the spirit and power of Elijah to arouse the people from their apathy, are in many respects the same. His work is a type of the work that must be done in this age. Christ is to come the second time to judge the world in righteousness. The messengers of God who bear the last message of warning to be given to the world, are to prepare the way for Christ’s second advent, as John prepared the way for his first advent. In this preparatory work, ‘every valley shall be exalted, and every mountain shall be made low; and the crooked shall be made straight, and the rough places plain’”—

John the Baptist: Ephesus, Laodicea. Right?

And towards the end of the paragraph she says,

—“for history is to be repeated, and once again ‘the glory of the Lord shall be revealed, and all flesh shall see it together; for the mouth of the Lord hath spoken it.’” Southern Watchman, March 21, 1905.

She says the history of John the Baptist is to be repeated.

Selected Messages, book 2, page 111:

“Satan is working that the history of the Jewish nation may be repeated in the experience of those who claim to believe present truth.” Selected Messages, book 2, 111.

Hmm. We will deal with this tomorrow; but, let us make note that here she says the history of the Jewish Nation will be repeated.

Sardis, Philadelphia and Laodicea

Manuscript Releases, volume 18, page 193:

“Oh, what a description! How many there are in this fearful condition. I earnestly entreat every minister to study diligently the third chapter of Revelation,”—

Now, Brothers and Sisters, I was being a bit facetious earlier on when I was saying that every Seventh-day Adventist knows the Seven Churches; this is basic for us. What churches are in Revelation, chapter 3?

We should know this; but, which churches are represented in Revelation, chapter 3. We should know this without thinking.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Responses in unison.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Sardis, Philadelphia, and Laodicea; that is what Sister White is talking about, are those three Churches, if you are going to take her simply at her word; His Word, which is faith.

—“I earnestly entreat every minister to study diligently the third chapter of Revelation, for in it is portrayed the condition of things existing in the last days.”—

That says that in the last days you also have Sardis. We have already noted Philadelphia and Laodicea. Sardis takes place in the time of Laodicea.

So, we have just put into the record that the history represented by all Seven Churches is repeated in our history.

—“Study carefully every verse in this chapter, for through these words Jesus is speaking to you.” Manuscript Releases, volume 18, 193.

Pioneer Understanding

Okay. The Pioneer understanding, as expressed by Joseph Bates—you may not know this. We are going to read this in a second—the Pioneers believed that in their history, which was the history of what?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Philadelphia.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Philadelphia. They believed that in their history of Philadelphia that all three of these Churches [Sardis, Philadelphia, and Laodicea] were there contemporaneously. And that is what Sister White just said, “Read chapter 3 and study it carefully, because this history is going to be repeated, the history of Sardis, Philadelphia, and Laodicea.”

The Millerites believed (the Millerites that were truly following the Lord) that they were Philadelphians; but, they believed that those involved with the Millerite Movement that were rejecting the message of the Millerites, they were Laodicean. But, they believed that their audience, those that they were taking the message to outside of the Millerites, was Sardis. That is why the Millerites saw all three of these Churches at the same time.

Here is Joseph Bates, Review and Herald, volume 1, November 1850.

“‘In all the land saith the Lord; TWO PARTS therein shall be cut off, and die;”—Sardis and Laodicea—“but the THIRD shall be left therein. God says he will bring the THIRD PART through the fire, and refine them. They shall call upon him, and he will hear them. He will say IT IS MY PEOPLE; and they shall say the LORD IS MY GOD.’ First part, SARDIS, the nominal church or Babylon. Second part, Laodicea, the nominal Adventist. Third part, Philadelphia, the only true church of God on earth, for they ask to be translated to the city of God. Revelation 3:12; Hebrews 12:22–24. In the name of Jesus, I exhort you again to flee from the Laodiceans, as from Sodom and Gomorrah. Their teachings are false and delusive; and lead to utter destruction. Death! DEATH!!* eternal DEATH!!! is on their track. Remember Lot’s wife.” Joseph Bates, Review and Herald, volume 1, November 1850.

I just want you to see that the Millerites understood that all three of these Churches were in Philadelphia; so, when Sister White says all three of these Churches are in Laodicea, it is simply saying that the Millerite history is repeated to the very letter at the end of the world.

Sardis

It is interesting to note that Taylor Bunch in his book on Revelation, The Seven Epistles of Christ, page 186, says this about Sardis—I like this—it says,

“Sardis not only represents ‘those escaping’ or ‘that which remains’ after the great apostasy and terrible persecutions of the Middle Ages, but some authorities believe that the word ardis means ‘remnant’ of ‘an escaped few,’ and therefore represent Protestantism after what was vital in it had evaporated so that there are only a few faithful ones remaining. There would be a ‘remnant’ who would continue the work of reform even after the Reformation had waned and Protestantism in general was dead. There would be ‘a few names,’ or ‘a few souls’ (Moffatt), in Sardis who had ‘not defiled their garments.’” Taylor Bunch, The Seven Epistles of Christ, 186.

What I read that for is he is identifying from the Greek that Sardis means those that escape.

And in Daniel 11:41 says,

“⁴¹He”—

And this is the Papacy. We have not explained this yet, but I am going to just give you an overview so you can see Sardis in it.

—“He [The Papacy] shall enter also into the glorious land [the United States of America at The Sunday Law], and many countries shall be overthrown:”—

And many Seventh-day Adventists will be overthrown because they are going to be held accountable to the light of Sabbath and Sunday.

—“but these shall escape out of his hand,”—

And there is the definition of Sardis, “those that escape.”

And according to Taylor Bunch, that is Babylon. Okay? “These shall escape from His hand, . . .”—

—“even Edom, and Moab, and the chief of the children of Ammon.” Daniel 11:41 (KJV).

That is the threefold makeup of modern Babylon. They are those that escape at The Sunday Law when the message goes forth, Revelation 18, verse 4, “Come out of her my people.”

Haskell

Okay. Now, if you think that the idea that all of these Churches, that all Seven Churches are repeated in our day and age, in the history of Laodicea, I want you to understand that this is an old Adventist understanding. Stephen Haskell puts it in his book on the Book of Revelation.

Notice what Haskell says on page 69 from the Story of the Seer of Patmos. He says,

“It should be remembered that, as the experience of Ephesus, Smyrna, and Pergamos, will be repeated in the last church before the second coming of Christ, so the history of Thyatira will have its counterpart in the last generation.” Stephen N. Haskell, Story of the Seer of Patmos, 69.

He has been developing this through several paragraphs, of course. I am just snipping out his conclusion. He says that Ephesus, Smyrna, Pergamos, and Thyatira are repeated in Laodicea.

Then on page 75, speaking of William Miller, he says,

“He applied the test, but all pointed forward to the year 1843 as the time when the world must welcome its Saviour. The condition of the people at the first advent of Christ was now repeated.” Stephen N. Haskell, Story of the Seer of Patmos, 75.

What was the condition of the people at the first advent of Christ? Well, that is Ephesus, and he was saying it was repeated in Philadelphia, in the history of the Millerites. So, he has already said that Ephesus is repeated in the history of Laodicea in the previous quote on page 69; and, now he is saying that Ephesus is repeated in Philadelphia. So, he is saying that Philadelphia is repeated in Laodicea.

Do you understand the logic?

Pages 75 and 76 of the Story of the Seer of Patmos, Haskell says,

“There was a time in the history of Pergamos, when Christianity thought Paganism was dead; but in reality, the religion which was apparently vanquished, had conquered. Paganism baptized, stepped into the church. In the days of Sardis this history was repeated.” Stephen N. Haskell, Story of the Seer of Patmos, 75, 76.

Okay. What history? Well, the history of Pergamos. He just said that Sardis is a repetition of Pergamos, and he has already said that Pergamos is repeated in Laodicea.

So, Haskell is saying that all these Churches are repeated in Laodicea.

And then, of course, on Page 69, he says,

“Upon this last church—the remnant,—shine the accumulated rays of all past ages.” Stephen N. Haskell, Story of the Seer of Patmos, 69.

Okay?

So,—what? Are you wanting to say a question?

BROTHER FROM THE AUDIENCE: On Page 75, that is the Jewish nation, is it not—

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Yes, that is the Jewish nation.

BROTHR FROM THE AUDIENCE: —like you were saying earlier?

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Yes. The Jewish nation we will deal with tomorrow.

The question is, we have already put the Jewish nation up there from the Spirit of Prophecy that it is repeated in our history; and, Haskell says the same thing, that it is repeated in our history.

But, we do not want to deal with that today, because we are going to deal with that tomorrow.

What I am saying is, this history here, this is the history of—and correct me if I am wrong—that is the history of the New Testament, the history of the New Testament and beyond, all the way up through 1798 and Thyatira. But, everything in the New Testament, all the way to our day and age, is repeated right here [underscoring Laodicea on the whiteboard].

But, we know from yesterday’s study that Daniel 11:40 begins in 1798, and at least by 1856 Laodicea had arrived.

And Daniel 12:1, Daniel 12:1 says, “At that time shall Michael stand up.” And we identified yesterday, when Michael stands up it is the close of human probation; and, those first few words in Daniel 12:1 says, “And at that time,” meaning that human probation closes somewhere back here in verse 45. So, this history here is Laodicea.

So, what we are saying, Brothers and Sisters, at minimum today, that all the Biblical history, from the time of the Disciples until our day and age, is repeated in the last six verses of Daniel 11. So, when it comes to studying Daniel 11, verse 40, which opens up the events connected with the close of probation and 1989, this is just one argument that this verse is one of the most profound verses in all of God’s Word, because it is the verse that opens the door up for us to understand that all of the Bible is portrayed in the last six verses of Daniel 11.

We just showed you the New Testament today. Tomorrow we will show you the Old Testament.

And what for? Because, if we are going to study Daniel 11, verse 40, that was fulfilled in 1989, and demonstrate that in 1989 the Time of the End for the 144,000 arrived, and at the Time of the End in Daniel 12 is the point in time when the Lion of the tribe of Judah, or the Dirt Brush Man of William Miller’s dream, unseals the increase of knowledge that is going to be the Everlasting Gospel that is going to test that generation, then we would expect that Daniel 11, verse 40, and 1989 should produce some type of light that qualifies as an increase of knowledge, that identifies that the Book of Daniel has been unsealed.

And in advance of our studying these verses, I want you to understand that the events connected with the close of probation that the multitudes in Adventism do not understand, in those last six verses of Daniel 11 the entire Bible is illustrated upon those verses. And that is pretty profound!

Shall we pray?

Benediction: Heavenly Father, we want to be among those that recognize this increase of knowledge, but we know that in order to do so we must run to and fro in your Word. We thank you that you have instructed us in Habakkuk 2, that you would have the vision printed upon Tables that those that wanted to study these things could run to and fro in your Word. We thank you that you have given us a point of reference, a key, to unlock these truths, and we want to stand upon that key, upon this foundational truth, though many wish to set them aside and tear them down. We thank you for our study this morning. We ask that you would bless our day of service to you. Keep us safe. Help us do a work that is honorable for you, and ask a continued blessing on the work that we are attempting with the DVDs and LiveStreaming. In Jesus’s name, amen.

Habakkuk’s Two Tables #43

PART SIX: 1989

Presented by Jeff Pippenger

Invocation by Brother Jeff Pippenger: Heavenly Father, we thank you for a night’s rest, for bringing us together to consider your Word this morning and taking us through another week of studies. As we open your Word this morning, we ask that you grant us the presence of your Holy Spirit to direct or thoughts that we might understand these truths connected with Daniel 11— verse 40, 1989, William Miller’s dream—that we might understand them in a way to better prepare us to stand faithful in the times that we are living in, and to have a message to share with those we come in contact with. We ask that you take control of our humanity, both mine and the presentation and the brothers and sisters that are listening to these things. And we would ask that you would pour the Latter Rain out upon us at this time by opening our understanding to your Word. We ask for traveling mercies for Kathy, and we thank you for all these things in Jesus’s name. Amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Well, we are dealing with 1989 in connection with William Miller’s dream. We have identified that the seven times that Miller marks the scattering in his dream represent a period of time when these foundational truths of Adventism were covered up. We have taken time to show that that covering up began in 1863, when the first truth that William Miller had discovered was set aside by James White.

And then we have identified but not proven that 1989 is the point where the covering up ceases and the Dirt Brush Man enters in to begin His work of sweeping away the rubbish of error and tradition and custom.

But, in order to do 1989 in a thorough way, we have to look more deeply at Daniel 11, verse 40, which is the verse that marks the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989 and marks the point in time for the Time of the End where the Reform Movement of the 144,000 begins, which is also the end of William Miller’s dream.

As we began this two days ago, we identified that the last six verses of Daniel 11, they begin in 1798, verse 40; and, they go on into the close of human probation in Daniel 12:1 when Michael stands up. And Michael stands up in Daniel 12:1 somewhere in verses 44 and 45; because, it begins saying, “And at that time shall Michael stand up.”

I am under the conviction that verse 44 and 45 are describing pretty much the same event, verse 44, “tidings out of the east and north trouble him [the King of the North]: therefore he goes forth with great fury to destroy, and utterly make away many, . . . yet he shall come to his end,” (Daniel 11:44-45) is describing the last movements of the Papacy, but it is in those last movements where Michael stands up and human probation closes. We will deal with that as we proceed.

So, we identified that we are to understand the great and solemn events that prophecy identifies as we stand on the threshold of their fulfillment. We identified that the great and solemn events are the solemn events connected with the close of probation.

And we identified that repeating the history of Ancient Israel, Seventh-day Adventists today do not understand the events connected with the close of probation by and large, though they have been clearly revealed and that they are salvational. So, we identified that Daniel 11:40-45 are the events connected with the close of probation.

Yesterday we identified not in a dogmatic way but that in 1856, at least by 1856, you can say that Adventism entered into their Laodicean condition.

And from there we went and showed from the Spirit of Prophecy and from Stephen Haskell that all the histories represented in the Seven Churches of Revelation 2 and 3 are repeated in the history of Laodicea.

In the history of Laodicea, the Everlasting Gospel is going to be accomplished in two classes of worshippers in Adventism, and will be developed and then demonstrated.

The one class that is going to be lifted up as an ensign and receive the Seal of God are repeating the history of Ephesus, the history of the First Seal when as a white horse the Church goes forth to carry the final warning message as prefigured by the Apostles when they carried the Gospel to the world in their history. But, we know that they are lifted up as an ensign at The Sunday Law, and at The Sunday Law persecution begins. So, we know that Smyrna is going to be active in this history, too.

But, in order for The Sunday Law to arrive in the United States and begin this process of persecution, Pergamos will be repeated in the history of the United States. Constantine’s combination of Paganism with Christianity is prefiguring the work of the United States setting aside Protestantism and coming into agreement with the Papacy. And we know from Bible prophecy that once this compromise in the United States takes place, as represented in Pergamos, that the Papacy is going to be returned to the throne of the Earth. This is Thyatira. This Thyatira marks 1260 years of Papal rule. In this history there will be three classes of worshippers once The Sunday Law arrives. You will have Sardis (those that escape); and, in Daniel 11, verse 41, you will see those that escape the hand of the Papacy when The Sunday Law arrives in the United States, represented by Sardis. At The Sunday Law in the United States in Daniel 11:41, you will have many overthrown that are the Laodiceans in Adventism; and, then you will have the ensign [Philadelphia] that is lifted up, those that will receive the Seal of God. So, these three histories (Pergamos, Sardis, and Philadelphia) are also repeated here at the end of the world.

So, what we showed, for those that are willing to see, is that when the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Dirt Brush Man, unseals the prophecy that is going to test this generation, that prophecy is the last six verses of Daniel 11; and, the unsealing begins with a fulfillment of prophecy; and, the prophecy that is fulfilled is verse 40, identifying the collapse of the Soviet Union.

And in agreement with the concept that once this prophecy is fulfilled, the Lion of the tribe of Judah opens up a prophetic truth. What we are seeing is, is He opens up the entire Bible.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Amen!

The Seven Seals

Ancient Israel

BROTHER PIPPENGER: But, yesterday, all we showed was at least the history of Christianity. Today, we are going to take it a step further; so, let us go to our notes and show that it is the entire Bible that is repeated within the structure, the history, represented in the last six verses of Daniel 11.

Healthful Living, beginning at page 280, says,

“The trials of the children of Israel, and their attitude just before the first coming of Christ, illustrate the position of the people of God in their experience before the second coming of Christ.”—

So, now we are not talking about the history of the Christian Church being repeated in Adventism. We are talking about the history of Ancient Israel being repeated in the history of modern Israel; and, Sister White, of course, identifies this principle often.

—“Satan’s snares are laid for us as verily as they were laid for the children of Israel just prior to their entrance into the land of Canaan. We are repeating the history of that people.

“Their history should be a solemn warning to us. We need never expect that when the Lord has light for his people, Satan will stand calmly by and make no effort to prevent them from receiving it. Let us beware that we do not refuse the light God sends, because it does not come in a way to please us. . . . If there are any who do not see and accept the light themselves, let them not stand in the way of others.”

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: “‘I call heaven and earth to record this day against you, that I have set before you life and death, blessing and cursing; therefore choose life, that both thou and thy seed may live; that thou mayest love the Lord thy God, and that thou mayest obey his voice, and that thou mayest cleave unto him; for he is thy life, and the length of thy days; that thou mayest dwell in the land which the Lord sware unto thy fathers, to Abraham, to Isaac, and to Jacob, to give them.’

“This song was not historical but prophetic. While it recounted the wonderful dealings of God with his people in the past, it also foreshadowed the great events of the future, the final victory of the faithful when Christ shall come the second time in power and glory.

“The apostle Paul plainly states that the experience of the Israelites in their travels has been recorded for the benefit of those living in this age of the world, those upon whom the ends of the world are come. We do not consider that our dangers are any less than those of the Hebrews, but greater.” Healthful Living, 280−281.

So, the history of Ancient Israel is going to be repeated at the end of the world. And what we are going to show is that the history of Ancient Israel was governed by the Seven Churches; the Seven Churches illustrate the history of Ancient Israel. And, if this is true, then when we see when the Seven Churches are repeated in Laodicea, it means that Ancient Israel’s history is repeated in Laodicea as well, which means that the history of Ancient Israel is repeated in the last six verses of Daniel 11, which means when the Lion of the tribe of Judah unsealed the prophecy in 1989, He was unsealing the entire Bible.

But, it can only be seen if you take advantage of the principle of bringing line upon line, from here a little, there a little, the principle that we call “proof-texting,” the principle of study that was adopted by William Miller which has been recommended to us by Inspiration.

All the Great Events

Selected Messages, book 3, beginning at page 338, it says,

“The Bible has accumulated and bound up together its treasures for this last generation.”—

Now, when Sister White says that, “the Bible,” that precedes even Ancient Israel, does it not?

—“All the great events and solemn transactions of Old Testament history have been, and are, repeating themselves in the church in these last days.” Selected Messages, book 3, 338−339.

That takes you all the way back to Adam.

Thyatira

HISTORY OF THE SEVEN SEALS

Sunday

“How long?” 1856 Law

1^st Seal 2^nd Seal 3^rd Seal 4^th Seal

Ephesus Smyrna Pergamos Thyatira Sardis Philadelphia Laodicea

Exodus / Jericho Judges 1260 / 70 Daniel 11:40

Figure No. 85.

Okay. We have in our worship studies used this next quote more than once. We have used it to show the 70 years of captivity in literal Babylon for literal Israel prefigured the 1260 years of captivity of spiritual Israel and spiritual Babylon.

Prophets and Kings, page 714:

“Today the church of God is free to carry forward to completion the divine plan for the salvation of a lost race. For many centuries God’s people suffered a restriction of their liberties. The preaching of the gospel in its purity was prohibited, and the severest of penalties were visited upon those who dared disobey the mandates of men. As a consequence, the Lord’s great moral vineyard was almost wholly unoccupied. The people were deprived of the light of God’s word. The darkness of error and superstition threatened to blot out a knowledge of true religion. God’s church on earth was as verily in captivity during this long period of relentless persecution as were the children of Israel held captive in Babylon during the period of the exile.” Prophets and Kings, 714.

If you are going to apply that prophetically, it means that Thyatira, which was the 1260 years of Papal rule, is the 70 years of captivity in Babylon; therefore, the 70 years of captivity in Babylon for Ancient Israel was Thyatira for Ancient Israel.

Parallel Lines: Repeat and Enlarge

Uriah Smith informed us yesterday,

“While the seven churches present the internal history of the church, the seven seals bring to view the great events of its external history.” Uriah Smith, The Biblical Institute, 253.

We did not take a great deal of time yesterday to mark it, but Ephesus is the First Seal; Smyrna is the Second Seal; Pergamos is the Third Seal; Thyatira is the Fourth Seal.

Now, whether it is the Churches, the Seals, or the Trumpets, the last three, they are conveying another truth. So, this is sequential history [the First Seal through the Fourth Seal]. This, whether it is the last three Churches, the last three Seals, or the last three Trumpets, it is dealing with God’s people at the end of the world. It is dealing with modern Israel. It is dealing with the beginning of modern Israel, the Millerites; and, the end of modern Israel, the 144,000. So, when you are dealing with the last three Churches, the last three Seals, or the last three Trumpets, there is a special message for modern Israel. But, the first four Seals are paralleling the first four Churches.

But, what we have said is that these 70 years for Ancient Israel was Thyatira, which if this is true, then you are going to have three periods that precede Thyatira. Okay? The first one would be Ephesus, then Smyrna, and Pergamos.

The First Five Seals

Revelation 6:1-11

But go to Revelation 6.

Unfortunately in Adventism, the Book of Revelation is not familiar ground. It should be; typically, it is not. Those people that do not like me saying that, sorry. I have asked questions to hundreds of Seventh-day Adventists around the world about basic concepts in Daniel and Revelation, and we do not know them anymore. They are just not there.

So, in Revelation 6, the Lion of the tribe of Judah is going to begin to unseal the Book that is sealed with Seven Seals, that Book being the Bible; and, He began to unseal it for the Millerites in 1798. The unsealing is marking a progressive increase of knowledge, because the Seals are removed one at a time.

And beginning in verse 1, it says,

“¹And I saw when the Lamb opened one of the seals, and I heard, as it were the noise of thunder, one of the four beasts saying, Come and see. ²And I saw, and behold a white horse: and he that sat on him had a bow; and a crown was given unto him: and he went forth conquering, and to conquer.”—

That is the church of the Apostles.

Verse 3,

—“³And when he had opened the second seal, I heard the second beast say, Come and see. ⁴And there went out another horse that was red:”—

Red because it is blood; because, it is representing Smyrna and the persecution.

—“and power was given to him that sat thereon to take peace from the earth, and that they should kill one another: and there was given unto him a great sword.—

Verse 5,

—“⁵And when he had opened the third seal, I heard the third beast say, Come and see. And I beheld, and lo a black horse; and he that sat on him had a pair of balances in his hand. ⁶And I heard a voice in the midst of the four beasts say, A measure of wheat for a penny, and three measures of barley for a penny; and see thou hurt not the oil and the wine.”—

The [black] horse of compromise, of Constantine: Pergamos.

Verse 7,

—“ ⁷And when he had opened the fourth seal, I heard the voice of the fourth beast say, Come and see. ⁸And I looked, and behold a pale horse: and his name that sat on him was Death, and Hell followed with him. And power was given unto them over the fourth part of the earth, to kill with sword, and with hunger, and with death, and with the beasts of the earth”—

The pale horse of death is the Papacy. It is Thyatira.

Verse 9,

—“⁹And when he had opened the fifth seal, I saw under the altar the souls of them that were slain for the word of God, and for the testimony which they held:”—

He saw those people that had been murdered by the Papacy in the 1260 years; and, the Fourth Seal is Thyatira.

In verse 10,

—“¹⁰And they”—those that had been murdered—“cried with a loud voice, saying, How long,”—

Do all the prophets agree with one another?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmations.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: All the prophecies have to agree with one another.

Immediately after Thyatira, after the Fourth Seal, there is a question raised, “How long?”

The Fifth Seal raises the question, “How long?”

—“¹⁰And they cried with a loud voice, saying, How long, O Lord, holy and true, dost thou not judge and avenge our blood on them that dwell on the earth? ¹¹And white robes were given unto every one of them; and it was said unto them, that they should rest yet for a little season, until their fellowservants also and their brethren, that should be killed as they were, should be fulfilled.” Revelation 6:1‑11 (KJV).

And we have looked at two passages where Sister White places the development of this second class of martyrs at The Sunday Law in Revelation 18. Those that were murdered by the Papacy during the Dark Ages are told to rest in their graves until there is another group of martyrs at the end of the world during The Sunday Law crisis that are made up; and, then the Papacy is going to be judged in Revelation 18 double. That is why the Papacy is judged double in Revelation 18; it is for the martyrs for the 1260 and for the martyrs at the end of the world.

But, after the Fourth Seal, after the four Churches, you see the question, “How long?”

You can see these two quotes that I have referenced before, about putting the Sixth Seal in The Sunday Law, in Revelation 18.

Manuscript Releases, volume 20, page 197:

“‘And when he had opened the fifth seal . . . [Revelation 6:9–11]. Here were scenes presented to John that were not in reality but that which would be in a period of time in the future.” Manuscript Releases, volume 20, 197.

Manuscript Releases, volume 20, page 14:

“When the fifth seal was opened, John the Revelator in vision saw beneath the altar the company that were slain for the Word of God and the testimony of Jesus Christ. After this came the scenes described in the eighteenth of Revelation, when those who are faithful and true are called out from Babylon. Revelation 18:1–5 quoted.” Manuscript Releases, volume 20, 14.

And you can see the reference from James White that we read yesterday, that the first four Churches cover the same history of the first four Seals; but, the last three are teaching a different lesson.

James White, Review and Herald, February 12, 1857:

“We have now traced the churches, the seals, and the beasts, or living beings, as far as they will compare as covering the same periods of time. . . . Neither do the last three churches, and the last three seals, compare, as covering the same periods of time, as the first four churches, and the first four seals do. But, as we have shown, the churches, seals and beasts do agree, as covering the same periods of time for the space of nearly 1800 years, till we come down to a little more than half a century of the present time.” James White, Review and Herald, February 12, 1857.

Walking To and Fro

Zechariah 1:7-11; Zechariah 6:1-8

Now let us go to Zechariah, chapter 1. And the reason we are going to Zechariah is we have seen that the Spirit of Prophecy says that the 70 years of captivity in literal Babylon typified the 1260 years of captivity in spiritual Babylon, and those 1260 years are Thyatira; therefore, the 70 years was Thyatira for Ancient Israel. And after Thyatira for the Christian Church, you have the martyrs under the altar asking the question, “How long until you judge the Papacy for murdering us?”

In Zechariah, chapter 1, beginning in verse 7, it says this,

“⁷Upon the four and twentieth day of the eleventh month, which is the month Sebat, in the second year of Darius, came the word of the Lord unto Zechariah, the son of Berechiah, the son of Iddo the prophet, saying, ⁸I saw by night, and behold a man riding upon a red horse,”—

In the first four Seals we have horses, different colored horses in the first four Seals.

Here we see a horse.

—“and he stood among the myrtle trees that were in the bottom; and behind him were there red horses, speckled, and white. ⁹Then said I, O my lord, what are these? And the angel that talked with me said unto me, I will shew thee what these be.”—

Okay. He wanted to know what these horses are, right? He asked the question, “What are these horses?”

And the angel said, “I will show you what they are.”

What does that mean? For a student of prophecy that means you need to wrap your mind around why Zechariah wanted to understand what those were, so when the angel finally explains to him what they are, you will know what they are.

Verse 10:

—“¹⁰And the man that stood among the myrtle trees answered and said, These are they whom the Lord hath sent to walk to and fro through the earth.”—

So, what are these horses? They are those which the Lord sent to walk to and fro through the Earth.

Verse 11:

—“¹¹And they answered the angel of the Lord that stood among the myrtle trees, and said, We have walked to and fro through the earth, and, behold, all the earth sitteth still, and is”—

Out of control.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Earth is at rest.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The earth—

—“is at rest.” Zechariah 1:7-11 (KJV).

Okay. These horses have been sent to and fro in the Earth; and, after they have done their task, the Earth is at rest. Do you see that?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmations.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: For a second witness, and maybe you do not know what we are witnessing here yet; but, for a first and second witness, let us go there. And maybe after you have seen this second witness, you will know what we are witnessing. All right?

Zechariah 6, beginning in verse 1:

“¹And I turned, and lifted up mine eyes, and looked, and, behold, there came four chariots out from between two mountains; and the mountains were mountains of brass.”—

How many chariots?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Two.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Four.

Where did you get two?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Sorry.

—^“2In the first chariot were red horses; and in the second chariot black horses; ³And in the third chariot white horses; and in the fourth chariot grisled and bay horses.”—

So, now we have horses of four different colors.

Have we seen that anywhere else? We have seen it in Revelation 6, the first four Seals.

—“⁴Then I answered and said unto the angel that talked with me, What are these, my lord?”—

Zechariah is curious.

—“⁵And the angel answered and said unto me, These are the four spirits of the heavens, which go forth from standing before the Lord of all the earth. ⁶The black horses which therein go forth into the north country; and the white go forth after them; and the grisled go forth toward the south country. ⁷And the bay went forth, and sought to go that they might walk to and fro through the earth:”—

These are the same horses, evidently, that we have seen in chapter 1. They are doing the same thing. They are walking to and fro in the Earth. This is the second testimony to chapter 1.

Verse 7 again:

—“⁷And the bay went forth, and sought to go that they might walk to and fro through the earth: and he said, Get you hence, walk to and fro through the earth. So they walked to and fro through the earth. ⁸Then cried he upon me, and spake unto me, saying, Behold, these that go toward the north country have quieted my spirit in the north country.” Zechariah 6:1-8 (KJV).

So, in chapter 1 they make the whole Earth at rest. In chapter 6 they quiet His spirit in the north country. They walk to and fro and, when they are done doing their work walking to and fro, His spirit is quiet.

Go back to Zechariah, chapter 1.

After we see these horses in chapter 1—and what I am suggestion is these horses are the first four Seals. Okay? You can see them real easy in chapter 6: There are four sets of horses. They have a specific work to do, walk to and fro in the Earth. They are going to cause the Earth to be at rest.

But, they are also there in chapter 1. Sometimes it is a little bit more difficult to see in chapter 1. That is why I go to chapter 6 first, to give you a third witness, the first witness being in Revelation 6.

How Long?

Zechariah 1:12-17

But, what happened after the fourth horse in Revelation 6?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Earth was at rest.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Earth was at rest, you can make that application; but, when we read chapter 6 of Revelation, what happened in the Fifth Seal? There is a question raised, marking the Fifth Seal. Right?

So, in chapter 1 of Zechariah, verse 12, it says after verse 11, “. . . all the earth sitteth still and is at rest.” Verse 11.

Now, verse 12.

^“12Then the angel of the Lord answered and said, O Lord of hosts, how long wilt thou not have mercy on Jerusalem and on the cities of Judah, against which thou hast had indignation these threescore and ten years?”—

What is threescore and ten?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Seventy.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: That is this right here [indicating the end of 1260//70 years marked at Thyatira in Figure No. 85]. The question is, “How long? You have been punishing Israel for 70 years. How long until you are going to have mercy on them, until you rebuild Jerusalem and bring them out of Babylon?” Right?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmations.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: So, this 70 years, what is it?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The 1260.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Well, it is the 1260, but what is it?

Well, it is Thyatira, but what is it?

It is the Fourth Seal. Right? It is all these things.

So, verse 13.

—“¹³And the Lord answered the angel that talked with me with good words and comfortable words. ¹⁴So the angel that communed with me said unto me, Cry thou, saying, Thus saith the Lord of hosts; I am jealous for Jerusalem and for Zion with a great jealousy.”—

He is going to rebuild Jerusalem—right?—after the 70 years. He is jealous for it. He is going to reestablish Jerusalem.

—“¹⁵And I am very sore displeased with the heathen that are at ease: for I was but a little displeased, and they helped forward the affliction. ¹⁶Therefore thus saith the Lord; I am returned to Jerusalem with mercies: my house shall be built in it, saith the Lord of hosts, and a line shall be stretched forth upon Jerusalem. ¹⁷Cry yet, saying, Thus saith the Lord of hosts; My cities through prosperity shall yet be spread abroad; and the Lord shall yet comfort Zion, and shall yet choose Jerusalem.” Zechariah 1:12-17 (KJV).

So, after the 70 years He is going to build Jerusalem. We understand that history.

But, go back now. I want you to see something that you saw, but I want to emphasize it now back in verse 12. He has talked about the 70 years of captivity, that they are going to rebuild Jerusalem thereafter; and, in verse 12, ^“Then the angel of the Lord answered and said, O Lord of hosts, . . .”—what?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: “How long?”

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“ . . .How long?”

This is the Fifth Seal for this history, the Fifth Seal for Ancient Israel.

See, Ancient Israel is governed by the Seven Churches of Revelation, just as the Christian Church was governed by the Seven Churches of Revelation.

How Long?

Isaiah 6:11-13; Psalm 74:1-10; 79:5-10; Daniel 8:13; Revelation 6:9-11

Go to Isaiah 6. We have dealt with Isaiah 6 a little in this worship series, but we have dealt with a lot of information in this worship series; so, sometimes I am sure that it does not all click.

Now in Isaiah 6, beginning in verse 11—in Isaiah 6, verse 3, the angels—and Sister White applies verse 3 of Isaiah 6 the same way I am going to apply it—in verse 3 of Isaiah 6 it says,

“³And one cried unto another, and said, Holy, holy, holy, is the Lord of hosts: the whole earth is full of his glory.” Isaiah 6:3 (KJV).

This is Revelation 18. Sister White says so. It is in your notes previously.

So, in Isaiah 6, you have Isaiah representing God’s people at the end of the world when the Mighty Angel of Revelation 18 descends, and we know he is purified and prepared to give a message. And once he realizes that he has to give a message to a church that is in apostasy, because the Lord just told him, “You are going to go to a people that seeing won’t see, and hearing won’t hear. They are a rebellious people, unless they would turn and be converted,” when he realizes that is his job assignment, then in verse 11 he says,

“¹¹Then said I, Lord, how long?”—

“How long?” Right here [see note above end waymark of Thyatira and beginning of Sardis in Figure No. 85]: And the “How long?” for Isaiah is identified as, “You are going to continue to give this message until the desolation of Jerusalem takes place at The Sunday Law.”

—“And he answered, Until the cities be wasted without inhabitant, and the houses without man, and the land be utterly desolate, ¹²And the Lord have removed men far away, and there be a great forsaking in the midst of the land. ¹³But yet in it shall be a tenth, and it shall return, and shall be eaten: as a teil tree, and as an oak, whose substance is in them, when they cast their leaves: so the holy seed shall be the substance thereof.” Isaiah 6:11-13 (KJV).

This “How long?” is always the same question throughout Scripture. For Isaiah, “You have to give the final warning message to the Seventh-day Adventist Church until the Church is purified at The Sunday Law.”

And when the Church is purified at The Sunday Law, the Lord is going to raise up an ensign, and that ensign is going to be modern Zion that has been rebuilt and reestablished. That is Zechariah.

But, modern Israel, it is in disarray at the end of the world.

Where is it? It is in captivity. It is in the wilderness.

What wilderness? It is in William Miller’s wilderness, the seven times scattering.

The Lord is going to raise up a people out of darkness like He does every time. Every Reform Movement is preceded by a time period of Darkness, a wilderness time period, a scattering time period. And from that scattering time period the Lord will raise up Jerusalem. He will build it.

The 70 years, was Jerusalem destroyed?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmations.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: So, for Zechariah, the question is, “How long until you rebuild Jerusalem?”

For Isaiah, “For how long do I have to give this message to Adventism?”

“Until you rebuild Jerusalem at The Sunday Law”; because, at The Sunday Law He is going to lift up a people like a crown, like an ensign. Jerusalem is going to be the City that all nations flow into.

We have looked at Psalm 74 before, and Psalm 79³ before. Both of those places in Psalm you will find the question, “How long?”

Psalm 74:1-10:

“¹O God, why hast thou cast us off for ever? why doth thine anger smoke against the sheep of thy pasture? ²Remember thy congregation, which thou hast purchased of old; the rod of thine inheritance, which thou hast redeemed; this mount Zion, wherein thou hast dwelt. ³Lift up thy feet unto the perpetual desolations; even all that the enemy hath done wickedly in the sanctuary. ⁴Thine enemies roar in the midst of thy congregations; they set up their ensigns for signs. ⁵A man was famous according as he had lifted up axes upon the thick trees. ⁶But now they break down the carved work thereof at once with axes and hammers. ⁷They have cast fire into thy sanctuary, they have defiled by casting down the dwelling place of thy name to the ground. ⁸They said in their hearts, Let us destroy them together: they have burned up all the synagogues of God in the land.

⁹We see not our signs: there is no more any prophet: neither is there among us any that knoweth how long. ¹⁰O God, how long shall the adversary reproach? shall the enemy blaspheme thy name for ever?” Psalm 74:1-10 (KJV).

Psalm 79:5-10

“⁵How long, Lord? wilt thou be angry for ever? shall thy jealousy burn like fire?

⁶Pour out thy wrath upon the heathen that have not known thee, and upon the kingdoms that have not called upon thy name. ⁷For they have devoured Jacob, and laid waste his dwelling place. ⁸O remember not against us former iniquities: let thy tender mercies speedily prevent us: for we are brought very low. ⁹Help us, O God of our salvation, for the glory of thy name: and deliver us, and purge away our sins, for thy name's sake. ¹⁰Wherefore should the heathen say, Where is their God? let him be known among the heathen in our sight by the revenging of the blood of thy servants which is shed.” Psalm 79:5-10 (KJV).

But, Daniel 8:13.

If you cannot grasp the significance that the question “How long?” is the same question every time, then you are not really, probably, believing or understanding that all the prophets are speaking about the end of the world and you have to get that concept in your head. And once it is in your head, you realize that every time you see “How long?” it is the same question; and, therefore, each time the question is raised, it is giving another component to this thought.

And in Daniel 8:13, it says,

“¹³Then I heard one saint speaking, and another saint said unto that certain saint which spake, How long [how long] shall be the vision concerning the daily sacrifice, and the transgression of desolation, to give both the sanctuary and the host to be trodden under foot?” Daniel 8:13 (KJV).

Was Adventism trodden underfoot? Yeah, William Miller’s dream. It was trodden underfoot. It has been scattered.

And what is Daniel 8 talking about, with the question, “How long?” It is talking about reestablishing Jerusalem, the sanctuary.

And, what else?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Establishing the host.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Reestablishing the host, because they have both been trodden down.

So, when does it get reestablished? At The Sunday Law.

It is always the same question and answer.

Go back to Psalm 74, just to give you one more line, if you are not familiar with this. Psalm 74; we went over this before.

Beginning in verse 1:

“¹O God, why hast thou cast us off for ever? why doth thine anger smoke against the sheep of thy pasture?”—

That is Adventism, right? We are the sheep of His pasture.

—“²Remember thy congregation,”—

We are His congregation.

—“which thou hast purchased of old; the rod of thine inheritance, which thou hast redeemed; this mount Zion, wherein thou hast dwelt.”—

We are Mount Zion in Scripture.

Verse 3:

—“³Lift up thy feet unto the perpetual desolations;”—

All the prophets are speaking about the end of the world. What was the perpetual desolations in Adventism? It was William Miller’s dream.

—“even all that the enemy hath done wickedly”—where?—“in the sanctuary.”—

The sanctuary of Adventism gets covered up by those “wicked feet.” That is what Miller had in his dream, those wicked feet that trod the precious jewels.

—“⁴Thine enemies roar in the midst of thy congregations; they set up their ensigns for signs. ⁵A man was famous according as he had lifted up axes upon the thick trees. ⁶But now they break down the carved work thereof at once with axes and hammers.”—

They are breaking down the sanctuary.

—“⁷They have cast fire into thy sanctuary,”—

Sister White says many will stand with the torch of false prophecy in the pulpits of Adventism.

—“⁷They have cast fire into thy sanctuary, they have defiled by casting down the dwelling place of thy name to the ground. ⁸They said in their hearts, Let us destroy them together: they have burned up all the synagogues of God in the land.

⁹We see not our signs:”—

The Old Paths, the waymarks are gone.

—“⁹We see not our signs: there is no more any prophet:”—

We pass a resolution in the General Conference Session saying we are only—we cannot use the writings of the Spirit of Prophecy for faith and practice; and, if you cannot use them for faith and practice, what can you use them for? There is no longer any prophet. The Spirit of Prophecy has been removed, and the last deception of Satan is to make of none effect the Spirit of Prophecy.

—“neither is there among us any that knoweth how long.”—

Nobody understands the message of “How long?”

And what is the message of “How long?” The message of “How long?” is how long until The Sunday Law. That is what Isaiah wanted to know, how long until The Sunday Law. And where do we find out how long The Sunday Law is? Where do we find that out?

You may not understand it yet, but you find it out in the last six verses of Daniel 11. “But none knoweth that anymore,” that is what Sister White says in The Great Controversy: “Multitudes have no more an understanding of these important truths than if they had never been revealed.” No one knows how long until The Sunday Law.

No one understands that we are living in the history of Daniel 11, verse 40; and, the next thing to happen is verse 41, which is The Sunday Law in the United States. And because they do not know that, they do not know that this is the last moment of time to prepare their character for the Seal of God or they are going to receive the mark of the beast. They do not know that.

Why? Because an enemy has come into the sanctuary and burned it with fire and trampled it underfoot and tore it down with axes. That is not me; that is the prophetic word.

So, anyway, the question is “How long?”

—“¹⁰O God, how long shall the adversary reproach? shall the enemy blaspheme thy name for ever?” Psalm 74:1-10 (KJV).

Revelation 6:9-11:

“⁹And when he had opened the fifth seal, I saw under the altar the souls of them that were slain for the word of God, and for the testimony which they held: ¹⁰And they cried with a loud voice, saying, How long, O Lord, holy and true, dost thou not judge and avenge our blood on them that dwell on the earth? ¹¹And white robes were given unto every one of them; and it was said unto them, that they should rest yet for a little season, until their fellowservants also and their brethren, that should be killed as they were, should be fulfilled.” Revelation 6:9-11 (KJV).

The Lord Will Choose Israel

Zechariah 1:17; Isaiah 14:1-7

In Zechariah that we are dealing with is this question, “How long?” [referring to Figure No. 85 on the whiteboard]. It is marking the arrival of the Fifth Seal for Ancient Israel, which means that now we have got a reference to Sardis and a reference to Thyatira for Ancient Israel.

And why was it that God’s people were carried into captivity for 70 years in Babylon? Why was it?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: They never let the land rest.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: It was from Israel participating in the worship of Paganism, right? That is Pergamos. That is Constantine; Constantine is a symbol of mixing the true religion with the false religion. What leads them into Thyatira is Constantine. It is the mingling that took place in this history [of Pergamos].

This here, Smyrna, the persecution, that is the time period of the Judges.

And Ephesus, when they were victorious, that is the time period of coming out of Egypt, bringing down Jericho. This is Ephesus for Ancient Israel.

Go to Zechariah 1:17.

You know, some of us have studied—I mean, as far as I know, those people that are publicly teaching this prophetic message (probably all of them, but at least the majority of them), they teach this very truth that we are teaching here; because, this message sometimes is summarized as the Message of the Little Book. And the Little Book is the Bible; but, the Bible becomes the Little Book because this approach to prophetic application lets you take every passage of the Bible and line it up on the last six verses of Daniel 11, and in this sense it becomes a Little Book.

So, I am sure that everyone that is publicly presenting this message addresses this particular teaching that we are dealing with here this morning and yesterday. So, for those of you in this room, or those of you who are watching LiveStream, once again this may be a redundant presentation. We have been doing some of those along the way.

But, I tell you what, it is unfortunate that if we get to this study that we are doing here and we somehow get so used to this study that we are unable to remember how profound this is the first time you recognized it, that the whole Bible is illustrated on the last six verses of Daniel 11. That is more than amazing! It is more than amazing!

So, if we are going through this and it is kind of like, “Okay. B follows A, which is followed by C and then comes D. All right. If you have studied this before, sobeit.” But, if you get to the point that you do not recognize that this understanding is something that only the Dirt Brush Man, the Lion of the tribe of Judah, could open up to the minds of human beings, then you are missing the point: This truth is something that Christ is presenting to His people at this time.

In Zechariah 1:17, it says,

“¹⁷Cry yet, saying, Thus saith the Lord of hosts; My cities through prosperity shall yet be spread abroad; and the Lord shall yet comfort Zion, and shall yet choose Jerusalem.” Zechariah 1:17 (KJV).

Jerusalem is going to be chosen for the final time at The Sunday Law. Okay? And then Jerusalem is going to be lifted up and the eleventh-hour laborers are going to come stand in Jerusalem with the ensign. The Lord is going to choose Jerusalem.

But, back here in this history [of Sardis], He was choosing Jerusalem again and He was bringing them out of Babylon to build Jerusalem.

Go to Isaiah 14:1-7. We still have not answered one question that we raised, probably several questions that we raised but we will try to answer this one. Isaiah 14, beginning at verse 1.

Now, notice that Isaiah is talking about choosing Jerusalem, too, just like Zechariah was in verse 17 of Zechariah, chapter 1.

What does it mean “to choose Jerusalem”? That is the city; that is God’s city.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The bride.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The bride.

First verse of Isaiah 14:

“¹For the Lord will have mercy on Jacob, and will yet choose Israel, and set them in their own land: and the strangers shall be joined with them, and they shall cleave to the house of Jacob.”—

What is that? Is that the same story?

He is going to choose Israel. That is Seventh-day Adventists, is it not?

But “strangers,” who is that?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Indiscernible responses.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: That is the Gentiles. That is the eleventh-hour workers. Those are the other sheep that He has that when they hear His voice, they shall come.

This is choosing Jerusalem, but it is saying it in a different way. But it is choosing Jerusalem.

Verse 2:

—“²And the people shall take them, and bring them to their place: and the house of Israel shall possess them in the land of the Lord for servants and handmaids: and they shall take them captives, whose captives they were; and they shall rule over their oppressors. ³And it shall come to pass in the day that the Lord shall give thee rest from thy sorrow, and from thy fear, and from the hard bondage wherein thou wast made to serve,”—

This is talking about them being in bondage and captivity [gestures to the Church of Thyatira in Figure No. 85], and the Lord is going to reverse that captivity and make those that were ruling over them in submission to them [those being in bondage and captivity]—this is spiritual submission—when He chooses Jerusalem again, when He chooses Israel.

Verse 4:

—“⁴That thou shalt take up this proverb against the king of Babylon, and say, How hath the oppressor ceased! the golden city ceased!”—

So now it is being specific. This is about their time period in Babylon. It is about when He is going to end the captivity in Babylon. Right?

Verse 5:

—“⁵The Lord hath broken the staff of the wicked, and the sceptre of the rulers. ⁶He who smote the people in wrath with a continual stroke, he that ruled the nations in anger, is persecuted, and none hindereth. ⁷The whole earth is”—

What?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: At rest.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“at rest, and is quiet: they break forth into singing.” Isaiah 14:1-7 (KJV).

Ahh, when is the whole earth at rest, and is quiet? Well, it is at the end of the 70 years.

What did those four horses do? They went and walked to and fro into the Earth, and what did they cause to happen? The Earth to be at rest. They came to a conclusion right here [indicating the waymark between Thyatira and Sardis as depicted in Figure No. 85].

These four chariots in Zechariah 6, these horses in Zechariah 1, these horses in Revelation 6 is this history here [indicating the first four of the Seven Churches]; and, when you get to the conclusion of the 70 years, or the 1260 years, or the scattering of William Miller, the Lord is going to choose Jerusalem. At that point the Earth is at rest.

So, I hope you see this. Ancient Israel is governed by the Seven Churches of Revelation, chapters 2 and 3.

The Four Scattering Horns

Zechariah 1:19-20; Jeremiah 50:17-18

Okay. Back to Zechariah, chapter 1, verses 19 and 20, and let us start in verse 18. We are going to need to start in verse 18 to understand what he saw.

“¹⁸Then lifted I up mine eyes, and saw, and behold four horns.”—

Zechariah sees four horns.

—“¹⁹And I said unto the angel that talked with me, What be these [four horns]? And he answered me, These are the horns which have scattered Judah, Israel, and Jerusalem.”— (KJV).

Okay. These are the powers that scattered them in the 70 years; during the 1260 years; during William Miller’s dream.

All the other scatterings are typified in the Scriptures as well, because all the prophecies are speaking about the end of the world, telling the same story.

Verse 20:

“²⁰And the Lord shewed me four carpenters. ²¹Then said I, What come these to do? And he spake, saying, These are the [four] horns which have scattered Judah, so that no man did lift up his head: but these are come to fray them,”—

What are coming to fray thee horns?

What does it mean to fray? Chop down, cut them up.

What is coming to fray these horns that scattered Israel?

—”but these are come to fray them, to cast out the horns of the Gentiles, which lifted up their horn over the land of Judah to scatter it.” Zechariah 1:18-21

There are four carpenters. What is a carpenter?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: One who builds.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: One who builds, but who is the Carpenter in the Scriptures?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Christ.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Okay. These are four symbols of Christ that bring back God’s people, put them back in Jerusalem; build Jerusalem.

I am passing over Jeremiah 50:17-18.

“¹⁷Israel is a scattered sheep; the lions have driven him away: first the king of Assyria hath devoured him; and last this Nebuchadrezzar king of Babylon hath broken his bones. ¹⁸Therefore thus saith the Lord of hosts, the God of Israel; Behold, I will punish the king of Babylon and his land, as I have punished the king of Assyria.” Jeremiah 50:17-18 (KJV).

We will go back to that.

The Lord Restoring His People

In the Spirit of Prophecy, Prophets and Kings, pages 580 – 581, it says.

“Zechariah then saw the powers that had ‘scattered Judah, Israel, and Jerusalem,’ symbolized by four horns. Immediately afterward he saw four carpenters, representing the agencies used by the Lord in restoring His people and the house of His worship. See verses 18−21.”—

What were the agencies that were used to bring them out of Babylon to rebuild Jerusalem and the sanctuary, and the streets and the wall? It was these Pagan kings that passed what?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Four decrees.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: [Holding up four fingers]: Four decrees. It is the 3:1 combination.

Continuing on with the Spirit of Prophecy:

—“‘I lifted up mine eyes again,’ Zechariah said, ‘and looked, and behold a man with a measuring line in his hand.”—

When He is going to rebuild Jerusalem, you see a man with a measuring line.

Did John in Revelation 11 see a man with a measuring line?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmations.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: It would be the same man, doing the same thing. The prophets all saw the same vision.

—“‘I lifted up mine eyes again,’”—

Speaking of the carpenters that come to restore Jerusalem.

—“Zechariah said, ‘and looked, and behold a man with a measuring line in his hand. Then said I, Whither goest thou? And he said unto me, To measure Jerusalem, to see what is the breadth thereof, and what is the length thereof. And, behold, the angel that talked with me went forth, and another angel went out to meet him, and said unto him, Run, speak to this young man, saying, Jerusalem shall be inhabited as towns without walls for the multitude of men and cattle therein: for I, saith the Lord, will be unto her a wall of fire round about, and will be the glory in the midst of her.’ Zechariah 2:1−5.

“God had commanded that Jerusalem be rebuilt; the vision of the measuring of the city was an assurance that He would give comfort and strength to His afflicted ones, and fulfill to them the promises of His everlasting covenant. His protecting care, He declared, would be like ‘a wall of fire round about;’ and through them His glory would be revealed to all the sons of men. That which He was accomplishing for His people was to be known in all the earth.”—

“In all the Earth,” when does that happen?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: That would be in Revelation 18.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Revelation 18: The Earth is going to be lightened with His glory.

—“‘Cry out and shout,’”—

What is this here? The Loud Cry.

—“‘thou inhabitant of Zion: for great is the Holy One of Israel in the midst of thee.’ Isaiah 12:6.” Prophets and Kings, 580−581.

Four Carpenters

Zechariah 1:20-21

“²⁰And the Lord shewed me four carpenters. ²¹Then said I, What come these to do? And he spake, saying, These are the horns which have scattered Judah, so that no man did lift up his head: but these are come to fray them, to cast out the horns of the Gentiles, which lifted up their horn over the land of Judah to scatter it.” Zechariah 1:20-21 (KJV).

Three Decrees

But, we are seeing this story about our day and age back here in this history of Sardis for Ancient Israel, the Fifth Seal for Ancient Israel, I their work of rebuilding Jerusalem with the man stretching the line. And the agencies which the Lord used to accomplish that work were the Three Decrees.

And you can see the three Decrees, followed by the fourth Decree of Nehemiah in your notes.

The Great Controversy, page 326:

“In the seventh chapter of Ezra the decree is found. Verses 12−26. In its completest form it was issued by Artaxerxes, king of Persia, 457 B.C. But in Ezra 6:14 the house of the Lord at Jerusalem is said to have been built ‘according to the commandment [‘decree,’ margin] of Cyrus, and Darius, and Artaxerxes king of Persia.’ These three kings, in originating, reaffirming, and completing the decree, brought it to the perfection required by the prophecy to mark the beginning of the 2300 years. Taking 457 B.C., the time when the decree was completed, as the date of the commandment, every specification of the prophecy concerning the seventy weeks was seen to have been fulfilled.” The Great Controversy, 326.

So, that is what we are saying, is that these three Decrees are prefiguring the Three Angels’ Messages, which are testing God’s people at this time. When the third Decree arrives, Judgment arrives. The third Decree, the third test for us today is The Sunday Law, at which point the Law will be lifted up before the world. The streets and walls will be finished even in troublous times.

Measuring Jerusalem

Zechariah 2:1-13; Revelation 11:1-2

Zechariah 2:1-13:

[Sounding of thunder outside of the meeting hall.]

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Praise the Lord for the thunder. Bring on the rain.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Indiscernible affirmations).

BROTHER PIPPENGER: “¹ I lifted up mine eyes again, and looked, and behold a man with a measuring line in his hand. ²Then said I, Whither goest thou? And he said unto me, To measure Jerusalem, to see what is the breadth thereof, and what is the length thereof.”—

Let us drop forward because we just read that from the Spirit of Prophecy, and take it up in verse 6.

— ³And, behold, the angel that talked with me went forth, and another angel went out to meet him, ⁴And said unto him, Run, speak to this young man, saying, Jerusalem shall be inhabited as towns without walls for the multitude of men and cattle therein: ⁵For I, saith the Lord, will be unto her a wall of fire round about, and will be the glory in the midst of her.”—

Sister White did not read verse 6, so we will take it up in verse 6.

—⁶Ho, ho, come forth, and flee from the land of the north, saith the Lord: for I have spread you abroad as the four winds of the heaven, saith the Lord. ⁷Deliver thyself, O Zion, that dwellest with the daughter of Babylon.”—

When does that take place? The Sunday Law: “Come out of her my people.”

—“⁸For thus saith the Lord of hosts; After the glory hath he sent me unto the nations which spoiled you: for he that toucheth you toucheth the apple of his eye. ⁹For, behold, I will shake mine hand upon them, and they shall be a spoil to their servants: and ye shall know that the Lord of hosts hath sent me.

“¹⁰Sing and rejoice, O daughter of Zion: for, lo, I come, and I will dwell in the midst of thee, saith the Lord. ¹¹And many nations shall be joined to the Lord in that day, and shall be my people: and I will dwell in the midst of thee, and thou shalt know that the Lord of hosts hath sent me unto thee. ¹²And the Lord shall inherit Judah his portion in the holy land, and shall choose Jerusalem again.”—

That is The Sunday Law.

—“¹³Be silent, O all flesh, before the Lord: for he is raised up out of his holy habitation.” Zechariah 2:1-13 (KJV).

What happens when the Lord stands up? It is a change of dispensation. We have looked at that before. This is marking the close of probation for Seventh-day Adventists, if we apply it to the end of the world.

But, what we are looking at here more specifically is the measuring of Jerusalem being a symbol of when Jerusalem is rebuilt after their 70 years of captivity, and it is prefiguring the building of Jerusalem that took place in the Millerite History.

In Revelation 11, starting at verse 1, it says:

“¹And there was given me a reed”—

Now, who is this? This is John.

And in the previous verses, and there is no chapter distinctions in the original writings of the Book of Revelation. In the previous verses, John has gone and taken the Little Book out of the Angel’s hands and he ate it. It was sweet in his mouth and became bitter in his stomach.

And then in verse 11 of chapter 10, it says, “And he said unto me, Thou must prophesy again before many peoples, and nations, and tongues, and kings,” telling John, as representing the Millerites, that the history of the Millerites will have to be repeated again.

But, then in verse 1 of Revelation 11, it says,

—“¹And there was given me a reed like unto a rod: and the angel stood, saying, Rise, and measure the temple of God, and the altar, and them that worship therein.

²But the court which is without the temple leave out, and measure it not; for it is given unto the Gentiles: and the holy city shall they tread under foot forty and two months.” Revelation 11:1-2 (KJV).

John here in the Millerite History is what? He is building Jerusalem. He is marking that the Lord is once again choosing Jerusalem, entering into covenant with modern Israel. He is told to measure the worshippers therein.

What does the measuring represent? It represents more than one thing. Usually I emphasize something different than I am going to emphasize today.

All Will Be Tested

Testimonies, volume 7, page 219, says,

“All who occupy positions in our institutions will be tested. If they will make Christ their pattern, He will give them wisdom and knowledge and understanding; they will grow in grace and aptitude in Christ’s way; their characters will be molded after His similitude. If they fail of keeping the way of the Lord, another spirit will control the mind and judgment, and they will plan without the Lord and will take their own course and leave the positions they have occupied. The light has been given them; if they depart from it, let no man present a bribe to induce them to remain. They will be a hindrance and a snare. The time has come when everything is to be shaken that can be shaken, that those things which cannot be shaken may remain.”—

And in Zechariah 2 it was talking about the shaking.

—“Every case is coming in review before God; He is measuring the temple and the worshipers therein.” Testimonies, volume 7, 219.

So, in this sense, when John is measuring the Temple, it is identifying that on October 22, 1844, Judgment began. It means other things, but the measuring has to do with Judgment.

The Plummet of the House of Ahab

2 Kings 21:10-13

Go to 2 Kings 21, starting at verse 10. We want to look at a place that is a symbol in the Scriptures that has to do with Judgment, with measuring; and, it is only mentioned three times.

Beginning in verse 10 of 2 Kings 21, it says,

“¹⁰And the Lord spake by his servants the prophets, saying, ¹¹Because Manasseh king of Judah hath done these abominations, and hath done wickedly above all that the Amorites did, which were before him, and hath made Judah also to sin with his idols: ¹²Therefore thus saith the Lord God of Israel, Behold I am bringing such evil upon Jerusalem and Judah, that whosoever heareth of it, both his ears shall tingle. ¹³I will stretch over Jerusalem the line of Samaria, and the plummet of the house of Ahab: and I will wipe Jerusalem as a man wipeth a dish, wiping it, and turning it upside down.” 2 Kings 21:10-13 (KJV).

When He is stretching this line over Jerusalem, we have already identified it represents Judgment. He is saying that He is going to judge Judah, the Southern Kingdom, with the line of Ahab, with Samaria, the Northern Kingdom.

What was the judgment that was delivered upon the Northern Kingdom?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: It was the 2520.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: It was the 2520.

He says, “The Northern Kingdom was carried into captivity for seven times; and, now, because of the sins of Manasseh, it is going to happen to the Southern Kingdom.”

And what is the symbol of this judgment process, judgment in this passage? You will find it in verse 13. It is the plummet of the house of Ahab, and this plummet is only mentioned three times in the Scriptures; and, it is mentioned in connection with judgment, with the stretching of the line.

Okay. Let us look at the other place where we can see this plummet.

Isaiah 28:14-18

Isaiah 28, verses 14 through 18. This should be familiar ground to us in this worship series by now. We have dealt with this more than once.

But, what I am saying is, when the man is measuring the city, judgment is taking place. And the judgment that was measured upon Judah was the same judgment that was measured upon Samaria; and, the symbol of this judgment is the plummet, the plummet.

And in Isaiah 28, starting at verse 14, it says,

“¹⁴Wherefore hear the word of the Lord, ye scornful men, that rule this people which is in Jerusalem.”—

And in Testimonies, volume 5, page 211, Sister White tells us that Jerusalem at the end of the world is the Seventh-day Adventist Church. So, verse 14 is talking about the leadership of the Seventh-day Adventist Church at the end of the world.

Verse 15 says,

—“¹⁵Because ye have said, We have made a covenant with death, and with hell are we at agreement; when the overflowing scourge shall pass through,”—

Now, Brothers and Sisters, do not forget this term, “the overflowing scourge.”

The overflowing, does overflowing have something to do with dirt? with flowers? It has to do with water. The overflowing scourge is a symbol that is connected with the River Euphrates. It has to do with the King of the North. The overflowing scourge in the Scriptures is The Sunday Law.

But, I want you to remember overflowing; because, when we start to take apart Daniel 11:40, the King of the North is going to overflow and pass over. It is one of his characteristics.

Okay. Verse 15:

—“¹⁵Because ye have said, We have made a covenant with death, and with hell are we at agreement; when the overflowing scourge shall pass through, it shall not come unto us: for we have made lies our refuge, and under falsehood have we hid ourselves: ¹⁶Therefore thus saith the Lord God, Behold, I lay in Zion for a foundation a stone, a tried stone, a precious corner stone, a sure foundation: he that believeth shall not make haste.”—

Right here [referring to the 1843 Chart], this is what is going to test them, those scornful men that ruled Jerusalem. It is the cornerstone; it is the Rock of Ages. This is a stumbling stone. You either fall on this and are broken or it is going to fall on you and it is going to crush you.

We have already dealt with this, but notice the next verse.

—“¹⁷Judgment also will I lay to the line,”—

What is “laying to the line” represent? Judgment.

—“¹⁷Judgment also will I lay to the line, and righteousness to the”—

What?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: To the plummet.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The plummet. This is the second time we find the plummet.

The plummet has something to do with the Judgment; but, now we know that the plummet of Judgment that is brought against these scornful men that rule Jerusalem has something to do with the Foundations of Adventism. Do we not? Is that not what it is saying?

—“¹⁷Judgment also will I lay to the line, and righteousness to the plummet: and the hail shall sweep away the refuge of lies, and the waters shall overflow the hiding place.”—

There is The Sunday Law.

—“¹⁸And your covenant with death shall be disannulled, and your agreement with hell shall not stand; when the overflowing scourge shall pass through, then ye shall be trodden down by it.” Isaiah 28:14-18 (KJV).

Zechariah 4

The plummet is also referenced in Zechariah, chapter 4. Go to Zechariah, chapter 4. This is the last place the plummet is referenced.

We will go through this fairly quickly. We are out of time, and I still have to conclude this [referencing the timeline of the Seven Churches on the whiteboard].

Verse 1:

“¹And the angel that talked with me [Zechariah] came again, and waked me, as a man that is wakened out of his sleep.”—

Zachariah here is representing God’s people that wake up at the Midnight Cry.

Verse 2:

^—“2And [the angel] said unto me, What seest thou? And I said, I have looked, and behold a candlestick all of gold, with a bowl upon the top of it, and his seven lamps thereon, and seven pipes to the seven lamps, which are upon the top thereof: ³And two olive trees by it, one upon the right side of the bowl, and the other upon the left side thereof. ⁴So I answered and spake to the angel that talked with me, saying, What are these, my lord? ⁵Then the angel that talked with me answered and said unto me, Knowest thou not what these be? And I said, No, my lord.”—

Zachariah is representing the Millerites here that wake up at the Midnight Cry in the summer of 1844 and then realize they do not know what the Sanctuary is. They do not know what the seven-branch candlestick is.

Zachariah is representing Seventh-day Adventists at the end of the world that wake up at the Midnight Cry at the end of the world and do not realize that the seven-branch candlestick represents the Latter Rain. They do not know what the Latter Rain is. They do not know what the work of the Holy Spirit is.

Verse 6:

—“⁶ Then he answered and spake unto me, saying, This”—what?—“This [candlestick] This is the word of the Lord”—

The Latter Rain is a message. It is the Word of the Lord.

—“unto Zerubbabel, saying, Not by might, nor by power, but by my spirit, saith the Lord of hosts.”—

The Latter Rain is the Word of the Lord. It is represented by the candlestick. Seventh-day Adventists at the end of the world do not know that. The Millerites did not know the furnishing of the heavenly Sanctuary because they thought the Sanctuary was the Earth.

Zachariah is representing the beginning and the ending of Adventism, just like John was in Revelation 10.

ZERUBBABEL, the name means out of Babylon, offspring of Babylon.

The beginning of Adventism was established upon the power of the Midnight Cry, the Second Angel’s Message, which is “Come out of Babylon.” And the end of Adventism is established in the power of Revelation 18, “Come out of Babylon.”

Zerubbabel is the beginning and the end of Adventism. It is the final gathering that was represented by the gathering in 1844.

Verse 7:

—“⁷Who art thou, O great mountain? before Zerubbabel thou shalt become a plain:”—

And Sister White tells us thee mountains are the difficulties that will be swept away.

—“and he shall bring forth the headstone thereof with shoutings, crying, Grace, grace unto it.”—

Zerubbabel is going to put the headstone—what is the headstone? That is the final stone [gesturing that the headstone is the last stone placed on top]. And Zerubbabel is going to put the foundation on. Zerubbabel represents the beginning and the end of Adventism.

—“before Zerubbabel thou shalt become a plain: and he shall bring forth the headstone thereof with shoutings, crying, Grace, and grace unto it. ⁸Moreover the word of the Lord came unto me, saying, ⁹The hands of Zerubbabel have laid the foundation of this house;”—

Millerite History.

—“his hands shall also finish it;”—

Our history.

—“and thou shalt know that the Lord of hosts hath sent me unto you. ¹⁰For who hath despised the day of small things?”—

There is the day of small things. There is the day of small things [referencing the 1843 Chart].

Who is despised in the Millerite History when all this began? Well, there is a group in Adventism that refused to return to those Old Paths. They despised the day of small things.

—“for they shall rejoice,”—

The other group is going to rejoice.

—“and shall see the plummet in the hand of Zerubbabel with those seven;”—

What is the plummet? Well, it is a symbol of Judgment. It is a symbol of measuring. And there is going to be a group that despised the Foundations of Adventism (the day of small things); but, there is going to be another group that is going to rejoice when they see the plummet in the hand of Zerubbabel with those seven.

Wow! That word seven just happens to be the identical Hebrew word that is translated as seven times in Leviticus 26. What is that plummet? They see the 2520.

—“they are the eyes of the Lord, which run to and fro through the whole earth.”—

Who runs to and fro through the whole Earth? It is the work of God. It is the work of God.

—^“11Then answered I, and said unto him, What are these two olive trees upon the right side of the candlestick and upon the left side thereof? ¹²And I answered again, and said unto him, What be these two olive branches which through the two golden pipes empty the golden oil out of themselves? ¹³And he answered me and said,”—

“You don’t know what these are?”

Zechariah is not representing himself. He is representing the Millerites; he is representing us.

—“Knowest thou not what these be? And I said, No, my lord. ¹⁴Then said he, These are the two anointed ones, that stand by the Lord of the whole earth.” Zechariah 4 (KJV).

Seventh-day Adventists, the Millerites, they do not understand the Heavenly Sanctuary in their day and age. We do not understand.

We do not understand the two anointed ones.

How many times have I had been confronted with these theologians and these pastors, “Sola scriptura, Brother! Sister White says we are not supposed to use her writings.”

“Well, Brother, you do not understand that the Spirit that inspired the Spirit of Prophecy is the identical Spirit that inspired the Bible. They are both the anointed ones.”

The people that are identified as the remnant in the Book of Revelation, they have the testimony of Jesus Christ. They do not give it lip service; they have it!

These are the two anointed ones that Adventism does not understand: the Bible and the Spirit of Prophecy.

So, enough sermonizing. Let us bring this to a conclusion.

Summary

What we are saying is that the history of Ancient Israel is repeated in our history. We read that right off at the beginning. We did not have to do any more. We could have read that and quit early today. Sister White says so.

But, we can show that the history of Ancient Israel is governed—and there is more to do with this study that we are not doing, by the way. Ancient Israel is governed by the history of the Seven Churches.

ANCIENT ISRAEL: OLD TESTAMENT

CHRISTIAN CHURCH: NEW TESTAMENT

L A O D I C E A

Figure No. 86.

And we showed yesterday that the history of the Seven Churches is all fulfilled in Laodicea.

So, what we are saying is, the history of Ancient Israel, that is the Old Testament; and the history of the Christian Church is the New Testament. It is all repeated in our history.

And our history, our history is a repetition of the Millerite History, of course.

So, what we are saying is, when the Lion of the tribe of Judah unseals the message of Daniel 11, verse 40, that this history down here to Daniel 12:1 when Michael stands up, that this history is the history of Laodicea. And on these verses the entire Bible is structured.

So, when we are talking about the Dirt Brush Man coming in, in 1989, and unsealing the Book of Daniel (Daniel 11:40), and beginning to sweep out the garbage from Adventism, we are talking about an unsealing that is just profound.

1^st TEMPLE CLEANSING 2^nd TEMPLE CLEANSING

1840

Dan. v.40 1841 1842 1843 1844 12:1

1798 v.41 v.42 v.43 v.44

Rev 18

History of Dan 11:40 COP COP

1989 9/11/2001 Sunday Law Close of Human Probation

( And at that time shall Michael stand up…)

Figure No. 87.

And in the history of verse 40, which begins in 1798, it goes all the way to verse 41, which is The Sunday Law. So, in this history, on 9/11 you had the Mighty Angel come down of Revelation 18, and empowered a message that was taken to the Protestants until they closed their doors in 1842.

In verse 42, the Papacy conquers the world; and, then the world is tested, until probation closes.

Am I getting you confused?

This [verse 40] is 1840.

This is verses 41 and 42: This is 1841 and 1842.

This is the first temple cleansing here [1840 to 1842]; the second temple cleansing goes right down to here [Daniel 12:1]. The second temple cleansing in the history of the Millerites was 1843 and 1844, which is verse 43 and verse 44; because “at that time” in verses 42 and 43 probation closes. Michael stands up [Daniel 12:1] in these histories, just as He stood up in 1844.

Did I lose you?

Brothers and Sisters, this is just one example that the whole Bible is structured on the last six verses of Daniel 11. And this is a study all into itself.

But, what are we doing here? We are trying to emphasize that in 1989 the Dirt Brush Man arrived, the Lion of the tribe of Judah, unsealed the Book of Daniel and an increase of knowledge began to test Seventh-day Adventists. And so far it looks like Seventh-day Adventists are greatly failing the test.

Shall we pray?

Benediction: Heavenly Father, we want to be awakened as was Zechariah, as were the Millerites; but, we want to understand the things that you present to us when we are awakened. We want to understand the increase of knowledge. We want to participate in the work of the Dirt Brush Man. We want to be among those that lead God’s people back to the Old Paths, that work to uncover the genuine jewels, the genuine coin. We thank you for allowing us to see a glimpse of this truth that you are opening to the world, and we ask a blessing upon the work that we are attempting to do here with the DVDs and the LiveStreaming. We set before you this day of work that we each have and ask a blessing upon on our service to you and ask for you to keep us safe. And we thank you for all these things in Jesus’s name. Amen.

Habakkuk’s Two Tables #44

PART SIX: 1989

Presented by Jeff Pippenger

Invocation by Brother Jeff Pippenger: Heavenly Father, we thank you for bringing us together this morning. We thank you for resolving the LiveStreaming problem. We ask as we take up our study this morning that you grant us the presence of your Holy Spirit and that you let us have the discernment to recognize the significance of Daniel 11 and verse 40. We want you to take control of our minds, our hearts that we can understand what you have for us and that the message presented would be from on High and not from a human being. We want the Latter Rain poured out upon us. We ask that you accomplish that for us at this time. In Jesus’s name, amen.

The Kings of the North and South

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Do you know who Malachi Martin is? He is dead, but he is a Jesuit and he was a spokesman for the last Pope; and this is probably his most famous book, The Keys of This Blood.

I have not busted out this book for years now, but it is marked up all the way through. We used to spend a lot of time dealing with what he said. But, I want to start with his introduction here to The Keys of This Blood.

The Keys of This Blood is about a three-way race to take control of the world between the United States, the Soviet Union, and the Papacy; and, his premise is that the Papacy is going to win; and, the United States, the Soviet Union, and the Papacy are the three powers that are in Daniel 11, verse 40. And that is what we are going to look at this morning.

And the Papacy understood this struggle over verse 40.

The “Introduction” to The Keys of This Blood, by Martin Malachi:

“Willing or not, ready or not, we are all involved in an all-out, no-holds-barred, three-way global competition. Most of us are not competitors, however. We are the stakes. For the competition is about who will establish the first one-world system of government that has ever existed in the society of nations. It is about who will hold and fill the dual power of authority and control over each of us as individuals and over all of us together as a community; over the entire six billion people expected by demographers to inhabit the Earth early in the third millennium.

“The competition is all out because, now that it has started, there is no way it can be reversed or called off.

“No holds are barred because, once the competition has been decided, the world and all that’s in it—our way of life as individuals and as citizens of the nations; our families and our jobs; our trades and commerce our money; our educational system and our religions and our cultures; even the badges of our national identities, which most of us have always taken for granted—all will have been powerfully and radically altered forever. No one can be exempted from its effect. No sector of our lives will remain untouched.

“The competition began and continues as a three-way affair because that is the number of rivals with sufficient resources to establish and maintain a new world order.

“Nobody who is acquainted with the plans of these three rivals has any doubt but that one of them can win. Each expects the other two to be overwhelmed and swallowed up by the coming maelstrom of change. That being the case, it would appear inescapable that their competition will end up as a confrontation.” Malachi Martin, The Keys of This Blood, introductory paragraphs of “The Servant of the Grand Design,” p. 15.

So, he goes through and explains why he thinks in this three-way power struggle the Pope of Rome is going to end up in control of the New World Order, that the Pope of Rome is going to defeat the Soviet Union and the United States.

In Daniel 11:40, it is dealing with those same three powers; and, Malachi Martin was viewing verse 40 from the perspective of Catholicism.

Now, you go to Daniel 11, verse 40, we have said already in these worship studies that verse 40 is one of the most profound verses in God’s Word. And I am not promoting Christmas or birthday presents. In fact, I read a passage from the Spirit of Prophecy within the past week; and, I do not remember the words; this is just a broad paraphrase. Ellen White said something to the effect that “Those that want to send me,” speaking of herself, Ellen White, “birthday presents, you need to understand that I am just going to pass them on to mission work.” She was just being out front, “Give me a birthday present, that’s fine; but, I am going to put it in the mission work.”

And, we certainly do not want to be worshipping Tammuz; but, that being said, we all know about Christmas presents and birthday presents. And the very best present, perhaps, just to make a point, is when you are in the military. When you are in the military and you are overseas and you get a present for Christmas, or whatever, even for your birthday, it is a box and what it is, it has got a present from your Mom, it has got a present from your Dad. It has got several presents in that one box. It has got a present from your niece, a present from your nephew; and, as you open it up, you know, there are the cookies from Mom, and there is the joke gift from your brother, and there is the picture of your little niece; and, you have gotten all these gifts, several of them, all in one box. There is nothing better than that; better than one present.

Daniel 11, verse 40 is like that. There are presents, jewels, gem after gem in this verse. So, I am just telling you that when we deal with verse 40 today, all we are doing is taking the ribbon off the package. We will be in verse 40, the Lord willing, for a long time. And the things that are in verse 40, they are truly amazing. And there is no way that all the things in verse 40 have been recognized yet.

So, verse 40 is talking about a three-way struggle between, as Malachi Martin said, the Papacy, the United States, and the Soviet Union. And the Papacy, and the United States, and the Soviet Union are the beast, the dragon, and the false prophet of Revelation 16 that lead the world to Armageddon. And verse 45 in Daniel 11 is Armageddon.

So, verse 40 of Daniel 11 is opening up the story about how the beast, dragon, and false prophet lead the world to Armageddon; and, that is the kinds of truths that are in there. But, you have to define these symbols in order to see it, and that is where we are going to begin.

In verse 40 of Daniel 11, it says,

“⁴⁰And at the time of the end shall the king of the south push at him: and the king of the north shall come against him like a whirlwind, with chariots, and with horsemen, and with many ships; and he shall enter into the countries, and shall overflow and pass over.” Daniel 11:40 (KJV).

We need to define the King of the North and the King of the South.

We have already ready referenced Uriah Smith’s book, Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation, is God’s helping hand; and, in your notes you will see where Uriah Smith is commenting on verse 5 of Daniel 11. He quotes verse 5 and then he says this—this is from page 249 of his book:

“‘VERSE 5. And the king of the south shall be strong, and one of his princes; and he shall be strong above him, and have dominion; his dominion shall be a great dominion.’

“The king of the north and the king of the south are many times referred to in the remaining portion of this chapter.”—chapter 11—“It therefore becomes essential to an understanding of the prophecy clearly to identify these powers. When Alexander’s empire was divided, the different portions lay toward the four winds of heaven, west, north, east, and south; these divisions of course to be reckoned from the standpoint of Palestine, the native land of the prophet. That division of the empire lying west of Palestine would thus constitute the kingdom of the west; that lying north, the kingdom of the north; that lying east, the kingdom of the east; and that lying south the kingdom of the south. The divisions of Alexander’s kingdom with respect to Palestine were situated as follows: Cassander had Greece and the adjacent countries, which lay to the west; Lysimachus had Thrace, which then included Asia Minor, and the countries lying on the Hellespont and Bosphorus, which lay to the north of Palestine; Seleucus had Syria and Babylon, which lay principally to the east; and Ptolemy had Egypt and the neighboring countries, which lay to the south.

“During the wars and revolutions which for long ages succeeded, these geographical boundaries were frequently changed or obliterated; old ones were wiped out, and new ones instituted. But whatever changes might occur, these first divisions of the empire must determine the names which these portions of territory should ever afterward bear, or we have no standard by which to test the application of the prophecy: that is, whatever power at any time should occupy the territory which at first constituted the kingdom of the north, that power, so long as it occupied that territory, would be the king of the north; and whatever power should occupy that which at first constituted the kingdom of the south, that power would so long be the king of the south. We speak of only these two, because they are the only ones afterward spoken of in the prophecy, and because, in fact, almost the whole of Alexander's empire finally resolved itself into these two divisions.” Uriah Smith, Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation, 249.

Rome

● N O R T H

●

Babylon

M E D I T E R R A N E A N S E A

● Jerusalem

E G Y P T

SOUTH

Figure No. 88.

So, what we are saying is—this is the map that we are dealing with—is that the power up here that controls the North is the King of the North, and the power that controls Egypt is the King of the South; and, this will carry on all the way through Daniel 11.

Daniel 11 is the only place you are going to see a war between the King of the North and the King of the South in God’s Word. So, the internal rule of definition of who is the King of the North and the King of the South has to be marked, has to be located in Daniel 11. That is what Uriah Smith was saying.

Before and After the Time Period of the Cross

Isaiah 43:9-12; 46:5-10; 44:1-8; 41:4; Galatians 4:22-26; 3:6-9, 26-29; Romans 2:28-29; 1 Corinthians 15:42-47

Now, there is a trick or a rule, something you have to understand if you are going to deal with verse 40. Verse 40 says, “And at the time of the end,” and we have already identified that is 1798 in a previous worship; but, 1798, the King of the South and the King of the North must be understood as spiritual entities because there is a rule in Bible prophecy—some people say it is the most important rule—and that rule is that prophecy that is fulfilled before the time period of the cross is to be understood in its literal application, and prophecy that is fulfilled after the time period of the cross is to be understood in its spiritual application. And this rule will show you from God’s Word, if you go to Isaiah 43:9-12, it says,

“⁹Let all the nations be gathered together, and let the people be assembled: who among them can declare this, and shew us former things? let them bring forth their witnesses, that they may be justified: or let them hear, and say, It is truth. ¹⁰Ye are my witnesses, saith the Lord, and my servant whom I have chosen: that ye may know and believe me, and understand that I am he: before me there was no God formed, neither shall there be after me. ¹¹I, even I, am the Lord; and beside me there is no saviour. ¹²I have declared, and have saved, and I have shewed, when there was no strange god among you: therefore ye are my witnesses, saith the Lord, that I am God.” Isaiah 43:9-12 (KJV).

So, in this passage of Isaiah, the Lord is saying, “Gather all nations together. We are going to show you who is God, who is the Savior by the demonstration of the former things.”

Go to Isaiah 46:5-10.

“⁵To whom will ye liken me, and make me equal, and compare me, that we may be like? ⁶They lavish gold out of the bag, and weigh silver in the balance, and hire a goldsmith, and he maketh it a god: they fall down, yea, they worship. ⁷They bear him upon the shoulder, they carry him, and set him in his place, and he standeth; from his place shall he not remove: yea, one shall cry unto him, yet can he not answer, nor save him out of his trouble. ⁸Remember this, and shew yourselves men: bring it again to mind, O ye transgressors. ⁹Remember the former things of old: for I am God, and there is none else; I am God, and there is none like me, ¹⁰Declaring the end from the beginning, and from ancient times the things that are not yet done, saying, My counsel shall stand, and I will do all my pleasure.” Isaiah 46:5-10 (KJV).

The Lord here is contrasting Himself with idolatry, and He is saying what proof that He is God is that He illustrates the end from the beginning. The former things illustrate the end. And this is the biggest argument in God’s Word about proving who God is: He is the One that identifies the end of the world by the former things, and He says we are to be witnesses of this very fact.

Isaiah 44:1-8:

“¹Yet now hear, O Jacob my servant; and Israel, whom I have chosen: ² Thus saith the Lord that made thee, and formed thee from the womb, which will help thee; Fear not, O Jacob, my servant; and thou, Jesurun, whom I have chosen. ³ For I will pour water upon him that is thirsty, and floods upon the dry ground: I will pour my spirit upon thy seed, and my blessing upon thine offspring: ⁴ And they shall spring up as among the grass, as willows by the water courses. ⁵ One shall say, I am the Lord's; and another shall call himself by the name of Jacob; and another shall subscribe with his hand unto the Lord, and surname himself by the name of Israel. ⁶ Thus saith the Lord the King of Israel, and his redeemer the Lord of hosts; I am the first, and I am the last; and beside me there is no God. ⁷ And who, as I, shall call, and shall declare it, and set it in order for me, since I appointed the ancient people? and the things that are coming, and shall come, let them shew unto them. ⁸ Fear ye not, neither be afraid: have not I told thee from that time, and have declared it? ye are even my witnesses. Is there a God beside me? yea, there is no God; I know not any.” Isaiah 44:1-8 (KJV).

Once again He is identifying that He is God because He declares the end from the beginning, and He says that we are to be witnesses of this principle, of this fact; but, in accomplishing the work of declaring the end of the world from the former things, He says He has appointed the “ancient people.”

The ancient people in the Old Testament are what illustrate the end of the world.

Isaiah 41:4 says,

“⁴Who hath wrought and done it, calling the generations from the beginning? I the Lord, the first and with the last; I am he.” Isaiah 41:4 (KJV).

So, the proof that God is God, in contrast with idolatry, the thing that we are to witness to at the end of the world is that Jesus is the God that illustrates the end of the world from the beginning of the world; and, the ancient people in the beginning of the world illustrate the people at the end of the world. And once you understand that, then you just have to understand that those literal people at the beginning of the world are prefiguring their spiritual fulfillment at the end; and, that is the rule about before the time period of the cross is literal, and after the time period of the cross is spiritual.

The spokesman for this rule probably is Paul. If you go to Galatians, Galatians, chapter 4, beginning at verse 22, it says,

“²²For it is written, that Abraham had two sons, the one by a bondmaid, the other by a freewoman. ²³But he who was of the bondwoman was born after the flesh; but he of the freewoman was by promise. ²⁴Which things are an allegory: for these are two covenants; the one from the mount Sinai, which gendereth to bondage, which is Agar. ²⁵For this Agar is mount Sinai in Arabia, and answereth to Jerusalem which now is, and is in bondage with her children. ²⁶But Jerusalem which is above is free, which is the mother of us all.” Galatians 4:22-26 (KJV).

Here Paul is identifying two Jerusalems: literal Jerusalem, which is still there; but, he is living in the time period of the cross and he is identifying spiritual Jerusalem, which is above. He is saying that the true Jerusalem of prophecy in his time period is Jerusalem, which is above, which is free.

Look at Galatians 3, verses 6 through 9:

“⁶Even as Abraham believed God, and it was accounted to him for righteousness. ⁷Know ye therefore that they which are of faith, the same are the children of Abraham.”—

That they which are of faith are the children of Abraham, not those that are blood descendants of Abraham.

Verse 8:

—“⁸And the scripture, foreseeing that God would justify the heathen through faith, preached before the gospel unto Abraham, saying, In thee shall all nations be blessed. ⁹So then they which be of faith are blessed with faithful Abraham.” Galatians 3:6-9 (KJV).

So, here, the seed of Abraham, after the time period of the cross, is based upon a spiritual relationship, not a blood relationship.

Look at verse 26 of the same chapter.

“²⁶For ye are all the children of God by faith in Christ Jesus. ²⁷For as many of you as have been baptized into Christ have put on Christ. ²⁸There is neither Jew nor Greek, there is neither bond nor free, there is neither male nor female: for ye are all one in Christ Jesus. ²⁹And if ye be Christ's, then are ye Abraham's seed, and heirs according to the promise.” Galatians 3:26-29 (KJV).

It is not literal descendants of Abraham. Now it is spiritual descendants of Abraham after the time period of the cross.

Romans 2: 28-29:

“²⁸For he is not a Jew, which is one outwardly; neither is that circumcision, which is outward in the flesh: ²⁹But he is a Jew, which is one inwardly; and circumcision is that of the heart, in the spirit, and not in the letter; whose praise is not of men, but of God.” Romans 2:28-29 (KJV).

From literal to spiritual, the time period of the cross.

1 Corinthians 15:42-47, says,

⁴²So also is the resurrection of the dead. It is sown in corruption; it is raised in incorruption: ⁴³It is sown in dishonour; it is raised in glory: it is sown in weakness; it is raised in power: ⁴⁴It is sown a natural body; it is raised a spiritual body. There is a natural body, and there is a spiritual body. ⁴⁵And so it is written, The first man Adam was made a living soul; the last Adam was made a quickening spirit. ⁴⁶Howbeit that was not first which is spiritual, but that which is natural; and afterward that which is spiritual. ⁴⁷The first man is of the earth, earthy; the second man is the Lord from heaven.” 1 Corinthians 15:42-47 (KJV).

After the cross, spiritual; before the cross, natural.

So, when you come to 1798, the Time of the End in Daniel 11, verse 40, you are after the time period of the cross and you are not looking for the power that controls literal Egypt or the power that controls literal Babylon to identify the King of the North and the King of the South. You are identifying the powers that control spiritual Babylon and spiritual Egypt.

The North is Babylon

Jeremiah 25:9; Ezekiel 26:7 (a king of kings); Joel 2:15-20 (between the seas); Ezekiel 38:14 – 39:7 (falls upon the mountains)

Jeremiah 25:9: We are now going to try to nail down the King of the North, understanding that all the prophets are speaking about the end of the world more than the days in which they lived; and, all prophets agree with one another. Jeremiah 25:9:

“⁹Behold, I will send and take all the families of the north, saith the Lord, and Nebuchadrezzar the king of Babylon, my servant, and will bring them against this land, and against the inhabitants thereof, and against all these nations round about, and will utterly destroy them, and make them an astonishment, and an hissing, and perpetual desolations.” Jeremiah 25:9 (KJV).

The king of Babylon is the King of the North in this passage.

And upon the testimony of two or three a thing is established. Go to Ezekiel 26:7:

“⁷For thus saith the Lord God; Behold, I will bring upon Tyrus Nebuchadrezzar king of Babylon, a king of kings,”—

Now, please take note that this is adding a layer of truth to the King of the North, the king of Babylon, to Nebuchadrezzar. He is also a king of kings, identifying that the King of the North at the end of the world would be a counterfeit christ, because Christ is the King of Kings. And when Christ is represented in the Bible as a King of Kings, the King is with a capital “K”; and, you notice here that Nebuchadrezzar as a king of kings, it is just a little “k,” but representing a counterfeit christ, which is one of the characteristics of the King of the North. And I just want you to note it while we are here, right now all we are showing you is that the King of the North is the king of Babylon.

—“⁷For thus saith the Lord God; Behold, I will bring upon Tyrus Nebuchadrezzar king of Babylon, a king of kings, from the north, with horses, and with chariots, and with horsemen, and companies, and much people.” Ezekiel 26:7 (KJV).

That is two places where the King of the North is the king of Babylon.

Go to Joel 2:15-20.

Remember that in verse 45 of Daniel 11, the King of the North, whoever he is in the last six verses of Daniel 11, he comes to his end right here, between the Mediterranean Sea and the Dead Sea. He comes to his end with none to help in the Valley of Megiddo.

And in Joel, chapter 2, beginning at verse 15, we are just looking at the King of the North here, but you will see why I added that in there. It says,

“¹⁵Blow the trumpet in Zion, sanctify a fast, call a solemn assembly: ¹⁶Gather the people, sanctify the congregation, assemble the elders, gather the children, and those that suck the breasts: let the bridegroom go forth of his chamber, and the bride out of her closet. ¹⁷Let the priests, the ministers of the Lord, weep between the porch and the altar, and let them say, Spare thy people, O Lord, and give not thine heritage to reproach, that the heathen should rule over them: wherefore should they say among the people, Where is their God?

“¹⁸Then will the Lord be jealous for his land, and pity his people. ¹⁹Yea, the Lord will answer and say unto his people, Behold, I will send you corn, and wine, and oil,”—all three: The Three Angels’ Messages—“and ye shall be satisfied therewith: and I will no more make you a reproach among the heathen. ²⁰But I will remove far off from you the northern army,”—this is the King of the North—“I will remove far off from you the northern army, and will drive him into a land barren and desolate, with his face toward the east sea, and his hinder part toward the utmost sea, and his stink shall come up, and his ill savour shall come up, because he hath done great things.” Joel 2:15-20 (KJV).

He comes to his end between the seas, this northern army, the King of the North. This is Daniel 11, verse 45.

Ezekiel 38:14 through 39:7: The King of the North, this is the king of Babylon. He is a counterfeit christ; he is a king of kings. He comes to his end in between the seas.

“^{Ezekiel 38:14} Therefore, son of man, prophesy and say unto Gog,”—

There is a lot of false teaching about Gog and Magog.

—“^{Ezekiel 38:14} Therefore, son of man, prophesy and say unto Gog, Thus saith the Lord God; In that day when my people of Israel dwelleth safely, shalt thou not know it? ¹⁵And thou shalt come from thy place out of the north parts,”—

Gog comes from the north parts. Gog is the King of the North.

—“thou, and many people with thee, all of them riding upon horses, a great company, and a mighty army: ¹⁶And thou shalt come up against my people of Israel, as a cloud to cover the land; it shall be in the latter days,”—it is going to be at the end of the world—“and I will bring thee against my land,”—His land, Palestine—“that the heathen may know me, when I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, before their eyes. ¹⁷Thus saith the Lord God; Art thou he of whom I have spoken in old time by my servants the prophets of Israel, which prophesied in those days many years that I would bring thee against them? ¹⁸And it shall come to pass at the same time when Gog shall come against the land of Israel, saith the Lord God, that my fury shall come up in my face. ¹⁹For in my jealousy and in the fire of my wrath have I spoken, Surely in that day there shall be a great shaking in the land of Israel; ²⁰So that the fishes of the sea, and the fowls of the heaven, and the beasts of the field, and all creeping things that creep upon the earth, and all the men that are upon the face of the earth, shall shake at my presence, and the mountains shall be thrown down, and the steep places shall fall, and every wall shall fall to the ground. ²¹And I will call for a sword against him throughout all my mountains,”—he is going to come to his end on the mountains of Israel—“saith the Lord God: every man's sword shall be against his brother. ²²And I will plead against him with pestilence and with blood; and I will rain upon him, and upon his bands, and upon the many people that are with him, an overflowing rain, and great hailstones, fire, and brimstone. ²³ Thus will I magnify myself, and sanctify myself; and I will be known in the eyes of many nations, and they shall know that I am the Lord.

“^{Ezekiel 39:1-7} Therefore, thou son of man, prophesy against Gog, and say, Thus saith the Lord God; Behold, I am against thee, O Gog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal: ² And I will turn thee back, and leave but the sixth part of thee, and will cause thee to come up from the north parts, and will bring thee upon the mountains of Israel: ³ And I will smite thy bow out of thy left hand, and will cause thine arrows to fall out of thy right hand. ⁴ Thou shalt fall upon the mountains of Israel, thou, and all thy bands, and the people that is with thee: I will give thee unto the ravenous birds of every sort, and to the beasts of the field to be devoured. ⁵ Thou shalt fall upon the open field: for I have spoken it, saith the Lord God. ⁶ And I will send a fire on Magog, and among them that dwell carelessly in the isles: and they shall know that I am the Lord. ⁷ So will I make my holy name known in the midst of my people Israel; and I will not let them pollute my holy name any more: and the heathen shall know that I am the Lord, the Holy One in Israel.” Ezekiel 38:14 – 39:7 (KJV).

So, Gog that comes against Israel at the end of the world—and that is what the King of the North does in Daniel 11:40-45—he comes out of the north, and he is going to come to his end with none to help.

So, the King of the North is the king of Babylon; but, in verse 40 of Daniel 11 in 1798 has to be spiritual Babylon.

The Great Controversy, page 382, is commenting on Revelation 17.

Please notice, as we identify the King of the North and the King of the South we are going to get our definitions from the Book of Revelation, and we are going to use the Spirit of Prophecy as the second testimony to confirm it. Upon the testimony of two a thing is established. And the testimony of the two witnesses about these spiritual entities will be The Great Controversy and the Book of Revelation.

The Great Controversy, page 382, says,

“The woman (Babylon) of Revelation 17 is described as ‘arrayed in purple and scarlet color, and decked with gold and precious stones and pearls, having a golden cup in her hand full of abominations and filthiness: . . . and upon her forehead was a name written, Mystery, Babylon the Great,”—

This woman is Babylon the Great.

—“the mother of harlots.’ Says the prophet: ‘I saw the woman drunk with the blood of the saints, and with the blood of the martyrs of Jesus.’ Babylon is further declared to be ‘that great city, which reigneth over the kings of the earth.’ Revelation 17:4–6, 18. The power that for so many centuries maintained despotic sway over the monarchs of Christendom is Rome.” The Great Controversy, 382.

The King of the North is spiritual Babylon. It is the Papacy.

The South is Egypt

Verse 40 of Daniel 11 says, “And at the time of the end,” in 1798, shall the king of the south begin a war against the Papacy.

SOUTH: Strong’s Concordance 5045—from an unused root mean. To be parched; the south (from its drought); spec. the Negeb or southern district of Judah; occasional, Egypt (as south to Pal).

The word SOUTH in the verse is Negeb. You will see from Strong’s it says, from an unused root meaning to be parched; the south (from its droughts); specifically, the Negeb or the southern district of Judah, occasionally, Egypt.

King of the South

Daniel 11:5-8; Isaiah 30:1-7; Revelation 11:8

Okay. The King of the South is the King of Egypt.

And if you are just looking at this verse for the first time, you may not catch something that sometimes people stumble over; but, you should not stumble over it because it is actually a clarification; and, it is this: The Papacy is going to conquer the King of the South in verse 40; but, the symbol of the King of the South is Egypt. And in verse 42 the Papacy, the same power, is going to conquer Egypt.

So, is God being redundant? Does He conquer Egypt, the King of the South, in verse 40; and, then, conquer Egypt again in verse 42? You know, is there some kind of miscommunication going on here? And the answer is no. The answer is no, and it is explained very clearly in the Scriptures. But, I want you to at least see it.

What identifies the King of the South is the power that controls Egypt, and south is a word that is sometimes translated as Egypt.

In Daniel 11, beginning at verse 5, it says,

“⁵And the king of the south shall be strong,”—

And this is the verse that Uriah Smith was commenting on that we read.

—“⁵And the king of the south shall be strong, and one of his princes; and he shall be strong above him, and have dominion; his dominion shall be a great dominion. ⁶And in the end of years they shall join themselves together; for the king’s daughter of the south shall come to the king of the north to make an agreement: but she shall not retain the power of the arm; neither shall he stand, nor his arm: but she shall be given up, and they that brought her, and he that begat her, and he that strengthened her in these times.”—

So the king of Egypt, he gives a daughter in marriage to the King of the North in this history. And after a little while, the King of the North, he sets aside this wife and takes another wife. Okay? So, there is going to be a conspiracy to overthrow this king [the King of the North] by his ex-wife, or his set-aside wife. But that is the history that we are talking about here.

Now, I am not too worried about the history here. I want you to see why we are calling the King of the South “Egypt.”

So, in verse 7 it says,

—“⁷But out of a branch of her roots shall one stand up in his estate, which shall come with an army,”—

Okay. One of her relatives back here in Egypt, he does not like that she got set aside for another wife; so, he is going to exercise revenge.

—“⁷But out of a branch of her roots”—the wife that gets set aside by the King of the North—“shall one stand up in his estate, which shall come with an army, and shall enter into the fortress of the king of the north, and shall deal against them, and shall prevail:”—

Okay. The King of the South here, the king of Egypt, he is going to attack in retaliation for this wife being dishonored.

And in verse 8, it says,

—“⁸And [he] shall also carry captives”—

He is also going to take some captives from Babylon, from the King of the North.

—“⁸And shall also carry captives into Egypt their gods, with their princes, and with their precious vessels of silver and of gold; and he shall continue more years than the king of the north.” Daniel 11:5-8 (KJV).

And all I want you to see there is that when he goes and attacks here [indicating on the whiteboard against the King of the North], he carries captives and booties, and he carries it back to where?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Egypt.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: To Egypt. Egypt is the King of the South. These verses here are defining the King of the South as Egypt.

Isaiah 30, verses 1-7:

“¹Woe to the rebellious children, saith the Lord, that take counsel, but not of me; and that cover with a covering, but not of my spirit, that they may add sin to sin: ²That walk to go down into Egypt, and have not asked at my mouth; to strengthen themselves in the strength of Pharaoh, and to trust in the shadow of Egypt! ³Therefore shall the strength of Pharaoh be your shame, and the trust in the shadow of Egypt your confusion. ⁴For his princes were at Zoan, and his ambassadors came to Hanes. ⁵They were all ashamed of a people that could not profit them, nor be an help nor profit, but a shame, and also a reproach. ⁶The burden of the beasts of the south: into the land of trouble and anguish, from whence come the young and old lion, the viper and fiery flying serpent, they will carry their riches upon the shoulders of young asses, and their treasures upon the bunches of camels, to a people that shall not profit them. ⁷For the Egyptians shall help in vain, and to no purpose: therefore have I cried concerning this, Their strength is to sit still.” Isaiah 30:1-7 (KJV).

They were not supposed to go to Egypt; but, Egypt here is the “burden of the beasts of the south.” Egypt is the South, the King of the South. The power that controls Egypt is the King of the South.

Revelation 11:8.

In 1798 we are looking for spiritual Egypt, Revelation 11, verse 8, spiritual Egypt, in the time period of 1798. And Revelation 11 is about the French Revolution, which is the history of 1798.

In verse 8, speaking of France, it says,

“⁸And their dead bodies shall lie in the street of the great city, which spiritually is called Sodom and Egypt,”—spiritually, Sodom and Egypt—“where also our Lord was crucified.” Revelation 11:8 (KJV).

In Revelation, spiritual Egypt is France, atheistic France. And as a second witness to this spiritual King of the South, in The Great Controversy, commenting on this verse, The Great Controversy, page 269, says,

“This is atheism, and the nation represented by Egypt would give voice to a similar denial of the claims of the living God and would manifest a like spirit of unbelief and defiance.” The Great Controversy, 269.

Spiritual Egypt in the 1798 time period is atheistic France that “would give voice.”

All right. The Great Controversy, page 443, says,

“The speaking of the nation is the action of its legislative and judicial authorities.” The Great Controversy, 443.

And in the French Revolution, France legally enshrined Atheism into their constitution. They gave voice; and this influence continues all the way to the end of the world.

Education, page 228, says,

“The worldwide dissemination of the same teachings that led to the French Revolution—all are tending to involve the whole world in a struggle similar to that which convulsed France.” Education, 228.

And the teachings of the French Revolution are the teachings of the United Nations; but, we are not going there yet. We just want you to see that spiritual Egypt in the 1798 time period was atheistic France. So, verse 40 of Daniel 11 says, “And at the time of the end,” in 1798, atheistic France shall push against the Papacy, spiritual Babylon.

Push

PUSH: Strong’s Concordance 5055—to butt with horns; fig. to war against: gore, push.

And the word PUSH, in your notes, means to butt with horns, to war against.

Daniel 8:4

And if you will go to Daniel 8:4, you will see the same word, only it is translated a little bit differently but it is recognizable. Daniel 8:4 says,

“⁴I saw the ram pushing”—the same word PUSH—“I saw the ram pushing westward, and northward, and southward; so that no beasts might stand before him, neither was there any that could deliver out of his hand; but he did according to his will, and became great.” Daniel 8:4 (KJV).

This is the Medes and Persians, and this is identifying the areas of their conquering the world. They went West, North, and South. The pushed; it was war.

So, in 1798, verse 4 says, at the Time of the End in 1798 shall atheistic France begin a war against the Papacy. And, of course, we know that this is so.

Come Against Like A Whirlwind

In verse 40 of Daniel 11, once the war has begun in the first part of the verse, and then there is a colon and it says,

“⁴⁰. . . : and the king of the north shall come against him like a whirlwind, with chariots, and with horsemen, and with many ships: and he shall enter into the countries, and shall overflow and pass over.” Daniel 11:40b (KJV).

And you see the Hebrew words COME, AGAINST, and WHIRLWIND in your notes.

COME: Strong’s Concordance 8175—a prim. root; to storm; by impl. to shiver, i.e. fear-:be (horribly) afraid, fear, hurl as a storm, be tempestuous, come like (take away as with) a whirlwind.

AGAINST: Strong’s Concordance 5921—same as 5920. 5920—from 5927. 5927—to ascend, intrans. (be high) or act. (mount)—arise (up). (cause to) ascend up.

WHIRLWIND: Strong’s Concordance 8175—same as ‘come’ above.

To come against, COME means to storm, to come like (take away as with) a whirlwind.

Against, AGAINST is worth taking note of. AGAINST means to ascend. So, not only is the Papacy, when it retaliates against the king of Atheism, going to sweep away the king of Atheism like a whirlwind, like a tornado, but at the same time he will begin to ascend to the throne of the Earth; because, Satan is the power that wants to ascend to the throne of God, and Satan’s representative on Earth is the Pope of Rome. It is characteristic of both Satan and the Papacy. They are the power that ascends.

Chariots and Horses

Exodus 14:9; 1 Kings 1:5; 20:1

Satan and the Papacy are going to come with an ally that gives the chariots, horses, and ships.

Exodus 14.

So far all our claims are based upon the testimony of two or three. Exodus 14:9, and according to God’s Word if you have two witnesses it is established.

“⁹But the Egyptians pursued after them, all the horses and chariots of Pharaoh, and his horsemen, and his army, and overtook them encamping by the sea, beside Pihahiroth, before Baalzephon.” Exodus 14:9 (KJV).

Chariots and horses represent army/military strength.

1 Kings 1, verse 5:

“⁵Then Adonijah the son of Haggith exalted himself, saying, I will be king: and he prepared him chariots and horsemen, and fifty men to run before him.” 1 Kings 1:5 (KJV).

1 Kings 20, verse 1, third witness - chariots, horsemen, and military strength:

“¹And Benhadad the king of Syria gathered all his host together: and there were thirty and two kings with him, and horses, and chariots: and he went up and besieged Samaria, and warred against it.” 11 Kings 20:1 (KJV).

Horses, chariots, and military strength in 1798, atheistic France would begin a war against the Papacy; but, as history unfolded, the Papacy would retaliate against the king of Atheism, the King of the South. And when he did so, he would bring an ally that supplied military strength.

In Review and Herald, March 9, 1911, it says,

“Everything in God’s world—men and doctrines, and nature itself—is fulfilling God’s sure word of prophecy, and accomplishing his grand and closing work in this world’s history. We are to be ready, and waiting for the orders of God. Nations will be stirred to their very center. Support will be withdrawn from those who proclaim God’s only standard of righteousness as the only sure test of character. And all who will not bow to the decree of national councils, and obey the national laws to exalt the sabbath instituted by the man of sin to disregard God’s holy day, will feel, not the oppressive power of popery alone, but of the Protestant world, the image of the beast.” Review and Herald, March 9, 1911.

I am missing page 3. Does anyone have page 3? My notes do not; I do not have pages 3 or 4.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Provides Brother Pippenger with the missing pages.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Great Controversy, beginning on page 615:

“As the Sabbath has become the special point of controversy throughout Christendom, and religious and secular authorities have combined to enforce the observance of the Sunday, the persistent refusal of a small minority to yield to the popular demand will make them objects of universal execration. It will be urged that the few who stand in opposition to an institution of the church and a law of the state ought not to be tolerated; that it is better for them to suffer than for whole nations to be thrown into confusion and lawlessness. The same argument many centuries ago was brought against Christ by the ‘rulers of the people.’ ‘It is expedient for us,’ said the wily Caiaphas, ‘that one man should die for the people, and that the whole nation perish not.’ John 11:50. This argument will appear conclusive; and a decree will finally be issued against those who hallow the Sabbath of the fourth commandment, denouncing them as deserving of the severest punishment and giving the people liberty, after a certain time, to put them to death. Romanism in the Old World and apostate Protestantism in the New will pursue a similar course toward those who honor all the divine precepts. —

“The people of God will then be plunged into those scenes of affliction and distress described by the prophet as the time of Jacob’s trouble.—“

So, in the Old World, NATO is going to carry out the persecution, and in the Western World, the armies of the United States are going to carry out the persecution; but, they are going to be doing it in agreement with the directions of the Pope of Rome.

And in this passage here, if you look carefully, it is not talking so much about The Sunday Law in the United States. It is talking about when the Death Decree is passed. Sister White says, “denouncing them as deserving of the severest punishment.”—

What is the severest punishment?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Death.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Death.

—“and giving the people liberty, after a certain time, to put them to death.”

Okay. This is the Death Decree.

Then in the next paragraph she says, “Then comes the time of Jacob’s trouble,” and the time of Jacob’s trouble takes place after probation is closed. So, she is inferring that the close of human probation, when Michael stands up, is at the Death Decree.

—‘Thus saith the Lord: We have heard a voice of trembling, of fear, and not of peace. . . . All faces are turned into paleness. Alas! for that day is great, so that none is like it: it is even the time of Jacob’s trouble; but he shall be saved out of it.’ Jeremiah 30:5–7.” The Great Controversy, 615–616.

Acts 7:54-60.

And if you go to Acts, chapter 7, verse 54, you will get your Biblical support for that application. Acts 7:54 says,

“⁵⁴When they heard these things, they were cut to the heart, and they gnashed on him with their teeth. ⁵⁵But he, being full of the Holy Ghost, looked up stedfastly into heaven, and saw the glory of God, and Jesus standing on the right hand of God.”—

Michael just stood up.

“—⁵⁶And said, Behold, I see the heavens opened, and the Son of man standing on the right hand of God. ⁵⁷Then they cried out with a loud voice, and stopped their ears, and ran upon him with one accord. ⁵⁸And cast him out of the city, and stoned him: and the witnesses laid down their clothes at a young man’s feet, whose name was Saul. ⁵⁹And they stoned Stephen, calling upon God, and saying, Lord Jesus, receive my spirit. ⁶⁰And he kneeled down, and cried with a loud voice, Lord, lay not this sin to their charge. And when he had said this, he fell asleep.” Acts 7:54-60 (KJV).

So, when Michael stands up, it is at the Death Decree.

Ships

Psalm 107:23; Proverbs 31:14; Revelation 18:17-19; 2 Chronicles 9:21-22

Ships, what are ships? Because, when the Papacy retaliates against the king of Atheism, he is going to bring not only armies, chariots and horsemen, but also ships.

Psalm 107:23: What are ships?

“²³They that go down to the sea in ships, that do business in great waters; . . .” Psalm 107:23 (KJV)

Ships represent economic strength.

Proverbs 31:14:

“¹⁴She is like the merchants’ ships; she bringeth her food from afar.” Proverbs 31:14 (KJV).

Merchants’ ships, food, and commerce.

Revelation 18:17-19:

“¹⁷For in one hour so great riches is come to nought. And every shipmaster, and all the company in ships, and sailors, and as many as trade by sea, stood afar off. ¹⁸And cried when they saw the smoke of her burning, saying, What city is like unto this great city! ¹⁹And they cast dust on their heads, and cried, weeping and wailing, saying, Alas, alas that great city, wherein were made rich all that had ships in the sea by reason of her costliness! for in one hour is she made desolate.” Revelation 18:17-19 (KJV).

Ships represent economic strength.

2 Chronicles 9:21-22.

Of course, ships are important to recognize because Islam is what brings down the ships at the end of the world; and, the primary symbol of economics in terms of the ships are the ships of Tarshish, and this is what the east wind brings down. But, we are not studying Islam at this time.

2 Chronicles, chapter 9, beginning at 21, says,

“²¹For the king’s ships”—Solomon’s—“went to Tarshish with the servants of Huram: every three years once came the ships of Tarshish bringing gold, and silver, ivory, and apes, and peacocks. ²²And king Solomon passed all the kings of the earth in riches and wisdom.” 2 Chronicles 9:21-22 (KJV).

So, when the King of the North retaliates against the King of the South, when the Papacy retaliates against the king of Atheism at the end of the world, he brings an ally with him that supplies military and economic strength; and, it is going to pass over the countries.

Countries

Daniel 11:40, 41, 42

You will notice in your notes Daniel 11:40, 41, and 42.

And as I said, all we are doing is taking the bow off the package of verse 40 here this morning. We are just getting started, but we have to have a point of reference as we take some of these other jewels out in the coming worships.

But, at the end of verse 40, when the King of the North sweeps away the king of Atheism, when the Papacy in conjunction with the United States collapses the Soviet Union in 1989, it passes over the countries. That is what verse 40 says. It shall enter into the countries, in the plural. And that is in there.

But, in verse 41, it says,

“⁴¹[When the king] shall enter into also into the glorious land, and many countries shall be overthrown.”—

And that word countries is a supplied word [shown as italics in the King James Bible]; because, when the glorious land (the United States of America) is conquered by the Papacy at The Sunday Law—and that is what verse 41 is identifying—many Seventh-day Adventists will be overthrown, but not many “countries.”

But, then in verse 42, it says,

“⁴²He shall stretch forth his hand also upon the countries: and the land of Egypt shall not escape.”

This word “countries” is in there, and Egypt here is representing all the countries of the world. So I just want you to see that there is light to be gleaned from marking this word countries/countries in these three verses, and noting that in verse 41 it is a supplied word. But what we are saying is that in 1989 the Soviet Union was swept away by an alliance between the Pope of Rome and Ronald Reagan, and that even though verse 40 begins in 1798, the King of the South, the king of Atheism, was one nation, the nation of France. As history progressed, the new king of Atheism, the Soviet Union, was made up of a confederacy of countries. So for verse 40 to say when he sweeps away the King of the South and he is going to pass over the “countries,” this is absolutely accurate.

Overflow and Pass Over

OVERFLOW: Strong’s Concordance 7857—a prim. root; to gush; by impl. to inundate, cleanse; by anal. to gallop, conquer;- drown, (over-) flow (-whelm), rinse. run. rush. (thoroughly) wash (away).

PASS: Strong’s Concordance 5674—a prim. root; to cross over.

This word OVERFLOW [Daniel 11:41], when he going to overflow the countries, it means a primary root; to gush; by implication to inundate, to conquer, to (thoroughly) wash (away).

And PASS means to cross over.

The reason why I am taking time to note some of these more mundane words in the verse is letting the Hebrew define what they mean you will find that the secular reporters of this history of 1989, they would repeatedly use these words that are found in verse 40.

Prophecy Defined

We have a definition of prophecy here. There are two things that I want you to see in this definition. One is the definition of prophecy; the other is what the last scenes of prophecy are.

It says from Selected Messages, book 2, page 102,

“Historical events, showing the direct fulfillment of prophecy, were set before the people,”—

And what we are going to do here in closing out this study is we are going to set before you historical events to substantiate the claim we just made about verse 40; and, the claim we just made about verse 40 is that in 1798 atheistic France began a war against the Papacy by delivering the deadly wound to the Papacy. But at the end of the world, the king of Atheism is no longer France; it is the Soviet Union, and that the Papacy is going to retaliate against the Soviet Union with its end-of-the-world ally, the United States that supplies military and economic strength, and there is going to be a mighty sweeping away of the Soviet Union. It is going to happen almost overnight. All the commentators are amazed on how fast it happened, and that is consistent with the word whirlwind in the verse. And at this point the Papacy is going to once again begin to ascend to the throne of the Earth with this mighty sweeping away, and it is going to pass over the countries. So, historical events were set before the people and prophecy was seen. And the way that you prove the fulfillment of prophecy is with historical events. That is why we are using this quote.

—“Historical events, showing the direct fulfillment of prophecy, were set before the people, and prophecy was seen to be a figurative delineation of events leading down to the close of this earth’s history.”—

And that is where these verses are going. They are going right down to the close of this Earth’s history.

Then she says,

—“The scenes connected with the working of the man of sin are the last features plainly revealed in this earth’s history.” Selected Messages, book 2, 102.

Right there, that sentence there, if you are willing to see, tells you that the King of the North in the last six verses of Daniel 11, it has got to be the man of sin; because,
“The scenes connected with the working of the man of sin are the last features plainly revealed in this earth’s history.” And in Daniel 12:1 human probation closes.

But, we are not using that prooftext. We are just laying that over the top of this presentation.

Education, page 184:

“From the rise and fall of nations as made plain in the pages of Holy Writ, they need to learn how worthless is mere outward and worldly glory.” Education, 184.

We are saying that when the Soviet Union was swept away in 1989 that it was a fulfillment of Daniel 11, verse 40, and that it was the fall of a nation.

Push

The Ongoing War

Now, I had to be selective about the visual aids that I brought today.

This is one of my favorites. This is from this history. This is from Time magazine, February 1992. It is called “Holy Alliance.” It is talking about the alliance between the Vatican and the United States, Reagan and the Pope, to sweep away the Soviet Union.

And the main article in this magazine was written by Carl Bernstein. Carl Bernstein is the son of a famous conductor. Carl Bernstein got the Pulitzer Prize for the Watergate Scandal, along with another man, that I am not remembering his name [Bob Woodard, with The Washington Post]; but, it does not matter. And when he was asked to do this article, Bernstein, in this Time magazine—and we are going to quote from this magazine about the demise of the Soviet Union in 1989—he says (and we will show you this tomorrow. We will show you the interview that Carl Bernstein has with [talk show host] Larry King). Carl Bernstein says, that he realized that this was the greatest story of his lifetime. So, he collaborated with a man who was an expert on the Vatican and he wrote this book, His Holiness John Paul II and the Hidden History of Our Time, the hidden history being the secret alliance between Ronald Reagan and the Pope of Rome.

And when you read this magazine or you read this book, it is 100 percent in agreement with what we are saying about verse 40. It is about how the United States used its money, for instance, to prop up the Solidarity Union in Poland to keep them in protest mode, and that is where the collapse began, was in Poland.

The CIA smuggled in $50 million to support them, to support that union that was on strike, bringing down Poland. And at that time, what do you suppose those union workers made a week? What was their paycheck? $3.00 a week. So, how much money is $50 million, and how did the United States get $50 million cash into Poland? Through the priests of the Catholic Church.

So, that is the “ships,” the economics.

And that is just one minor illustration of the economic struggle that went on there.

The military struggle is the United States took the missiles that were in Western Europe and it turned those nuclear warheads towards the Soviet Union; but, it only did so as the Pope of Rome told them that they could do it. Reagan never pointed one missile towards the Soviet Union, except when he first got permission from the Pope of Rome. And when they did that, the Soviet Union was forced to counter and bring its military to the borders of Western Europe in defense of what they could see what was happening, and it brought about an economic collapse.

Military and economics—chariots, ships, and horsemen—being directed by the Pope of Rome.

We will deal a little bit more with that tomorrow.

Now, through the years, there are people that have been fighting this message. You know, they say, “Well, you know, I think the collapse was really 1991. What are you saying 1989?”

And initially I used to say, “Well, you know, 1989, 1991, you know, big deal. I believe it was 1989.”

Some people even went farther than that, down to Year 2000.

But, this is a recent—when was it?—a couple of years ago. I like this one. This is Time magazine, “1989: The Year that Defined Today’s World.” They marked 1989 as the collapse of the Soviet Union, no matter what these Adventists that are sleeping on want to argue about. 1989. Okay?

1989, and then to William Miller’s dream.

The Man of the Century, this book is about the man of the Century because he [Pope John Paul II] brought down the Soviet Union: The man of sin of the Century.

I like this one from Life magazine, once again on the bringing down of the Soviet Union: “Pope John Paul II: A Tribute.” The reason why I like this one: with a forward by the Reverend Billy Graham. There is a secret alliance, not with the political but with the religious apostate protestants; Billy Graham praising the Pope, praising the man of sin.

So, what we are going to do here in closing is we are going to take some of the statements from the reporters that were reporting on the collapse of the Soviet Union and demonstrate that the history that was recorded is in agreement with what we are saying about in verse 40.

Time magazine, December 4, 1989, says,

“Until recently, the battalions of Marxism seemed to have the upper hand over the soldiers of the Cross.”—

The “soldiers of the Cross” being the Catholic Church; but, what I want you to see here is they are noting a long drawn-out war, a war that began in 1798.

—“In the wake of the Bolshevik Revolution of 1917,”—

And the Bolshevik Revolution, what is another word for the Bolshevik Revolution? It is the Russian Revolution, is it not?

And the Russian Revolution is when Russia becomes the King of the South. It becomes the king of Atheism, and you will see something. It is not an accident.

Who is the first King of the South? France.

And where does France become the King of the South? When? What is the historical event that brings Napoleon into power?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The French Revolution.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: In the French Revolution.

Wherever the King of the South goes in history, you will find a revolution. As Atheism spread throughout South America or Asia or Africa, the way that the King of the South accomplishes his conquering is he goes into a country and he begins to spread his civil unrest to accomplish a revolution. It is one of the characteristics of the King of the South, is revolution.

The Bolshevik Revolution is marking the beginning of the modern King of the South, just as the French Revolution marked the beginning of the first King of the South.

And in history it is called the Bolshevik Revolution; it is called the Russian Revolution. And what else is it called?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The October Revolution.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The October Revolution.

Why is it important to note that it is the October Revolution? Because, it was in 1917.

In 1917, in October, the most important date for the Soviet Union, that is where they get started. That is their birth. That is like 1776 on July 4^th here in the United States, July 4^th. Okay? That is the starting point for them.

What else happened in October of 1917?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Fatima.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Miracle of Fatima.

And the most important point of reference for this man [Pope John Paul II] and for the Catholic Church today is Fatima.

I was looking at this, this morning; and I have not looked at this book, The Keys of This Blood, by Malachi Martin, for years. I have it marked up, all over the place; but, these pages here that are folded, they were for when I was going to do presentations on this, it is about and saying that Pope John Paul II was directed by the messages of Fatima. Okay? The Miracle of Fatima took place in October of 1917; same month, same year.

The starting point for the King of the South in verse 40 is the starting point for the modern King of the North in verse 40. And when you understand the Fatima message, you understand more about verse 40; but, we are not going there.

—“Until recently, the battalions of Marxism seemed to have the upper hand over the soldiers of the Cross.”—the war began in 1798. He pushed against them—“In the wake of the Bolshevik Revolution of 1917, Lenin had pledged toleration but delivered terror. ‘Russia turned crimson with the blood of martyrs,’ says Father Gleb Yakunin, Russian Orthodoxy’s bravest agitator for religious freedom. In the Bolsheviks’ first five years in power, 28 bishops and 1,200 priests were cut down by the red sickle. Stalin greatly accelerated the terror, and by the end of Khrushchev’s rule, liquidation of the clergy reached an estimated 50,000. After World War II, fierce but generally less bloody persecution spread into the Ukraine and the new Soviet bloc, affecting millions of Roman Catholics and Protestants as well as Orthodox.” Time, December 4, 1989.

What is my point? Verse 40 says the king of Atheism was going to begin a war against the Papacy. He was going to push against him. This was a war. Blood was being spilled.

And notice that this commentary is coming in connection with the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989. It is being drawn from these secular testimonies of this history.

Life magazine, December 1989:

“In 1935 Josef Stalin, absolute ruler of the Soviet Union, was given some unsolicited advice. Make a propitiatory gesture to the Vatican, he was told. Pushed too far, his country’s Catholics might become counterrevolutionary.”—

Pushed? If the King of the South pushes the King of the North too far, he might have a counterrevolution on his hands, the same words.

—“Stalin’s great mustache amplified his sneer. ‘The pope. And how many divisions has he?’ The answer then was that he has none. The answer now is that he needs none. The structures of Communism are crumbling to the touch.” Life, December 1989.

A Whirlwind

“Days of the Whirlwind” Title in Newsweek, December 25, 1989.

I have this magazine here. This is another one of my favorite magazines, but I did not locate it yesterday; but, it is over there. It is The Newsweek Magazine from December 1989, and the title of the magazine is “Days of the Whirlwind.” He will sweep them away as a whirlwind!

And in this magazine, it gives the chronology of the collapse of the Soviet Union in the Days of the Whirlwind. And what does verse 40 say? “He shall come against him like a”—what?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Whirlwind.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“like a whirlwind.”

“Of all the events that have shaken the Soviet bloc in 1989, none is more fraught with history—or more implausible—than the polite encounter to take place this week in Vatican City. There, in the spacious ceremonial library of the 16th century Apostolic Palace, the czar of world atheism, Mikhail Gorbachev, will visit the Vicar of Christ, Pope John Paul II.

“The moment will be electric, not only because John Paul helped inflame the fervor for freedom in his Polish homeland that swept like brush fire across Eastern Europe.”—

Go look at these Hebrew words in verse 40. It is a mighty sweeping away.

—“Beyond that, the meeting of the two men symbolizes the end of the 20th century’s most dramatic spiritual war, a conflict in which the seemingly irresistible force of Communism battered against the immovable object of Christianity.” Time, December 4, 1989.

This was a war between the King of the South and the King of the North.

And after Gorbachev met with him, he went back and finished off the collapse of the Soviet Union. And then what did Gorbachev do?

He stepped down and he moved. He had been the King of the South; but, he stepped and he moved and took a position in Egypt, in the United Nations, and he still works there today. Because, this is the dragon here. The King of the South is the dragon, and the dragon moves through history; but, that is another story.

Time magazine, December 4, 1989:

“While Gorbachev’s hands-off policy was the immediate cause of the chain reaction of liberty that has swept through Eastern Europe in the past few months, John Paul deserves much of the longer-range credit.” Time, December 4, 1989.

Swept being one of the definitions of a whirlwind.

Reader’s Digest, March 1990:

“With the Pope’s support, Solidarity (Polish Labor Union) was formed, and John Paul II sent word to Moscow that if Soviet forces crushed Solidarity, he would go to Poland and stand with the people.”—

Okay. So, they are starting their protest in Poland, and he threatens them, this Pope threatens them, “If you are going to stomp these guys out, I am going to go over there and stand with them.”

Why is that a threat? Why is a man in Italy threatening to come to Poland a threat to them?

It has to do with Fatima. It has to do with Fatima.

See, there was a time—the Miracle of Fatima in Portugal was in a little, tiny village and it took place in the part of the village called the Cova da Iria on October 13, 1917; and, because the virgin Mary appeared to these three young children and gave them some messages, the Catholic Church, of course, turns this into a shrine and they built a church there now and it is a gigantic cathedral, Catholic church since 1917.

But, in order to build that church, they had to raise money to build that church. So, they made little Virgin of Fatima dolls and they sold them, and they raised their money by selling little Virgin of Fatima dolls. And there came a point of time in this history of building Fatima that they had a Virgin of Fatima statue, and they sent it around the world to visit certain countries to raise money. The Catholic Church is about raising money. And every country that this statute went to, there were miracles.

It went to Egypt, and as soon as it went to this Catholic Church in Egypt, the virgin Mary started appearing in Egypt.

It went to Brazil, and they put it in a courtyard in Brazil so people could come to see it; and, as soon as it got there, a flock of doves landed on its feet while thousands of people milled around for two weeks. Those doves never ate; they never drank. Do you know how long a bird can go without drinking water? It cannot go two weeks; but, those birds were alive the whole two weeks.

Miracles like this happened everywhere that statue went, and finally it went to Poland. And the communist authorities in Poland said, “We don’t want that statue. Send it home.” So, they sent it back to Portugal.

And then all these countries where these miracles had happened, they contacted the Polish authorities and they said, “You really ought to receive that statue. It has been a blessing.”

So, the Polish Government, they went to Cardinal Wyszyński, who was the head of the Polish Catholic structure at that time, and they said, “We will take your statue.”

And Cardinal Wyszyński said, “We don’t want your statue here now. What we want to do is build a church.”

And the Communists said, “Well, now, we said you could bring the statue.”

And he said, “No, we want to build a church.”

So, after some interplay, the Polish Government said, “Okay. You can build a church.”

It was the first church that was built in the Soviet Union since World War II. Of course, the Catholics understand that that church, the first Catholic Church that was built since World War II, was built because of the intercession of the Virgin Mary of Fatima.

So, they built the church and the Bishop that was in charge of building the first Catholic Church since the Communists took control of the Soviet Union after World War II, he builds the church and then in front of the church he puts a great big cross.

And the Communists came and said, “Hey, we told you that you could build a church; but, we didn’t tell you, you could put that cross up there.” So, they took a chainsaw and they cut it down.

So, this Bishop, he rebuilds the cross.

The Communists cut it down.

He rebuilds the cross.

The Communists cut it down.

He rebuilds it, and the Communists give up. They give up, and the historians point to that argument right there is what broke the mentality of the Communists in Poland, was this Bishop had the guts to stand up to the Communist authority and he won. And that Bishop ended up being Pope John Paul II. So, when he says, “If you crush this Solidarity Union, I am coming back to Poland,” they thought, “Oh, man! We don’t need this.” And they backed down.

That is the history about this statement, about his threat to come to Poland.

—“The Soviets were so alarmed that they hatched a plot to kill him. . . .”—

When we first started teaching this, there was still an argument, “Oh, the Soviets really didn’t hire this Islamic guy to try to assassinate the Pope.” But, since we first start teaching this, they have opened up the archives of the Soviet Union and, without a doubt, it is all there in black and white. It was the Soviet Union, the King of the South, that hired Mehmet Ali Ağca to assassinate Pope John Paul II.

But, he did not assassinate him, did he. He just gave him the deadly wound that was healed.

—“The Pope cautioned Solidarity leaders, particularly his friend Lech Walesa, to proceed slowly. They did. In 1988 General Wojciech Jaruzelski, the Polish communist leader, went to them offering a deal. Solidarity insisted on an election, which it carried with some 80 percent of the vote. When the Communist government fell, the impact on Eastern Europe was electrifying.” Reader’s Digest, March 1990.

Moving on. There is so much history on this verse, and it has been a long time since I have gone through this history. This is kind of fun.

Time magazine, December 11, 1989.

“When the Holy Roman Emperor Henry IV decided to seek pardon of Pope Gregory VII in 1077, he stood barefoot for three days in the snow outside the papal quarters in Canossa, Italy. Though Gorbachev’s concordat with the church was less arduous, it was no less significant in its way.” Time, December 11, 1989.

When he went to bow to the Pope, the demise of the Soviet Union was underway.

“GORBY’S BOW TO THE ROMAN LEGIONS” Title in the US News & World Report.

And the title of the US News & World Report from 1989 is, “Gorby’s Bow to the Roman Legions”: The King of the South bowing to the King of the North.

“The Soviet president’s session Friday with Pope John Paul II is the latest development of a revolution in the Communist world that the pope helped spark and Gorbachev has allowed to happen.” USA Today, cover story.

Life magazine, December 1989:

“In private meetings with heads of state, back room consultations with dissident groups and persistent propagandizing for his crusade against tyranny, he [John Paul II] has helped bring about the greatest policy change since the Russian Revolution.” Life, December 1989.

Dropping down to the next paragraph:

Jubilee, April 1990:

“In Poland the freedom movement was born almost three decades ago when the bishop of Krakow sought approval to build a new church. When Communist authorities denied his application, the bishop had a giant cross erected and celebrated open-air masses. The Communists tore it down. The church members replaced it over and over until finally the Communists gave up.” Jubilee, April 1990.

Time magazine, December 4, 1989:

“His [Pope John Paul II] triumphant tour of Poland in 1979, says Polish bishop, altered the ‘mentality of fear, the fear of police and tanks, of losing your job, of not getting promoted, of being thrown out of school, of failing to get a passport. People learned that if they ceased to fear the system, the system was helpless.’ Thus was born Solidarity, backed by the church and led by such friends of the pope as Lech Walesa and Tadeusz Mazowieke, who subsequently became the Soviet bloc’s first Christian Prime Minister.” Time, December 4, 1989.

But, also, “altered the ‘mentality of fear . . . ,’” is that the United States pumped $50 million in to be keeping them alive during this protest.

From Life magazine, December 1989:

“In May, 1981, before a vast audience in St. Peter’s Square, Pope John Paul was shot and severely wounded by Mehmet Ali Agea. There was immediate speculation that the gunman had been sent by East bloc plotters from Bulgaria, sponsored by the Soviet secret police. Their aim: to silence the one man capable of shaking the foundations of international Communism.” Life, December 1989.

And what is Pope John Paul II’s story? And you cannot believe these Catholic stories, but this is the story: He is in the car. The idol that Pope John Paul II worshipped was Mary of Fatima, and he sees a little girl with a Mary of Fatima button on, so he bends down to bless her, right as the guy is shooting. And had he not bent down, he would have been killed; but, he gets wounded. They take him to the hospital and he looks out the window, and the Miracle of Fatima takes place outside his window.

So then he calls for the secret messages of Fatima to be brought to him that none of the Popes had been willing to receive. They were all supposes to receive it. And he realizes that he is the Pope that is suppose to fulfill the message of Fatima.

And the message of Fatima, according to Catholics—and this is satanic prophecy—is that Pope John Paul II was the Good Pope, and that the Good Pope was going to be followed by the Bad Pope. I guess this makes this guy [Pope Benedict/Pope Francis] the Bad Pope.

And in the time of the Bad Pope, the Third World War was going to begin, even with nuclear weapons.

Are you watching what is going on in Iran?

And that this Third World War was going to annihilate some countries, but it is going to be brought immediately to an end very quickly because Jesus is going to return. And in the Miracle of Fatima, they know it is Jesus because, when he returns, what does he do? He calls fire down out of Heaven.

So, the Miracle of Fatima, when you look closely at it, you can see that it has the design and the mentality of Catholicism to receive Satan as Christ; and, it agrees with Adventist understanding of end-time events.

Time magazine, February 24, 1992:

“A COMMON BRUSH WITH DEATH—At their first meeting, Reagan and John Paul II discussed something else they had in common: both had survived assassination attempts that occurred only six weeks apart in 1981, and both believed God had saved them for a special mission. And both referred to the ‘miraculous fact that they had survived.’” Time magazine, February 24, 1992.

Chariots and Horsemen

“HOLY ALLIANCE,” Time magazine, February 24, 1992, Cover Title.

“Only President Ronald Reagan and Pope John Paul II were present in the Vatican Library on Monday, June 7, 1982. It was the first time the two had met, and they talked for 50 minutes. . . .

“In that meeting, Reagan and the pope agreed to undertake a clandestine campaign to hasten the dissolution of the Communist empire. Declares Richard Allen, Reagan’s first National Security Advisor: ‘This was one of the great secret alliances of all time.’. . . . “—

And I want you to take note, if you would, that as we go through this worship, that when we are identifying 1989 as the fulfillment of Daniel 11, verse 40, any historian that has any sensibilities about them would tell you that the greatest historical event in the 20^th Century was the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989.

And as we proceed on in this worship study and we get to 9/11/2001, with the bringing down of the Twin Towers, once again any historian that is worth his salt would tell you that the greatest historical event of the 21^st Century was 9/11.

So, when the Lord says that He confirms the fulfillment of prophecy by historical events, it is not just minor, obscure historical events. The greatest historical event of the 20^th Century is Daniel 11, verse 40, the collapse of the Soviet Union.

And you may think that we have got another 88 years in this century, so something else may happen that is more significant than 9/11; but, if you are thinking that, you really need to pinch yourself, because you are asleep. 9/11 is what is guiding the whole direction of Planet Earth right now.

So, we are making a point about the significance of which histories the Lord uses to fulfill prophecy.

—“’This was one of the great secret alliances of all time.’ . . . .

“‘Reagan came with very simple and strongly held views,’ says Admiral Bobby Inman, former deputy director of the CIA. ‘It is a valid point that he saw the collapse (of Communism) coming and he pushed it hard.’ During the first part of 1982, a five-part strategy emerged that was aimed at bringing about the collapse of the Soviet economy. . . .

1. The U.S. defense buildup, already under way, aimed at making it too costly for the Soviets to compete militarily with the U.S. Reagan’s Strategic Defense Initiative-Star Wars became a centerpiece of the strategy.

2. Covert operations aimed at encouraging reform movements in Hungary, Czechoslovakia, and Poland.”—

Smuggled the money into the Solidarity Union.

—“3. Financial aid to Warsaw-Pact nations calibrated to their willingness to protect human rights and undertake political and free-market reforms.”—

Start giving the poor nations of the Soviet Union money, so their sympathies would be drawn away from the leadership in Moscow.

—“4. Economic isolation of the Soviet Union and the withholding of Western and Japanese technology from Moscow. The administration focused on denying the USSR what it had hoped would be its principal source of hard currency in the twenty-first century: profits from a transcontinental pipeline to supply natural gas to Western Europe. . . .”—

The reason why Russia right now, today, has some cash flow is because they finally finished a pipeline from Siberia, all the way down to Western Europe; and, they were building that pipeline during this time period, but they did not have any money to build that pipeline. The money came from the United States. What Ronald Reagan did is he quit giving them money to build that pipeline, and they had been getting money from banks under the premise that “When the pipeline is finished, we’ll pay you back because we will have a bunch of oil.” So, once the United States quit giving them money to build the pipeline and the pipeline stopped, they had no collateral to get money from the banks. Ships, ships—

—“5. Increased use of Radio Liberty, Voice of America and Radio Free Europe to transmit Administration’s messages to the people of Eastern Europe. . . .

“‘Like all great and lucky leaders, the pope and President exploited the forces of history to their own ends.’ ” Time, February 4, 1992, 29–30.

—and propaganda.

Chariots

Reader’s Digest, March 1990:

“In 1981, the Communist bloc got another shock. A new American President, Ronald Reagan,”—

Why did Ronald Reagan say he wanted to bring down the Soviet Union? Because he said he believed it was the antichrist of Bible prophecy, and Ronald Reagan professed to be a Christian. And Sister White says that all those that become confused on the meaning of antichrist will ultimately end up on the side of antichrist, and he ended up in a secret alliance with the man of sin, even though every Protestant church at one point in time identified the Pope of Rome as the man of sin. He became confused in his understanding and he thought the Soviet Union was the antichrist of Bible prophecy, so he formed an alliance with the antichrist of Bible prophecy.

—“A new American President, Ronald Reagan, began fulfilling his promise to challenge the Soviets, not to placate them. Over the next few years, he accelerated the military buildup and announced the Strategic Defense Initiative (SDI), a space-based system for protecting against missile attack. He backed anti-communist rebels in Nicaragua, Angola, Cambodia, and Afghanistan. And with American troops, he liberated the island of Grenada from Communist thugs.

“The Soviets’ confidence was shaken. . . .

“The Western Europeans also pressured the Soviets. NATO forged ahead with military modernization. German voters spurned Soviet ‘peace overtures’ and elected a government that voted to deploy new intermediate-range missiles. . . .

“Military pressure from America and its Western allies had caused the Soviets to flinch.” Reader’s Digest, March 1990.

Ships

Time magazine, December 1989:

“Gorbachev has also grasped the fact that political and economic survival depends upon the goodwill of the Soviet people, among whom Christians have always outnumbered Communists. Gorbachev, moreover, needs the cooperation of the West, observes Father Mark, a reform-minded Orthodox priest in Moscow, who considers Gorbachev’s program within the USSR ‘a result of foreign policy necessity.’ ” Time, December 4, 1989.

Gorbachev was realizing that he was going bankrupt.

Reader’s Digest, March 1990:

“In the 1980s, Communist economies, always inefficient, went belly up. Before, they had lacked consumer and luxury goods. Now perennial shortages of staples worsened as well. When Soviet miners went on strike in 1989, their demands included soap, toilet paper, and sugar.” Reader’s Digest, March 1990.

And you have evidence of this.

US News and World Report, January 1990:

“For Gorbachev, the ferment in the Baltics is shaking not just a small corner of the empire built by Lenin and Stalin, but the foundations of the empire itself. The nationalities question is a potent distillation of many other signs, from a crumbling economy to violent ethnic clashes, that the breathtaking disintegration of the Soviet empire in Eastern Europe may not stop at the Soviet border. As the economy deteriorates and shortages grow, public disillusionment with Communism and with Gorbachev himself is rising, and hostile republics, nationalities and interests groups are competing more fiercely for political power and for shares in the shrinking economy. Corruption and crime are rampant; minors and railway workers threaten to cut off fuel supplies during the bitter winter; Azerbaijanis cut the rail line to an Armenian enclave in their midst; farmers hoard food, leaving city shelves bare.” US News and World Report, January 15, 1990.

Overflow

From Life magazine, December 1989:

“The rush to freedom in Eastern Europe is a sweet victory for John Paul II.” Life, December 1989.

Life magazine, December 1989:

“THE TRIUMPH OF JOHN PAUL II—The tide of freedom washing over Eastern Europe answers his most fervent prayer.” Life, December, 1989.

The reason why I am reading these, these are the words from Daniel 11, verse 40.

He Shall Pass Over

You will have evidence that as the Soviet Union collapsed, the political leaders that began to get elected into office were Catholics.

U S News and World Report, May 1990:

“When Tadeusz Mazowiecki took over in August 1989 as Poland’s first non-Communist prime minister in 45 years, he was asked if he was a socialist. ‘I am a Catholic,’ he answered tersely.” US News and World Report, May 21, 1990.

Time magazine, December 1989:

“Last year Lithuania’s two leading bishops were returned to head dioceses after a combined 53 years of internal exile, and the cathedral in Vilnius, previously used as an art museum, was restored for worship. This year the Belorussian republic got its first bishop in 63 years. That paved the way for Archbishop Angelo Sodano, who oversees the Vatican’s foreign relations, to make the arraignments for Gorbachev’s historic visit to the Holy See.

“These concessions to Catholicism are only part of Gorbachev’s religious liberalization.” Time, December 4, 1989.

Life magazine, December 1989:

“Three new Catholic bishops have recently been named in Czechoslovakia. And this month Gorbachev meets Pope John Paul II during a visit to Italy-the first face-to-face encounter between leaders of the Kremlin and the Vatican. The sessions may lead to legalization of the long-banned Ukrainian Catholic Church in the USSR.” Life, December, 1989.

US News and World Report, December 1989:

“The revival of religious freedom is expected to include lifting of an official ban on the five-million-member Ukraine Catholic Church, which has survived underground since 1946 when Stalin ordered it absorbed into the Russian Orthodox Church. Winning legalization for the Ukrainian Church has been a primary aim of the pope’s. Officials in the Soviet Union say they will clear the way for legalization by permitting Ukrainian Catholics to register, as other religious groups are now required to do under Soviet law.” US News and World Report, December 11, 1989.

Summary

So, what are we saying?

Daniel 11, verse 40, begins at the Time of the End in 1798. It is one of the most profound verses in God’s Word.

In 1989 this verse was fulfilled with the collapse of the Soviet Union, marking the Time of the End for the 144,000. That is pretty profound in itself, that the Time of the End for the beginning of Adventism and the Time of the End for the end of Adventism is in the very same verse.

But, the history that we are suggesting for this verse, we gave you two or three witnesses for every symbol, and the historians are loud and clear that what we say about that history is accurate.

We have more to say about that tomorrow.

Shall we pray?

Benediction: Heavenly Father, we want to be benefitted by the fact that you as the Lion of the tribe of Judah, as the Dirt Brush Man, began to unseal the testing truth for your people with the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989. We want to be among those that run to and fro in your Word and understand this increase of knowledge and allow this increase of knowledge to perfect your character within us. We know that time is short. We have been sleeping on as Laodicean Adventists, well beyond the fulfillment of verse 40, and we would ask that you would help us be about our business of preparing ourselves for the times that are just ahead, when verse 41 is fulfilled at The Sunday Law. We thank you for another day that we can serve you. We ask that you keep us safe and let us work in a way that we would glorify you this day, and we would ask for your continued blessing upon the work that we are attempting here. We thank you for these things in Jesus’s name. Amen.

Habakkuk’s Two Tables #45

PART SIX: 1989

Presented by Jeff Pippenger

Invocation by Brother Jeff Pippenger: Heavenly Father, we thank you for bringing us here this morning to consider the truth of your Word. We ask that you would resolve the problem that we have with the LiveStreaming today, after we finish here that we can continue on with this work. And as we take up the study of Daniel 11, verse 40, this morning, we ask that you grant us the presence of your Holy Spirit, that you would help us to understand the relevance and significance of the history of this verse, that the Holy Spirit might use it to further perfect our character that we might more fully represent you. I would ask that you take charge of this presentation and overrule my humanity, hide me behind your cross. Forgive me in any way that I have prevented you from speaking through me, and prepare the hearts and minds of those that are listening to these things to receive it as you intend. In Jesus’s name, amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: We had a rough start yesterday for a few minutes getting the LiveStream going; and, so I was a little bit anxious as we were going through.

And what we were looking at yesterday was the basic rundown of Daniel 11, verse 40, that in 1798, atheistic France began a war against the Papacy, but that the verse then describes when the Papacy will return and sweep away the king of Atheism, who at that in history is the Soviet Union.

And then we looked at a quote where in Selected Messages, book 2, page 102, where we were told historical events showing the direct fulfillment of prophecy were set before the people, and prophecy was seen to be a figurative delineation of events leading down to the close of this Earth’s history.

So, we then began to look at the historical record of the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989, and that is where I was kind of moving quickly. If you have those notes, one of the things that you want to look at as you go through is how often these secular authors would pull words right out of the 51 words that are in verse 40 to describe this history of verse 40. It is not an accident that this took place.

And to summarize down the relationship of the Papacy and the United States, we said that the United States was represented by the chariots, ships, and horsemen, and that in 1992 Time magazine wanted to go back and cover this history, and they got Carl Bernstein to do an article in here covering the history, just as we describe it, the history of the underground behind the scenes being accomplished by the operatives of the Catholic Church and the Soviet Union, and that the United States was supplying the financial pressure and the military pressure.

And when Bernstein wrote this article, he understood that this was the biggest story that he had ever covered; so, he went ahead and wrote this book, His Holiness John Paul II and the Hidden History of Our Time.

And I have not watched this Larry King interview for quite some time, but in it one of the things that always amazes me is that when he is going to interview Carl Bernstein about this book and tell some of the history that will confirm the history that we are identifying, there is a point—I forget exactly what it is, but we will find out in a moment—where he identifies that when this book was released, it was released in 11 languages, simultaneously. I think it was 11; maybe it was 6. My mind is foggy on that. But, if you have ever worked in publishing a book, to publish a book is one thing but to have it translated simultaneously into several languages and get them all published at the same time, for me that was always significant; because, it is this history that Seventh-day Adventists are going to be held accountable for understanding in terms of the Time of the End, the increase of knowledge, the Dirt Brush Man coming and beginning His work. So, you can see when the historians began to elaborate on this history, this perhaps was one of the most significant books. When it was released, it was released where Adventists in several different languages could get a hold of it.

So, we are going to look at this [video]. We cut it off short, because towards the end of the interview, it gets into areas we do not need to look at.

(At DVD 04:40 the Larry King Live interview of Carl Bernstein is shown to the audience.)

Announcer: Now from New York, here is Larry King!

Larry King: Good evening. A good show tonight: Valentino, Marla Maples, and Trump later. We are going to spend the first half hour with one of the best in the business, Carl Bernstein, the award winning journalist who, along with his former partner, Bob Woodward, changed the face of America in journalism, with “All the President’s Men” and their coverage of Watergate.

We now have his new book, His Holiness, from Doubleday. There you see its cover. It was co-written with Mr. Politi, an Italian journalist.

How did that come about?

Carl Bernstein: Marco Politi.

Larry King: Marco Politi.

Carl Bernstein: Well, this is a book that is really a biography, and at the same time it is history, the secret history of the end of the Cold War and the Pope’s role in it. And because I do not have a Catholic or widely known Christian background, I thought that I really needed a collaborator who could put context to information that I was getting.

Larry King: So, this was your baby, and you went to him?

Carl Bernstein: Exactly.

Larry King: And the two of you—is that hard? Well, you are used to it—right?— collaborating.

Carl Bernstein: I am used to it. It was a wonderful experience in the sense that Marco brings a dimension to this book, a European sensibility and understanding of the history of the Papacy and the Vatican that I just don’t have.

Larry King: Who did what writing? How did that work?

Carl Bernstein: I ended up sewing it all together, but he drafted some sections. The last part of the book, he is largely responsible for, in which you see the Pope in isolation in the declining years of his life.

Larry King: Well, maybe I am stupid, but is this your first major biography of this Pope?

Carl Bernstein: It is the first biography that really tells you what he has done and how he has been the great leader of our time.

Larry King: How did you, who are associated with other things, come to do a biography of the Pope, which Bob Woodward said on this program that it is one of the best books he has ever read?

Carl Bernstein: Well, First of all, it is about the power, and all of my books and work have been about power and the exercise of power.

I wrote a cover story for Time magazine saying that Pope John Paul II and Ronald Reagan had collaborated secretly to keep Solidarity—the Solidarity Labor Movement alive in Poland after the imposition of martial law, and this was the turning point and the great event at the end of the Cold War.

To my amazement, Gorbachev wrote a response to my piece in the New York Times, saying, “Yes, and without this Pope none of the events in Eastern Europe would have occurred.”

And at that point I said that my intuitive sense of this man is one thing, but this is really the great story of our time.

Larry King: But did you attempt an interview?

Carl Bernstein: Yes. I did not get it, but we traveled with him. Marco has traveled with the Pope for 15 years, which is another dimension that Marco brings to this book. But, I really talked to the people closest to him and had access to remarkable secret documents, particularly in Washington, detailing the secret relationship, the visits made by CIA Director Casey to the Pope. Special Ambassador Vernon Walters, the one that took visits every six months that were totally secret, one of the biggest secrets that we had, to see the Pope.

Larry King: You got the cables?

Carl Bernstein: I got the cables.

Larry King: Are they in the book?

Carl Bernstein: Yes. Some of them. It talks about how the Pope examined satellite photos, Soviet troop deployments. We shared all of our most important intelligence with the Pope, particularly about Poland, which was the lynch pin to the end of Communism and the Soviet Union.

Larry King: Maybe Marco may be better to answer this, but I will ask of you: Why don’t Popes do interviews?

Carl Bernstein: I think they feel that they are above it. I think that is a good enough reason.

Larry King: They do talk occasionally to a Cardinal—yes?—to do a Q&A.

Carl Bernstein: This Pope is the most media conscious Pope that there has ever been. He has written a book. He puts out a version of events that he wants to be put out.

And he has done interviews. He does interviews in which he has the questions submitted to him, and then he brings it out as a book later.

Larry King; (Laughter).

Carl Bernstein: Which we should all be able to do interviews like that.

Larry King: Like Bob Hope.

Carl Bernstein: Yes, exactly!

Larry King: Not a bad move (laughter).

Carl Bernstein: Yeah.

Larry King: But he is though, is he not, a great study in contradiction, that we can make the case that inside the Church he is one of the most conservative prelates; outside he is a Socialist. He is anti-capitalism. He is against big money. He thinks we should share the wealth, et cetera. Is he two people?

Carl Bernstein: He is more, than anything, a man of contradiction. He feels very close to women, and at the same time he has a tormented relationship, obviously, with all of womankind. He has got huge problems with the women in his church; they are leaving. The nuns are angry at him for not giving them an increased role in the Church. He is a dogmatic conservative and a liberal humanist.

Larry King: We can find very few of them in the United States, very few of them anywhere. How do you explain it? You must go back and explain this.

Carl Bernstein: Well, I think you have to look at his Polishness. He grew up under the Nazi occupation and then under the Communists in Catholic Poland, which was an area of Catholicism that was untouched by Western Catholicism.

But, I think the important thing to understand about this man is that he believes that he is divinely inspired. He is a mystic. That is the other key thing about him. He is a true mystic. He prays six to eight hours a day, lying down on the floor, his arms prone, as if he were on the cross.

Larry King: Hmm.

Carl Bernstein: He believes in apparitions of the Virgin. He believes he is the own life has been saved by the Virgin of Fatima. So, he seeks and acts on what he believes is divine inspiration, and this was particularly true in his struggle with the Communists, and particularly true in deciding that he and Ronald Reagan could work together.

Larry King: That is where the Humanism came from—right?—the struggle against oppressors?

Carl Bernstein: Well, I think the Humanism comes from his interpretation of God’s will. I think it is more than just oppressors. He is someone who believes. He is a great champion of human rights and universal values, although there are women who would say that—

Larry King: In the area of human rights, abortion aside, maybe the number one spokesman in the world.

Carl Bernstein: Absolutely, he and Mandela. He and Nelson Mandela are the only great spokesmen in the world for universal principles.

Larry King: Our guest has been Carl Bernstein. The book has been published in about—what?—15 countries, simultaneously.

Carl Bernstein: Twelve countries.

Larry King: Twelve countries; that may be a first.

The book is His Holiness. The publisher in the West is Doubleday.

We will be back with Carl Bernstein on Larry King Live right after this.

(Break in program, and video resumes with President Ronald Reagan speaking)

President Ronald Reagan (presentation in progress, opening with camera shot of Pope John Paul II): In Poland you experienced Nazism and Communism. As Pope you suffered a terrorist attack that nearly claimed your life. Still you proclaim that the central message of our own time, that the central message of all time is not hatred but love.

(Applause)

Larry King: Tonight’s show is the Road to Rome. Valentino later.

Our guest is Carl Bernstein. His book, His Holiness, from Doubleday, written with Marco Politi.

Right?

Carl Bernstein: Right.

Larry King: And published in 12 countries, simultaneously.

Carl Bernstein has always been very good at unearthing secrets. He finds a big one in this book, which is . . . ?

Carl Bernstein: Well, the United States’ greatest secret of the end of the Cold War was that it spent $50 million for the CIA to keep Solidarity alive underground after martial law had been imposed by the Communists.

And I went to Bob Gates, who had been Bill Casey’s Assistant Director and later Director of the CIA, and I said, “How did this secret keep?”

Because, had it been blown, it would have been devastating and the whole Cold War might have turned out differently.

And he looked at me and he said, “Good secrets keep. Bad secrets leak.”

And this was our great secret.

Larry King: And the Pope is involved.

Carl Bernstein: The Pope was aware of it. He was told by President Reagan, by Casey during his visits, and by Walters of this support for Solidarity. He gave his own financial support to Solidarity.

But, what really happened, is Casey and the Pope engaged in what Casey called a geostrategic dialogue. He would come to Rome first on his visits when he would go around the world and come to see the Pope, and they would discuss particularly what was happening with the Soviet Union and what was happening with Soviet leadership, what was going on in Central America where the Pope and the Reagan Administration were very much in alliance. In fact, Oliver North gave money illegally to priests in Nicaragua. So, this was an alliance quite unlike anything that had ever happened.

Larry King: Was it a tough story to work?

Carl Bernstein: Yes, because it was an institution that I was unfamiliar with and, at the same time—you know, I believe people tell the truth. People want to tell the truth. And if you are a good listener and you go to see them and they know you have no preconceived notions about what it is that you are going to write, except what you find out to be the truth, you learn great things.

Larry King: What surprised you the most about the Pope?

Carl Bernstein: The greatest—well, the greatest surprise about this secret alliance to me—the greatest surprise about the Pope was his mysticism.

But, the greatest surprise about the secret alliance, I think, was the fact that the Pope was a crucial factor in our introducing cruise missiles into Europe. As a Deputy Secretary of State told me, the American Bishops, the European Bishops were all against the deployment of those missiles, which were the crucial aspect of American strategy in the Reagan defense buildup. And as the Deputy told me, he said if the Pope had gotten up one Sunday and said, “We don’t want cruise missiles in one of the Catholic countries in Europe,” this would have been the end of the deployment of cruise missiles.

So, what these secret cables from Walters show is almost every visit that Walters made to visit the Pope, you see the reference it says, “I showed the Pope the overhead photography,” which means the satellite photos.

And then he says, “I gave him the SS-20 briefing,” which is to brief him on American nuclear strategy and why the United States felt that those missiles were so important in Western Europe.

Larry King: Therefore, he is not just one of the more important Popes.

Carl Bernstein: Oh, no.

Larry King: He is one of the more important people.

Carl Bernstein: He is one of the great political figures of this century; and, certainly with Gorbachev and Reagan, these are the three men that have dominated the last part of our century.

Larry King: Why didn’t Gorbachev and Reagan discuss this more?

Why didn’t they give him credit?

Carl Bernstein: They do.

Larry King: They probably made speeches where—

Carl Bernstein: I went to see Ronald Reagan in 1991 when I first worked on this story. And I said, “Mr. President, how did this happen?”

And he said, “It was easy. I wanted to make them an ally,” he said of the Vatican. And that is what he proceeded to do.

Larry King: But we didn’t read this daily in our newspapers.

Carl Bernstein: Of course not. It was a great secret. It was our great secret. Here was a strategic super power and a spiritual super power combining their intelligence capabilities.

Remember, this is not a formal signed alliance. This is a convergence of interests, parallel interests.

Larry King: Can one say maybe religion shouldn’t have been involved in this kind of story, that another Pope might have said, “Leave me out!”?

Carl Bernstein: Well, I think there are more serious questions about the separation of church and state in America.

Larry King: Yeah, sure.

Carl Bernstein: I mean, we certainly don’t show satellite photos to the Dalai Lama; and, the Pope is in great competition—

Larry King: Or to the head of the Greek Orthodox Church?

Carl Bernstein: Well, exactly. And he is in competition with souls with the Protestant Fundamentalist Sects, with the Muslims. And each time the Pope would go to a country that he would visit—and this is the most peripatetic Pope, of course, that has ever been. He has traveled, you know, to a hundred countries in the world. We would brief him on the country he was about to go to. He would receive the CIA briefing materials on that country. So, it raises some serious questions about—

Larry King: Extraordinarily bright?

Carl Bernstein: Very bright, extraordinarily bright. He is a poet. He is a philosopher.

Larry King: A playwright?

Carl Bernstein: He is a playwright, an extraordinary man; one of the great men of our time.

Larry King: More about this fascinating gentleman by this fascinating author, Carl Bernstein. The book, His Holiness, from Doubleday. Don’t go away.

(Break in program)

Larry King: Back a little, this book, His Holiness—back a little: How did Pope John Paul II get to be Pope?

Carl Bernstein: Well, his predecessor died after 33 days.

Larry King: He has been Pope for how long now?

Carl Bernstein: He has now been Pope since 1978. So, he has been Pope longer than any other Pope in this century, except one. And although he is very ill and infirm, he wants to be alive for the Millennium. And I wouldn’t count him out.

Larry King: You would not?

Carl Bernstein: I would not.

Larry King: He looks so frail.

Carl Bernstein: He is frail. He has got Parkinson’s. He may have another tumor. He is undergoing what they say is an appendectomy this week, which I think will also involve some exploratory surgery.

Larry King: He has been shocked.

Carl Bernstein: And he has been shocked.

The assassination is fascinating.

Larry King: Well, how did he get to be Pope?

Carl Bernstein: He got to be Pope because the Cardinals were looking (1) for someone who was tough on doctrine, which he is; (2) who was a humanist, who could be a force at the same time against the trends towards materialism in the West, back towards more spirituality; and (3) above all, his experience with the Communists. They were finally ready for a non-Italian Pope, the first non-Italian Pope in 450 years.

Larry King: And they chose someone that nobody could say, “I totally dislike,” or “I totally love.”

Carl Bernstein: Exactly.

(End of video interview)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: So, what we are saying is, historical events are set before the people, and prophecy is confirmed. And what we are suggesting is represented in Daniel 11, verse 40, has been confirmed loud and clear by the historians of our time period.

About three weeks ago, four weeks ago, they dedicated a couple of statues in Poland, one of the Pope and one of Reagan. You just cannot get away from the fact that this was the biggest history of the last century, and that this is a fulfillment of the Book of Daniel, and it is from the Book of Daniel that God marks the Time of the End and the increase of knowledge.

So, we are going to switch gears here now, still dealing Daniel 11, verse 40, and we are going to start on page 1 of our notes.

Oh, before, I knew there was something that I wanted to say. Somewhere in the past worship service we have mentioned Daniel 11, verse 30. We dealt with it a little bit. And in verse 30 of Daniel 11 is the end of the story of Pagan Rome and the transition to Papal Rome, and we have looked at what Uriah Smith said about it.

And Pagan Rome is coming to a conclusion in Daniel 11, verse 30. And what marks the end of Pagan Rome being the primary subject in this passage is when it has intelligence with them that forsook the holy covenant, them that forsook the holy covenant being the Papacy.

And I hope you saw that the way this secret alliance was carried out is by the Central Intelligence Agency, and they were having intelligence with the man that has forsook the holy covenant; and, from this point on in the passage, then, the Pope becomes the point of reference, the Papacy.

This is worth noting because as we proceed through this study, Sister White is going to quote verses 30 through 36 of Daniel 11, in connection with the final fulfillment of Daniel 11, and saying, “Similar to those described in these words, verses 30 to 36 will be repeated in verses 40 to 45. So, this confirmation of the intelligence between the United States and the Vatican, it even uses the same word: intelligence, Central Intelligence Agency.

So, now to our notes. We will get to this repetition of history somewhere down the line in the future.

The Rise of the Great Controversy

Education, page 391 says,

“The Bible is its own expositor. Scripture is to be compared with scripture. The student should learn to view the word as a whole, and to see the relation of its parts. He should gain a knowledge of its grand central theme, of God’s original purpose for the world, of the rise of the great controversy,”—

There are people that fight against what we are teaching, and one of the arguments is that their prophetic understanding is based upon the book, The Great Controversy. And if it is not specifically marked in the book, The Great Controversy, then it is just speculation on these men’s parts about what they are saying.

But, the book, The Great Controversy, is absolutely the present truth book for the hour. I am not downplaying that; but, the book, The Great Controversy, is based upon the principle that the Great Controversy began in Heaven with Lucifer’s rebellion, and it continues until the end of the issue; and, the Great Controversy is much broader than simply the book, The Great Controversy.

—“He [the student] should gain a knowledge of its grand central theme [of the Bible], of God’s original purpose for the world, of the rise of the great controversy, and of the work of redemption. He should understand the nature of the two principles that are contending for supremacy, and should learn to trace their working through the records of history and prophecy, to the great consummation. He should see how this controversy enters into every phase of human experience; how in every act of life he himself reveals the one or the other of the two antagonistic motives; and how, whether he will or not, he is even now deciding upon which side of the controversy he will be found.” Education, 191.

So, we want to add a component to our consideration of Daniel 11, verse 40 to 45, and that being that this is the climax of the Great Controversy. And because this is the climax of the Great Controversy, these verses, at least on Planet Earth; because, when you get to Daniel 12:1, Michael stands up and human probation closes. This is the climax of the Great Controversy in terms of probationary time for human beings.

Michael: “Who is like God?”

Revelation 12:7-9

Daniel’s last vision, chapters 10 through 12, is placed in the context of the Great Controversy; and, it is done so by the term “Michael.”

You see in your notes, “Michael,” and it means Who is like God? So, when you see Christ represented as Michael, that means Who is like God?, and it is telling you that when Christ is set forth in the Scriptures as Michael, there is a controversy going on about Who is like God?. And you are only going to find “Michael” mentioned three times in the Scriptures; but, upon the testimony of two or three a thing is established. So, every time you see “Michael” in the Scriptures, you see Him in direct confrontation with Satan.

Okay. So, when it comes to the King of the North, the King of the North is the Pope of Rome, but the Pope of Rome is the representative of Satan upon Earth.

And the true King of the North is Christ. And this Great Controversy that is symbolically represented by Michael is giving us another line to understand who the King of the North and what the King of the North in Daniel 11 is all about.

In Revelation 12, verses 7 through 9, it is familiar to all of us. It says,

“⁷And there was war in heaven: Michael and his angels fought against the dragon; and the dragon fought and his angels, ⁸And prevailed not; neither was their place found any more in heaven. ⁹And the great dragon was cast out, that old serpent, called the Devil, and Satan, which deceiveth the whole world: he was cast out into the earth, and his angels were cast out with him.” Revelation 12:7-9 (KJV).

Here we see Michael at the very beginning of the Great Controversy in war with Satan, and Satan is cast out with the angels to Planet Earth.

In Seventh-day Adventist Bible Commentary, volume 7, page 973:

“In so deceptive a way did he [Lucifer] work that the sentiments that he inculcated could not be dealt with until they had developed in the minds of those who received them.

“The influence of mind on mind, so strong a power for good when sanctified, is equally strong for evil in the hands of those opposed to God. This power Satan used in his work of instilling evil into the minds of the angels, and he made it appear that he was seeking the good of the universe. As the anointed cherub, Lucifer had been highly exalted; he was greatly loved by the heavenly beings, and his influence over them was strong. Many of them listened to his suggestions and believed his words. ‘And there was war in heaven: Michael and his angels fought against the dragon; and the dragon fought and his angels, and prevailed not; neither was their place found any more in heaven.’

“Cast out of heaven, Satan set up his kingdom in this world, and ever since, he has been untiringly striving to seduce human beings from their allegiance to God. He uses the same power that he used in heaven—the influence of mind on mind. Men become tempters of their fellow men. The strong, corrupting sentiments of Satan are cherished, and they exert a masterly, compelling power. Under the influence of these sentiments, men bind up with one another in confederacies.” The Seventh-day Adventist Bible Commentary, volume 7, 973.

So, one of the things about the Great Controversy, when you see Michael illustrated, is that the way that Satan works is mind upon mind; and, we need to understand that in our own sphere of influence and interaction, who is it that is going to deceive us? Well, it is going to be another mind, and it is going to be another mind that we have respect for, someone that has been exalted in religious things.

We are not going to be deceived by the drug addict on the street. We are going to be deceived by this wonderful flowery pastor or preacher, and he is going to work upon our mind and give us errors that we do not even realize that we are receiving, until they have already developed their fruit in our own minds. At least, that is sometimes part of the story.

Michael the Archangel

Jude 1:5-9

Jude 1, beginning at verse 5:

“⁵I will therefore put you in remembrance, though ye once knew this, how that the Lord, having saved the people out of the land of Egypt, afterward destroyed them that believed not. ⁶And the angels which kept not their first estate, but left their own habitation, he hath reserved in everlasting chains under darkness unto the judgment of the great day. ⁷Even as Sodom and Gomorrha, and the cities about them in like manner, giving themselves over to fornication, and going after strange flesh, are set forth for an example, suffering the vengeance of eternal fire. ⁸Likewise also these filthy dreamers defile the flesh, despise dominion, and speak evil of dignities. ⁹Yet Michael the archangel, when contending with the devil he disputed about the body of Moses, durst not bring against him a railing accusation, but said, The Lord rebuke thee.” Jude 1:5-9 (KJV).

So, here we see Michael in confrontation once again with Satan over the resurrection of Moses.

Now, these are the three points in the story of Michael: (1) the war in Heaven; (2) whether Christ has the power and authority to resurrect; and, then, of course, (3) we know in Daniel 12:1 Michael stands up. And now He is demonstrating His power to save a group of people that do not need to be resurrected; because, when He stands up, everyone that has the Seal of God, they are going to live without dying until Christ returns.

So, the story of Michael is the story of the rebellion in Heaven, and the story of Christ’s authority to resurrect the righteous, and His authority to save those that we call the 144,000 that do not die.

And, there is more to what went on in that interaction between Satan and Michael at the resurrection of Moses. Sister White says this in The Spirit of Prophecy, volume 1, pages 342 – 343:

“Satan exulted that he had succeeded in causing Moses to sin against God. For this transgression, Moses came under the dominion of death. If he had continued faithful, and his life had not been marred with that one transgression, in failing to give to God the glory of bringing water from the rock, he would have entered the Promised Land, and would have been translated to Heaven without seeing death. Michael, or Christ, with the angels that buried Moses, came down from Heaven, after he had remained in the grave a short time, and resurrected him, and took him to Heaven.”—

I wonder how long he was in the grave. I have no idea. I get criticized for speculation, but I bet you he was resurrected on the third day.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Laughter).

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“As Christ and the angels approached the grave, Satan and his angels appeared at the grave, and were guarding the body of Moses, lest it should be removed. As Christ and his angels drew nigh, Satan resisted their approach, but was compelled, by the glory and power of Christ and his angels, to fall back. Satan claimed the body of Moses, because of his one transgression; but Christ meekly referred him to his Father, saying, ‘The Lord rebuke thee.’ Christ told Satan that he knew Moses had humbly repented of this one wrong, that no stain rested upon his character, and that his name in the heavenly book of records stood untarnished. Then Christ resurrected the body of Moses, which Satan had claimed.” The Spirit of Prophecy, volume 1, 342–343.

So, when we see Michael in the Scriptures—“Michael,” meaning Who is like God?—He is always in confrontation with Satan.

Daniel’s Last Vision

This is the Great Controversy. It is the issue of Christ or Satan. And the climax of this story is in Daniel’s last vision, and Daniel’s last vision reaches its climax in the last six verses of Daniel 11. So, this truth about the Great Controversy about Michael, it has to be one of the components that you factor in to your understanding of the last six verses of Daniel 11.

SAR: Strong’s Concordance H8269—a head person (of any rank or class):—captain (that had rule), chief (captain), general, governor, keeper, lord, ([-task-]) master, prince (-ipal), ruler, steward.

And Daniel’s last vision, which is chapters 10 through 12, you are going to see in chapter 10 a confrontation between “Michael your prince,” and “the prince of Persia.”

And this word PRINCE is sar. It means a military commander. You see it defined there: a head person, a captain, a chief (captain), a governor, a keeper, lord, master, prince, ruler, steward.

When you see Michael in a confrontation with Satan, it is a war. It is a controversy. It is a struggle.

These princes in Daniel, chapter 10, the prince of Persia and Michael your prince, are representing the warfare that is going on in this time period.

And this word sar, occurs 420 times in the Old Testament, and it refers especially to military commanders.

In Joshua 5:15, it says,

“¹⁵And the captain [sar] of the Lord’s host said unto Joshua, Loose thy shoe from off thy foot; for the place whereon thou standest is holy. And Joshua did so.” Joshua 5:15 (KJV).

So, the prince of Persia and Michael your prince in Daniel 10, it is representing this Great Controversy, this argument about Who is like God?, and it is representing a spiritual warfare.

Sister White comments on Daniel 10 in this truth found in The Seventh-day Adventist Bible Commentary, volume 4, page 1173. She quotes verses 12 and 13 of Daniel 10. Let us read that. Daniel 10: 12-13:

“[Daniel 10:12–13 quoted.] ¹²Then said he unto me, Fear not, Daniel: for from the first day that thou didst set thine heart to understand, and to chasten thyself before thy God, thy words were heard, and I am come for thy words. ¹³But the prince of the kingdom of Persia withstood me one and twenty days; but, lo, Michael, one of the chief princes, came to help me; and I remained there with the kings of Persia.”—

Okay. Gabriel was trying to convince Cyrus to follow through on his willingness to allow the children of Israel to go back and rebuild Jerusalem. Cyrus is the king of Persia.

But, in Gabriel’s attempt to direct the mind of Cyrus, Satan is there, the prince of Persia; and, he is having to deal with the prince of Persia, Satan, and he cannot prevail. So, Michael your prince comes in.

But, you will notice in those verses 12 and 13 that you have the prince of Persia and the king of Persia. Sister White quotes those two verses, and then she says this:

—“By this we see that heavenly agencies have to contend with hindrances before the purpose of God is fulfilled in its time. The king of Persia was controlled by the highest of all evil angels.”—

Who is the highest of all evil angels?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Satan.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Satan.

—“He refused, as did Pharaoh, to obey the word of the Lord. Gabriel declared, He withstood me twenty-one days by his representations against the Jews. But Michael came to his help, and then he remained with the kings of Persia, holding the powers in check, giving right counsel against evil counsel. Good and evil angels are taking a part in the planning of God in His earthly kingdom. It is God’s purpose to carry forward His work in correct lines, in ways that will advance His glory. But Satan is ever trying to counterwork God’s purpose. Only by humbling themselves before God can God’s servants advance His work. Never are they to depend on their own efforts or on outward display for success.

“We have before us in the Word of God instances of heavenly agencies working on the minds of kings and rulers, while at the same time satanic agencies were also at work on their minds. No human eloquence, in strongly set forth human opinions, can change the working of satanic agencies. Satan seeks continually to block the way, so that the truth shall be bound about by human devising; and those who have light and knowledge are in the greatest danger unless they constantly consecrate themselves to God, humiliating self, and realizing the peril of the times.” The Seventh-day Adventist Bible Commentary, volume 4, 1173.

Okay. In our studies here, and this might challenge some people’s understanding of what we teach or how you are to teach the message, but we are going to get to the point where we are going to look at Ezekiel 37. In Ezekiel 37 you have two messages. You have the First and Second Angels’ Messages marked in Ezekiel 37. And the First Message causes a noise and a shaking. So, we are going to get to a point in time where we look at Ezekiel 37’s First Angel’s Message, and it causes a noise and a shaking. And this word noise is translated that way, but it can be translated as the voice. Okay. The First Message is the voice crying in the wilderness.

And this voice, this First Message in Ezekiel 37, it causes a shaking, but it also brings the body together, the bones, the sinews, the flesh. It brings them together, but they are not alive until the Second Message comes, the Message of the Four Winds.

So, when we get to that point in our study, we are going to put that into the mix, because the shaking, the shaking, is part of the prophetic message.

Okay. When the First Message comes, in 1989 when the Dirt Brush Man begins to sweep away the rubbish, the customs and traditions in Adventism that are preventing some of God’s people from seeing that Daniel 11, verse 40, was fulfilled and that the Lord is now bringing His people together to finish the work, there is a shaking that goes on in Adventism. And the shaking is caused by those people that are resisting this message.

So, once this message came into history, there have been certain personalities in this history that have opposed it and have caused some people grief uf you name those men and say, “This man did this,” or “This man did that.” But, it is part of the prophetic record and it needs to be addressed; because, there are some of their arguments that were brought against this message that was what the Lord used to further open up light.

Okay. I will give you an example. We will deal with it in detail later, but I will give you an example. There was an argument that the glorious land was the Seventh-day Adventist Church, but the glorious land is the United States of America. So, this argument went on a great deal. And the Lord in seeking to be clear about the glorious land being the United States of America, He opened up the fact that Pagan Rome, when it took control of the world, they had to conquer three geographical areas; and, when Papal Rome took control of the world, they had to remove three geographical areas. Therefore, when modern Rome in Daniel 11:40-45 is taking control of the world, those obstacles have to be geographical areas. This truth would not have been recognized if there had not been anybody saying, “Hey, the glorious land is the Seventh-day Adventist Church.” But, there is a whole group of people saying the glorious land is the Seventh-day Adventist Church. This false argument was used by the Lion of the tribe of Judah to lead the students of prophecy deeper into their study of God’s Word to recognize one of the arguments against that—that is not the only argument against that false teaching—but, when you recognize that argument, then you recognize something that had not been recognized before. And what is that?

You would think this group would know. What is that? What is it that I just explained to you?

Pardon me?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The glorious land?

BROTHER PIPPENGER: No. We were talking about the glorious land, but we are talking about the argument to defend the glorious land was—

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The repeat of history?

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The repeat of history, close.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Triple application?

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Triple application of prophecy: Pagan Rome, Papal Rome, modern Rome. And suddenly you can see Elijah, the first; John the Baptist, Elijah the second; and, Elijah the third at the end of the world.

The triple application of prophecy allows you to see that is the First Woe is Islam and the Second Woe is Islam, then the Third Woe is Islam.

So, the shaking that goes on in this history, represented and marked by Ezekiel 37’s First Message, is part of the story. So, we are going to address some of those issues so we can understand how the Lion of the tribe of Judah put these things in place.

So, when it comes to Daniel 11, verse 40 through 45, there were people—not very many, but there have been some—that argued that the King of the North here in these last six verses is not the Papacy.

We have shown that from the Bible the power that opposes God’s people at the end of the world that it is the Northern King, and that Northern King is Babylon; and, we have shown that at the end of the world, we are looking for a spiritual Babylon and that Revelation 17 marks the Papacy as spiritual Babylon and, therefore, the Papacy is the King of the North.

We have shown also that the only place that you see the struggle between the King of the North and the King of the South in the Scriptures is in Daniel 11, and that the power that controls Babylon is the King of the North. So, we have been putting some arguments in place to identify that the King of the North is the Papacy.

We have also shown that in verse 31, when the abomination that maketh desolate is placed in AD538 that this is the Papacy and that there is no grammatical change from verse 31 to 40 that allows you to identify different kings than the Papacy.

But, what we want to add to that now is that we read a quote, the first quote we talked about this morning. I left off the last sentence of the quote from Selected Messages, book 2, page 102, I believe. It is on page 3 of your notes from yesterday. The last sentence in that quote says,

“. . . The scenes connected with the working of the man of sin are the last features plainly revealed in this earth’s history.” Selected Messages, book 2, 102.

So, when we understand that the last six verses of Daniel 11 are the last scenes of Earth’s history, then you expect to see the man of sin portrayed in those scenes; therefore, to identify the King of the North as the Papacy is in agreement with that passage.

But, also, when you understand that the climax of the story of Michael in the Scriptures is in Daniel’s last vision, and you understand that Michael is the controversy over Who is like God?, then you see that this controversy should be in these verses that lead to Michael standing up.

And on page 3 of your notes—and I am not going to go all the way through this. I am going to close this with just making a point, and then we are going to take up our notes tomorrow right here on page 3.

The Sides of the North

Isaiah 14:12-17; Psalm 48

But, in Isaiah 14, beginning in verse 12, it says,

“¹²How art thou fallen from heaven, O Lucifer, son of the morning!”—

When did he fall from Heaven? When there was war in Heaven.

With whom?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Michael.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Michael.

—“how art thou cut down to the ground, which didst weaken the nations! ¹³For thou hast said in thine heart, I will ascend into heaven,”—

Remember, the whirlwind in verse 40, the mighty sweeping away, it means to ascend. When the Papacy is sweeping away the Soviet Union in 1989, it is beginning its ascent to the throne of the Earth. And ascending is a characteristic of the Papacy and Satan.

And Sister White tells us that the Protestants of the United States are going to restore the last ascendency of the man of sin.

So, in verse 13, it says,

—“¹³For thou has said in thine heart, I will ascend into heaven, I will exalt my throne above the stars of God: I will sit also upon the mount of the congregation, in the sides of the north: ¹⁴I will ascend above the heights of the clouds; I will be like the most High.”—

So, if you are careful in your consideration of these verses, you see that Satan wants to seat himself on two places. He wants to exalt his throne above the stars of God, but he will sit also—“I will sit also”—upon the mount of the congregation. Satan wants to sit upon God’s political throne, and he wants to sit upon His religious throne, the Church; and, his Church is the mount of the congregation, which is in the sides of the North.

—“¹⁵Yet thou shalt be brought down to hell, to the sides of the pit. ¹⁶They that see thee shall narrowly look upon thee, and consider thee, saying, Is this the man that made the earth to tremble, that did shake kingdoms; ¹⁷That made the world as a wilderness, and destroyed the cities thereof; that opened not the house of his prisoners?” Isaiah 14:12-17 (KJV).

And if you go to Psalm 48, Psalm 48 tells us what the sides of the North are. Beginning in verse 1, it says,

“¹Great is the Lord, and greatly to be praised in the city of our God, in the mountain of his holiness. ²Beautiful for situation, the joy of the whole earth, is mount Zion, on the sides of the north, the city of the great King. ³God is known in her palaces for a refuge. ⁴For, lo, the kings were assembled, they passed by together. ⁵They saw it, and so they marvelled; they were troubled, and hasted away. ⁶Fear took hold upon them there, and pain, as of a woman in travail. ⁷Thou breakest the ships of Tarshish with an east wind. ⁸As we have heard, so have we seen in the city of the Lord of hosts, in the city of our God: God will establish it for ever. Selah. ⁹We have thought of thy lovingkindness, O God, in the midst of thy temple. ¹⁰According to thy name, O God, so is thy praise unto the ends of the earth: thy right hand is full of righteousness. ¹¹Let mount Zion rejoice, let the daughters of Judah be glad, because of thy judgments. ¹²Walk about Zion, and go round about her: tell the towers thereof. ¹³Mark ye well her bulwarks, consider her palaces; that ye may tell it to the generation following. ¹⁴For this God is our God for ever and ever: he will be our guide even unto death.” Psalm 48 (KJV).

Okay. The king that sits upon Mount Zion is God; but, who wants to sit there?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Satan.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Satan. Satan wants to counterfeit God.

And what is the counterfeit about in this sense? It is a counterfeit King of the North, the sides of the North.

So, when you understand that Satan is counterfeiting the King of the North, and you come back into Daniel 11:40-45 and you ask yourself who is the King of the North, you have another line of reasoning to identify the King of the North as Satan.

And if you return to your notes now, it says, from Testimonies, volume 9, page 230,

“The determination of antichrist to carry out the rebellion he began in heaven will continue to work in the children of disobedience.” Testimonies, volume 9, 230.

Who is the antichrist of Bible prophecy?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Papacy.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Everyone just said the Papacy; but, is that what she is saying here: “The determination of antichrist to carry out the rebellion he began in heaven . . .” ?

You see, Satan and the Pope are interchangeable terms. When you see the antichrist, you have to determine by context if it is talking about the Papacy or Satan.

This antichrist here, this is the one that caused the rebellion in Heaven.

But, what does he want to do; what does Lucifer want to do? He wants to be seated on the sides of the North. He wants to be the King of the North. Satan wants to be the King of the North.

How does he accomplish that?

The next quote, The Great Controversy, page 50:

“To secure worldly gains and honors, the church was led to seek the favor and support of the great men of earth; and having thus rejected Christ, she was induced to yield allegiance to the representative of Satan—the bishop of Rome.” The Great Controversy, 50.

So, if the Bishop of Rome is the antichrist, and Satan is the antichrist, and Satan wants to be the counterfeit King of the North, what does the Pope want to be? The counterfeit King of the North. This is another argument to identify who the King of the North is in the last six verses of Daniel 11; but, it should be understood in the context of what Daniel’s last vision is all about.

What is Daniel’s last vision all about?

From Daniel 10 to Daniel 12, who is there? Michael. It is about Michael. It is about the Great Controversy, Who is like God? Is it Satan or is it Christ? It is about his efforts, Lucifer’s efforts, to counterfeit Christ; because, he wants to be King of the North.

Signs of the Times, November 19, 1894:

“Through the pope of Rome the same work has been carried on here on earth as was carried on in the courts of heaven before the expulsion of the prince of darkness. Satan sought to correct the law of God in heaven, and to supply an amendment of his own. He exalted his own judgment above that of his Creator, and placed his will above the will of Jehovah, and in this way virtually declared God to be fallible. The pope also takes the same course and, claiming infallibility for himself, seeks to adjust the law of God to meet his own ideas, thinking himself able to correct the mistakes he thinks he sees in the statutes and commands of the Lord of heaven and earth. He virtually says to the world, I will give you better laws than those of Jehovah. What an insult is this to the God of heaven!” Signs of the Times, November 19, 1894.

The Great Controversy, page 50:

“This compromise between paganism and Christianity resulted in the development of ‘the man of sin’ foretold in prophecy as opposing and exalting himself above God. That gigantic system of false religion”—

What gigantic system of false religion?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Catholicism.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Catholic system.

—“That gigantic system of false religion is a masterpiece of Satan’s power—a monument”—

A monument of what?

—“of his efforts to seat himself upon the throne to rule the earth according to his will.” The Great Controversy, 50.

Satan built the Catholic Church so that he would have a throne on the Earth to sit on when he comes and personates Christ. And when he comes to do this, his personation of Christ, his claim that he is Michael, includes his claim that he is the true King of the North; and, his representative on Earth is the Pope of Rome, therefore the Pope of Rome is the counterfeit King of the North.

So, when we are dealing with Daniel 11, we need to be clear about who the King of the North is in this passage. And when we are clear, it opens a wealth of information about what is being illustrated in these verses.

We will return to this point tomorrow in our study.

Shall we close with a word of prayer?

Benediction: Heavenly Father, we thank you that the history that you have chosen to identify as the fulfillment of Daniel 11, verse 40, is not an obscure or a remote history, that it is the biggest historical event of the 20^th Century, and that there is an abundance of information in the secular reports that confirm the history that you have represented in verse 40. As your people, we want to understand this correctly and what it means to us. We ask that you would grant us the presence of your Holy Spirit that our discernment might be fine-tuned to recognize that in 1989, when the collapse of the Soviet Union took place, that the Dirt Brush Man, the Lion of the tribe of Judah, began to remove the Seals, the customs, the traditions that have been handed down in Adventism. He began to remove those things that his people might understand this final experience, this final message in such a way that it will change them in your image and provide them with a message that they can carry to the world. Help us awaken out of our Laodicean condition, that we can see that we are now twenty-something years after the fact and by-and-large still in this Laodicean state. Forgive us for this. Forgive us for not fulfilling our responsibility to be students of prophecy and awaken us to this responsibility so that we can finish the work and go home with you soon we pray in Jesus’s name. Amen.

Habakkuk’s Two Tables #46

PART SIX: 1989

Presented by Jeff Pippenger

Invocation by Brother Jeff Pippenger: Heavenly Father, we thank you for bringing us together this morning to continue our study of 1989 and Daniel 11, verse 40. We ask that you take control of this presentation and grant us the presence of your Holy Spirit, that you would allow us to enter by faith into the Most Holy Place with you that we can receive the light that you have for us this morning. Please prepare our hearts and minds for that light and take control of the words that I present, that they can be words that will glorify and honor you. And we want the Latter Rain poured out upon us, please. Prepare our vessels for this. We ask you for all these things in the name of Jesus. Amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: We are still dealing with 1989 as the ending point for William Miller’s dream, as the Time of the End for the 144,000; and, we are showing that 1989 is a fulfillment of Daniel 11, verse 40.

Yesterday we dealt with a little bit on the fact that the last six verses of Daniel 11 is the climax of the Biblical teaching of Michael, “Michael” meaning Who is like God?, talking about the desire of Satan to take the place of God; and this controversy that has been carried on since the rebellion began in Heaven.

The Sides of the North (Continued)

Isaiah 14:12-17; Psalm 48

Today in our notes, we had closed out with the first few quotes in this presentation. We looked at Isaiah 14, where Satan wants to stand and sit upon God’s throne, and sit upon the sides of the North; and, then we went to Psalm 48 to identify that the sides of the North is Zion, Jerusalem, God’s Church. Satan wants to sit upon God’s political throne and His religious throne.

And we noted that in the first quote there in Testimonies, volume 9, that Satan is called the antichrist, just like the Pope of Rome is the antichrist.

And then in The Great Controversy, page 50, we showed that the Pope is a representative of Satan on Earth; they are interchangeable, and their prophetic characteristics allow you to see either Satan or the Pope of Rome, and you have to determine who is being discussed in the Scriptures based upon the context.

We read the quote from Signs of the Times, November 19, 1894, that Satan is seeking to carry out the same work here on Earth that he began in Heaven through the Papacy, through the Pope of Rome.

And then we closed with The Great Controversy, page 50, which says,

“This compromise between paganism and Christianity resulted in the development of ‘the man of sin’ foretold in prophecy as opposing and exalting himself above God. That gigantic system of false religion is a masterpiece of Satan’s power—a monument of his efforts to seat himself upon the throne to rule the earth according to his will.” The Great Controversy, 50.

Satan has built the Catholic Church for the purpose of ruling Planet Earth when he comes to personate Christ.

Unites with the Dragon

Now, in this presentation, this is kind of a preparatory presentation for tomorrow when we are going to look at Armageddon.

We have said more than once now that Daniel 11, verse 40 is one of the most profound verses in God’s Word. And rightly understood, in verse 40 you have the Papacy as the King of the North, and you have the dragon as the King of the South, and you have the United States as the False Prophet, represented in chariots, ships, and horsemen. And these three powers, the Beast, the Dragon, and the False Prophet, they are the three powers that lead the world to Armageddon.

So, Armageddon is noted in Revelation 16; and, therefore, if you are really going to understand how the world gets led to Armageddon, you need to understand that this struggle that takes the world to Armageddon begins in Daniel 11, verse 40, with the King of the North, the King of the South, and the United States—the Beast, the Dragon, and the False Prophet. This is one of the truths that is in verse 40 that has opened up in 1989, at the Time of the End; and, these verses are dealing with the interaction of the Beast, the Dragon, and the False Prophet all the way through. So, we want to look at that.

And we want to look at where the Beast (the Papacy, the King of the North) comes to his end in verses 44 and 45, so that we have the context for when we look at Armageddon tomorrow.

So, we are going to look at these three powers: the False Prophet, the United States; the Beast/the King of the North (the Papacy); and, the Dragon.

So, our first quote is from Manuscript Releases, volume 14, page 162. And there are a lot of things in here. We are going to pull certain things out and emphasize them.

“Satan will work the miracles to deceive those who dwell upon the earth. Spiritualism will do its work by causing the dead to be personated. Those religious bodies who refuse to hear God’s messages of warning will be under strong deception, and will unite with the civil power to persecute the saints. The Protestant churches will unite with the papal power in persecuting the commandment-keeping people of God. This is that power which constitutes the great system of persecution which will exercise spiritual tyranny over the consciences of men.

“‘He had two horns like a lamb, and he spake as a dragon.’”—

Who is that?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Indiscernible responses.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: That is the United States of America

—“Though professing to be followers of the Lamb of God, men become imbued with the spirit of the dragon. They profess to be meek and humble but they speak and legislate with the spirit of Satan, showing by their actions that they are the opposite of what they profess to be. This lamb-like power unites with the dragon”—

We are going to show this fact as we proceed in this worship study. We have not proven this yet; but, in Daniel 11, verse 41, you have a Sunday Law in the United States. That is also Revelation 13:11. When the United States speaks as a dragon, that is The Sunday Law in the United States.

And from verse 11 in Revelation 13, then the United States goes out and it forces the world to come under the authority of the United Nations. In verse 14 of Revelation 13, it says it commands the whole Earth to set up an image of the beast, and the only definition of the image of the beast is a combination of church and state, with the church in control of the relationship. The United States is the one that forces this.

So, one of the tricks to see in this Movement is Revelation 13, Daniel 11, Revelation 16, and Revelation 17. They are talking about the Beast, the Dragon, and the False Prophet. But, once the United States passes The Sunday Law, it then goes and commands the world to come under the umbrella of the Ten Kings of Revelation 17, the dragon power. And sometimes it is hard for people to recognize that as it implements, as the United States deceives the world in accepting this One World Government, this One World Government is represented by these Ten Kings in Revelation 17 and they are the Dragon. The Ten Kings are the Dragon; but, the United States unites with them. In fact, if you are going to be technical to the prophetic passage, when the United States is overcome in Daniel 11, verse 41 at The Sunday Law, and then Egypt, which is the world, is conquered in verses 42 and 43, the world there in Revelation 17 is these Ten Kings. But, they receive how many kingdoms according to Revelation 17?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: One.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: One kingdom.

And who is the primary king in those Ten Kings? It is the United States.

And it is technically correct, even today, that half the military strength of the United Nations is supplied by the United States, and over half the financing is already supplied by the United States to the United Nations. It [the United States] already controls it.

And, of course, this is the story of Jezebel; the Papacy, the King of the North; and the prophets of Baal that is the False Prophet, that is the United States. And, it is the story of Ahab (the Ten Kings).

Ahab was the king of how many tribes?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Ten.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Ten.

And the United States is Ahab. It is the one that is going to be directing the Ten Kings.

But anyway, in this quote,

—“This lamb-like power unites with the dragon”—the dragon is the Ten Kings—“in making war upon those who keep the commandments of God and have the testimony of Jesus Christ. And Satan unites with Protestants and papists,”—

So, what do you have there? We have what in Adventism we call the threefold union. Satan is the Dragon; Protestants are the False Prophet; papists are the Beast—a threefold union.

—“And Satan unites with Protestants and papists, acting in consort with them as the”—what?—“the god of this world,”—

Satan is going to act as the god of this world, and our previous quote from The Great Controversy, page 50, he is prepared the Catholic Church so that he can be enthroned over Planet Earth.

—“And Satan unites with Protestants and papists, acting in consort with them as the god of this world, dictating to men as if they were the subjects of his kingdom, to be handled and governed and controlled as he pleases.”—

This is not just a metaphor about Satan controlling the world. When he takes control of the world, he is going to govern it, handle it, and control it. He is here. He is here.

Continuing on:

—“If men will not agree to trample underfoot the commandments of God, the spirit of the dragon is revealed. They are imprisoned, brought before councils, and fined. ‘He causeth all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads’ [Revelation 13:16]. ‘He had power to give life unto the image of the beast, that the image of the beast should both speak, and cause that as many as would not worship the image of the beast should be killed’ [verse 15]. Thus Satan usurps the prerogatives of Jehovah. The man of sin sits in the seat of God, proclaiming himself to be God, and acting above God.” Manuscript Releases, volume 14, 162.

The man of sin here, by context of this passage, is not the Pope of Rome. It is Satan. And once again he is sitting in the seat of God, proclaiming himself to be God. So, in this history, you are going to have the Beast, the Dragon, and the False Prophet; but, you are going to have the activities of Satan going on as well.

The Great Controversy, beginning at page 624, says,

“Fearful sights of a supernatural character will soon be revealed in the heavens, in token of the power of miracle-working demons.”—

Now, if you have studied anything about the Papacy and the last Pope and this Pope, the last Pope and this Pope are like-minded into what their most important idol is. Both of them profess that the idol that directs them is Mary of Fatima. And since 1917 the messages of Fatima have been what have directed the Papacy in their understanding of end time events; and, these messages of Fatima are confirmed in the Catholic mind by apparitions that appear in the Heavens: you know, the Virgin Mary appears in the Heavens. And somewhere we even have recordings where the Virgin Mary was appearing in Georgia about 15 years ago, and there are people from a secular news station were there waiting for the apparitions to take place so they could record it with their news camera, and they did not take place. But what happened, it was a perfectly clear day and out of the sky it started raining rose petals everywhere. And this was recorded by secular people that did not believe it.

So, it depends on whether you believe a “Thus saith the Lord.” “Fearful sights of a supernatural character will soon be revealed in the heavens,” and that is where these miracles that are preparing the Catholic Church to believe the messages of Fatima are taking place.

And if you have paid attention over the past three or four weeks in this same place in Georgia, I am pretty sure, there is now a Catholic person that has come from Medjugorje, which is one of the places in Europe where the apparitions of Mary were taking place. And this person had seen the apparition of Mary way back when and has had dreams and visions, or whatever, since that time, and she is now visiting Georgia and thousands of people are going to this place in Georgia, right now, to be blessed by her.

How many of you have heard of that? Did you know that was going on?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Negative responses.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Seventh-day Adventists, they are too wrapped up in what they are wrapped up in, in their Laodicea daily activities.

But, when you look at Fatima, you see that Satan has prepared the Catholic Church with an understanding of end time events that allows them to believe that when Satan personates Christ that they are going to turn their Church over to him. Okay? That is what it means that he has taken the time and trouble to prepare the Catholic Church so that he has a throne to rule from; and, he is going to announce a curse against the Bad Pope. And according to the message of Fatima, the Pope that is ruling right now is the Bad Pope and he is going to pronounce a blessing upon the Good Pope, and that is Pope John Paul II that is dead. I would not be surprised to see him resurrected when Satan appears. That is what it says is going to happen, because he is the Good Pope.

“Fearful sights of a supernatural character will soon be revealed in the heavens, in token of the power of miracle-working demons. The spirits of devils will go forth to the kings of the earth and to the whole world, to fasten them in deception, and urge them on to unite with Satan in his last struggle against the government of heaven. By these agencies, rulers and subjects will be alike deceived. Persons will arise pretending to be Christ Himself, and claiming the title and worship which belong to the world’s Redeemer. They will perform wonderful miracles of healing and will profess to have revelations from heaven contradicting the testimony of the Scriptures.

“As the crowning act in the great drama of deception, Satan himself will personate Christ.”—

This is marked in Revelation 13:13. He causes fire to come down out of heaven, and the messages of Fatima, as I have already said, have informed the Catholic Church that when Christ returns they will know that he is “Christ” because he is going to return and call fire down from out of heaven.

“As the crowning act in the great drama of deception, Satan himself will personate Christ. The church has long professed to look to the Saviour’s advent as the consummation of her hopes. Now the great deceiver will make it appear that Christ has come. In different parts of the earth, Satan will manifest himself among men as a majestic being of dazzling brightness, resembling the description of the Son of God given by John in the Revelation. Revelation 1:13–15. The glory that surrounds him is unsurpassed by anything that mortal eyes have yet beheld. The shout of triumph rings out upon the air: ‘Christ has come! Christ has come!’ The people prostrate themselves in adoration before him, while he lifts up his hands and pronounces a blessing upon them, as Christ blessed His disciples when He was upon the earth. His voice is soft and subdued, yet full of melody. In gentle, compassionate tones he presents some of the same gracious, heavenly truths which the Saviour uttered; he heals the diseases of the people, and then, in his assumed character of Christ, he claims to have changed the Sabbath to Sunday, and commands all to hallow the day which he has blessed. He declares that those who persist in keeping holy the seventh day are blaspheming his name by refusing to listen to his angels sent to them with light and truth. This is the strong, almost overmastering delusion. Like the Samaritans who were deceived by Simon Magus, the multitudes, from the least to the greatest, give heed to these sorceries, saying: This is ‘the great power of God.’ Acts 8:10.

“But the people of God will not be misled. The teachings of this false christ are not in accordance with the Scriptures. His blessing is pronounced upon the worshipers of the beast and his image, the very class upon whom the Bible declares that God’s unmingled wrath shall be poured out.” The Great Controversy, 624–625.

Now, one of the things that we are saying here is, in verse 40 we are preparing the way for tomorrow so we can see Armageddon; we can see that verse 40 is addressing Revelation 16 and the world getting led to Armageddon. But, in verse 40 you have the story of Fatima, if you are willing to see it; because, in verse 40 you have the struggle between the King of the North and the King of the South, and the starting point, the historians tell you the starting point for the modern King of the South, the Soviet Union, was in October of 1917 at the Bolshevik Revolution, a/k/a the Russia Revolution, the October Revolution.

But the starting point for the messages of Fatima was October 1917 as well; and, on the 13^th of the month, for five consecutive months leading up to October 13th—or maybe it was six consecutive months—the Virgin Mary would meet with three young children in Portugal. She would appear to them and promise to do a miracle in October of 1917 to prove that she had really been meeting with these children—and I will not go through that history at this time. But, she left some messages with these children that is the point of reference for Catholic prophetic understanding. And one component of the message is that the Pope that was in power at that time was supposed to call a special meeting of all the Cardinals, bring them together, and pray for Russia and dedicate Russia to the Virgin Mary. And if they would have done this, then Russia would have been healed and returned to Mary; but, if they refused to do that, then Russia was going to propagate the errors that it was holding onto and it was going to cause a Second World War. They had just got out of the First World War in that history; and, it even predicts a Third World War.

And with these messages were carried to the Vatican, and every Pope that became a Pope from that point on, 1917 onward, they would all read the messages but none of them would call this special meeting, not even Pope John Paul II. He did not call the special meeting until he was shot. And when he was taken into the hospital, then the Miracle of Fatima that had occurred in October 1917 appeared outside the window of his hospital room—this is Catholic; you can believe what you want to believe. I am not saying that you have to believe this, but this is their story—it appeared outside his window, and then he sent for those messages and realized that he was the man to call this Conclave, and he was the Good Pope. But it was already too late. It was already too late. They had not dedicated Russia to the Virgin Mary, and Russia was going to propagate its errors in the world and the Second World War had already passed.

The point being, those messages of Fatima that were given in October 1917, they were well in advance of the Second World War; and, who could be sure in October 1917 (the very month and year of the Bolshevik Revolution), who was going to know that the Russians were even going to be successful as they went in and killed the Tzar’s family and began the Revolution?

Maybe when they kicked down the doors and killed the Tzar and his family, there were men there waiting for them with guns and they would blow them all away and Communism does not even get started. But, the messages of Fatima addressed the fact that the philosophy of Communism was going to be propagated over the years.

So, when you see the purpose of the Fatima miracle, you see it right there in verse 40, because the starting point for the modern King of the North and the starting point for the modern King of the South is the same month, the same year, and it is in the history of verse 40 and it is what is directing the mindset for both of those powers.

And you see in the messages of Fatima the philosophical preparation of Satan to the Catholic Church to prepare the Catholic Church to receive him as Christ when he personates Christ. That is, if you believe that he is going to personate Christ.

The next quote, The Seventh-day Adventist Bible Commentary, volume 5, page 1105:

“As the second appearing of our Lord Jesus Christ draws near, satanic agencies are moved from beneath.”—

A power came down from above on 9/11; a power rises from beneath.

—“Satan will not only appear as a human being, but he will personate Jesus Christ; and the world that has rejected the truth will receive him as the Lord of lords and King of kings. He will exercise his power, and work upon the human imagination. He will corrupt both the minds and the bodies of men, and will work through the children of disobedience, fascinating and charming, as does a serpent. What a spectacle will the world be for heavenly intelligences! What a spectacle for God, the Creator of the world, to behold!” The Seventh-day Adventist Bible Commentary, volume 5, 1105.

PERSONATE: To represent by a fictitious or assumed character so as to pass for the person represented. Webster’s 1828 Dictionary.

So, what does PERSONATE mean? To represent by a fictitious or assumed character so as to pass for the person represented.

Satan is going to be here in person, pretending to be Christ.

Revelation 13:11-13

Okay. Let us go to Revelation 13, verses 11 through 13.

Verse 11:

“¹¹And I beheld another beast coming up out of the earth; and he had two horns like a lamb, and he spake as a dragon.”—

Now, we are going to show you here—but I am going to say it in advance so when we finally show it you will have a second or a third testimony so it will sink in—Sister White clearly identifies that Revelation 13 begins in 1798. She says, “When the Papacy was robbed of its strength” —that is 1798—“John beheld a new power coming up out of the earth,” and then she speaks about the lamb-like beast of the United States. So, Sister White plainly says that in 1798, when the Papacy was robbed of its strength, that is when John sees the Revelation 13 vision. That is when he sees the United States coming up out of the Earth. So, verse 11 is where the United States is introduced.

And the Spirit of Prophecy is clear that the speaking of a nation is an action of its legislative and judicial authority. So, when this lamb-like beast in verse 11 speaks as a dragon, it is marking The Sunday Law in the United States.

So, what I want you to see is that verse 11 begins in 1798 and it ends at The Sunday Law; and, Daniel 11, verse 40, begins in 1798 at the Time of the End, and it ends in verse 41, which is The Sunday Law. It is not an accident that the history of Daniel 11:40 is the identical history of Revelation 13:11. And Revelation 13:11 ends when the Papacy conquers the glorious land, Daniel 11:40.

And then verse 12 says,

—“¹²And he [the United States] exerciseth all the power of the first beast before him, and causeth the earth and them which dwell therein to worship the first beast, whose deadly wound was healed. ¹³And he doeth great wonders, so that he maketh fire come down from heaven on the earth in the sight of men, . . .” Revelation 13:11-13 (KJV).

So, the United States is the power that is the False Prophet.

Two out of three words in the Revelation comes from the Old Testament. Where is John getting verse 13 from? Where is verse 13 of Revelation 13 derived from, what passage in the Old Testament? Elijah.

Elijah calls fire down from out of Heaven. And when Elijah calls fire down out of Heaven, what is happening there? We have studied this in the worship. What is taking place?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The contest between the true and false prophets.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The true and false prophets are being demonstrated.

And who is the true prophet?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Elijah.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Elijah.

But, this is not the true Prophet, is it?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Negative response.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Who is it? It is the United States.

This is the proof text that the United States is the False Prophet of Bible prophecy. The United States is the one that is going to force the world to accept the mark of the beast, the image of the beast. It is the False Prophet.

The Great Controversy, page 553, this passage here is one of several but on this theme Seventh-day Adventists need to wrap their minds around.

“Many endeavor to account for spiritual manifestations by attributing them wholly to fraud and sleight of hand on the part of the medium. But while it is true that the results of trickery have often been palmed off as genuine manifestations, there have been, also, marked exhibitions of supernatural power. The mysterious rapping with which modern spiritualism began was not the result of human trickery or cunning, but was the direct work of evil angels, who thus introduced one of the most successful of soul-destroying delusions. Many will be ensnared through the belief that spiritualism is a merely human imposture; when brought face to face with manifestations which they cannot but regard as supernatural, they will be deceived, and will be led to accept them as the great power of God.

“These persons overlook the testimony of the Scriptures concerning the wonders wrought by Satan and his agents. It was by satanic aid that Pharaoh’s magicians were enabled to counterfeit the work of God. Paul testifies that before the second advent of Christ there will be similar manifestations of satanic power. The coming of the Lord is to be preceded by ‘the working of Satan with all power and signs and lying wonders, and with all deceivableness of unrighteousness.’ 2 Thessalonians 2:9,10. And the apostle John, describing the miracle-working power that will be manifested in the last days, declares: ‘He doeth great wonders, so that he maketh fire come down from heaven on the earth in the sight of men, and deceiveth them that dwell on the earth by the means of those miracles which he had power to do.’ Revelation 13:13, 14. No mere impostures are here foretold. Men are deceived by the miracles which Satan’s agents have power to do, not which they pretend to do.” The Great Controversy, 553.

So, I know that when I told you that there were rose petals falling from a blue sky, raining on this place in Georgia, you probably thought that it was pretty far-fetched; but, it has been recorded.

Pentecost

Now, this is a familiar passage in what we have been studying, The Great Controversy, starting at page 611; but, I want to pull something out of this passage. This is where Sister White compares Millerite History with our history of Revelation 18, and then there is a paragraph where she says,

“The work will be similar to that of the Day of Pentecost. . . .

“The great work of the gospel is not to close with less manifestation of the power of God than marked its opening. The prophecies which were fulfilled in the outpouring of the former rain at the opening of the gospel are again to be fulfilled in the latter rain at its close. Here are ‘the times of refreshing’ to which the apostle Peter looked forward when he said: ‘Repent ye therefore, and be converted, that your sins may be blotted out, when the times of refreshing shall come from the presence of the Lord; and He shall send Jesus.’ Acts 3:19, 20.

“Servants of God, with their faces lighted up and shining with holy consecration, will hasten from place to place to proclaim the message from heaven. By thousands of voices, all over the earth, the warning will be given. Miracles will be wrought, the sick will be healed, and signs and wonders will follow the believers. Satan also works, with lying wonders,”—

Who works?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Satan.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Satan.

—“even bringing down fire from heaven in the sight of men. Revelation 13:13. Thus the inhabitants of the earth will be brought to take their stand.” The Great Controversy, 611–612.

Satan is going to bring fire from down out of heaven, according to the Bible and the Spirit of Prophecy, to prove that he is Christ. The Catholic Church has been prepared by the messages of Fatima, which find their roots in Daniel 11, verse 40, to turn their church over to “Christ” when “Christ” calls fire from down out of heaven.

When

We have put in place here that in the history of these verses, Daniel 11:40-45, one of the things that takes place is that Satan is going to personate Christ. Now we want to mark when this takes place.

Testimonies, volume 5, page 451:

“By the decree enforcing the institution of the Papacy in violation of the law of God, our nation will disconnect herself fully from righteousness.”—

This is The Sunday Law, right?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmation responses.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Which Sunday Law? It is The Sunday Law in the United States. Okay?

—“When Protestantism shall stretch her hand across the gulf to grasp the hand of the Roman power, when she shall reach over the abyss to clasp hands with Spiritualism, when, under the influence of this threefold union, our country shall repudiate every principle of its Constitution as a Protestant and republican government, and shall make provision for the propagation of papal falsehoods and delusions, then we may know that the time has come for the marvelous working of Satan and that the end is near.” Testimonies, volume 5, 451.

So, when does Satan begin his marvelous acts?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: At The Sunday Law.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: At The Sunday Law in the United States.

And there is a principle here just on how the Spirit of Prophecy works that you should pay attention to as a student of prophecy. Often Sister White would say, “When this . . . ,” “When this,” “When this,” When this,” “When this, then this will happen.” And this is one of those paragraphs.

Sunday Law

Rev 13:11 ENSIGN

Dan 11:40 Dan 11:41 Dan 12:1

(BARABBAS/Son of Father)

Verse 40 SATAN PERSONATES CHRIST

Figure No. 89.

So, what we are saying is—and we have not proved Daniel 11, verse 41, though, at this point—that this is Daniel 11, verse 41.

This is Daniel 11, verse 40 [referring to Figure No. 89].

This is the history of verse 40. And the history of verse 40 ends at verse 41, which is Revelation 13:11, when the United States speaks as the dragon. This is The Sunday Law.

When The Sunday Law comes, Satan personates Christ. This may be something you never thought about; it may be something that you already know; but, there are people that think otherwise. They think Satan comes before The Sunday Law; but, that is not what the Scriptures say.

Satan comes in Revelation 13:13. He calls fire down out of heaven, and verse 13 comes after verse 11; and, in verse 11 the United States speaks as a dragon. And here Sister White says it is at The Sunday Law, the decree in the United States; then, the time has come for the marvelous workings of Satan, and we can know then that the end is near.

Now, maybe you do not understand the necessity of marking when Satan personates Christ, but it is a waymark that we are going to put in place.

The next quote, The Seventh-day Adventist Bible Commentary, volume 7, page 911:

“The time is coming when Satan will work miracles right in your sight, claiming that he is Christ; and if your feet are not firmly established upon the truth of God, then you will be led away from your foundation. The only safety for you is to search for truth as for hid treasures. Dig for the truth as you would for treasures in the earth, and present the word of God, the Bible, before your Heavenly Father and say, Enlighten me; teach me what is truth. . . . You should store the mind with the word of God; for you may be separated, and placed where you will not have the privilege of meeting with the children of God.

“None need be deceived. The law of God is as sacred as His throne, and by it every man who cometh into the world is to be judged. There is no other standard by which to test character. ‘If they speak not according to this word, it is because there is no light in them.’”—

What is she saying?

They are saying that Sunday is supposed to be sacred. It is Satan.

—“Now, shall the case be decided according to the Word of God, or shall man’s pretensions be credited?

“Says Christ, ‘By their fruits ye shall know them.’ If those through whom cures are performed, are disposed, on account of these manifestations, to excuse their neglect of the law of God and continue in disobedience, though they have power to any and every extent, it does not follow that they have the great power of God. On the contrary, it is the miracle-working power of the great deceiver. He is a transgressor of the moral law, and employs every device that he can master to blind men to its true character. We are warned that in the last days he will work with signs and lying wonders. And he will continue these wonders”—And he will continue these wonders—“until the close of probation,”—

This is Daniel 12:1.

Do you see that? You will get arguments from people. They say that Satan is still doing a work of deception in the Seven Last Plagues.

I do not doubt that he is still lying during the time period of the Seven Last Plagues; but, when Michael stands up in Daniel 12:1 and human probation closes, there is not anyone else to deceive. Every case is decided.

—“And he will continue thee wonders until the close of probation, that he may point to them as evidence that he is an angel of light and not of darkness.

“Satan will work his miracles to deceive; he will set up his power as supreme. The church may appear as about to fall, but it does not fall. It remains, while the sinners in Zion will be sifted out—the chaff separated from the precious wheat“—

The sinners in the Seventh-day Adventist Church, they go out. They are the ones that go out.

—“This is a terrible ordeal, but nevertheless it must take place. None but those who have been overcoming by the blood of the Lamb and the word of their testimony will be found with the loyal and true, without spot or stain of sin, without guile in their mouths. . . . The remnant that purify their souls by obeying the truth gather strength from the trying process, exhibiting the beauty of holiness amid the surrounding apostasy.” The Seventh-day Adventist Bible Commentary, volume 7, 911.

When do the sinners in Zion go out?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Sunday Law.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Right here (indicates The Sunday Law).

So, the righteous in Zion at The Sunday Law, what do they become?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: They are without spot.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: They are without spot, but what are they, prophetically.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The ensign.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The ensign. There is going to be an ensign lifted up.

And who is Satan here? He is personating Christ, but who is he in this story?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The King of the North.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: No, he is Satan. The King of the North is the Papacy.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Dragon.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: [“Writes ‘Barabbas’ into the history’s timeline.] See, the world is choosing again. This is the cross all over again. They are choosing between Christ and Barabbas.

BAR, what does BAR mean?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Son of.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Son of.

What is ABBA?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Father.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: This is a false “christ.” This is Satan personating Christ.

At this same time that he appears and the world is going to be choosing between Barabbas and the righteous in Zion. The righteous in Zion we have been emphasizing is the ensign. Right? So, the world is choosing between the ensign and Barabbas.

And what is the ensign? It is the 144,000 that are on the cross. Barabbas is not on the cross.

Let that sink home, because it gives you an idea of what is going to happen to the righteous at this time.

Never Again

And if you are not sure that the Adventist Church does not fall because you are one of those Adventists that think the Seventh-day Adventist Church is Babylon and that we are supposed to separate from it, upon the testimony of two a thing is established. The next quote, Manuscript Releases, volume 18, page 11, says,

“‘God’s people are rising,’ said the angel, ‘never to fall again.’ ‘Be careful,’ said the angel, ‘lest the branches be cut off and others are raised up in their stead.’” Manuscript Releases, volume 18, 11.

So, there are some branches in Adventist that are going to be cut off. Who is that? That is those in the previous passage that go out from among us.

And, those branches are going to be replaced with what? The eleventh-hour workers in this history [between Daniel 11:41 and Daniel 12:1]. So, the Church does not fall; The Sunday Law purifies it.

Now, one of the things that I want to put in place for future reference is that from The Sunday in the United States, Daniel 11:41 to Daniel 12:1, this period of time, this is a special period of time. It is marked in prophecy from a variety of ways. And one of the things that takes place in this period of time is Satan is personating Christ. There are other things. Keep that in your memory bank. We will return to that thought at some point in time, Lord willing.

The Battle of Zion and Babylon (First and Last)

Revelation 1:8; Daniel 1:1-2; Daniel 11:44-12:1

Now, we want to close by putting one more thing in place in advance of tomorrow’s presentation.

Jesus is the First and the Last, and His signature in the Scriptures is that He illustrates the end from the beginning. And there is another argument that is valid that shows you that the King of the North in the last six verses of Daniel 11 is Babylon, and it is based upon “the First and the Last.”

Go to Daniel 1.

You will see in your notes that we have reference there Revelation 1:8, identifying that Christ is the Alpha and the Omega, the First and the Last.

“⁸I am Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the ending, saith the Lord, which is, and which was, and which is to come, the Almighty.” Revelation 1:8 (KJV).

Daniel 1, verses 1 and 2, says,

“¹In the third year of the reign of Jehoiakim king of Judah came Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon unto Jerusalem, and besieged it. ²And the Lord gave Jehoiakim king of Judah into his hand, with part of the vessels of the house of God: which he carried into the land of Shinar to the house of his god; and he brought the vessels into the treasure house of his god.” Daniel 1:1-2 (KJV).

So, the beginning of the testimony of Daniel is the war between the King of the North and Jerusalem. And because Jesus is the First and the Last, the Alpha and the Omega, the end of Daniel’s testimony is talking about this identical war. And if the enemy that is attacking Jerusalem in Daniel 1, verses 1 and 2, is the King of the North (the king of Babylon), then the enemy that is attacking Jerusalem at the end is going to be the King of the North (the king of Babylon); and, spiritual Babylon at the end of the world in Revelation 17 is the Papacy.

So, if you do to Daniel 11, verse 44, we will see the end of this story.

So, based upon the First and the Last in the Book of Daniel, you can see who the King of the North is. It is the king of Babylon.

Beginning at verse 44 of Daniel 11, it says,

“^{chapter 11:44}But tidings out of the east and out of the north shall trouble him:”—shall trouble the King of the North, the king of Babylon (the Papacy)— “therefore he shall go forth with great fury to destroy, and utterly to make away many. ⁴⁵And he shall plant the tabernacles of his palace between the seas in [and] the glorious holy mountain; yet he shall come to his end, and none shall help him.

“^{chapter 12:1} And at that time shall Michael stand up, . . . .” Daniel 11:44 - 12:1 (KJV).

So, Daniel’s story begins with the battle of Jerusalem and Babylon; it ends with the battle of Jerusalem and Babylon. In the first reference, Babylon defeats Jerusalem; but, here at the end, Babylon comes to his end and none shall help.

MEDITERRANEAN SEA

Mt. Carmel

Esdraelon Valley

(X) ● Megiddo

Esdraelon Ridge

● Nob Sea of Galilee

Jerusalem ●

Dead Sea

Figure No. 90.

And where he comes to his end is between the seas and the glorious holy mountain; and, the glorious holy mountain is Jerusalem.

And my brother Noel, he did not get here early. I did not ask him to, so he had no way to know. So, this is my artwork. This is not his artwork.

This is the glorious holy mountain; this is Jerusalem.

And this is the Mediterranean Sea.

This is the Sea of Galilee.

This is the Dead Sea.

And the King of the North in verses 44 and 45 of Daniel 11, he is going to come to his end with none to help, between the seas and the glorious holy mountain, somewhere right in here.

And this right here, this is Esdraelon Valley; and, this is the Esdraelon Ridge; that is what these lines are.

And this is Mount Carmel.

And this (the Mediterranean Sea) is the ocean where Elijah had them go out and get the water.

Mount Carmel, this is the story of Elijah.

But, right here, this is Megiddo. This is Armageddon.

So, when Daniel 11, in verses 44 and 45 is saying the Papacy (Babylon, the King of the North) comes to his end with none to help, and he comes to his end between the seas and the glorious holy mountain, it is right here (x).

How do you know that? You know that because all the prophets agree with one another. They are all telling the same story.

The Daughter of Zion

Jeremiah 6:22-23; Micah 4 (verse 11); Psalm 48:1-8; 83:1-5

Now, in this story, in the King James, you can get a little bit side-tracked. Verse 45, again, it says,

“⁴⁵And he shall plant the tabernacles of his palace between the seas in the glorious holy mountain.” Daniel 11:45 (KJV).

So, there are some people saying, “Well, that is saying that he is going to plant the tabernacles of his palace right here in the glorious holy mountain.” He is going to plant his banner.

But, other translations, instead of having in, they put and, “between the seas and the glorious holy mountain,” and this is the correct translation. But, I want to show it to you from the Scriptures, because the Papacy does not conquer the Seventh-day Adventist Church at the end of the world.

So, go to Jeremiah 6:22-23.

“²²Thus saith the Lord, Behold a people cometh from the north country, and a great nation shall be raised from the sides of the earth. ²³They shall lay hold on bow and spear; they are cruel, and have no mercy; their voice roareth like the sea; and they ride upon horses, set in array as men for war against thee, O daughter of Zion.” Jeremiah 6:22-23 (KJV).

What is a daughter in the Scriptures?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: A church.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: It is the offspring. It is the last offspring.

It is a woman, so it is a church; but, it is the remnant church. It is the remnant people of God. It is Jerusalem. It is the daughter of Zion.

There is a people coming from the North that is going to attack them, according to Jeremiah.

Notice Micah. Go to the Book of Micah, chapter 4.

“¹But in the last days, it shall come to pass, that the mountain of the house of the Lord shall be established in the top of the mountains,”—

That is this mountain. That is Jerusalem.

Jerusalem has several mountains around it, but the glorious holy mountain is where the temple is.

—“the house of the Lord shall be established in the top of the mountains, and it shall be exalted above the hills; and people shall flow unto it. ²And many nations shall come, and say, Come, and let us go up to the mountain of the Lord, and to the house of the God of Jacob; and he will teach us of his ways, and we will walk in his paths: for the law shall go forth of Zion, and the word of the Lord from Jerusalem.

“³And he shall judge among many people, and rebuke strong nations afar off; and they shall beat their swords into plowshares, and their spears into pruninghooks: nation shall not lift up a sword against nation, neither shall they learn war any more. ⁴But they shall sit every man under his vine and under his fig tree; and none shall make them afraid; for the mouth of the Lord of hosts hath spoken it. ⁵For all people will walk every one in the name of his god, and we will walk in the name of the Lord our God for ever and ever.

“⁶In that day, saith the Lord, will I assemble her that halteth, and I will gather her that is driven out, and her that I have afflicted. ⁷And I will make her that halted a remnant, and her that was cast far off a strong nation: and the Lord shall reign over them in mount Zion from henceforth, even for ever. ⁸And thou, O tower of the flock, the strong hold of the daughter of Zion, unto thee shall it come, even the first dominion; the kingdom shall come to the daughter of Jerusalem. ⁹Now why dost thou cry out aloud? is there no king in thee? is thy counsellor perished? for pangs have taken thee as a woman in travail. ¹⁰Be in pain, and labour to bring forth, O daughter of Zion, like a woman in travail: for now shalt thou go forth out of the city, and thou shalt dwell in the field, and thou shalt go even to Babylon; there shalt thou be delivered; there the Lord shall redeem thee from the hand of thine enemies.

“¹¹Now also many nations are gathered against thee, that say, Let her be defiled, and let our eye look upon Zion. ¹²But they know not the thoughts of the Lord, neither understand they his counsel: for he shall gather them as the sheaves into the floor. ¹³Arise and thresh, O daughter of Zion: for I will make thine horn iron, and I will make thy hoofs brass: and thou shalt beat in pieces many people: and I will consecrate their gain unto the Lord, and their substance unto the Lord of the whole earth.” Micah 4 (KJV).

That is Daniel 2. That is what the Lord is going to do with the 144,000. He is going to thresh Babylon.

But, what I want you to see is that in verse 11, many nations are going to be gathered against Jerusalem. And this is not literal Jerusalem; this is spiritual [Jerusalem]. We are after the cross. But, many nations are going to be gathered against Jerusalem.

In verse 11 of Micah, it says, “Now also many nations are gathered against thee, that say, Let her be defiled,”—let who be defiled? God’s Church—“and let our eye look upon Zion.” They are going to look at it. Okay? They are going to look upon it.

Who is going to look upon it?

Psalm 48, beginning at verse 1:

“¹Great is the Lord, and greatly to be praised in the city of our God, in the mountain of his holiness. ²Beautiful for situation, the joy of the whole earth, is mount Zion, on the sides of the north, the city of the great King. ³God is known in her palaces for a refuge. ⁴For, lo, the kings were assembled, they passed by together.”—

What are they passing by?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Zion.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Jerusalem, Zion, the sides of the North.

—“⁵They saw it, and so they marvelled;”—

They are looking at her. This is Micah 4. They are looking at her.

—“⁴For, lo, the kings were assembled, they passed by together. They saw it, and so they marvelled; they were troubled, and hasted away. ⁶Fear took hold upon them there, and pain, as of a woman in travail. ⁷Thou breakest the ships of Tarshish with an east wind. ⁸As we have heard, so have we seen in the city of the Lord of hosts, in the city of our God: God will establish it for ever. Selah.” Psalm 48:1-8 (KJV).

So, the wicked, all nations are going to come against God’s people. They are going to look at Zion; but, in that time period, trouble is going to take hold of them as a woman in labor because the East wind of Islam is going to take down the economic structure of Planet Earth. We are not there yet, but they are looking upon Zion to destroy it.

Okay. Go to Psalm 83.

Many nations are going to come against the glorious holy mountain. They are going to look over God’s people, and what are they going to wish to do?

Psalm 83, beginning at verse 1:

“¹Keep not thou silence, O God: hold not thy peace, and be not still, O God. ²For, lo, thine enemies make a tumult: and they that hate thee have lifted up the head. ³They have taken crafty counsel against thy people, and consulted against thy hidden ones. ⁴They have said, Come, and let us cut them off from being a nation; that the name of Israel may be no more in remembrance. ⁵For they have consulted together with one consent: they are confederate against thee:

This is the Ten Kings of Revelation 17. This is the nations of the world coming to destroy God’s people at the end of the world.

Okay. So, there is a war at the end of the world. Then, where is the war marked? It is marked in Daniel 11:40-45. This is where the enemy of God’s people is going to his end with none to help.

Between the Seas

Joel 2:20.

Look at Joel 2:20.

Now we are going to teach a very subtle but important point. They never get into Jerusalem. They never make it in. They come to their end outside Jerusalem.

In verse 20 of Joel 2, we have looked at this before. It says,

“²⁰But I will remove far off from you the northern army,”—

This is the King of the North.

—“and will drive him into a land barren and desolate, with his face toward the east sea, and his hinder part toward the utmost sea, and his stink shall come up, and his ill savour shall come up, because he hath done great things.” Joel 2:20 (KJV).

His hinder parts are going to be pointing this sea [the Sea of Galilee], and his face towards this sea [the Mediterranean Sea]; because, he is going to come to his end between the seas and the glorious holy mountain [see Figure 90]. And he comes to his end right here [Megiddo].

So, if he comes to his end right here [at Megiddo], is he in Jerusalem?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Yes.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: No, he is not in Jerusalem.

He Remains at Nob

Isaiah 10:24-27; 32-34

Go to Isaiah 10. Verses 24 through 27 says,

^“24Therefore thus saith the Lord God of hosts, O my people that dwellest in Zion, be not afraid of the Assyrian:”—

Where is Assyria? To the North.

—“be not afraid of the Assyrian [the King of the North]: he shall smite thee with a rod, and shall lift up his staff against thee, after the manner of Egypt. ²⁵For yet a very little while, and the indignation shall cease, and mine anger in their destruction. ²⁶And the Lord of hosts shall stir up a scourge for him according to the slaughter of Midian at the rock of Oreb: and as his rod was upon the sea, so shall he lift it up after the manner of Egypt. ²⁷And it shall come to pass in that day, that his burden shall be taken away from off thy shoulder, and his yoke from off thy neck, and the yoke shall be destroyed because of the anointing.” Isaiah 10:24-27 (KJV)

Now, in verse 32, speaking of when the Lord destroys the King of the North where his persecution is ended—that is what we just read there—in verse 32, it says,

^“32As yet shall he remain at Nob that day: he shall shake his hand against the mount of the daughter of Zion, the hill of Jerusalem.”—

He is going to shake his hand at Jerusalem, but he is going to be at Nob.

—“³³ Behold, the Lord, the Lord of hosts, shall lop the bough with terror: and the high ones of stature shall be hewn down, and the haughty shall be humbled. ³⁴ And he shall cut down the thickets of the forest with iron, and Lebanon shall fall by a mighty one.” Isaiah 10:32-34 (KJV).

That tree of Babylon gets cut down, and it gets cut down at Nob.

NOB: Mount Scopus, the northernmost summit of the Mount of Olives, about two miles northeast of Jerusalem.

And in your notes, NOB is the name for Mount Scopus, which is the northern most summit of the Mount of Olives, about two miles northeast of Jerusalem. So, Nob is outside of Jerusalem. Right? It is not in Jerusalem; it is outside of Jerusalem.

When the Bible talks about the King of the North coming to his end, he does not come to his end in the glorious holy mountain. It is outside.

The Entry of the East Gate

Now, I am not going to read Jeremiah 19 because of time, but Jeremiah 19 talks about Tophet, and Tophet was outside of Jerusalem. That is where Ahas and other wicked people offered their children to Molech. They burnt them alive.

TOPHET: “to burn,” “fireplace.” Where Israel burned their children to Molech.

“¹Thus saith the Lord, Go and get a potter's earthen bottle, and take of the ancients of the people, and of the ancients of the priests; ²And go forth unto the valley of the son of Hinnom, which is by the entry of the east gate, and proclaim there the words that I shall tell thee, ³And say, Hear ye the word of the Lord, O kings of Judah, and inhabitants of Jerusalem; Thus saith the Lord of hosts, the God of Israel; Behold, I will bring evil upon this place, the which whosoever heareth, his ears shall tingle. ⁴Because they have forsaken me, and have estranged this place, and have burned incense in it unto other gods, whom neither they nor their fathers have known, nor the kings of Judah, and have filled this place with the blood of innocents; ⁵They have built also the high places of Baal, to burn their sons with fire for burnt offerings unto Baal, which I commanded not, nor spake it, neither came it into my mind: ⁶Therefore, behold, the days come, saith the Lord, that this place shall no more be called Tophet, nor The valley of the son of Hinnom, but The valley of slaughter. ⁷And I will make void the counsel of Judah and Jerusalem in this place; and I will cause them to fall by the sword before their enemies, and by the hands of them that seek their lives: and their carcases will I give to be meat for the fowls of the heaven, and for the beasts of the earth. ⁸And I will make this city desolate, and an hissing; every one that passeth thereby shall be astonished and hiss because of all the plagues thereof. ⁹And I will cause them to eat the flesh of their sons and the flesh of their daughters, and they shall eat every one the flesh of his friend in the siege and straitness, wherewith their enemies, and they that seek their lives, shall straiten them. ¹⁰Then shalt thou break the bottle in the sight of the men that go with thee, ¹¹And shalt say unto them, Thus saith the Lord of hosts; Even so will I break this people and this city, as one breaketh a potter's vessel, that cannot be made whole again: and they shall bury them in Tophet, till there be no place to bury. ¹²Thus will I do unto this place, saith the Lord, and to the inhabitants thereof, and even make this city as Tophet: ¹³And the houses of Jerusalem, and the houses of the kings of Judah, shall be defiled as the place of Tophet, because of all the houses upon whose roofs they have burned incense unto all the host of heaven, and have poured out drink offerings unto other gods. ¹⁴Then came Jeremiah from Tophet, whither the Lord had sent him to prophesy; and he stood in the court of the Lord's house; and said to all the people, ¹⁵Thus saith the Lord of hosts, the God of Israel; Behold, I will bring upon this city and upon all her towns all the evil that I have pronounced against it, because they have hardened their necks, that they might not hear my words.” Jeremiah 19 (KJV).

Tophet is Ordained of Old

Isaiah 30:31-33

³¹For through the voice of the Lord shall the Assyrian be beaten down, which smote with a rod. ³²And in every place where the grounded staff shall pass, which the Lord shall lay upon him, it shall be with tabrets and harps: and in battles of shaking will he fight with it. ³³For Tophet is ordained of old; yea, for the king it is prepared; he hath made it deep and large: the pile thereof is fire and much wood; the breath of the Lord, like a stream of brimstone, doth kindle it.” Isaiah 30:31-33 (KJV).

And Tophet, according to Isaiah 30: 31-33, has been ordained of old; and, it was outside of Jerusalem: Tophet. So, this is another place, if you study these verses in your notes, where the King of the North comes to his end, at Tophet, outside of Jerusalem.

Round About Jerusalem

Joel 2:28 – 3:21

But, in Joel 2:28, we will look at Joel 2:28.

“^{chapter 2:28} And it shall come to pass afterward, that I will pour out my spirit upon all flesh; and your sons and your daughters shall prophesy, your old men shall dream dreams, your young men shall see visions: ²⁹And also upon the servants and upon the handmaids in those days will I pour out my spirit. ³⁰And I will shew wonders in the heavens and in the earth, blood, and fire, and pillars of smoke. ³¹The sun shall be turned into darkness, and the moon into blood, before the great and terrible day of the Lord come. ³²And it shall come to pass, that whosoever shall call on the name of the Lord shall be delivered: for in mount Zion and in Jerusalem shall be deliverance, as the Lord hath said, and in the remnant whom the Lord shall call. “^{chapter 3:1} For, behold, in those days, and in that time, when I shall bring again”—

And what is “bring again” mean in the Hebrew?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Reverse.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Reverse.

—“when I shall bring again [reverse] the captivity of Judah and Jerusalem, ²I will also gather all nations, and will bring them down into the valley of Jehoshaphat,”—

And what are all nations gathered for at this time? To attack Jerusalem; they are coming to attack Jerusalem. This is the King of the North.

—“²I will also gather all nations, and will bring them down into the valley of Jehoshaphat, and will plead with them there for my people and for my heritage Israel, whom they have scattered among the nations, and parted my land. ³And they have cast lots for my people; and have given a boy for an harlot, and sold a girl for wine, that they might drink. ⁴Yea, and what have ye to do with me, O Tyre, and Zidon, and all the coasts of Palestine? will ye render me a recompence? and if ye recompense me, swiftly and speedily will I return your recompence upon your own head; ⁵Because ye have taken my silver and my gold, and have carried into your temples my goodly pleasant things: ⁶The children also of Judah and the children of Jerusalem have ye sold unto the Grecians, that ye might remove them far from their border.”—

And I hope you are seeing—we have not been mentioning it—that in this time period, what is happening to God’s people? They are being persecuted. They are being scattered. They are being taken captive.

Verse 7:

—“⁷Behold, I will raise them out of the place whither ye have sold them, and will return your recompence upon your own head:”—

And here it is referencing the Valley of Jehoshaphat, but this is happening all around the world to God’s people. So, this is not the literal Valley of Jehoshaphat. This is a spiritual war.

Verse 8:

—“⁸And I will sell your sons and your daughters into the hand of the children of Judah,”—

Here are the eleventh-hour workers.

—“and they shall sell them to the Sabeans, to a people far off: for the Lord hath spoken it.

“⁹Proclaim ye this among the Gentiles; Prepare war, wake up the mighty men, let all the men of war draw near; let them come up: ¹⁰Beat your plowshares into swords and your pruninghooks into spears: let the weak say, I am strong. ¹¹Assemble yourselves, and come, all ye heathen, and gather yourselves together round about: thither cause thy mighty ones to come down, O Lord. ¹²Let the heathen be wakened, and come up to the valley of Jehoshaphat: for there will I sit to judge all the heathen round about. ¹³Put ye in the sickle, for the harvest is ripe: come, get you down; for the press is full, the fats overflow; for their wickedness is great. ¹⁴Multitudes, multitudes in the valley of decision:”—

So, what is the Valley of Jehoshaphat?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The valley of decision.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: It is the valley of decision.

—“for the day of the Lord is near in the valley of decision. ¹⁵The sun and the moon shall be darkened, and the stars shall withdraw their shining. ¹⁶The Lord also shall roar out of Zion, and utter his voice from Jerusalem; and the heavens and the earth shall shake: but the Lord will be the hope of his people, and the strength of the children of Israel. ¹⁷So shall ye know that I am the Lord your God dwelling in Zion, my holy mountain: then shall Jerusalem be holy, and there shall no strangers pass through her any more.

“¹⁸And it shall come to pass in that day, that the mountains shall drop down new wine, and the hills shall flow with milk, and all the rivers of Judah shall flow with waters, and a fountain shall come forth out of the house of the Lord, and shall water the valley of Shittim. ¹⁹Egypt shall be a desolation, and Edom shall be a desolate wilderness, for the violence against the children of Judah, because they have shed innocent blood in their land. ²⁰But Judah shall dwell for ever, and Jerusalem from generation to generation. ²¹For I will cleanse their blood that I have not cleansed: for the Lord dwelleth in Zion.” Joel 2:28 – 3:21 (KJV).

JEHOSHAPHAT: “Yaweh judges.” The Kidrom valley, between Jerusalem and the mount of Olives.

JEHOSHAPHAT means “Yaweh judges.” It is the Kidrom Valley, between Jerusalem and the Mount of Olives. It is also outside of Jerusalem.

When the King of the North comes to his end, he comes to his end outside Jerusalem.

Mount Perazim (1 Chronicles 14:9-17; 2 Samuel 5:17-20)

Isaiah 28:21-22

You have the references for Perazim there, if you want to look at it more in-depth on your own time, from 1 Chronicles 14:9-17; and 2 Samuel 5:17-20.

But in Isaiah 28, beginning at verse 21, it says,

“²¹For the Lord shall rise up as in mount Perazim, he shall be wroth as in the valley of Gibeon, that he may do his work, his strange work; and bring to pass his act, his strange act. ²²Now therefore be ye not mockers, lest your bands be made strong: for I have heard from the Lord God of hosts a consumption, even determined upon the whole earth.” Isaiah 28:21-22 (KJV).

And “the whole earth” here is represented as Mount Perazim in Gibeon.

GIBEON: six miles northwest of Jerusalem.

And, Gibeon, it is six miles northwest of Jerusalem.

So, the places where the Bible identifies the King of the North coming to his end with none to help is outside Jerusalem. He never makes it into the glorious holy mountain.

And when you are considering Armageddon, which we will do tomorrow, that the Beast; the Dragon; and the False Prophet—the King of the North in verse 40; the King of the South in verse 40; and the chariots, ships, and horsemen in verse 40—the Dragon is the King of the South; the Papacy is the King of the North; and the United States is the chariots, ships, and horsemen. Those three powers lead the world to Armageddon, to Megiddo. They lead the world to Daniel 11, verses 40 through 45. And the work of leading the world to Armageddon, which is a big story, that story begins in Daniel 11, verse 40.

Shall we pray?

Benediction: Heavenly Father, we thank you that abundant light has been given that you can illustrate the sequence of events here at the end of the world so that we can know for a certainty what is going to take place and not be unprepared to meet the marvelous working of Satan in the near future. We want to be full of your Word that we can be fortified to stand in that time period; but, we also want to be full of your Word that we have a winning message to share with those that we come in contact with. We ask that you would protect us in our daily service this day, and that you would prepare divine appointments for each of us that we can come in contact with someone that needs the Word in due season; and, we ask a continued blessing upon the work that we are doing here with the DVDs and the LiveStreaming. In Jesus’s name, amen.

Habakkuk’s Two Tables #47

PART SIX: 1989

Presented by Jeff Pippenger

Invocation by Brother Jeff Pippenger: Heavenly Father, we thank you for a good night’s rest, and we thank you for bringing us together to study your Word this morning. Some of our group are traveling. We ask for traveling mercies this morning. And as we take up the study of the Word, we ask that you grant us the guidance and presence of your Holy Spirit, that you would watch over the work that we are doing here, that you would prepare our hearts and minds for the light that you have for us this morning, that you would take control of my thinking process that it would be used to glorify you and present the truth and not be corrupted with human thoughts. We know that we are living in the time of the Latter Rain, so we ask that you would pour your Latter Rain out upon us so that we can continue to study the implications of Daniel 11, verse 40. In Jesus’s name, amen.

Armageddon

Three Parts

Revelation 16:12-19

BROTHER PIPPENGER: We want to begin this morning with Revelation 16. We are going to deal with Armageddon this morning.

Revelation 16, speaking about the Sixth Vial in verse 12. It says,

“¹²And the sixth angel poured out his vial upon the great river Euphrates; and the water thereof was dried up, that the way of the kings of the east might be prepared. ¹³And I saw three unclean spirits like frogs come out of the mouth of the dragon, and out of the mouth of the beast, and out of the mouth of the false prophet. ¹⁴For they are the spirits of devils, working miracles, which go forth unto the kings of the earth and of the whole world, to gather them to the battle of that great day of God Almighty. ¹⁵Behold, I come as a thief. Blessed is he that watcheth, and keepeth his garments, lest he walk naked, and they see his shame. ¹⁶And he gathered them together into a place called in the Hebrew tongue Armageddon. ¹⁷And the seventh angel poured out his vial into the air; and there came a great voice out of the temple of heaven, from the throne, saying, It is done.

¹⁸And there were voices, and thunders, and lightnings; and there was a great earthquake, such as was not since men were upon the earth, so mighty an earthquake, and so great. ¹⁹And the great city was divided into three parts, and the cities of the nations fell: and great Babylon came in remembrance before God, to give unto her the cup of the wine of the fierceness of his wrath.” Revelation 16:12-19 (KJV).

The reason why we went to verse 19 is we are wanting to identify that in verse 19 the great city Babylon, modern Babylon, is divided into three parts. Modern Babylon is not simply Babylon that sits on the Euphrates. Modern Babylon is a city, a kingdom. We have already established that a city in Bible prophecy is a kingdom in this worship series.

And by the way, we have pretty much reached the halfway mark in this worship series, and I intend to do a lot less of defending every little point along the way now. There will be some things that we have already established several times, and there will be some things that we have not established but we have established the technique of prophetic interpretation that we are using as we study these things. So, for the critics, the honest critics, these techniques we have identified early on in this worship series. We have used them more than once to establish truths, so I am not going to perpetually repeat these principles and make the defense. We are going to begin to study this information at a different level.

So, what we are saying is, we have already established that a city in Bible prophecy is a kingdom; and, in verse 19 great Babylon, the modern Babylon at the end of the world—and certainly this is modern Babylon at the end of the world—that is going to enter the Seven Last Plagues. We are told in verse 19 that it is divided into three parts. And the three parts that it is divided into are noted in verse 13 as the Dragon, the Beast, and the False Prophet.

Okay. It is not important to this study, but as you go through the Book of Revelation, you will find that every time that the Dragon, the Beast, and the False Prophet are referenced, they are always referenced in that order. The Dragon was the first that came into history, and then the Beast came into history in AD538, and then the False Prophet (the United States) comes in at the end. And when the Revelator mentions these three powers, however he does it, it is always in this order.

So, what we are saying is, is that 1989 is the end of William Miller’s dream, and that is when the Lion of the tribe of Judah unseals the prophetic testing message for the 144,000 at the end of the world.

At the Time of the End, every Reform Movement is a fulfillment of a prophecy. We are saying that verse 40 of Daniel 11, identifying the collapse of the Soviet Union, is that prophecy that is fulfilled, that marks the Time of the End for the 144,000.

1798 Sunday Law Egypt ARMAGEDDON

VERSES FORTY , FORTY-ONE FORTY-THREE, Dan 11:44 – 12:1

Figure No. 91.

And although we have not proven verse 41 is The Sunday Law yet—we will do that in our next presentation, the Lord willing—we are saying that verse 40 of Daniel 11 begins in 1798 at the Time of the End, and it goes until verse 41, which is The Sunday Law; and, therefore, the history that verse 40 covers is from AD1798 to The Sunday Law in the United States.

And we have taken some time in our previous presentations to identify that in verse 40 there are three powers. There is the King of the North (that is the Papacy); there is the United States (represented by the chariots, ships, and horsemen); and, there is the Dragon power (represented as the King of the South).

So, when you are looking at the Beast, and the Dragon, and the False Prophet and their activities, their roles in leading the world to Armageddon, down here in the Seven Last Plagues, where does that story begin? It begins in Daniel 11, verse 40. Those three powers are in verse 40 of Daniel 11. And the whole structure of the last six verses of Daniel 11 is based upon the interaction of the Beast, the Dragon, and the False Prophet.

So, if you have a desire or are convicted that you need to understand Armageddon, then you need to understand Daniel 11, verse 40.

ARMAGEDDON: Har: “mountain”. Megeddon: “assembly”, possibly “congregation”, “slaughter”. Megiddo: The plain of Esdralon at the foot of the Carmel ridge on the northeastern side.

Okay. ARMAGEDDON you have in your notes. It is made up of two words, Har, meaning “mountain,” and Megeddon, meaning “assembly,” “congregation,” or “slaughter”: The mountain of the assembly, the mountain of the slaughter.

Yesterday we illustrated on the board that just below the Carmel ridge is Megiddo, and it is just next to the Mediterranean Sea and just above the Sea of Galilee, and just off to the right of the Dead Sea, at least on our map. Megiddo is between the seas and Jerusalem, the glorious holy mountain; and, this is where the King of the North comes to his end with none to help in Daniel 11:44 through Daniel 12:1.

We have mentioned before the fact that John the Revelator calls Megiddo the Mountain of Megiddo, to make sure that the student of prophecy understands that Armageddon is not a literal place, for there is no mountain in Megiddo. So, John the Revelator purposely uses an inconsistency in the geography of that area to make sure the student understands that this is a spiritual war at the end, not a literal war.

A Company Who Have Been Deceived

Notice the next quote, Manuscript Releases, number 17, page 18.

“God has warned His people of the perils before them. John beholds the things which will be in the last days, and he sees a people working counter to God. Read Revelation 12:17; 14:10–13, and chapters 17 and 13.”—

Revelation 12:17 talks about Satan being angry with the remnant of her seed.

Revelation 14:10-13 is where the punishment of those that receive the mark of the beast is noted.

Revelation 17 identifies the threefold union of the Beast, the Dragon, and the False Prophet; and, it marks how the Papacy is judged in that history.

And, of course, Revelation 13 describes how the United States is the False Prophet that forces the whole world to accept the image of the beast and receive the mark of the beast.

So, Sister White is focusing in the very message of the Third Angel in this passage.

Back to the beginning, it says,

—“God has warned His people of the perils before them.”—

This is emphasizing a warning message.

—“John beholds the things which will be in the last days, and he sees a people working counter to God. Read Revelation 12:17; 14:10–13, and chapters 17 and 13. John sees the company who have been deceived.”—

I would submit to you that this all of mankind that is lost; but, the first company to be deceived we have already noted in this study is Adventism which receives strong delusion just prior to The Sunday Law.

Continuing on:

—“He says, ‘I saw three unclean spirits like frogs come out of the mouth of the dragon, and out of the mouth of the beast, and out of the mouth of the false prophet. For they are the spirits of devils, working miracles, which go forth unto the kings of the earth and of the whole world, to gather them to the battle of that great day of God Almighty. Behold, I come as a thief. Blessed is he that watcheth, and keepeth his garments, lest he walk naked, and they see his shame.’” Manuscript Release, number 17, 18.

What I want you to see in this passage, if you will, is Sister White is using Revelation 16 and the story of the Beast, and the Dragon, and the False Prophet to identify a warning message, and she is giving a second testimony to this warning; because, in Revelation 16, verse 15, it says, “Blessed is he that watcheth and keepeth his garments, . . .” So, Sister White is citing this passage in Revelation 16 in saying this is a warning message; and, here in verse 15, it is saying that it is a warning message. It is saying, “Blessed are you that keep your garments,” thus implying that there is a possibility for you to lose your garments. But this cannot be so in the time of the Plagues.

When Michael stands up in Daniel 12:1, human probation closes. The garments I am wearing are either the garments of my self-righteousness or the garments of Christ’s righteousness. And when He stands up, “he that is unjust, let him be unjust still; and, he that is just, let him be just still.” You do not change garments after Michael stands up. And once Michael stands up, then begins the Seven Last Plagues.

And here in the Sixth Vial, the Sixth Plague, in verse 15 there is a warning, “Blessed is he that keepeth his garments,” and Sister White is emphasizing the warning of these three powers. So, how is it that the subject of the Beast, and the Dragon, and the False Prophet is a warning message?

Okay. For me, it is a warning message. It is saying that you need to understand how and who, what are the powers that lead the world to Armageddon! And if you are going to understand those powers and the work that is accomplished by those powers as they lead the world to Armageddon—and leading the world to Armageddon means leading the world to a place where two classes are finalized. And in Daniel’s terminology, in verse 45 the two classes: the glorious holy mountain, God’s Church; and, the seas, the rest of the world. It is this march to Armageddon that divides the world into two classes, with no third class. There is no one else making any decisions. Every decision has been made.

And it is a warning to Seventh-day Adventists before it happens that you need to understand who the Beast, the Dragon, and the False Prophet are and what are their activities in accomplishing this work.

And if this is so—and it is so!—then you need to understand Daniel 11, verse 40; because, in Daniel 11, verse 40, that is where these three powers begin the work of leading the world to Armageddon.

So, when we are saying that in 1989, the Time of the End for the 144,000 was fulfilled and the Dirt Brush Man comes in and begins to remove the traditions and customs that have been handed down in Adventism, preventing people from understanding where we are in the flow of history, verse 40 is the verse that begins to tell the story about how the world ends up in Armageddon. And if you do not understand the beginning of the story, then how can you understand the story at all? Jesus illustrates the end with the beginning.

So, what am I saying? I am saying that verse 40, which identifies the Time of the End, it has got many, many important truths that God’s people have to wrap their minds around. And that is why in The Great Controversy, when she says, “The events connected with the close of probation and the need of preparation in the time of trouble have been clearly revealed, but multitudes—my words: in Adventism—do not understand these truths,” they do not understand verse 40 is identifying the beginning of the march to Armageddon, among other things.

So, let us look a little at these three powers.

The Dragon, the Beast, and the False Prophet

Signs of the Times, November 1, 1899:

“Under the symbols of a great red dragon, a leopard-like beast, and a beast with lamblike horns,”—

Where do we find these symbols?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Revelation 12 and 13.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Revelation 12 and 13.

But, who are these symbols?

Who is the great red dragon? Well, that is easy. It is the Dragon.

Who is the leopard-like beast? That is the Beast.

And, who is the lamb-like beast? That is the False Prophet.

And do you notice what order they are in? Dragon, Beast, and False Prophet.

No matter how they are illustrated in The Revelation, they are always in that order.

—“Under the symbols of a great red dragon, a leopard-like beast, and a beast with lamblike horns, the earthly governments which would especially engage in trampling upon God’s law and persecuting His people, were presented to John.”—

What is the great red dragon?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Pagan Rome.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: It is an earthly government. She just said so. The dragon is an earthly government. So is the leopard-like beast, and so is the beast with lamb-like horns.

The dragon is many things; but, I want you to see here that she is identifying it as an earthly government.

—“The war is carried on till the close of time. The people of God, symbolized by a holy woman and her children, were represented as greatly in the minority. In the last days only a remnant still existed. Of these John speaks as they ‘which keep the commandments of God, and have the testimony of Jesus Christ.’

“Through paganism, and then through the Papacy, Satan exerted his power for many centuries in an effort to blot from the earth God’s faithful witnesses. Pagans and papists were actuated by the same dragon spirit. They differed only in that the Papacy, making a pretense of serving God, was the more dangerous and cruel foe.”—

Wow! How can the Papacy be the more cruel foe when you remember the activities of men like Nero and Diocletian. You know, the historians say that after the reign of Diocletian there was a meeting of the Christians that came together of whom—I forget the leader there, the Christian leader’s name. It is not important to my point—but of all the people, all the Christians that came to this gathering, there were virtually none of them that were whole: this guy’s eyes had been put out; this guy’s tongue had been cut out; this guy’s legs were gone, and this guy’s hands were gone. Okay. That was the cruelty of Pagan Rome; but, Sister White says the Papacy was more cruel.

Okay. What does that tell you? That persecution is progressively worse. The persecution that takes place at the end of the world, it is going to be enhanced by modern techniques of persecution.

Starting over at the second paragraph,

—“Through paganism, and then through the Papacy, Satan exerted his power for many centuries in an effort to blot from the earth God’s faithful witnesses. Pagans and papists were actuated by the same dragon spirit. They differed only in that the Papacy, making a pretense of serving God, was the more dangerous and cruel foe. Through the agency of Romanism, Satan took the world captive. The professed church of God was swept into the ranks of this delusion, and for more than a thousand years the people of God suffered under the dragon’s ire.”—

Now, here is the point of this passage.

—“And when the Papacy, robbed of its strength, was forced to desist from persecution,”—

When was the Papacy robbed of its strength? 1798.

—“when the Papacy, robbed of its strength, was forced to desist from persecution, John beheld a new power coming up to echo the dragon’s voice, and carry forward the same cruel and blasphemous work. This power, the last that is to wage war against the church and the law of God, was symbolized by a beast with lamblike horns.

“But the stern tracing of the prophetic pencil reveals a change in this peaceful scene. The beast with lamblike horns speaks with the voice of a dragon, and ‘exerciseth all the power of the first beast before him.’”—

What in the world does that mean?

The next sentence:

—“Prophecy declares that he will say to them that dwell on the earth that they should make an image to the beast, and that “he causeth all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads; and that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark, or the name of the beast, or the number of his name.” Thus Protestantism follows in the steps of the Papacy.” Signs of the Times, November 1, 1899.

There are a few things that I want you to see here.

Sister White just said that John received the vision of Revelation 13 in 1798, which was when the Papacy was robbed of its strength John beheld a new power coming up out of the Earth.

HISTORY OF REVELATION 13:11 (Also the History of the United States)

1798 Sunday Law

Revelation 13:11

Figure No. 92.

So, that new power is marked in Revelation 13:11. It is the lamb-like beast. It is the United States. And ultimately in verse 11, the United States speaks as the dragon, and we have already made the point, and we are going to make it again, that the speaking of the United States as a dragon takes place at The Sunday Law; therefore, it is important to see that the same history of verse 40 is the history of Revelation 13:11. It is the identical history.

You know, some of these people that fight this message, they are saying, “There are over 200 years’ history in verse 40. How ridiculous is that?”

Well, it is the same amount of time that is in verse 11 of Revelation 13.

And why is this important? It does not matter if you understand why it is important. You can tell it is important just from the fact that the Lord has given us a second witness to this identical history. That has to mean something.

Okay. It says the United States, when it is speaking about the United States, it is going to exercise the same powers of the beast before it. That is verse 12.

Go to Revelation 13. Verse 11 is the United States of Revelation 13. In verse 12 it says,

“¹²And he exerciseth all the power of the first beast before him, . . .” What is the power of the first beast before him?

I mean, Sister White is taking this quote and emphasizing this aspect of the United States; therefore, it is being identified in Inspiration as a characteristic of the United States that we are to understand. So, what is the power of the first beast?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Persecution.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Church and state.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Persecution; church and state? Okay, close.

Go to Revelation 13, verse 2.

“²And the beast which I saw was like unto a leopard,”—

Who is the leopard beast?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Papacy?

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Papacy.

—“and his feet were as the feet of a bear, and his mouth as the mouth of a lion; and the dragon”—

Who is the dragon?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Pagan Rome.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Pagan Rome, Pagan Rome.

—“and the dragon gave him power, and his seat, and great authority.” Revelation 13:2 (KJV).”

And the dragon gave him three things, his what?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: His power.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Hmm. Can he exercise the same power as the beast before him?

What was the power that was exercised before him?

HISTORY OF THE RISE OF THE PAPACY

Clovis

AD330 496 533

Figure No. 93.

Well, the dragon, remember, the dragon gives three things to the Papacy; and, it removes three things from the Papacy. It removes three horns, but it gives three things to the Papacy. It gives him his seat. In the year AD330 Constantine moves the capitol of the Roman Empire to Constantinople, leaving a spiritual vacuum in the City of Rome that the Papacy gobbles up. It gives him his seat to rule from. It did that in AD330.

It gave him his civil authority in 533 when the Emperor Justinian wrote a decree identifying the Pope of Rome as the head of the church and the Corrector of Heretics, and legally and technically from that point on the Pope of Rome can turn to the Emperor of Rome and say, “You are a heretic. Off with your head!” The civil authority has been given to the Papacy in 533.

But, when was it that the power was given to the Papacy by the dragon? 496.

And who gave the power to the Papacy; who is the historical figure?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Clovis.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Clovis, king of France, formed a church-state relationship with the Papacy in 496 and began to use his military strength to place the Papacy on the throne of the Earth.

TIMELINE OF DANIEL 11:40 – 12:1

1798 Sunday Law Egypt ARMAGEDDON

USA (France)

Reagan (Clovis)

POWER

VERSES FORTY , FORTY-ONE FORTY-THREE, Dan 11:44 – 12:1

Figure No. 94.

So, when it says in verse 12 of Revelation 13 that the United States is going to exercise the power of the beast before it, what is the power?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Military.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Military strength.

So, where is it that we can identify in prophecy that the United States begins to exercise its military power to place the Papacy on the throne of the Earth?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: In Daniel 11, verse 40.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: In verse 40 [see Figure No. 93].

(Interruption of electrical power during presentation.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: This must be an important point.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Yes, it is.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: All right?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Laughter.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: I think it is, but I never realized that it was so important that it would infuriate Satan to this extent.

I have seen people fight this truth that I am going to share with you; so, it may very well be that important.

The power of the United States begins to be exercised for the Papacy by Ronald Reagan in his time period; therefore, who typifies Ronald Reagan?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Clovis.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Clovis.

Therefore, who typifies the United States?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: France.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Who is France part of?

(Restoration of electrical power during presentation.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Who is France a part of?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Ten Kingdoms.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Ten Kingdoms of who? Pagan Rome.

France is part of the dragon power that placed the Papacy on the throne of the Earth.

So, what I want you to see when it comes to the United States, they are going to exercise the same power as the beast before it, and that power, if you are going to be a student of prophecy and you are going to give a second testimony to Revelation 13:12 to where the United States begins to exercise the power to place the Papacy on the throne of the Earth, what do you need to understand? Daniel 11, verse 40.

Okay. Daniel 11, verse 40, is one of the most profound verses in the Bible. Not only does it begin the march to Armageddon but it is your second witness to the work of the United States in placing the Papacy on the throne of the Earth.

And as the second witness to that work, it identifies the same history as Revelation 13:11, which is the history of the United States.

There are just profound and specific connections here!

Chariots, Horsemen, and Ships

The False Prophet—Revelation 13:11-18

Okay. Now go to Revelation 13, if you are not already there.

Speaking of the United States, starting in verse 11 it says,

“¹¹And I beheld another beast coming up out of the earth; and he had two horns like a lamb, and he spake as a dragon.”—

The speaking of the United States is The Sunday Law. Okay? We are going to show that to you. We have already shown that in this worship service.

After The Sunday Law, therefore, in verse 11, there is going to be further development. And it says,

—“¹²And he [the United States] exerciseth all the power of the first beast before him, and causeth the earth and them which dwell therein to worship the first beast, whose deadly wound was healed.”—

How is the United States going to force the world to worship the Papacy? It is going to use its military and economic might. It is going to exercise the same power as Clovis, who used his military and economic might.

Verse 13:

—“¹³And he doeth great wonders, so that he maketh fire come down from heaven on the earth in the sight of men,”—

Who makes fire come down out of heaven, from yesterday’s presentation?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Elijah.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Satan. Elijah did, but Satan here at the end.

But, we also read a quote yesterday, if you noticed it, that his representatives are going to perform these miracles, too. The United States is his representative in this.

What are the miracles of the United States?

How does the United States make fire come down out of heaven? You have got military fire power.

What else?

What is the religion of the United States? It is apostate Protestantism. But, apostate Protestantism, it is going to receive strong delusion. Those people in apostate Protestantism that do not come out of Babylon and be the eleventh-hour workers and stand with God’s people, they are going to be just as deluded as anyone else that rejects the truth.

And how does Satan capture apostate Protestantism? The Pentecostal Movement.

What is the symbol of the Pentecostal Movement? Speaking in tongues, fire coming down out of heaven.

So, this verse 13, it has a lot of ways that we can see it; but, this is about the United States.

Verse 14:

—“¹⁴And deceiveth”—

Who deceiveth? Who deceives here in verse 14? The United States.

—“¹⁴And [the United States] deceiveth them that dwell on the earth”—

Does that mean them that dwell in England? Does it mean them that dwell in Africa? The Earth! Sister White says every nation will be involved. The United States is going to deceive the entire world.

—“¹⁴And deceiveth them that dwell on the earth by the means of those miracles which he had power to do in the sight of the beast; saying to them that dwell on the earth, that they should make an image to the beast,”—

Saying to the world, to the world!

—“that they should make an image to the beast which had the wound by a sword, and did live.”—

Now, Brother and Sisters, this means there are two images of the beast in Revelation 13; because, in order for the Protestants of the United States to pass a Sunday Law through the Government of the United States, they first have to form an image of the beast here in the United States because the image of the beast is the combination of church and state, with the church in control of the relationship. And until the Protestants have control of the state, the Government of the United States, they cannot pass a Sunday Law.

But, when they pass The Sunday Law, when the United States speaks as a dragon, it is marking that the image of the beast has been fully developed in the United States,

But this image of the beast is not the image of the beast in the United States. This is the image of the beast in the entire world; and, there is only one definition of the image of the beast. It is the combination of church and state. So, there is going to be a One World Government that is going to consist of church and state.

And in verse 15, it says,

—“¹⁵And he [the United States] had power to give life unto the image of the beast,”—to this One World Government—“that the image of the beast should both speak,”—

The speaking of a nation is an action of its legislative and judicial authorities. This One World Government that the United States is going to force the world to set up is going to have a legislative branch which is in New York City, and a judicial branch which is in Holland. It is already here.

—“and cause that as many as would not worship the image of the beast should be killed. ¹⁶And he causeth all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads: ¹⁷And that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark, or the name of the beast, or the number of his name. ¹⁸Here is wisdom. Let him that hath understanding count the number of the beast: for it is the number of a man; and his number is Six hundred threescore and six.” Revelation 13:11-18 (KJV).

TIMELINE OF DANIEL 11:40 – 12:1

1798 1989 Sunday Law Egypt ARMAGEDDON

USA (France)

Reagan (Clovis)

POWER

VERSES FORTY, FORTY-ONE FORTY-THREE, Dan 11:44 – 12:1

HISTORY OF REVELATION 13:11 (Also the History of the United States)

1798 Sunday Law Church & State

Revelation 13:11

Figure No. 95.

So, what I am saying is, after The Sunday Law in the United States, it goes out to the entire world. And we have not shown it yet, but in Daniel 11, verses 42 and 43, the world is represented by Egypt. It goes out to the world and tells them that they must set up an image of the beast, which is church and state—right?—and it is going to bring this One World Government to life by its power.

And this story in Revelation 13, it is the identical story in the last six verses of Daniel 11 [referencing Figure No. 94]. It is in the same sequence. It is telling the same story, using different symbols.

Declaration of Independence—1776; the Constitution—1787;

the Bill of Rights—1791; National Sovereignty recognized

by the nations of the world—1798

Okay. Let us remember the United States. I have this in your notes.

• The Declaration of Independence was 1776.

• The Constitution was ratified in 1787.

• The Bill of Rights were ratified in 1791.

• And, the National sovereignty of the United States was recognized by the other nations of the world in 1798. This is when the United States becomes a legal country; and, this is when the United States is marked as the sixth kingdom of Bible prophecy.

Sister White says this, The Great Controversy, pages 440 – 442:

“What nation of the New World was in 1798 rising into power, giving promise of strength and greatness, and attracting the attention of the world? The application of the symbol admits of no question. One nation, and only one, meets the specifications of this prophecy;”—

And if you are like most Seventh-day Adventists and you have not studied these things because you just did not think you needed to be a student of prophecy, then you probably do not realize that there are all kinds of foolish ideas in Adventism about who the sixth kingdom is in Revelation 17, and it is identified often as other than the United States of America in spite of the fact that in Revelation 13 you have the leopard-like beast of the Papacy followed by the United States. How hard is that one?! But, Sister White here is saying when it comes to the history of 1798, “One nation and one nation only,” it seems like to me she is trying to emphasize the fact that you can only mark the United States in 1798.

—“One nation, and only one, meets the specifications of this prophecy, it points”—vaguely?

Is that what she says?

—“it points unmistakably to the United States of America. Again and again the thought, almost the exact words, of the sacred writer has been unconsciously employed by the orator and the historian in describing the rise and growth of this nation.”—

You will notice that I have the last words of that sentence highlighted. Why do I do that? Why do you think I have that emphasized for you?

Because, you may have not understood it because I never said anything about it. I have said things about it, but not in this regard. The fact that the historians are using the very words from Daniel 11, verse 40, to describe the collapse of the Soviet Union is exactly what Sister White is emphasizing here, that the historians that mark the arrival of the United States in prophecy, they use the same words from Revelation 13 to do so; thus, Sister White is telling us that when the historians record the history that is a fulfillment of prophecy, that even though they may be worldlinga to the fullest extent, the Lord still directs them in choosing words that allows the student of prophecy to make the connection, and that connection is made in the history of the collapse of the Soviet Union as well in the history of the United States.

—“The beast was seen ‘coming up out of the earth;’ and, according to the translators, the word here rendered ‘coming up’ literally signifies ‘to grow or spring up as a plant.’ And, as we have seen, the nation must arise in territory previously unoccupied. A prominent writer, describing the rise of the United States, speaks of ‘the mystery of her coming forth from vacancy,’ and says: ‘Like a silent seed we grew into empire.’—G. A. Townsend, The New World Compared With the Old, page 462. A European journal in 1850 spoke of the United States as a wonderful empire, which was ‘emerging,’ and ‘amid the silence of the earth daily adding to its power and pride.’—The Dublin Nation. Edward Everett, in an oration on the Pilgrim founders of this nation, said: ‘Did they look for a retired spot, inoffensive for its obscurity, and safe in its remoteness, where the little church of Leyden might enjoy the freedom of conscience? Behold the mighty regions over which, in peaceful conquest, . . . they have borne the banners of the cross!’—Speech delivered at Plymouth, Massachusetts, December 22, 1824, page 11. 371

“‘And he had two horns like a lamb.’ The lamblike horns indicate youth, innocence, and gentleness, fitly representing the character of the United States when presented to the prophet as ‘coming up’ in 1798. Among the Christian exiles who first fled to America and sought an asylum from royal oppression and priestly intolerance were many who determined to establish a government upon the broad foundation of civil and religious liberty.”—

Often Seventh-day Adventists emphasize that the pilgrims came to the United States to escape the Papal authority, but sometimes we forget that they were also running away from royal authority. They were running away from a corrupt church and a corrupt state. That is what it is all about: church/state corruption.

—“Their views found place in the Declaration of Independence, which sets forth the great truth that ‘all men are created equal’ and endowed with the inalienable right to ‘life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness.’ And the Constitution guarantees to the people the right of self-government, providing that representatives elected by the popular vote shall enact and administer the laws. Freedom of religious faith was also granted, every man being permitted to worship God according to the dictates of his conscience. Republicanism and Protestantism became the fundamental principles of the nation. These principles are the secret of its power and prosperity.”—

What is the secret of the power and prosperity of the United States? Republicanism and Protestantism.

And where is that secret preserved?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: In the Constitution.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Constitution; it is the Constitution that preserves the secret that makes the United States what it is; and, at the end of the world, it no longer is. Its powers at the end of the world are not Republicanism and Protestantism. It is changed. It is military and economic strength; it is chariots and horsemen and ships.

—“The oppressed and downtrodden throughout Christendom have turned to this land with interest and hope. Millions have sought its shores, and the United States has risen to a place among the most powerful nations of the earth.

“But the beast with lamblike horns ‘spake as a dragon. And he exerciseth all the power of the first beast before him, and causeth the earth and them which dwell therein to worship the first beast, whose deadly wound was healed; . . . saying to them that dwell on the earth, that they should make an image to the beast, which had the wound by a sword, and did live.’ Revelation 13:11–14.

“The lamblike horns and dragon voice of the symbol point to a striking contradiction between the professions and the practice of the nation thus represented. The ‘speaking’ of the nation is the action of its legislative and judicial authorities. By such action it will give the lie to those liberal and peaceful principles which it has put forth as the foundation of its policy. The prediction that it will speak ‘as a dragon’ and exercise ‘all the power of the first beast’ plainly foretells a development of the spirit of intolerance and persecution that was manifested by the nations represented by the dragon and the leopardlike beast. And the statement that the beast with two horns ‘causeth the earth and them which dwell therein to worship the first beast’ indicates that the authority of this nation is to be exercised in enforcing some observance which shall be an act of homage to the papacy.” The Great Controversy, 440–442.

The Great Controversy, pages 448 – 449:

“The enforcement of Sundaykeeping on the part of Protestant churches is an enforcement of the worship of the papacy—of the beast. Those who, understanding the claims of the fourth commandment, choose to observe the false instead of the true Sabbath are thereby paying homage to that power by which alone it is commanded.”—

If you do not understand this, you need to understand these next few thoughts.

—“But in the very act of enforcing a religious duty by secular power, the churches would themselves form an image to the beast;”—

So, when they pass The Sunday Law, what have they just formed?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The image of the beast.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The image of the beast.

So, there are two images of the beasts in Revelation 13, even if people do not want to acknowledge it. Verse 11, when it speaks as a dragon, it is The Sunday Law; and, the image of the beast has been fully developed in the United States. Then it goes to the world and it tells the world in verse 14, “You need to do the same thing that we’ve just done.”

—“But in the very act of enforcing a religious duty by secular power, the churches would themselves form an image to the beast; hence the enforcement of Sundaykeeping in the United States would be an enforcement of the worship of the beast and his image.” The Great Controversy, 448–449.

Page 445 of The Great Controversy says,

“The ‘image to the beast’ represents that form of apostate Protestantism which will be developed when the Protestant churches shall seek the aid of the civil power for the enforcement of their dogmas. The ‘mark of the beast’ still remains to be defined.” The Great Controversy, 445.

Therefore, the mark of the beast and the image of the beast are two different things. The mark of the beast is Sunday observance. The image of the beast is the combination of church and state, with the church in control of the relationship.

The Great Controversy, page 443:

“But what is the ‘image to the beast’? and how is it to be formed? The image is made by the two-horned beast, and is an image to the beast. It is also called an image of the beast.”—

It is going to operate the same way the Papacy of the past operated; therefore, it is an image of the Papacy, “it is an image of the beast.” But, by making this image, it is bowing down to the beast; so, “it is an image to the beast”; it is an offering to the beast. It is an acknowledgement that “We want to be like you are.” It is both.

—“It is also called an image of the beast. Then to learn what the image is like and how it is to be formed we must study the characteristics of the beast itself—the papacy.

“When the early church became corrupted by departing from the simplicity of the gospel and accepting heathen rites and customs, she lost the Spirit and power of God; and in order to control the consciences of the people, she sought the support of the secular power. The result was the papacy, a church that controlled the power of the state and employed it to further her own ends, especially for the punishment of ‘heresy.’”—

“. . . especially for the punishment of ‘heresy.” Especially for the punishment of heresy.

In fact, if you read the Catechism, it lays out the various types of worship that the Catholic Church does; and, the Catholic Church in Vatican II, the buzz word for these rituals is called “Celebration.” They celebrate this and they celebrate that; they celebrate this.

But, what is the highest form of Celebration that is marked in the Catechism for the Catholic Church?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Indiscernible responses.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The punishment of heretics.

But, is that not the highest form of worship for Paganism, is burning your children at the altar of Molech? It is the highest form of worship, according to the Catechism, is the punishment of heretics.

That is why she says, “especially for the punishment of ‘heresy.’”

—“In order for the United States to form an image of the beast, the religious power must so control the civil government that the authority of the state will also be employed by the church to accomplish her own ends.” The Great Controversy, 443.

Okay. I am hoping you are seeing that this history here of verse 11 is the same history of Daniel 11, verse 40. It goes from 1798 to The Sunday Law.

But, this history of verse 40, it is emphasizing the movements of the King of the North, the Papacy. But, this history of Revelation 13:11, it is emphasizing the movements of the False Prophet (the United States). It is a twofold look at the same history.

Then comes The Sunday Law, and the United States is fully disconnected from righteousness, and it is going to go out to the whole world and say, “You need to set up a One World Government that is a combination of church and state with the Pope of Rome in control of the relationship.” And that is paralleling verses 42 and 43 of Daniel 11. I have not shown that yet. I cannot show everything at the same time; I do not know how to do it. But, we will get back to that.

Switching gears a little bit here.

All the World

Signs of the Times, May 6, 1897:

“History will be repeated. False religion will be exalted. The first day of the week, a common working day, possessing no sanctity whatever, will be set up as was the image at Babylon. All nations and tongues and peoples will be commanded to worship this spurious sabbath. This is Satan’s plan to make of no account the day instituted by God, and given to the world as a memorial of creation.

“The decree enforcing the worship of this day is to go forth to all the world.”—

Not just to the United States but to all the world.

—“In a limited degree, it has already gone forth. In several places the civil power is speaking with the voice of a dragon, just as the heathen king spoke to the Hebrew captives.” Signs of the Times, May 6, 1897.

So, notice this next couple of quotes.

First the United States

Testimonies, volume 6, page 18:

“As America, the land of religious liberty, shall unite with the Papacy in forcing the conscience and compelling men to honor the false sabbath, the people of every country on the globe will be led to follow her example.” Testimonies, volume 6, 18.

So, where does The Sunday Law begin?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: In the United States.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The United States.

And how many countries follow the example of the United States?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: All.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Every country on the globe.

The next quote, Testimonies, volume 6, page 395.

“Foreign nations will follow the example of the United States. Though she leads out, yet the same crisis will come upon our people in all parts of the world.” Testimonies, volume 6, 395.

She leads out with The Sunday Law in the United States, and then she goes to the world and says, “You must set up an image of the beast.” And that image of the beast is the same test. The image of the beast in the world reaches its climax, the full development of itself, when it has the ability to enforce a Sunday Law on all the countries of the globe; and it will do so.

The King of the South

Egypt is the Dragon

Ezekiel 29:2-3

We have been speaking about the False Prophet. Now we are going to switch gears to the Dragon.

We are doing this because we are saying that in Daniel 11, verse 40, we have the Dragon, the Beast, and the False Prophet beginning their activity that leads the world down here to Armageddon. We want to look at the Dragon now.

Ezekiel 29.

Now, the theologians, this will give them heartburn—okay?—because, I am going to take and say the Dragon in Revelation 12, which was written by John in Greek, is also written about in Ezekiel in Hebrew hundreds and hundreds of years apart: “Doesn’t this guy understand that this is a different time in history, John and Ezekiel? And doesn’t he understand it’s two different languages? How can he be saying that they are the same?”

Because, I acknowledge that I am an uneducated, worthless human being and my only chance of salvation is to accept the Word of God simply as It is set forth and believe it. And the Word of God identifies the Dragon in Revelation 12, and it identifies the Dragon in Ezekiel 29. For me, the simple man that I am, it means that it is the same Dragon in both places.

Ezekiel 29, beginning in verse 2:

“² Son of man, set thy face against Pharaoh king of Egypt, and prophesy against him, and against all Egypt: ³ Speak, and say, Thus saith the Lord God; Behold, I am against thee, Pharaoh king of Egypt, the great dragon that lieth in the midst of his rivers, which hath said, My river is mine own, and I have made it for myself.” Ezekiel 29:2-3 (KJV).

Egypt is the Dragon in prophecy. Egypt is the Dragon in prophecy.

And maybe you do not think this is important; but, I remember going to this passage in an inquisition that we were involved in, in Germany, where I was presenting the message. And we had the university professors and the well-known pastors, the Germans were there, sitting around in a circle, attempting to reject everything we said. And when you got to here, saying that this is the Dragon, that one professor, man, he just—he was not going to accept that one.

Brother and Sisters, Egypt in Bible prophecy is the Dragon. You may not understand the significance of marking that and believing it; but, the theologians that are fighting this message, they fight this point. So, even if you do not understand it, just duly note that it is something worth fighting for, for those that are on the wrong side of the issue, the Dragon.

The Great Controversy, page 439:

“Thus while the dragon, primarily, represents Satan, it is, in a secondary sense, a symbol of pagan Rome.” The Great Controversy, 439.

The Dragon is Egypt; the Dragon is Satan; the Dragon is Pagan Rome. The Dragon is many things, but Egypt and Pagan Rome?

Did not Pagan Rome, in the time period of Antony and Cleopatra, did not Pagan Rome conquer Egypt? How can they both be the Dragon?

Okay. Do you see my point?

Notice the next quote, Testimonies to Ministers, page 38:

“Kings and rulers and governors have placed upon themselves the brand of antichrist, and are represented as the dragon who goes to make war with the saints—with those who keep the commandments of God and who have the faith of Jesus.” Testimonies to Ministers, 38.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: It moves.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Pardon me?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: It moves.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Dragon moves through history.

But this here, the Dragon at the end of the world, is it Pagan Rome?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: No.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Is it Egypt?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: No.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Prophetically it is, but it is not the country of Eqypt. It is kings, governors, and rulers in The Sunday Law crisis, because it says this is The Sunday Law crisis: They go forth to make war with the saints that keep the commandments of God. This is The Sunday Law crisis.

So, the Dragon—and we started with a quote in this study from Signs of the Times, November 1, 1899, where Sister White references the great red dragon, the leopard-like beast, and the beast with lamb-like horns. And what did she say they were? Earthly governments.

The earthly governments that represent the Dragon at the end of the world is the earthly government that is made up of kings and rulers and governors. It is an earthly government that is made up of a group of politicians, which is called the United Nations.

So, what am I saying about the Dragon? I am saying this: When it comes to the Dragon, the characteristics of the Dragon in Bible prophecy is that it moves through history.

And I have a breakdown for you so you can note and where you can mark the Dragon at different points in prophetic history.

HEAVEN - EZEKIEL 28; EDEN - GENESIS 3; SHINAR - GENESIS 11; BABYLON, PERGAMOS - REVELATION 2:13; ROME - DANIEL 8:11; FRANCE - REVELATION 11:8; THE SOVIET UNION - DANIEL 11:40; THE UNITED NATIONS - DANIEL 11:42; THE UNITED NATIONS - REVELATION 20:7–10

• He begins the war in Heaven does he not?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Yes.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: And in Ezekiel 28, you can find that.

• And then he comes down to bring the war to Planet Earth at Eden in Genesis 3; and, you can see the Dragon there, and you can see a pronouncement against him, which is the Everlasting Gospel, “I am going to put enmity between thee and Me.”

• He comes to Shinar in the time of Nimrod. You can find that in Genesis 11.

And he stays in Babylon all the way through in the time of Belshazzar.

• And when Belshazzar is brought down by the Medes and Persians, the historians testify that the Chaldeans, the religious elite of Babylon that represent the religion of the Dragon, they move to a city in Asia Minor called Pergamos. And you can see Pergamos marked in Revelation 2, verse 13, as the place where Satan’s seat is located after Babylon. And who is Satan? He is the Dragon.

So, the Dragon has moved from Heaven to Eden, to Shinar, to Babylon, to Pergamos.

• And then comes Pagan Rome into history, and it conquers Pergamos and it brings the religion of the Chaldeans from Pergamos back to the City of Rome. Now, it has moved to Rome.

• And Pagan Rome divides into ten parts, according to Daniel 7, and one of those ten parts is France, Revelation 11:8. France is the Dragon power, the king of Atheism.

• But, as time progresses the king of Atheism (the Dragon power) moves to the Soviet Union, Daniel 11:40.

• And we read from some of the historical record where Gorbachev, when he bowed to the Pope and went back and took apart the Soviet Union at the Pope’s direction that he [Gorbachev] then stepped down from being the leader of the Soviet Union and took a job in the United Nations, which is the kings, governors, and rulers that are represented as the Dragon that goes to make war with those who keep the commandments of God and have the testimony of Jesus.

My point is this, when it comes to the Dragon, he moves through history. He is not in the same geographical location. He moves. If you are unwilling to see this, then you are unwilling to see.

Egypt is given to Babylon (the Dragon is Given to the Beast)

Jeremiah 46:1-2, 13, 20; Ezekiel 29:18-21; Daniel 11:42; Revelation 17:17

When it comes to the Dragon—and I know this is hard. This is hard for a lot of people to conceptualize or to buy into, but it is true. The next point we are going to make is hard; because, when you think of the Dragon, you think of Satan, and you think that Satan is the one that is directing the False Prophet of the United States, and Satan is the one that is directing the Beast of the Papacy, and Satan is the one directing the spiritualism of the United Nations; and, he is. But, Satan is the Dragon, and in Bible prophecy the Dragon is given to the Papacy. You have to see that.

To give you a quick example, in the Church of Thyatira in Revelation, what is the symbol of the Papacy in Thyatira, in Revelation? What symbolizes the Papacy in the Church of Thyatira?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Jezebel.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Jezebel. Okay.

And Jezebel is the church.

Who was Jezebel married to?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Ahab.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Ahab. So, what is Ahab?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: He is the king.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: He is the state.

So, how many states did he have?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Ten.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Ten.

He is the Ten Kings that commit fornication with Jezebel with the Beast at the end of the world. Right?

So, that number 10, how many kingdoms did Pagan Rome disintegrate into?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Ten.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Ten.

The number 10, that is the Dragon power. Ahab is the Dragon power. Ahab is the Dragon power.

Was Jezebel ruling over Ahab, or was Ahab ruling over Jezebel? Okay. The Biblical testimony is that Jezebel is controlling the movements. Egypt is given to (the Dragon is given to) the Papacy.

Now, notice Jeremiah 46. Go to Jeremiah 46.

Why do you need to see this? You need to see this because the King of the North (the Papacy) in Daniel 11, verse 42, is going to conquer Egypt. You want to see that that is always the case in the Scriptures, is that Egypt (the Dragon power) is given into the hands of the Papacy. You want to know that this is so, so that you can be confident in your understanding of the last six verses of Daniel 11.

Jeremiah 46:1-2 says,

“¹The word of the Lord which came to Jeremiah the prophet against the Gentiles; ² Against Egypt, against the army of Pharaohnecho king of Egypt, which was by the river Euphrates in Carchemish, which Nebuchadrezzar king of Babylon smote in the fourth year of Jehoiakim the son of Josiah king of Judah.” Jeremiah 46:1-2 (KJV).

Who is Nebuchadnezzar?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: King of the North.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: King of the North.

Who did he just defeat?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The King of the South.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The King of the South, Egypt.

Okay. Egypt gets defeated by Babylon.

Notice verse 13.

“¹³The word that the Lord spake to Jeremiah the prophet, how Nebuchadrezzar king of Babylon should come and smite the land of Egypt.” Jeremiah 46:13 (KJV).

Babylon smites Egypt.

Verse 20:

“²⁰Egypt is like a very fair heifer, but destruction cometh; it cometh out of the north.” Jeremiah 46:20 (KJV).

Who is Egypt? Ezekiel 29, verses 2 and 3: It is the Dragon. The Papacy takes control of the Dragon. The Dragon is a state. The image of the beast is a combination of church and state with the church, the woman, in control of the relationship. The state is given to the Papacy.

Back to Ezekiel 29, verses 18 through 21. Ezekiel 29, beginning at verse 18, says,

“. . .¹⁸Son of man, Nebuchadrezzar king of Babylon caused his army to serve a great service against Tyrus: every head was made bald, and every shoulder was peeled: yet had he no wages, nor his army, for Tyrus, for the service that he had served against it:”—

What does the Bible say about the laborer?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: He is worth his hire.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Okay. He was using Nebuchadnezzar to accomplish a purpose; so, the Lord is saying, “I’m going to pay the King of the North, I am going to pay the Papacy for the work that he is doing for me.”

Verse 19,

—“¹⁹Therefore thus saith the Lord God; Behold, I will give the land of Egypt unto Nebuchadrezzar king of Babylon; and he shall take her multitude, and take her spoil, and take her prey; and it shall be the wages for his army. ²⁰I have given him the land of Egypt for his labour wherewith he served against it, because they wrought for me, saith the Lord God.”—

And in what day does He give Egypt to the Papacy?

Next verse,

—“²¹In that day will I cause the horn of the house of Israel to bud forth,”—

Ah, this happens in the time period of the Latter Rain.

—“and I will give thee the opening of the mouth in the midst of them; and they shall know that I am the Lord.” Ezekiel 29:18-21 (KJV).

Ah, in this very time period, the Lord is going to raise up a people that are receiving the Latter Rain that are going to present this very truth to the world. He is going to give them an opening of the mouth.

And what are they going to talk about? They are going to talk about the fact, among other things, that in Bible prophecy that Egypt is given to the Papacy. The King of the North takes control of the King of the South. That is Daniel 11:42.

“⁴²He shall stretch forth his hand also upon the countries: and the land of Egypt shall not escape.” Daniel 11:42 (KJV).

Now, Revelation 17:17. We are not dealing with Revelation 17 as of yet; but, just so we can put it in your mind for a future reference, in Daniel 11:42, the King of the North conquers Egypt and the countries. And, in Revelation 17:17, speaking of the Ten Kings—and we are saying the Ten Kings have been represented by the ten toes of Daniel 2—they are represented by Ahab and his ten nations; they are represented by the ten tribes of Psalm 83; they are represented by the ten cities in connection with Nimrod; they are represented by the ten cities in Ezekiel 30 that are the cities of Egypt that are judged by the Lord in Ezekiel 30. These Ten Kings are the Dragon at the end of the world.

And verse 17 says,

“¹⁷For God hath put in their hearts to fulfil his will, and to agree, and give their kingdom [the kingdom of the Dragon] unto the beast, until the words of God shall be fulfilled.” Revelation 17:17 (KJV).

Because, the King of the North in verse 42 of Daniel 11 is going to conquer Egypt; it is going to conquer the Dragon.

Okay. We have put that in place. We want to put a couple more things in place as we are closing.

Sorry I got a little bit carried away there, time-wise.

The Long War

What we are saying—now, this is a different thought. Okay? I have to pull you back away from some of this—what we have been saying is, is that in verse 40 of Daniel 11, the activities of the King of the North (the Beast), the King of the South (the Dragon), and the False Prophet (the chariots, ships, and horsemen), this is where it begins. This is where you see the activities begin.

With the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989, the student of prophecy has opened up to them a line of truth that carries them all the way down here [to Armageddon] where the King of the North comes to his end, between the seas and the glorious holy mountain which is Megiddo, Armageddon. That is just one line of truth that is opened up; all kinds of lines of truth are opened up there in verse 40.

The Battle of Carchemish (Egypt and Assyria/Babylon: South/North)

But, in this history, one of the truths in this history, is that in 1798 to 1989, you have a long, protracted war.

In the beginning of this war, Egypt, the King of the South, it attacks the King of the North and it is victorious. It delivers the deadly wound. So, this is a long drawn-out war from 1798 to 1989. And initially, the Dragon delivers the first blow and is victorious. But, at the end, the Dragon loses.

That is part of that verse 40.

But, as you remember, we showed that this history of Daniel 11:40 to down here to Daniel 12:1, what history is that? It is the history of Laodicea.

And the history of Laodicea had how many of the churches repeated?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: All of them.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: All of them, from Ephesus, all the way through. All those histories are repeated in Laodicea; and not only of the Christian Church, but of who else? Ancient Israel.

So, we have already seen the principle that allows us to see that verses 40 to 45, that is the whole Bible is laid over the top. This is the principle that turns the Bible into the Little Book that is in the Angel’s hand.

So, what I am saying is, this long drawn-out history in verse 40, people attack this idea. I have already mentioned one attack: “How can you have over 200 years in one verse?” It is a stupid argument, but they give it. But, connected with that kind of false logic is, “Well, a war that begins here [1798] and ends here [The Sunday Law]?” So, we are going to give you a couple of this long drawn-out war, so upon the testimony of two or three we can establish this long drawn-out war.

Josiah’s Death

2 Kings 23:28-30 (1798)

2 Kings 23.

And, of course, we are going to deal with this, the Lord willing. You never know what you are going to do from one day to another, right? We are going to deal with this king Josiah before we get out of the typifications of Habakkuk’s Tables, because king Josiah, he is one of the key stories in these two Tables [the 1843 and 1850 Charts].

But, this is the story of king Josiah, 2 Kings 23:29-30, and if you back up to verse 28, it says,

“²⁸Now the rest of the acts of Josiah, and all that he did, are they not written in the book of the chronicles of the kings of Judah? ²⁹In his days Pharaohnecho”—who?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: King of Egypt.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“Pharaohnecho king of Egypt [King of the South] went up against the king of Assyria to the river Euphrates:”—

Who is the king of Assyria?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: King of the North.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: King of the North.

So, the King of the South here is attacking the King of the North. Have you ever seen that anywhere in Scriptures? Right here, right here, 1798.

—“and king Josiah went against him; and he slew him at Megiddo, when he had seen him. ³⁰And his servants carried him in a chariot dead from Megiddo, and brought him to Jerusalem, and buried him in his own sepulchre. And the people of the land took Jehoahaz the son of Josiah, and anointed him, and made him king in his father's stead.” 2 Kings 23:28-30 (KJV).

Now, you know that when the King of the South [Pharaohnecho] came to begin this war with the King of the North, that he told Josiah something. You know that story, right?

What did he [Pharaohnecho] tell Josiah? He said, “The Lord sent me in this battle. Stay out of it.” [2 Chronicles 35:20-21] Okay?

So, what is that? That is a warning message connected with Daniel 11, verse 40. “Stay out of this battle; or . . .”—where do you end up? Dead in Armageddon.

Do all the prophets speak about the end of the world?

Okay. So, Josiah represents a lay person in Adventism—no, he doesn’t represent a lay person, does he? Who does Josiah represent at the end of the world?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Leaders.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Leadership of the Seventh-day Adventist Church. He is the king that ends up where? Dead at Armageddon.

Why? Because, he rejected the warning of Daniel 11, verse 40.

Do you see it? Well, it is there.

The Fourth Year of Jehoiakim (the First Angel)

Jeremiah 46:1-2, 13, 20 (1989)

Now, go to Jeremiah 46. We have already looked at this, but not from this perspective.

Keep your finger in there, if it is not already too late, in 2 Kings 23. Keep your finger in there for your own reference, if you need to. But, in Jeremiah 46, which we have already looked at—what we just read in 2 Kings 23 was in the time period of who? Josiah.

And chapter 46 of Jeremiah says,

“¹The word of the Lord which came to Jeremiah the prophet against the Gentiles; ²Against Egypt, against the army of”—who?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Pharaohnecho.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Pharaohnecho. This is the same king, the king of Egypt.

—“Pharaohnecho king of Egypt, which was by the river Euphrates in Carchemish,”—

This is the same battle. It was the king of Assyria at the beginning; and, now it is the king of Babylon, Nebuchadrezzar.

—“which Nebuchadrezzar king of Babylon smote in the fourth year of”—

Josiah? No.

—“the fourth year of Jehoiakim the son of Josiah king of Judah.” Jeremiah 46:1‑2 (KJV).

So, this is at the end of the battle down here [1989], the fourth year of Jehoiakim.

And who wins there?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Nebuchadnezzar.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Nebuchadnezzar wins here in 1989.

See, this is a war that begins when the King of the South pushes against the King of the North, and initially the King of the South wins; but, at the end the King of the North returns and sweeps away the King of the South.

And in this story you have the story of Josiah, the leadership of the Seventh-day Adventist Church that rejects the warning of Daniel 11, verse 40, and ends up at Armageddon a dead man.

One other proof of a long drawn-out war.

2 Chronicles 35:19-25

And you can read—I am running out of time, of course, here. I have been too wordy this morning—my bad. We will not read 2 Chronicles 35:19-25 [into the record]; it is in your notes.

“¹⁹In the eighteenth year of the reign of Josiah was this passover kept.

^“20After all this, when Josiah had prepared the temple, Necho king of Egypt came up to fight against Charchemish by Euphrates: and Josiah went out against him. ²¹But he sent ambassadors to him, saying, What have I to do with thee, thou king of Judah? I come not against thee this day, but against the house wherewith I have war: for God commanded me to make haste: forbear thee from meddling with God, who is with me, that he destroy thee not. ²²Nevertheless Josiah would not turn his face from him, but disguised himself, that he might fight with him, and hearkened not unto the words of Necho from the mouth of God, and came to fight in the valley of Megiddo. ²³And the archers shot at king Josiah; and the king said to his servants, Have me away; for I am sore wounded. ²⁴His servants therefore took him out of that chariot, and put him in the second chariot that he had; and they brought him to Jerusalem, and he died, and was buried in one of the sepulchres of his fathers. And all Judah and Jerusalem mourned for Josiah. ²⁵And Jeremiah lamented for Josiah: and all the singing men and the singing women spake of Josiah in their lamentations to this day, and made them an ordinance in Israel: and, behold, they are written in the lamentations.” 2 Chronicles 35:19-25 (KJV).

This tells the story of Pharaohnecho telling Josiah, “Don’t go!”

Now, notice. Josiah has been told that because he had done this wonderful revival and reformation that he is going to go to his grave in peace. So, Sister White is going to comment on the fact that he did not go to his grave in peace.

And we have just shown you that he is a symbol of the leadership of Adventism that rejects the message of Daniel 11, verse 40, the message of the war between the King of the South and the King of the North, that it is a long drawn-out war that initially the King of the South wins, but ultimately the King of the North prevails.

And here is what Sister White says about Josiah from The Seventh-day Adventist Bible Commentary, volume 2, page 1039:

“Those who will not take God’s Word as assurance, need not hope that human wisdom can help them; for human wisdom, aside from God, is like the waves of the sea, driven with the wind, and tossed. The word of Christ is, ‘He shall guide you into all truth.’ Reject not the light given.

“Read the history of Josiah. He had done a good work. During his reign idolatry was put down, and apparently successfully uprooted. The temple was reopened and the sacrificial offerings re-established. His work was done well.

“But at the last he died in battle. Why?—Because he did not heed the warnings given. . . . [2 Chronicles 34:26–33; 35:20–24 quoted.]

“Because Josiah died in battle, who will charge God with denying His word that Josiah should go to his grave in peace? The Lord did not give orders for Josiah to make war on the king of Egypt. When the Lord gave the king of Egypt orders that the time had come to serve Him by warfare, and the ambassadors told Josiah not to make war on Necho, no doubt Josiah congratulated himself that no word from the Lord had come directly to him. To turn back with his army would have been humiliating, so he went on. And because of this, he was killed in battle, a battle that he should not have had anything to do with. The man who had been so greatly honored by the Lord, did not honor the word of God. The Lord had spoken in his favor, predicted good things for him; and Josiah became self-confident, and failed to heed the warning. He went against the word of God, choosing to follow his own way, and God could not shield him from the consequences of his act.

“In this our day men choose to follow their own desires and their own will. Can we be surprised that there is so much spiritual blindness?” The Seventh-day Adventist Bible Commentary, volume 2, 1039.

So, what is the story of Josiah about? About rejecting the message, the warning message, of Daniel 11, verse 40.

I am going to end here.

There is another long drawn-out war that is identifying the long drawn-out war of the King of the South and the King of the North in Daniel 11, verse 40, and we will begin with that tomorrow morning. It is the long drawn-out war that marks not that the leadership of Adventism will end up at Armageddon if they reject the message of Daniel 11, verse 40. It marks that immediately after the long drawn-out war, which ended in 1989, that Islam will come into history. So, we will start that tomorrow. And what we are doing is giving two witnesses on top of this history of Daniel 11:40 – 12:1 to show this long drawn-out war is a prophetic waymark.

Shall we pray?

Benediction: Heavenly Father, we are amazed that the amount of information that you can put in one verse; but, we acknowledge that we have but only as human beings scratched the surface in beginning to understand the light that is there. But, nevertheless, the light that is contained in this verse is amazing. We ask that you would allow this truth to change our hearts, change our minds, that we will be about our businesses of running to and fro in your Word that we might fully comprehend this increase of knowledge, that it might work its purpose in us that we can be purified and made white and then tried, and that we might have a message to share with those that we come in contact with. We set before you this day of service and ask for our work to be safely done and that it might be a work that will glorify and honor you. We thank you for the work that you are doing with the LiveStreaming and the DVD recordings. In Jesus’s name, amen.

Habakkuk’s Two Tables #48

PART SIX: 1989

Presented by Jeff Pippenger

Invocation by Brother Jeff Pippenger: Heavenly Father, we thank you for a night’s rest and for awakening us and for bringing us over to continue our study of 1989; Daniel 11, verse 40; William Miller’s dream; and, all the various lines of truth that are connected with this passage in Scripture. We know if we are going to understand this correctly, we need the presence of your Holy Spirit. We ask that you would grant that to us now. We know that the Sankeys are on their way out here for next week’s meetings. We ask that you give them traveling mercies, and we know that we have friends coming down from Canada to be a part of these meetings. Please protect them as well. We want to be vessels turned upward so that we can receive the Latter Rain that you have for us this morning. So, if there are any sins, any transgressions that we have committed that are preventing us from receiving the blessing of the Latter Rain as you open our understanding to your Word this morning, we ask that you would forgive us of these. We ask that you take control of my humanity and that you would overrule it, that what I say is for your glory and honor, and that you would overrule my brothers and sisters that are hearing these things that they would understand as you wish for them to understand these things. In Jesus’s name, amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: We are trying to give some input on the significance of Daniel 11, verse 40, how many truths are connected to Daniel 11, verse 40. We are doing this to provide an argument that with the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989, in fulfillment of Daniel 11, verse 40, that this marks the Time of the End for the 144,000 when the Lion of the tribe of Judah begins to unseal the prophetic message for this history one seal at a time, meaning in a progressive fashion. It is an increase of knowledge that is illustrated in Daniel 12.

So, we have been taking a great deal of time here in verse 40 to set some of these themes in place; and, for the purpose of even looking at them even more closely as we proceed. Early on, within the past week of so, we showed that the history of Daniel 11, verse 40, begins in 1798 and it goes all the way to the close of human probation, which means it covers the history of the Millerites, all the way to the end of the world; and, therefore, the majority of that history is the history that we call Laodicea.

And we showed that the history of the first six Churches—Ephesus, Smyrna, Pergamos, Thyatira, Sardis, and Philadelphia—all are repeated in the history of Laodicea, and then we showed that the Seven Churches, the historical/prophetic representation of the Seven Churches also governs the history of Ancient Israel. So, we made a case that all the history of the Bible is illustrated upon the last six verses of Daniel 11. That is a pretty profound recognition all by itself. We have not dredged some of the depth of what that means. We have just put it in place so that we can expect for it to be true when we bring other lines of prophecy upon the top of Daniel 11:40-45, which we have begun to do a little bit of.

TIMELINE OF DANIEL 11:40 – 12:1

1798 1989 Sunday Law Egypt ARMAGEDDON

USA (France)

Reagan (Clovis) ISLAM

POWER 9/11

VERSES FORTY, FORTY-ONE, FORTY-TWO & Dan 11:44 – 12:1.

FORTY-THREE,

HISTORY OF REVELATION 13 (Also the History of the United States)

World Image

1798 Sunday Law of the Beast 666

Revelation 13:11 Rev 13:14-15 Rev 13:16-18

Figure No. 96.

We have identified that the history of Revelation 13:11 begins in 1798 and it ends when the United States speaks as a dragon at The Sunday Law. So, verse 11 of Revelation 13 is 1798 to The Sunday Law; and that the history of Daniel 11, verse 40, is from 1798 to The Sunday Law, therefore making a prophetic connection to anyone who wishes to see the prophetic connection between Daniel 11, verse 40, and Revelation 13:11.

We have made the argument, also if you are willing to see, that verse 40 has the Time of the End for the Millerites, 1798. And with the collapse of the Soviet Union, it has the Time of the End [1989] for the 144,000. So, the Time of the End for the beginning of Adventism and for the End of Adventism is in the very same verse. That is very profound when you think about it, if you think about it.

And then we went through, and not fully—and the reason I am saying “not fully” is because there are still some significant truths that we want to deal with, with the King of the South (the Dragon Power) in verse 40, and also with the United States, represented as the chariots, ships, and horsemen.

But, we have been discussing these three powers in this verse. The King of the North in verse 40 being the Beast of Revelation 16; the horsemen and chariots and ships, representing the twofold nature of military and economic strength, the two horns of the United States at the end of the world when they have lost their way, and, they are there in verse 40; and, the King of the South (being the Dragon) in verse 40 are the three powers that lead the world to Armageddon.

And Armageddon we have shown down here in Daniel 11:44 through Daniel 12:1, where the King of the North comes to his end with none to help, this is Armageddon. And it is these three powers in verse 40, the Beast, the Dragon, and the False Prophet, that lead the world to Armageddon. So, the story of Daniel 11:40-45 is the story of Revelation 16. And there are still more to be said about that.

And we have put a few other thoughts that I am not remembering to bring back up to our attention in play as well that we will probably deal with later.

But, in verse 40 we are saying that there is a long, protracted war between the Papacy and Atheism, Atheism being the King of the South in the verse. And at the beginning, the King of the South attacks the King of the North, pushes at him. But, in 1989, the King of the North retaliates against the King of the South and sweeps it away in a mighty fashion, passing over the countries. Whoever the King of the South is when it is swept away in verse 40, it is a confederacy of countries; because, the verse says that the King of the North passes over the countries. Of course, we are identifying that as the Soviet Union, which was a confederacy of countries.

But, though 1989 marks the fulfillment of Daniel 11, verse 40, the verse itself does not come to an end until The Sunday Law, Daniel 11:41, which we have not proven yet; but, we cannot prove everything at one time.

So, we are seeing in verse 40 a long, protracted war between the King of the South and the King of the North that ends in 1989; and, then we closed out yesterday by showing another illustration of this long, protracted war. All the prophets are speaking about the end of the world, and the history of Ancient Israel and the history of the Christian Church are all repeated in Laodicea; therefore, they are all repeated in the last six verses of Daniel 11.

HISTORY OF JOSIAH

1798 1989

ISLAM

2 Kings 23:29-30 Jeremiah 46:1-2

Revelation NINE Nineveh

THE LONG WAR (Verse 40)

Figure No. 97.

So, we went into the story of Josiah, who was given a warning message not to get involved with the war that was beginning, and this war was the King of the South: Pharaohnecho, the king of Egypt. The King of the South was pushing against the king of Assyria, the King of the North.

And right from the start, Pharaohnecho told Josiah, “The Lord has sent me against the King of the North. You need to stay out of it”; but, Josiah disregarded that warning message of Daniel 11, verse 40, and he went to war and there is where he died, and he died at Armageddon.

And in the fourth year of Jehoiakim, many years later, Jeremiah 46:1-2, the king of Babylon comes and deals the deadly blow to Pharaohnecho. So, you have here a long, protracted war.

This section here [from 1798 to 1989 (see Figure No. 97)] is this history here [from 1798 to The Sunday Law (see Figure No. 96, Timeline of Daniel)]. I just brought it down here to make a point.

You have a secondary long, protracted war where the King of the South pushes against the King of the North [referring to Figure No. 97], and then many years later the King of the North returns and retaliates against him.

And if you would see it—and maybe it is at a level that you are not prepared to acknowledge—but, here the King of the South pushes against the king of Assyria. But, this war, the Battle of Carchemish the Bible calls it, though it begins against the king of Assyria, when the King of the North returns, it is not the king of Assyria but the king of Babylon. Okay? In 1798 this is the Papacy that receives the deadly would [referring again to Figure No. 96.]

And if you are really going to study Rome prophetically, in Daniel 11:14 it tells us that it is Rome that establishes the vision. So, we need to study Rome carefully.

You have Pagan Rome in history, and then you have Papal Rome; but, Rome at the end of the world is modern Rome.

So, here [see Figure 96] is Papal Rome in 1798 receiving the deadly wound as the King of the South pushes at him; but here, when the King of the North retaliates against the king of Atheism in 1989, this is modern Rome.

In this story [see Figure 96] the King of the South pushes against the King of the North, Assyria; but, when the King of the North returns and retaliates against the King of the South, it is Babylon. If you can see that change there, it is marking the change between Papal Rome and modern Rome; and, it is giving us a lesson that Josiah as the leadership of the Seventh-day Adventist Church, by rejecting the warning message of Daniel 11, verse 40, he ends up at Armageddon on the wrong side of the issue.

The Battle of Constantinople: 1798, and

Nineveh: 1989 (Rome and Persia: A two-Horned Power)

Revelation 9:1-3

Okay. Now, another line of a long, protracted war is what we will take up here. I am calling it “The Battle of Constantinople and Nineveh,” and you will see why.

We are going to read Revelation 9:1, and then we are going to go into Uriah Smith’s commentary on this history. We will read verses 1 through 3 of Revelation 9.

And what we are saying is this is a third history that illustrates a long, protracted war. This is another line that goes over the top of Daniel 11, verse 40, the war between the King of the South and the King of the North.

Beginning at verse 1 of Revelation 9:

“¹And the fifth angel sounded, and I saw a star fall from heaven unto the earth: and to him was given the key of the bottomless pit. ²And he opened the bottomless pit; and there arose a smoke out of the pit, as the smoke of a great furnace; and the sun and the air were darkened by reason of the smoke of the pit. ³And there came out of the smoke locusts upon the earth: and unto them was given power, as the scorpions of the earth have power.” Revelation 9:1-3 (KJV).

Now, we want to say some things about here, but I want to say some things outside of what is our point here.

Go up to verse 10 of Revelation 8. Verse 10 says,

“¹⁰And the third angel sounded,—

What third angel? What is this?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (No response.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: It is too early in the morning for a question, huh?

It is the Third Trumpet. This is the Seven Trumpets of Revelation. And Miller and the Pioneers understood that the Trumpets were the historical forces that the Lord used to bring judgment upon Rome; and, the first four Trumpets bring judgment upon Western Rome, and Western Rome is disintegrated into the ten kingdoms of Daniel 7 by AD476 because of the activities of the first four Trumpets.

And here in verse 10 you have the Third Trumpet, and it is Attila the Hun. It says,

“¹⁰And the third angel sounded, and there fell a great star from heaven, burning as it were a lamp, and it fell upon the third part of the rivers, and upon the fountains of waters.” Revelation 8:10 (KJV).

This illustration of Attila the Hun, what is the symbol that represents him in the verse?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: A falling star.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: A falling star.

Okay. So, when you get down to Revelation 9, verse 1, it says,

“¹And the fifth angel sounded, and I saw a star fall from heaven . . .” Revelation 9, (KJV).

In Adventism today, because Islam has become an issue in the world that Adventism cannot deny. Even if Adventism does not want to place Islam in prophecy, they cannot deny the activities of Islam are underway. So, you have some teachings about Islam that are a little bit off the Biblical radar, and one of them is found here and it is a premise that this star that fell from heaven here is Mohammad.

And this is in the context of Revelation 9, because Revelation 9 is about Islam of the Fifth and the Sixth Trumpets, the First and the Second Woes. But, what is argued here is Mohammad, when he originally began, he was a prophet of God; but, somewhere in the development of his life story, he falls away from God.

Okay. Now, what this does, it is using the falling star. That is the argument, “Look, it was a star in Heaven. It was in Heaven once. It had to be a good star; but, it fell, so it is a bad star.”

So, my argument against that is, “Are you also trying to tell me that Attila the Hun was a prophet of God?” Because, this is the context of the passage: If you are going to make an assumption based upon a symbol of the falling of the star, and there is another falling of the stars in the same passage—and this is all about the Trumpets here—then, you have to be consistent.

And I have actually had a person argue that Attila the Hun was divinely appointed by the Lord. And I am not that familiar with history, but Attila the Hun was not a godly man, as I remember history, at any point along the way. But, that is not my point.

Once you make that assumption about Islam, then you have reason to argue that there are some—there is a possibility, or whatever, that the insights that are found in the Koran that some of them are sanctified and inspired. That leads you the wrong way. All right?

Because, if you go to Genesis, just to put this to bed, Genesis 16:12 where we see Ishmael introduced, Ishmael being the symbol of Islam, verse 11 of Genesis 16 says,

“¹¹And the angel of the Lord said unto her, Behold, thou art with child, and shalt bear a son, and shalt call his name Ishmael; because the Lord hath heard thy affliction. ¹²And”—

And Sister White comments on this spirit of Ishmael. You will probably get to that quote at some point in this study, where his spirit is a troublemaker to everyone that he comes in contact with.

So,

—“he will be a wild man; his hand will be against every man, and every man’s hand against him; and he shall dwell in the presence of all his brethren.” Genesis 16:11-2 (KJV).

The spirit that is associated with all of his brethren, according to Inspiration, is this unholy spirit. So, when you are trying to make a case that there is some component of Islam that is sanctified and holy, it stands against the stated pronouncement of Ishmael and all his descendents.

But, I am not trying to bad-mouth people that are in the religion of Islam anymore than I am bad-mouthing a Catholic person when I am dealing with the Catholic Church or the Papacy. It is not at the personal level, but it is at the prophetic level.

Go back to Revelation 9.

At the prophetic level, we need to know who we are dealing with. And when you take the time—we will not do it here—to look at the term bottomless pit, and Sister White’s comments on it, “bottomless pit” appears here in Revelation 9; it appears in Revelation 11 in association with the French Revolution. It is where Satan is put for a thousand years in Revelation 20; and, the Catholic Church in Revelation 17 comes out of the bottomless pit. And whenever Sister White comments on the bottomless pit, she says it is a new manifestation of satanic power. So, when you see Islam coming out of the bottomless pit, the Spirit of Prophecy also says, “satanic power.” It does not say anything about Mohammad once being a prophet, or that possibly there is some sanctified insight that we can glean from the Koran.

So, Uriah Smith comments. Who is Uriah Smith? He is God’s helping hand. In Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation, pages 495 – 497, he comments on this passage of Revelation 9, verses 1 through 3.

And Revelation 9, verses 1 through 3, is talking about a key, something that happens in history; because, what does James White say about prophecy? It is history in advance.

So, this key is a key in history that opens up the bottomless pit in verse 1.

And then in verse 2, when the bottomless pit is opened, there is a smoke that comes out of the pit like locusts and scorpions in verse 3. And this is identifying the historical event that brings Islam into history.

Okay. That is a brief overview.

Now, Uriah Smith is going to tell us the history that is represented in these verses that allows the smoke of Islam to come into history. This is Uriah Smith:

“‘VERSE 1. And the fifth angel sounded, and I saw a star fall from heaven unto the earth: and to him was given the key of the bottomless pit.’

“For an exposition of this trumpet, we shall again draw from the writings of Mr. Keith. This writer truthfully says: ‘There is scarcely”—

Now, notice, Uriah Smith is agreeing with this Keith that he is quoting; and, pay attention to what he is agreeing with, because what he is agreeing with, what he is saying is of all the symbols in the Book of Revelation that are easily established, the one that is the most easily established is the Fifth and Sixth Trumpets identifying Islam. Okay?

—“This writer truthfully says, ‘There is scarcely so uniform an agreement among interpreters concerning any other part of the Apocalypse as respecting the application of the fifth and sixth trumpets, or the first and second woes, to the Saracens and Turks.”—

Saracens, Fifth Trumpet; Mohammad and his followers, Turks, Sixth Trumpet, Islam moves to Turkey, the Ottoman Empire.

—“It is so obvious that it can scarcely be misunderstood. Instead of a verse or two designating each, the whole of the ninth chapter of the Revelation in equal portions, is occupied with a description of both.

“‘The Roman empire declined, as it arose, by conquest; but the Saracens and the Turks were the instruments by which a false religion became the scourge of an apostate church;”—

So, there is one of the definitions of the role of Islam that the Pioneers held to, is that Islam is raised up. It is a false religion, to be a scourge against an apostate church.

—“and hence, instead of the fifth and sixth trumpets, like the former, being designated by that name alone, they are called woes.”—

What does he mean by that?

Because, you can pronounce judgment on a secular person; but, if you pronounce judgment upon a church, then it is a woe because it has a religious connotation. So, now he is going to explain this.

—“‘Constantinople was besieged,”—

What is Constantinople?

What is Constantinople?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: It is the capitol.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: It is the capitol of the Roman Empire.

Since when?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: AD330.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Since AD330.

So, in AD330 Constantine divided the kingdom in half—right?—between East and West, and the political branch of the kingdom went to the East.

And when he did that, what did he give to the Papacy? He gave the Papacy its seat in the City of Rome.

And who is the Papacy? It is the church.

So, from this point on, we see Western Rome a symbol of the church, and Eastern Rome a symbol of the state. That is worth keeping in your mind. Eastern Rome is the state, and Western Rome is the church. Right? Constantinople, the new political center.

—“Constantinople was besieged, for the”—

For what, the seventh or eighth time?

—“for the first time after the extinction of the Western empire, by Chosroes, the king of Persia.’”—

Now, we have things to say about Persia that I am going to say here and not defend. Okay? But, I want you to at least put it into your memory bank to when we come back here.

We are required to understand the Beast, the Dragon, and the False Prophet. Why?

Why are we required to understand that?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (No audible responses.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Because, we are those that have been identified as the ones that are going to call people out of Babylon.

So, what is Babylon?

You ought to know what Babylon is if you are going to call people out of Babylon. In fact, if you are going to be the one that calls people out of Babylon, then you probably need to be the expert on what Babylon is. And what is Babylon at the end of the world?

It is a city that is divided into three parts. One part is the Beast, one part is the Dragon, and one part is the False Prophet. So, if there is light about these three entities or their relationship to one another, as those that are going to call people out of Babylon, we should be the experts on it. And what I want you to see is that each of these powers has their own unique characteristics.

We have dealt a little bit with the Dragon. His primary characteristic is the number 10.

You do not see the number 10 associated with the Papacy. I mean, you do in the sense that the Papacy is counterfeiting Paganism, but it is not a primary symbol of the Papacy.

You do not see the number 10 associated with the False Prophet. And when it comes to the False Prophet, one of the characteristics of the False Prophet is he has two horns.

Okay. When he is the lamb-like beast, it is Republicanism and Protestantism; and when he speaks as a dragon, it is military and economic strength.

And the lamb-like beast, we have already made our first approach to the fact that the lamb-like beast is the power that places the Papacy on the throne of the Earth, and therefore was typified by Clovis; because, the lamb-like beast, we pointed out, is going to exercise all the power of the first beast before it (verse 12 of Revelation 13). And then we went to verse 2 of Revelation 13 and looked at the power, the seat, and the authority, and Clovis represents the power that was given to the Papacy to place it upon the throne of the Earth in AD538; therefore, we have identified that Clovis is typifying the United States, and Clovis is the king of France, and the king of France in Revelation 11, verse 8, has two nations in it, Sodom and Egypt; because France is typifying the United States.

And when it comes to the False Prophet, one of the characteristics of the False Prophet is that it is a dual nation. Okay?

There are only so many nations that are a dual nation. Who brought Babylon to the throne, because Babylon is prefiguring Rome? A twofold nation of France placed Papal Rome on the throne of the Earth, and the twofold nation of the United States is going to put modern Rome on the throne of the Earth. But, who put Babylon on the throne of the Earth? It was Hezekiah, by having the sign of the sun going backwards, which brought the Babylonians.

And then Hezekiah, instead of praising and lifting up the Lord, he said, “Come and look at all the good stuff I have.” And this was the motivation for Babylon coming to the throne of the Earth.

And Hezekiah represents Israel, and Israel is a twofold power. It has the Northern Kingdom and the Southern Kingdom, Ephraim and Judah.

So, it is always a twofold power that places the Papacy or Babylon on the throne of the Earth, and it is always a twofold power that takes her down.

And who took Babylon down?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Medo-Persia.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Medo-Persia, a twofold nation, a twofold nation. That twofold nation is representing who at the end of the world?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The United States.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The United States. All the prophets are speaking about the end of the word.

So, I want you to see in the story of Revelation 9:1 that the power that is being represented here is Persia.

What is Persia? It is a twofold power. It does not say “Medes and Persians” specifically, but that is who Persia is in prophecy. It is the Medes and the Persians.

And when you look closely at the Medes and the Persians, they are teaching the same thing that is taught in Revelation 13:11; the United States changes.

The Medes and the Persians changed. When they came into history, who was the power? The Medes; but they end up, it was the Persians.

But in any case, in Bible prophecy when you see the Persians, what do you see? A twofold power; and, when you see a twofold power, it could be France, the United States.

—“Constantinople was besieged, for the first time after the extinction of the Western empire, by Chosroes, the king of Persia.”

Who is Constantinople? It is Rome, is it not? It is still Rome.

And who is Rome? It is the King of the North.

And who is Persia? It is the twofold power.

Who is it? It is the King of the South. And this is the first encounter between Persia, the King of the South, pushing against Rome, Constantinople, the King of the North.

All right. Do you follow me?

—“‘A star fell from heaven unto the earth; and to him was given the key of the bottomless pit.’

“‘While the Persian monarch contemplated the wonders of his art and power, he received an epistle”—a letter—“from an obscure citizen of Mecca, inviting him to acknowledge Mohammed as the apostle of God. He rejected the invitation, and tore the epistle. “It is thus,” exclaimed the Arabian prophet, “that God will tear the kingdom, and reject the supplication of Chosroes.” Placed on the verge of these two empires of the East, Mohammed observed with secret joy the progress of mutual destruction; and in the midst of the Persian triumphs he ventured to foretell, that, before many years should elapse, victory would again return to the banners of the Romans. “At the time when this prediction is said to have been delivered, no prophecy could be more distant from its accomplishment (!) since the first twelve years of Heraclius announced the approaching dissolution of the empire.”

We have got more to read here, but what it is saying is, is that Persia attacks Constantinople. The King of the South, the two-horned power, the Medes and the Persians, the two-horned power pushes against Constantinople in the East and prevails initially.

But in this line of prophecy [referencing Figure No. 97], it is not about Josiah representing Adventism that rejects the warning message of Daniel 11:40. This line of prophecy we are dealing with here, Revelation 9, it is putting another piece of information into this history. It is going to identify what are the dynamics that take place that brings Islam into prophetic history.

And as we have just read, Mohammad could see that these two powers were going to exhaust their strengths and leave a power vacuum for the rise of Islam, and that is just what happened.

Continuing on,

“‘It was not, like that designative of Attila, on a single spot that the star fell, but UPON THE EARTH.

“‘Chosroes subjugated the Roman possession in Asia and Africa.”—

He pushed against the King of the North, and he prevailed.

“—And “the Roman empire,” at that period, “was reduced to the walls of Constantinople, with the remnant of Greece, Italy, and Africa, and some maritime cities, from Tyre to Trebizond, of the Asiatic coast. The experience of six years at length persuaded the Persian monarch to renounce the conquest of Constantinople,”—

See, it is a long, drawn-out war. He is battling to take Constantinople. He is taking the Empire away from the Romans. But, after six years, he says, “Enough.” He pushes at him.

—“and to specify the annual tribute of the ransom of the Roman empire,—“

“Okay. I am not going to continue warring against you, but you are going to pay me a tribute.” The two-horned power says this.

—“a thousand talents of gold, a thousand talents of silver, a thousand silk robes, a thousand horses, and a thousand virgins. Heraclius subscribed to these ignominious terms. But the time and space which he obtained to collect those treasures from the poverty of the East were industriously employed in the preparation of a bold and desperate attack.”’—

So, he is forced to pay tribute to the two-horned power, Persia; because, he has been delivered a deadly wound, right here [1798]; and, he has a poor kingdom that he is going to raise taxes on in order to pay these tributes to the two-horned power.

But, in the meantime, he has got a secret plan going on. All right? A bold and desperate attack.

And this particular attack, if you are someone that is studying warfare at a college that teaches warfare, you know, the military colleges that do this, this is one of the most famous military campaigns in history. It is studied.

—“‘The king of Persia despised the obscure Saracen,’”—

They despised Islam.

—“‘and derided the message of the pretended prophet of Mecca. Even the overthrow of the Roman empire would not have opened a door for Mohammedanism, or for the progress of the Saracenic armed propagators of an imposture, though the monarch of the Persians and chagan of the Avars (the successor of Attila) had divided between them the remains of the kingdoms of the Caesars. Chosroes himself fell. The Persian and Roman monarchies exhausted each other’s strength. And before a sword was put into the hands of the false prophet, it was smitten from the hands of those who would have checked his career and crushed his power.”—

So, Chosroes, the Persian, he goes down and—anyway, you can follow Smith.

—“‘Since the days of Scipio and Hannibal, no bolder enterprise has been attempted than that which Heraclius achieved for the deliverance of the empire.’”—

Now he is going to tell us about this long, draw-out war campaign.

—“‘He explored his perilous way through the Black Sea and the mountains of Armenia, penetrated into the heart of Persia, and recalled the armies of the great king to the defense of their bleeding country.’

“‘In the battle of Nineveh, which was fiercely fought from daybreak to the eleventh hour, twenty-eight standards, besides those which might be broken or torn, were taken from the Persians; the greatest part of their army was cut in pieces, and the victors, concealing their own loss, passed the night on the field. The cities and palaces of Assyria were opened for the first time to the Romans.’

“‘The Roman emperor was not strengthened by the conquests which he achieved; and a way was prepared at the same time, and by the same means, for the multitudes of Saracens from Arabia, like locusts from the same region, who, propagating in their course the dark and delusive Mohammedan creed, speedily overspread both the Persian and the Roman empire.’”—

So, what is being described here is the two-horned power, Persia, pushes against Rome at the Battle of Constantinople, and puts Rome in subjection. But, the leader of Rome, this Heraclius, he secretly sends his army all the way around the geography of Persia and comes in behind Persia and attacks down here at the Battle of Nineveh. And he defeats Persia at the Battle of Nineveh. The King of the North defeats the King of the South at the end of the battle.

But as he does so, the King of the South, he is out of the picture now; but, Heraclius, the Roman power, all his strength is gone.

So, the two powers, the Persians and the Romans, that could have prevented the rise of Mohammad and Islam, they have no power.

So what this story is telling us is that right after 1989, you should expect to see the rise of Islam into history.

The key, the key that opens that bottomless pit, the Battle of Nineveh: it is 1989; it is Daniel 11, verse 40; it is the point in history where the Dirt Brush Man enters in order to open God’s Word to His people with a testing message.

—“‘More complete illustration of this fact could not be desired than is supplied in the concluding words of the chapter from Gibbon, from which the preceding extracts are taken.’ ‘Although a victorious army had been formed under the standard of Heraclius, the unnatural effort seems to have exhausted rather than exercised their strength. While the emperor triumphed at Constantinople or Jerusalem, an obscure town on the confines of Syria was pillaged by the Saracens, and they cut in pieces some troops who advanced to its relief,—an ordinary and trifling occurrence, had it not been the prelude of a mighty revolution. These robbers were the apostles of Mohammed; their frantic valor had emerged from the desert; and in the last eight years of his reign, Heraclius lost to the Arabs the same provinces which he had rescued from the Persians.’

‘“The spirit of fraud and enthusiasm, whose abode is not in the heavens,’ was let loose on earth. The bottomless pit needed but a key to open it, and that key was the fall of Chosroes. He had contemptuously torn the letter of an obscure citizen of Mecca. But when from his ‘blaze of glory’ he sunk into”—

And where does Chosroes sink into, to mark the key, according to Uriah Smith?

Now, Sister White was asked about if she thought that Uriah Smith’s book, Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation, was inspired, and she was disgusted by that question, it appears to be, if a prophetess can be disgusted; because, she tells her nephew, Frank Belden who asked that question, “I shall not answer that question.”

She knew that Uriah Smith was not inspired. She said, “I shall not answer that question. I dare not say that these men,” these Pioneer authors, “were not led of God; but, as to inspiration in the fullest sense, they were not.” That was her response.

But, she does say they were led of God.

So, what does it mean that you are led of God? Well, maybe it means that the Lord led Uriah Smith right here to say the key, the fall of Chosroes that brings Islam into history, maybe Uriah Smith was saying that what we want to mark the death of Chosroes with is this statement here:

—“But when from his ‘blaze of glory’ he sunk into the ‘tower of darkness’”—

Then we would find a tower marking the rise of Islam in history.

—“he sunk into the ‘tower of darkness’ which no eye could penetrate, the name of Chosroes was suddenly to pass into oblivion before that of Mohammed; and the crescent seemed but to wait its rising till the falling of the star. Chosroes, after his entire discomfiture and loss of empire, was murdered in the year 628; and the year 629 is marked by ‘the conquest of Arabia,’ and ‘the first war of the Mohammedans against the Roman empire.’ ‘And the fifth angel sounded, and I saw a star fall from heaven unto the earth; and to him was given the key of the bottomless pit. And he opened the bottomless pit.’ He fell unto the earth. When the strength of the Roman empire was exhausted, and the great king of the East lay dead in his tower of darkness, the pillage of an obscure town on the borders of Syria was ‘the prelude of a mighty revolution.’ ‘The robbers were the apostles of Mohammed, and their frantic valor emerged from the desert.”’

“The Bottomless Pit.—The meaning of this term may be learned from the Greek, which is defined ‘deep, bottomless, profound,’ and may refer to any waste, desolate, and uncultivated place. It is applied to the earth in its original state of chaos. Genesis 1:2. In this instance it may appropriately refer to the unknown wastes of the Arabian desert, from the borders of which issued the hordes of Saracens like swarms of locusts. And the fall of Chosroes, the Persian king, may well be represented as the opening of the bottomless pit, inasmuch as it prepared the way for the followers of Mohammed to issue from their obscure country, and propagate their delusive doctrines with fire and sword, till they had spread their darkness over all the Eastern empire.” Uriah Smith, Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation, 495–497.

So, what we are saying here is that in Daniel 11, verse 40, you have a long, drawn-out war between the King of the South and the King of the North. It begins when the King of the South pushes at the King of the North and prevails. It ends when the King of the North returns and retaliates and sweeps around the way of the King of the South.

In the history of verse 40, the King of the South is the king of Atheism, and the King of the North is the Papacy and modern Rome.

In the story of Josiah, Egypt pushes against Assyria, and ultimately Egypt is defeated by Babylon many years later in this Battle of Carchemish.

And this tells us that those in Adventism that reject the warning message of verse 40 are going to end up down here in verses 44 to Daniel 12:1 on the wrong side of the issue in Armageddon.

But, Revelation 9, in this long, drawn-out war, is telling us that when Persia pushed against Rome and initially won the battle, that Rome was going to return and retaliate; and, when Rome retaliated and sweeps away the King of the South (Persia) that this is the key that brings Islam into history. So sometime in verse 40, before verse 41 which is The Sunday Law, if what we are saying is correct, with the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989, then sometime before The Sunday Law in the United States, we should expect to see Islam come back into prophetic history.

And if you believe that Uriah Smith was led of the Lord, then maybe the fact that he marks the fall of Chosroes as a fall of a tower to the earth, might ring some bells for you.

Okay. Switching gears now.

A Revival

The purpose of Daniel 11:40-45 is to produce a revival among God’s people. This is another thought in connection with the great, deep significance of Daniel 11:40-45, and verse 40 in particular.

In Selected Messages, book 1, page 121, it says,

“A revival of true godliness among us is the greatest and most urgent of all our needs. To seek this should be our first work.” Selected Messages, book 1, 121.

On page 128 in the same passage, of the same book—this is the same manuscript here. She is going to define what a revival is. She says,

“A revival and a reformation must take place, under the ministration of the Holy Spirit. Revival and reformation are two different things. Revival signifies a renewal of spiritual life,”—

Therefore, if you go back to the quote right before that, when she says a revival is our greatest need and our first work, and it is a renewal of spiritual life, it means that we are spiritually dead. At the end of the world we are Laodiceans. We are a valley of dead, dry bones. We are sleeping virgins, and our greatest need is to be awakened, to have the Spirit breathed upon these dead, dry bones that they might stand up a mighty army.

—a quickening of the powers of mind and heart, a resurrection from spiritual death. Reformation signifies a reorganization, a change in ideas and theories, habits and practices. Reformation will not bring forth the good fruit of righteousness unless it is connected with the revival of the Spirit. Revival and reformation are to do their appointed work, and in doing this work they must blend.” Selected Messages, book 1, 128.

How does that happen?

Testimonies to Ministers, page 113, says,

“When we as a people understand what this book means to us, there will be seen among us a great revival.” Testimonies to Ministers, 113.

And “this book” here, when you look in the writings of Sister White, she is talking about “the books” of Daniel and Revelation; because, she repeatedly says they are the same book.

“When we as a people understand what this book means to us, there will be seen among us a great revival.” Testimonies to Ministers, 113.

Next quote, The Faith I Live By, page 345:

“When the books of Daniel and Revelation are better understood, believers will have an entirely different religious experience. . . One thing will certainly be understood from the study of Revelation—that the connection between God and His people is close and decided.” The Faith I Live By, 345.

Our greatest need is for a revival, and Inspiration teaches us that the revival comes from a prophetic message that is found in the book of Daniel and Revelation; and, we are saying that Daniel 11, verses 40 and 41, these two verses, are the verses that have been designed by God to produce the revival of God’s people.

Verse 40 has the most, the greatest, the biggest historical event of the 20^th Century as its fulfillment, the collapse of the Soviet Union. Verse 40 announces in big, black and white words that the last six verses of Daniel 11 have begun to be fulfilled. God requires Seventh-day Adventists to recognize this. If you recognize that in 1989 Daniel 11, verse 40, was fulfilled in the collapse of the Soviet Union and you wake up and consider what verse 41 represents, verse 41 represents a Sunday Law in the United States. And when you understand what that means, it means that probation is going to close for Seventh-day Adventists at The Sunday Law in the United States. So, the next thing in the prophecies of Daniel 11:40-45 that is specifically marked as happening is the close of probation for Seventh-day Adventists.

If you understand from verse 40 that the next thing to happen is that your probation is going to close and you determine through the power of the Holy Spirit to bring your life into agreement with this fact, what happens to you? You experience a revival in your life, because you know that you are not ready for the Seal of God. You know you are ready for the mark of the beast, and you realize that the mark of the beast and the Seal of God are on their way, so you go to the foot of the cross and you meet the requirements of the Gospel so the Lord can finish the work that He began in you that you can be ready for the Seal of God when verse 41 arrives. And this is the formula that is in Daniel and Revelation that has been designed by God to produce the revival among Seventh-day Adventists at the end of the world, the revival that we call the Latter Rain.

Okay. So, when we are dealing with the significance of verse 40 and that it is the Time of the End for the 144,000, and that there is a truth unsealed in agreement with what we are taught in Daniel 12, and that the Lion of the tribe of Judah begins to remove seals one at a time in agreement with Revelation 5, and that the Dirt Brush Man has entered and is sweeping out the false coin in agreement with William Miller’s dream, what we are saying is that verse 40 is identifying the very truth that brings God’s people to life. And verse 40 is a pretty profound verse.

Okay. So, we have put that in place.

The Elijah Message

We want to look at what is the message of verse 40: What is the message of verse 40? And we are going to say it is the First Message; because, we are repeating the history of the Millerites, and the history of the Millerites is the history of the First and Second Angels’ Messages. The Second Angel’s Message concludes with the arrival of the Third Message. But, the basic history of the Millerites from 1798 to 1844 is the history of the First and Second Angels’ Messages; and, we will repeat that history. We will have a first message and a second message. In every Reform Movement there is a first and a second message that concludes with the closing of a door. So, we want to mark that the message of Daniel 11, verse 40, it is the First Message.

The Judgment of AD70

Matthew 3:7

What is the First Message?

Go to Matthew 3:7. We have been over this before, but we still want to go over it again.

The time of Christ is repeated in our history, and in the time of Christ you had two messages. We have read about it in the worship series, in Early Writings, page 259, “All those that would not receive the message of John the Baptist”—there is your first message—“could not be benefitted by the teachings of Jesus.” There is your second message, and the message of Jesus ended at the cross when the door closed, which was followed by the disappointment of the Disciples, prefiguring the disappointment of the Millerites. The cross lines up with October 22, 1844; and before October 22, 1844, you have the First Message of William Miller, and the Second Message that is marked when the Mighty Angel of Revelation 10 descends, and that Angel is no less the personage than Jesus Christ. The First Message for the Millerites is Miller’s, and the Second is Jesus Christ; and, the First Message in the time of Christ was John the Baptist, and the Second was Jesus Christ. Okay? The same histories.

And in Matthew 3:7, it says, speaking of John,

“⁷But when he saw many of the Pharisees and Sadducees come to his baptism, he said unto them, O generation of vipers, who hath warned you to flee from the wrath to come?” Matthew 3:7 (KJV).

The reason he calls them the “generation of vipers” is this is the fourth generation, prophetically; and, in the fourth generation is when Christ accomplishes the Everlasting Gospel. And when Christ accomplishes the Everlasting Gospel, he is going to produce two classes of worshippers. One is going to be the seed of Christ, and one is going to be the seed of Satan, and Satan is the serpent. Satan is the viper. That is why John is saying, “You are the generation of vipers. You are the generation that is going to become the seed of Satan.” It is not like he is being mean-spirited; he is just being accurate to the generation that he is in.

But, we are not dealing with that. We are dealing with the question that he asked them, who hath warned them to flee from the wrath to come.

What is the wrath to come in the time period of John the Baptist?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The destruction of Jerusalem.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The destruction of Jerusalem in AD70.

And who warned the Jews to flee from the events connected with the close of probation for Ancient Israel? Who had warned them?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Daniel.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Daniel, the prophet. Daniel, the prophet.

The Voice

Matthew 3:1-3; Isaiah 40:1-5

And in Matthew 3, verses 1 through 3, it says,

“¹In those days came John the Baptist, preaching in the wilderness of Judaea, ²And saying, Repent ye: for the kingdom of heaven is at hand. ³For this is he that was spoken of by the prophet Esaias, saying, The voice of one crying in the wilderness, Prepare ye the way of the Lord, make his paths straight.” Matthew 3:1‑3 (KJV).

So, John the Baptist, not only does he give the message that is the events connected with the close of probation, he is the voice crying in the wilderness. Right?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (No audible responses.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Yes?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Yes.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Go to Isaiah 40, verses 1 through 5.

“¹Comfort ye, comfort ye my people, saith your God. ²Speak ye comfortably to Jerusalem, and cry unto her, that her warfare is accomplished, that her iniquity is pardoned:”—

When is Israel’s iniquity pardoned?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (No audible responses.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: At the blotting out of sin.

—“for she hath received of the Lord's hand double for all her sins.

“³The voice of him that crieth in the wilderness, Prepare ye the way of the Lord, make straight in the desert a highway for our God. ⁴Every valley shall be exalted, and every mountain and hill shall be made low: and the crooked shall be made straight, and the rough places plain: ⁵And the glory of the Lord shall be revealed, and all flesh shall see it together: for the mouth of the Lord hath spoken it.” Isaiah 40:1-5 (KJV).

When is the whole world lightened with the glory of the Lord?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Revelation 18.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Revelation 18. This is primarily speaking about Revelation 18.

And when are we pardoned in that time period? When the sins are being blotted out; and, in that time period there will be a voice crying in the wilderness that is setting forth the events connected with the close of probation.

Do you follow the logic?

Okay. Sister White in Prophets and Kings, page 119, says,

“Among the mountains of Gilead, east of the Jordan, there dwelt in the days of Ahab a man of faith and prayer whose fearless ministry was destined to check the rapid spread of apostasy in Israel.”—

Who is Ahab?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: He is Jezebel’s husband.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: He is Jezebel’s husband.

Who is Jezebel? She is the Papacy. She is Thyatira during the 1260 years, and she is modern Rome at the end of the world.

And who is ruling in that relationship, Ahab or Jezebel?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Jezebel.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Jezebel is ruling in that relationship.

And who is Ahab the head of?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Israel.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Ten tribes. Okay? There are Ten Kings in Revelation 17 that commit fornication with the whore of Rome in Revelation 17. Those Ten Kings, that is Israel; but, of those Ten Kings there is one king that rules over those Ten Kings. Who is Ahab?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Israel?

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The United States; because, we read a quote yesterday or the day before that says the United States unites with the dragon power. We pointed it out for you. It becomes part of these Ten Kings, and it is the primary part because we have also read a quote that the United States is the last power to make war with Christians.

Okay. So, Ahab is the Ten Kings; Jezebel is the Papacy; but, Ahab, other than the Ten Kings is primarily representing the role of the United States at the end of the world.

—“Far removed from any city of renown, and occupying no high station in life, Elijah the Tishbite nevertheless entered upon his mission confident in God’s purpose to prepare the way before him and to give him abundant success. The word of faith and power was upon his lips, and his whole life was devoted to the work of reform. His was the voice of one crying in the wilderness”—

He was the voice of one crying in the wilderness, and Isaiah predicts a voice of one crying in the wilderness long after Elijah is on the scene of history.

Miller

So, Elijah is prefiguring John the Baptist; but, Elijah and John the Baptist are prefiguring who?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: William Miller.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: William Miller, and their voices are a message that comes from the wilderness.

—“His was the voice of one crying in the wilderness to rebuke sin and press back the tide of evil. And while he came to the people as a reprover of sin, his message offered the balm of Gilead to the sin-sick souls of all who desired to be healed.” Prophets and Kings, 119.

And, of course, we have read this before, Early Writings, page 233.

“Thousands were led to embrace the truth preached by William Miller, and servants of God were raised up in the spirit and power of Elijah to proclaim the message. Like John, the forerunner of Jesus, those who preached this solemn message felt compelled to lay the ax at the root of the tree, and call upon men to bring forth fruits meet for repentance. Their testimony was calculated to arouse and powerfully affect the churches and manifest their real character. And as the solemn warning to flee from the wrath to come was sounded, many who were united with the churches received the healing message; they saw their backslidings, and with bitter tears of repentance and deep agony of soul, humbled themselves before God. And as the Spirit of God rested upon them, they helped to sound the cry, ‘Fear God, and give glory to Him; for the hour of His judgment is come.’” Early Writings, 233.

So, in the history of the Millerites, there is the First Message, who is William Miller, and it has been prefigured by both John the Baptist and Elijah, who are First Messages.

And Elijah, the real Elijah, is the first of two messages. What is the Second Message in his history?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Elisha.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Elisha.

John the Baptist is the First. Who is the Second in his history? Jesus.

And in the Millerite History, Miller is the First, followed by Jesus on 9/11—(pause)—8/11/1840. Okay?

The Opening of the Judgment

So, what was Miller’s message? We have read this before, The Great Controversy, page 310.

“It was needful that men should be awakened to their danger; that they should be roused to prepare for the solemn events connected with the close of probation.” The Great Controversy, 310.

That is John’s message: Who hath warned you to flee from the wrath to come?” which comes when Ancient Israel is divorced of God at the stoning of Stephen and probation closes upon this people. John the Baptist was acquainting them with the events connected with the close of probation; and William Miller, prefigured by John the Baptist, is presenting the events connected with the close of probation.

And in Daniel 11, verse 40, is introducing the genuine events that lead to the close of probation. Daniel 11, verse 40, is the First Message. It is the message of Elijah; it is the message of John the Baptist; it is the message of Miller.

The Close of Probation

In Prophets and Kings, pages 715 – 716, it says,

“Today, in the spirit and power of Elias and of John the Baptist, messengers of God’s appointment are calling the attention of a judgment-bound world to the solemn events soon to take place in connection with the closing hours of probation and the appearance of Christ Jesus as King of kings and Lord of lords.” Prophets and Kings, 715–716.

And if you see a spokesman in Adventism that is not now identifying the events connected with the close of probation in their message, then you know that they are a false teacher; because, at this time in history, the message is about the events connected with the close of Judgment and Probation. Any other message is a distraction at best. All right?

And what is that message? It is the First Message.

And what marks the beginning of that Message? Daniel 11, verse 40, identifies that the first verse of the verses that lead to the close of probation has been fulfilled; and, it warns those that will be warned that the next verse [verse 41 of Daniel 11] is the close of probation for Seventh-day Adventists and you better get your life straight or you are going to receive the mark of the beast.

What is our work? Testimonies, volume 8, pages 9-10:

“What is our work? The same as that given to John the Baptist, of whom we read: ‘In those days came John the Baptist, preaching in the wilderness of Judea, and saying,”—

So, our work is what? It is the voice of one crying in the wilderness.

—“Repent ye: for the kingdom of heaven is at hand. For this is he that was spoken of by the prophet Esaias, saying, The voice of one crying in the wilderness, Prepare ye the way of the Lord, make His paths straight.’ Matthew 3:1–3.

“All who are truly engaged in the work of the Lord for these last days will have a decided message to bear.”—

A decided message to bear.

—“Read the first few verses of the fortieth chapter of Isaiah:”—

We already did read that.

—“‘The voice of him that crieth in the wilderness, Prepare ye the way of the Lord, make straight in the desert a highway for our God. Every valley shall be exalted, and every mountain and hill shall be made low: and the crooked shall be made straight, and the rough places plain: and the glory of the Lord shall be revealed, and all flesh shall see it together: for the mouth of the Lord hath spoken it.’ Isaiah 40:3–5.

“‘The voice said, Cry. And he said, What shall I cry? All flesh is grass, and all the goodliness thereof is as the flower of the field: the grass withereth, the flower fadeth: because the Spirit of the Lord bloweth upon it: surely the people is grass. The grass withereth, the flower fadeth: but the word of our God shall stand forever.’ Verses 6–8.

“This chapter is filled with instruction appropriate for us at this time. The word of the Lord to us is: ‘Repent ye; prepare the way for a revival of My work.’” Testimonies, volume 8, 9–10.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Hmm.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Elijah’s message was based upon the apostasy of Jezebel; and, in response to that, there were three and a half years of drought. And those three and a half years of drought prefigures the 1260 years of Dark Ages when Jezebel (the Papacy) ruled the world.

And in both Elijah and Miller, their messages were in response to what when on in the wilderness time period.

The voice, the message, that comes out of the wilderness has a relationship to the darkness that precedes that history.

John the Baptist had a relationship to the darkness that preceded that history, the darkness that had put preconceived ideas in the minds of Ancient Israel that prevented them from understanding who the Messiah was. Okay?

So, your message is also always going to have some relationship to the wilderness that precedes your time period.

Do you follow that logic?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmations.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: So, what is the wilderness that precedes our time period?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: William Miller’s dream.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: William Miller’s dream.

If you are not understanding William Miller’s dream and the darkness that has come into Adventism represented by the band of iron and brass that was placed around the root of the tree, then you are not giving a message from the wilderness. You are not the voice crying in the wilderness.

And if you are not talking about the close of probation, you are not that voice crying in the wilderness.

Parables

Now, we have these next quotes here, we have looked at more than once.

The Great Controversy, page 393:

“The parable of the ten virgins of Matthew 25 also illustrates the experience of the Adventist people.” The Great Controversy, 393.

The parable of the Ten Virgins is our parable.

Review and Herald, August 19, 1890:

“I am often referred to the parable of the ten virgins, five of whom were wise, and five foolish. This parable has been and will be fulfilled to the very letter, for it has a special application to this time, and, like the third angel’s message, has been fulfilled and will continue to be present truth till the close of time.” Review and Herald, August 19, 1890.

This parable has been and will be fulfilled to the very letter, fulfilled in the Millerite History, fulfilled in our history.

The parable of the Ten Virgins is about the wise and foolish virgins.

Review and Herald, August 19, 1890, Sister White says,

“The state of the Church represented by the foolish virgins, is also spoken of as the Laodicean state.” Review and Herald, August 19, 1890.

The foolish virgins are that they are going to find that they have no oil; they are the Laodiceans in Adventism. The wise virgins in Adventism that have oil, those are the Philadelphians; and, the Philadelphians are going to have the privilege and responsibility of carrying the final warning message to the eleventh-hour workers that are in Sardis.

But, these parables all teach that after the Judgment there is no probation.

Christ’s Object Lessons, page 123:

“Again, these parables teach that there is to be no probation after the judgment. When the work of the gospel is completed, there immediately follows the separation between the good and the evil, and the destiny of each class is forever fixed.” Christ’s Object Lessons, 123.

When The Sunday Law comes, there is no more probationary time for Seventh-day Adventists. When verse 41 comes, probation is closed. You better get ready before probation closes, or you are going to die. This is the way the Lord produces a revival from the books of Daniel and Revelation.

So, what I am saying is, if you are saying that you are a messenger to Adventism today and you are not emphasizing the events that lead to the close of probation and the close of Judgment, then you obviously are not a messenger and you are not paralleling the work of Elijah and John the Baptist or William Miller.

If your message does not have some connection to the wilderness time period that preceded the unsealing of the prophecy in our day and age, then you are not the voice crying in the wilderness.

Why am I making an emphasis on this? Well, why not? The theme that Jesus marked in Matthew 24, more than any other thing, was that in this time period beware because there is going to be false teachers and false prophets. He said that more than any other thing. So, let us be clear, who are the false teachers, who are the false prophets?

Well, one way you could know is that they do not know anything about the wilderness that precedes 1989, and they are unwilling to talk about the events connected with the close of probation that are represented in the last six verses of Daniel 11.

But, there is one other way—there are probably many, but there is one other way that we are going to deal with as we come to a close—the shut door.

The Shut-Door Doctrine

Selected Messages, book 1, pages 62 – 63:

“It is claimed that these expressions prove the shut-door doctrine, and that this is the reason of their omission in later editions.”—

Okay. The Sister had written some things in her earlier books. When they are reprinted later on, there are some revisions and people are saying, “Look at this. They are trying to take errors that she early on taught and hide them.” Sister White is responding to this.

—“But in fact they teach only that which has been and is still held by us as a people, as I shall show.”—

She is saying, “There were no changes that change what we believed then and now.”

The next paragraph:

—“For a time after the disappointment in 1844, I did hold, in common with the advent body, that the door of mercy was then forever closed to the world.”—

Okay. She believed that! Ellen White believed, before the end of 1844, that on October 22, 1844, probation was closed for everybody. And some people say, “Well, that proves that she is a false prophet.”

Well, you know what else she was doing at that same time that she believed that? She was eating pork. Okay? She was keeping Sunday. So, the idea that she held some misconceptions before light came to her has never been an argument against her prophetic office; so, it should not be that she held this doctrine before 1844, either.

—“For a time after the disappointment in 1844, I did hold, in common with the advent body, that the door of mercy was then forever closed to the world. This position was taken before my first vision was given me. It was the light given me of God that corrected our error, and enabled us to see the true position.

“I am still a believer in the shut-door theory, but not in the sense in which we at first employed the term or in which it is employed by my opponents.

“There was a shut door in Noah’s day. There was at that time a withdrawal of the Spirit of God from the sinful race that perished in the waters of the Flood. God Himself gave the shut-door message to Noah: ‘My spirit shall not always strive with man, for that he also is flesh: yet his days shall be an hundred and twenty years’ (Genesis 6:3).”—

If you can operate on William Miller’s proof-texting method and Isaiah’s line upon line in Isaiah 28, then as she lists these shut-door histories, you know you can go into these shut-door histories and lay them upon one another, line upon line, and see some very interesting things; because, Noah’s teaching is that as we approach this closing of the door, that there is a class that the Spirit is removed from. And what is that class receiving?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Strong delusion.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Strong delusion. This is present truth: Noah.

Then she says,

—“There was a shut door in the days of Abraham. Mercy ceased to plead with the inhabitants of Sodom, and all but Lot, with his wife and two daughters, were consumed by the fire sent down from heaven.

“There was a shut door in Christ’s day. The Son of God declared to the unbelieving Jews of that generation, ‘Your house is left unto you desolate’ (Matthew 23:38).

“Looking down the stream of time to the last days, the same infinite power proclaimed through John: ‘These things saith he that is holy, he that is true, he that hath the key of David, he that openeth, and no man shutteth; and shutteth, and no man openeth’ (Revelation 3:7).

“I was shown in vision, and I still believe, that there was a shut door in 1844. All who saw the light of the first and second angels’ messages and rejected that light, were left in darkness. And those who accepted it and received the Holy Spirit which attended the proclamation of the message from heaven, and who afterward”—

After the Midnight Cry experience.

—“renounced their faith and pronounced their experience a delusion, thereby rejected the Spirit of God, and it no longer pleaded with them.

“Those who did not see the light, had not the guilt of its rejection. It was only the class who had despised the light from heaven that the Spirit of God could not reach. And this class included, as I have stated, both those who refused to accept the message when it was presented to them, and also those who, having received it, afterward renounced their faith. These might have a form of godliness, and profess to be followers of Christ; but having no living connection with God, they would be taken captive by the delusions of Satan. These two classes are brought to view in the vision—those who declared the light which they had followed a delusion, and the wicked of the world who, having rejected the light, had been rejected of God. No reference is made to those who had not seen the light, and therefore were not guilty of its rejection.” Selected Messages, book 1, 62–63.

Now, that is all interesting about “judged by light” and it impacts us; it is important; but, what I want you to see is that in every generation there is a shut-door message.

If you are not preaching a shut-door message, then you are not the voice crying in the wilderness. And what is the shut-door message?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Daniel.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: It is Daniel 11, verse 41. When The Sunday Law arrives, the door is shut on Adventism.

What tells you that the door is about to shut? Verse 40, the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989. The Dirt Brush Man has now arrived. He is telling Adventists, “I’m sweeping the garbage out of the window. If you hold onto those idols, you are going with them.”

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Uh-huh.

Amen.

A Shut-Door Message

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Great Controversy, beginning at page 430:

“It is those who by faith follow Jesus in the great work of the atonement who receive the benefits of His mediation in their behalf, while those who reject the light which brings to view this work of ministration are not benefited thereby.”—

You should study that sentence until you get it.

And I do not get it all, but you need to get this part: In the time of Christ, one of the ways to identify the problems for the Jews is by the rejection of light they could not follow Christ from the earthly sanctuary to the Heavenly Sanctuary. They could not understand His ministration there.

In the time of the Millerites, those people that rejected the light, they could not follow Christ from the Holy Place to the Most Holy Place.

But, all these lines of prophecy are speaking about our day and age, and they are saying that the problem for Seventh-day Adventists at the end of the world is that if they are rejecting the light of this particular message, they will be unable to recognize that Christ moved from the Judgment of the Dead to the Judgment of the Living on September 11, 2001. And because they do not understand that the ministration of Christ has changed, they are going to reap the same reward that the Jews did that participated in the crucifixion of Christ; and that the Protestants did in the United States when they began to carry the label of Apostate Protestantism.

The second sentence:

—“The Jews, who rejected the light given at Christ’s first advent, and refused to believe on Him as the Saviour of the world, could not receive pardon through Him. When Jesus at His ascension entered by His own blood into the heavenly sanctuary to shed upon His disciples the blessings of His mediation, the Jews were left in total darkness to continue their useless sacrifices and offerings. The ministration of types and shadows had ceased. That door by which men had formerly found access to God was no longer open. The Jews had refused to seek Him in the only way whereby He could then be found, through the ministration in the sanctuary in heaven. Therefore they found no communion with God. To them the door was shut. They had no knowledge of Christ as the true sacrifice and the only mediator before God; hence they could not receive the benefits of His mediation.

“The condition of the unbelieving Jews illustrates the condition of the careless and unbelieving among professed Christians, who are willingly ignorant of the work of our merciful High Priest. In the typical service, when the high priest entered the most holy place, all Israel were required to gather about the sanctuary and in the most solemn manner humble their souls before God, that they might receive the pardon of their sins and not be cut off from the congregation. How much more essential in this antitypical Day of Atonement that we understand the work of our High Priest and know what duties are required of us.”

“Repent ye, therefore, and be converted. Send your sins beforehand into Judgment that they might be blotted out. You now are in the time period where the High Priest is investigating living Seventh-day Adventists and blotting out their sins.” You better know that; because, when He finishes, He finishes by closing the door at The Sunday Law.

—“Men cannot with impunity reject the warning which God in mercy sends them. A message was sent from heaven to the world in Noah’s day, and their salvation depended upon the manner in which they treated that message. Because they rejected the warning, the Spirit of God was withdrawn from the sinful race, and they perished in the waters of the Flood. In the time of Abraham, mercy ceased to plead with the guilty inhabitants of Sodom, and all but Lot with his wife and two daughters were consumed by the fire sent down from heaven. So in the days of Christ. The Son of God declared to the unbelieving Jews of that generation: ‘Your house is left unto you desolate.’ Matthew 23:38. Looking down to the last days, the same Infinite Power declares, concerning those who ‘received not the love of the truth, that they might be saved’: ‘For this cause God shall send them strong delusion, that they should believe a lie: that they all might be damned who believed not the truth, but had pleasure in unrighteousness.’ 2 Thessalonians 2:10-12. As they reject the teachings of His word, God withdraws His Spirit and leaves them to the deceptions which they love.” The Great Controversy, 430–431.

Summary

So, what we are saying is, the First Angel’s Message in the time of Christ was presented by John the Baptist, and it was the events connected with the close of probation, and it was the voice, the message, of one crying in the wilderness; and, this is repeated in the time of the Millerites.

In our history, verse 40, with its fulfillment in 1989, opens to us the events connected with the close of probation, and it becomes the First Angel’s Message for us. It is the First Angel’s Message, because it is identifying that in verse 41 the door of probation closes. It is the shut-door message, and it is this message that is designed by God to produce the revival of God’s people at the end of the world.

So, when we are saying that Daniel 11, verse 40, is deep and profound, we cannot even find words to express what we mean by that.

And we will continue on, on Sunday morning.

Shall we pray?

Benediction: Heavenly Father, we thank you for allowing us to be among the few that have seen these truths of verse 40, at least partially. We know that there are people that have not heard these truths and they are not held accountable for them. We know that there are people that have heard them and have rejected them outright, right when they first heard them, and that they are going to be held accountable for them. And we know there is the possibility that we in this room and on the LiveStream and on the DVD who can hear these truths understand them and then set them aside as well. We do not want to be of that class. We want to be of the class that allows the Holy Spirit, and through your Providential Leading, that these truths become part of us, that they change us into your image, and that they prepare us with a winning message to carry to Adventism and then the world. We ask that you will finish that work in each and every one of us. We set before you this day of labor that we each have and ask for you to watch over us, that we will be safe, and help us to do what we do for your glory and honor. And we ask a continue blessing upon the work that we are attempting here with the DVDs and the LiveStreaming. In Jesus’s name, amen.

Habakkuk’s Two Tables #49

PART SIX: 1989

Presented by Jeff Pippenger

Invocation by Brother Jeff Pippenger: Heavenly Father, we thank you for giving us a good night’s rest and bringing us together this morning that we can study your Word. We want the presence of your Holy Spirit in this study. We ask that you grant us that presence. We want the words that are conveyed in this message to be true, honorable, a type that would glorify you. We ask that you would take control of this presentation, overrule my humanity and hide me behind your cross. Forgive me; forgive the listeners of anything that is preventing us from being fully prepared to receive what you have for us. Open the hearts and minds of the listeners, and we ask that you pour your Latter Rain out upon us at this time. We want to understand a little bit of the shaking that goes on as this final warning message proceeds through history. We ask that you grant us that insight at this time. In Jesus’s name, amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: We are dealing with 1989 as the end of William Miller’s scattering in William Miller’s dream as the point in time of 1989 when the Dirt Brush Man arrives and the Lion from the Tribe of Judah begins to unseal the prophetic message for this generation. So, we are spending time on Daniel 11, verse 40, which marks the arrival of the Time of the End for the 144,000, and marks the end of William Miller’s dream.

And we are trying to show that the characteristics of Daniel 11, verse 40, the things that it teaches, the things that it opens up are consistent with the increase of knowledge that comes at the Time of the End when the Book of Daniel is unsealed.

In our last presentation we pointed out that the Millerite History is a two-step history, the First and Second Angels’ Messages, and that the First Angel’s Message in both the time of Christ and in the time of the Millerites and our time is a message connected with identifying with the events connected with the close of probation; and, that it is through the Books of Daniel and Revelation that the Lord designs to produce a revival among His people. We have read from Sister White who said that very thing, in Testimonies to Ministers, page 113.

We then closed in our last presentation by identifying that every Reform Movement has a closed door message, a shut-door message, beginning with Noah, all the way down through time; and, therefore, we have added to the consideration of Daniel 11, verse 40, that this is the Shut-Door Message. Verse 40 identifies the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989, and verse 41 identifies The Sunday Law in the United States where the door closes for Adventism.

So, we are going to continue along that line; but, we are going to deal a little bit with a waymark of prophetic history that sometimes makes people uncomfortable, having to do with the shaking of Adventism.

So, we are going to look at Ezekiel 37, just briefly.

Ezekiel Thirty-Seven

Adventism

We have referred to Ezekiel 37 more than once in this worship series. In Ezekiel 37 is the First and Second Angels’ Messages illustrated, typified by Ezekiel.

In Ezekiel 37, beginning at verse 1, it says,

“¹The hand of the Lord was upon me, and carried me out in the spirit of the Lord, and set me down in the midst of the valley which was full of bones.”—

And Sister White clearly says this is the Seventh-day Adventist Church.

Verse 2:

—“²And caused me to pass by them round about: and, behold, there were very many in the open valley; and, lo, they were very dry. ³And he said unto me, Son of man, can these bones live? And I answered, O Lord God, thou knowest.”—

Can the Adventist Church be brought back to life? And that is what we are dealing with here, is the revival message for Adventism, which is a shut-door message.

Verse 4:

—“⁴Again he said unto me, Prophesy upon these bones and say unto them, O ye dry bones, hear the word of the Lord.”—

This is what brings them back to life, is hearing the Word of the Lord.

—“⁵Thus saith the Lord God unto these bones; Behold, I will cause breath to enter into you, and ye shall live: ⁶And I will lay sinews upon you, and will bring up flesh upon you, and cover you with skin, and put breath in you, and ye shall live; and ye shall know that I am the Lord.” Ezekiel 37:1-6 (KJV).

So, that is what the prophetic message is that Ezekiel is supposed to proclaim.

Ezekiel 37:7-8

And then in verse 7, he says,

⁷So I prophesied as I was commanded: and as I prophesied, there was a noise, and behold a shaking, and the bones came together, bone to his bone. ⁸And when I beheld, lo, the sinews and the flesh came up upon them, and the skin covered them above: but there was no breath in them.” Ezekiel 37:7-8 (KJV).

All right. That is the First Message. After this Ezekiel is going to prophesy to the wind, and the wind is what brings them to life.

And, of course, this is illustrated in the creation of Adam. First, Adam is created as a body. The bones and sinews and muscles are brought together. And then the second step for Adam is the Lord breathes into him the breath of life and he becomes a living soul.

And in the Second Message here, the second prophecy in Ezekiel in verse 9, it says,

—“⁹Then said he unto me, Prophesy unto the wind, prophesy, son of man, and say to the wind, Thus saith the Lord God; Come from the four winds, O breath, and breathe upon these slain, that they may live. ¹⁰So I prophesied as he commanded me, and the breath came into them, and they lived, and stood up upon their feet, an exceeding great army. ¹¹Then he said unto me, Son of man, these bones are the whole house of Israel: behold, they say, Our bones are dried, and our hope is lost: we are cut off for our parts.

—“¹²Therefore prophesy and say unto them, Thus saith the Lord God; Behold, O my people, I will open your graves, and cause you to come up out of your graves, and bring you into the land of Israel. ¹³And ye shall know that I am the Lord, when I have opened your graves, O my people, and brought you up out of your graves, ¹⁴And shall put my spirit in you, and ye shall live, and I shall place you in your own land: then shall ye know that I the Lord have spoken it, and performed it, saith the Lord.

“¹⁵The word of the Lord came again unto me, saying, ¹⁶Moreover, thou son of man, take thee one stick, and write upon it, For Judah, and for the children of Israel his companions: then take another stick, and write upon it, For Joseph, the stick of Ephraim and for all the house of Israel his companions: ¹⁷And join them one to another into one stick; and they shall become one in thine hand. ¹⁸And when the children of thy people shall speak unto thee, saying, Wilt thou not shew us what thou meanest by these? ¹⁹Say unto them, Thus saith the Lord God; Behold, I will take the stick of Joseph, which is in the hand of Ephraim, and the tribes of Israel his fellows, and will put them with him, even with the stick of Judah, and make them one stick, and they shall be one in mine hand. ²⁰And the sticks whereon thou writest shall be in thine hand before their eyes.

“²¹And say unto them, Thus saith the Lord God; Behold, I will take the children of Israel from among the heathen, whither they be gone, and will gather them on every side, and bring them into their own land: ²²And I will make them one nation in the land upon the mountains of Israel; and one king shall be king to them all: and they shall be no more two nations, neither shall they be divided into two kingdoms any more at all: ²³Neither shall they defile themselves any more with their idols, nor with their detestable things, nor with any of their transgressions: but I will save them out of all their dwellingplaces, wherein they have sinned, and will cleanse them: so shall they be my people, and I will be their God. ²⁴And David my servant shall be king over them; and they all shall have one shepherd: they shall also walk in my judgments, and observe my statutes, and do them. ²⁵And they shall dwell in the land that I have given unto Jacob my servant, wherein your fathers have dwelt; and they shall dwell therein, even they, and their children, and their children's children for ever: and my servant David shall be their prince for ever. ²⁶Moreover I will make a covenant of peace with them; it shall be an everlasting covenant with them: and I will place them, and multiply them, and will set my sanctuary in the midst of them for evermore. ²⁷My tabernacle also shall be with them: yea, I will be their God, and they shall be my people. ²⁸And the heathen shall know that I the Lord do sanctify Israel, when my sanctuary shall be in the midst of them for evermore.” Ezekiel 37:9-28 (KJV).

So, our Second Message is the message from the four winds that brings the body to life. So, we are identifying these two messages by Ezekiel as the First and Second Angels’ Messages of Millerite History, the First and Second Messages of our history, the First and Second Messages of the history of Christ. They are the First and Second Messages of all these reform lines.

But, we want to take a component about the First Message; because, in the First Message, when the First Message is presented—and we are saying the First Message arrives for Adventists at the end of the world in 1989, at the conclusion of William Miller’s dream, at the collapse of the Soviet Union in fulfillment of verse 40—that this is that First Message that Ezekiel proclaimed here that brings the bones and the flesh together; but, they are not alive yet.

And it says in verse 7 that when he prophesied as he was commanded, there was a noise and a shaking. And we will get to that in a minute. Let me read a couple of quotes from the Spirit of Prophecy, and then we will deal with noise and shaking.

General Conference Bulletin, February 4, 1893:

“I lay down my pen and lift up my soul in prayer, that the Lord would breathe upon his backslidden people, which are as dry bones, that they may live.” General Conference Bulletin, February 4, 1893.

This is one of several places where Sister White says that God’s people are the dry bones, and she is praying that the Lord would breathe upon them. She is praying that they would receive the revival that they need.

The next quote:

“The dry bones need to be breathed upon by the Holy Spirit of God, that they may come into action, as by a resurrection from the dead.” Bible Training School, December 1, 1903.

And in our last presentation, we quoted from Selected Messages, book 1, page 128, where she says the revival represents a renewal of spiritual life. So, the revival is the resurrection from the dead, and it is the Second Message in Ezekiel 37 that brings the bones into a mighty army.

But, in the First Message, the one we are dealing with, there is a noise and a shaking.

NOISE: Strong’s Concordance, H6963—From an unused root meaning to call aloud; a voice or sound:— + aloud, bleating, crackling, cry (+ out), fame, lightness, lowing, noise, + hold peace, [pro-] claim, proclamation, + sing, sound, + spark, thunder (-ing), voice, + yell.

And the definition of NOISE in Strong’s says, from an unused root to call aloud; a voice or a sound.

So, we have already identified that the First Message, whether it be Elijah, John the Baptist, or William Miller, is identified as the voice crying in the wilderness. This noise is a voice. It is the voice crying in the wilderness for this generation.

NOISE: From an unused root meaning to call aloud; a voice or sound:— + aloud, bleating, crackling, fame, lightness, lowing, noise, hold peace, proclaim, proclamation, sing, sound spark, a thundering voice. Okay. This is the voice crying in the wilderness that brings together the bones and flesh, but does not quite bring them to life.

What is the shaking?

SHAKING: Strong’s Concordance, H7494—From H7493; vibration, bounding, uproar:—commotion, confused noise, earthquake, fierceness, quaking, rattling, rushing, shaking. H7493—A primitive root; to undulate (as the earth, the sky, etc.; also a field of grain), particularly through fear; specifically to spring (as a locust):—make afraid, (re-) move, quake, (make to) shake, (make to) tremble.

SHAKING in verse 7 is from H7493; a vibration, a commotion, a confused noise, an earthquake, fierceness, quaking, rattling, rushing, shaking. A primitive root; to undulate (as the earth, the sky, etc.; also a field of grain), particularly through fear, specifically to spring (as a locust):—make afraid, remove, quake, to shake, make to tremble.

The First Message here, the message of the events connected with the close of probation, the closed-door message, the message the Lord uses to produce a revival, the message of the last six verses of Daniel 11, it is the voice of one crying in the wilderness; and, it produces a shaking in Adventism. And this shaking in Adventism is a subject of the Scriptures. All right? You can identify certain characteristics about the Beast. The Beast never changes. The Beast receives a deadly wound, but its deadly wound is healed.

You can identify characteristics about the False Prophet. The False Prophet is the power that changes. It begins as a lamb and ends up speaking as a dragon.

You can identify characteristics about the Dragon, the number 10. He moves through history.

But, when it comes to the prophetic message to this First Message, it is identified in the Scriptures that this message causes a shaking. So, the shaking is a subject of prophecy. And we want to put this in the mix; because, as we consider how the Lion of the tribe of Judah unseals the message for this generation, beginning in 1989, one of the methods that He uses to lead people to find truth is the argument that is brought against the truth. The Lord has allowed men to be raised up that fight this message; and, because of their faulty reasoning, those people that are following this message have been forced to go to areas in God’s Word to defend this message that they probably would not have gone to had they not been pushed into that corner.

So, at minimum when you are talking about the shaking, it is worthwhile to look at it so you can see that the Lord’s hand was even in control of the opponents that are raised up. Okay?

Ezekiel 37, the First and Second Angels’ Messages; and, it identifies the noise, the voice crying in the wilderness, and it identifies the shaking produced from fear.

Acts 2:13-21; Joel 1:5

Go to Acts, chapter 2, verse 13 through 21. This is at Pentecost. Verse 1 of Acts, chapter 2, says,

“¹And when the day of Pentecost was fully come, they were all with one accord in one place.” Acts 2:1 (KJV).

And in verse 13, as the Disciples are speaking in various languages because there are people from all over the world in Jerusalem at that time period that have their own languages, the gift of tongues is opened up to the Disciples; and, those people that are opposing the message are claiming that these people that are speaking in other than Hebrew are drunk.

Verse 13:

“¹³Others mocking said, These men are full of new wine.”—

New wine is a prophetic characteristic of the Latter Rain Message. Okay?

“¹³Others mocking said, These men are full of new wine.

^“14But Peter, standing up with the eleven, lifted up his voice, and said unto them, Ye men of Judaea, and all ye that dwell at Jerusalem, be this known unto you, and hearken to my words. ¹⁵For these [men] are not drunken, as ye suppose, seeing it is but the third hour of the day. ¹⁶But this is that which was spoken by the prophet Joel. ¹⁷And it shall come to pass in the last days, saith God, I will pour out of my Spirit upon all flesh: and your sons and your daughters shall prophesy, and your young men shall see visions, and your old men shall dream dreams: ¹⁸And on my servants and on my handmaidens I will pour out in those days of my Spirit; and they shall prophesy: ¹⁹And I will shew wonders in heaven above, and signs in the earth beneath; blood, and fire, and vapour of smoke: ²⁰The sun shall be turned into darkness, and the moon into blood, before that great and notable day of the Lord come: ²¹And it shall come to pass, that whosoever shall call on the name of the Lord shall be saved.” Acts 2:13-21 (KJV).

So, go to Joel, where Peter says Pentecost is the fulfillment of Joel. In Joel, chapter 1, verse 5, it says,

“⁵Awake, ye drunkards, and weep; and howl, all ye drinkers of wine, because of the new wine; for it is cut off from your mouth.” Joel 1:5 (KJV).

Okay. The new wine here is what the people on the wrong side of the issue of Pentecost was charging against the Disciples, “And they are drunk here early in the day.” But, the new wine is the Latter Rain Message that came in the time of Peter, the Latter Rain Message that came in the time of the Millerites, and the Latter Rain Message that comes primarily here at the end of the world.

And when the new wine comes, when the Latter Rain Message comes, there is a class who rejects the message. The new wine is cut off from their mouth. And that class accuses those that are receiving the Message of being drunk. So, you have two manifestations of drunkenness. You have the class that is receiving the new wine that are being accused of being drunkards, that are being led by the Holy Spirit; and, then you have the drunkards of Ephraim, those that have been drinking the wine of Babylon and are prevented thereby to not recognize the Latter Rain Message.

So, all I am saying is, what I am saying here in terms of our study, is that when Joel was fulfilled in the time of the Disciples, and when Joel was fulfilled in the time of the Millerites, and it is pointing forward to the perfect fulfillment of Joel at the end of the world, one of the components of this prophetic passage is that there is a controversy that takes place, an argument between those who are fighting the Message and those who are accepting the Message.

That gives us two witnesses. That is Ezekiel and Peter and Joel, three witnesses, that the debate that goes on over the Latter Rain Message is a subject of prophecy.

Sister White is speaking about Acts and Peter and Pentecost in Acts of the Apostles, pages 40 – 43. She says,

“‘Now when this was noised abroad, the multitude came together, and were confounded, because that every man heard them speak in his own language. And they were all amazed and marveled, saying one to another, Behold, are not all these which speak Galileans? and how hear we every man in our own tongue, wherein we were born?’

“The priests and rulers were greatly enraged at this wonderful manifestation,”—

Okay. This was the mighty manifestation of the power of God.

“The Advent Movement from 1840 to 1844 was a glorious manifestation of the power of God.” And when Sister White makes that statement in The Great Controversy, page 611, she is comparing it to the history of Pentecost, which she is dealing with in this passage; and, she is using both Pentecost and the Advent Movement of 1840 to 1844 to illustrate the perfect fulfillment of Joel during our time period, the Latter Rain. So, she is commenting here, and she says, “this wonderful manifestation,” that is a tie-in.

—“The priests and rulers were greatly”—

What? Enraged. Okay?

—“enraged at this wonderful manifestation, but they dared not give way to their malice, for fear of exposing themselves to the violence of the people. They had put the Nazarene to death; but here were His servants, unlettered men of Galilee,”—

Who?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Unlettered men.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Unlettered men of Galilee; no PhD’s behind their names.

—“unlettered men of Galilee, telling in all the languages then spoken, the story of His life and ministry.”—

How is that repeated?

How does the story of His life and ministry get told all over the world in everyone’s own language here at the end? What is that emphasizing?

It is emphasizing that He is going to open up the prophetic understanding of His Word around the globe. The language is going to be opened up at the end is the language of prophecy.

—“The priests, determined to account for the miraculous power of the disciples in some natural way, declared that they were drunken from partaking largely of the new wine prepared for the feast. Some of the most ignorant of the people present seized upon this suggestion as the truth, but the more intelligent knew it to be false; and those who understood the different languages testified to the accuracy with which these languages were used by the disciples.

“In answer to the accusation of the priests Peter showed that this demonstration was in direct fulfillment of the prophecy of Joel, wherein he foretold that such power would come upon men to fit them for a special work.”—and then she quotes from Acts—“‘Ye men of Judea, and all ye that dwell at Jerusalem,’ he said, ‘be this known unto you, and hearken to my words: for these are not drunken, as ye suppose, seeing it is but the third hour of the day. But this is that which was spoken by the prophet Joel: And it shall come to pass in the last days, saith God, I will pour out of My Spirit upon all flesh: and your sons and your daughters shall prophesy, and your young men shall see visions, and your old men shall dream dreams: and on My servants and on My handmaidens I will pour out in those days of My Spirit; and they shall prophesy.’

“With clearness and power Peter bore witness of the death and resurrection of Christ: ‘Ye men of Israel, hear these words: Jesus of Nazareth, a man approved of God among you by miracles and wonders and signs, which God did by Him in the midst of you, as ye yourselves also know: Him . . . ye have taken, and by wicked hands have crucified and slain: whom God hath raised up, having loosed the pains of death: because it was not possible that He should be holden of it.’”—

Next paragraph:

—“Peter did not refer to the teachings of Christ to prove his position, because he knew that the prejudice of his hearers was so great that his words on this subject would be of no effect. Instead, he spoke to them of David, who was regarded by the Jews as one of the patriarchs of their nation. ‘David speaketh concerning Him,’ he declared: ‘I foresaw the Lord always before My face, for He is on My right hand, that I should not be moved: therefore did My heart rejoice, and My tongue was glad; moreover also My flesh shall rest in hope: because Thou wilt not leave My soul in hell, neither wilt Thou suffer Thine Holy One to see corruption. . . .”—

What is Peter’s argument here? Prophecy; he goes to prophecy.

—“‘Men and brethren, let me freely speak unto you of the patriarch David, that he is both dead and buried, and his sepulcher is with us unto this day.’ ‘He . . . spake of the resurrection of Christ, that His soul was not left in hell, neither His flesh did see corruption. This Jesus hath God raised up, whereof we all are witnesses.’

“The scene is one full of interest. Behold the people coming from all directions to hear the disciples witness to the truth as it is in Jesus. They press in, crowding the temple. Priests and rulers are there, the dark scowl of malignity still on their faces, their hearts still filled with abiding hatred against Christ, their hands uncleansed from the blood shed when they crucified the world’s Redeemer. They had thought to find the apostles cowed with fear under the strong hand of oppression and murder, but they find them lifted above all fear and filled with the Spirit, proclaiming with power the divinity of Jesus of Nazareth. They hear them declaring with boldness that the One so recently humiliated, derided, smitten by cruel hands, and crucified, is the Prince of life, now exalted to the right hand of God.

“Some of those who listened to the apostles had taken an active part in the condemnation and death of Christ. Their voices had mingled with the rabble in calling for His crucifixion. When Jesus and Barabbas stood before them in the judgment hall and Pilate asked, ‘Whom will ye that I release unto you?’ they had shouted, ‘Not this Man, but Barabbas!’ Matthew 27:17; John 18:40. When Pilate delivered Christ to them, saying, ‘Take ye Him, and crucify Him: for I find no fault in Him;’ ‘I am innocent of the blood of this just Person,’ they had cried, ‘His blood be on us, and on our children.’ John 19:6; Matthew 27:24, 25.

“Now they heard the disciples declaring that it was the Son of God who had been crucified. Priests and rulers trembled. Conviction and anguish seized the people. ‘They were pricked in their heart, and said unto Peter and to the rest of the apostles, Men and brethren, what shall we do?’ Among those who listened to the disciples were devout Jews, who were sincere in their belief.”—

So, when you are talking about the debate, the shaking that goes on over this message, there are people that will watch the debate that are sincere that are going to come out on the right side of the issue. This is one of the things that is marked in prophecy, in how people understand the message.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Indiscernible question is put to Brother Pippenger.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: This is in Adventism.

—“The power that accompanied the words of the speaker convinced them that Jesus was indeed the Messiah.

“‘Then Peter said unto them, Repent, and be baptized every one of you in the name of Jesus Christ for the remission of sins, and ye shall receive the gift of the Holy Ghost. For the promise is unto you, and to your children, and to all that are afar off, even as many as the Lord our God shall call.’

“Peter urged home upon the convicted people the fact that they had rejected Christ because they had”—

What?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Been deceived.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Been deceived by what?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Priests and rulers.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“been deceived by priests and rulers;”—

So, in this history here, which is repeated in our history, there is going to be a class in Adventism that reject the Latter Rain Message because they have been deceived by priests and rulers.

—“and that if they continued to look to these men for counsel, and waited for them to acknowledge Christ before they dared to do so, they would never accept Him. These powerful men, though making a profession of godliness, were ambitious for earthly riches and glory. They were not willing to come to Christ to receive light.

“Under the influence of this heavenly illumination the scriptures that Christ had explained to the disciples stood out before them with the luster of perfect truth. The veil that had prevented them from seeing to the end of that which had been abolished, was now removed, and they comprehended with perfect clearness the object of Christ’s mission and the nature of His kingdom. They could speak with power of the Saviour; and as they unfolded to their hearers the plan of salvation, many were convicted and convinced. The traditions and superstitions inculcated by the priests were swept away from their minds,”—

What are the traditions and superstitions?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: William Miller’s dream.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: That is the counterfeit coins that are brought in to cover up the genuine jewels in William Miller’s dream.

And how did those counterfeit coins get removed?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Dirt Brush Man.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Dirt Brush Man—what?—swept them away from their minds.

—“and the teachings of the Saviour were accepted.” Acts of the Apostles, 40–43.

History is repeated. The Dirt Brush Man was doing a work there.

And in this history, the message that the Disciples are proclaiming is the present truth testing message for that time. And when that present truth testing message was opened up to their minds, suddenly the entire Bible is opened to them. They can see the message of the hour perfectly and clearly. And this is repeated at the end: Those people that are drinking the new wine that comes on 9/11, the Lion of the tribe of Judah opens the prophetic message for this day and age up to their understanding.

Review and Herald, July 20, 1886, speaking of this very history of Pentecost with Peter, she says,

“It is with an earnest longing that I look forward to the time when the events of the day of Pentecost shall be repeated”—

So, was there an argument, a debate in the history of Pentecost?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmations.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Yes. There is going to be an argument and a debate in this history. It is a subject of prophecy.

—“shall be repeated with even greater power than on that occasion. John says, ‘I saw another angel come down from heaven, having great power; and the earth was lightened with his glory.’ Then, as at the Pentecostal season, the people will hear the truth spoken to them, every man in his own tongue.

“God can breathe new life into every soul”—

Where does God breathe new life into every soul?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Indiscernible response.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: You are marking the day; but, what I am looking for is Ezekiel 37. This is tying into Ezekiel 37. This is the arrival of the Second Message, when the Church is raised up a mighty army.

—“God can breathe new life into every soul that sincerely desires to serve Him, and can touch the lips with a live coal from off the altar,”—

Where is that?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: From Isaiah.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: That is Isaiah 6.

Isaiah 6, now, when He is raising up people, breathing His Spirit upon them, raising them up a mighty army, he purifies their lips. Isaiah 6.

—“and cause them to become eloquent with His praise.”—

He causes them to become eloquent with His praise, even though in a moment Sister White is going to tell us that before He causes them to be eloquent in His praise, they had stammering lips. They are going to be unloosed from those stammering lips.

—“Thousands of voices will be imbued with the power to speak forth the wonderful truths of God’s Word. The stammering tongue will be unloosed,”—

Where is that from?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Isaiah 28.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Isaiah 28.

Okay. Go to Isaiah 28. There is something that you can see, if you are willing to see, in Isaiah 28, verse 11.

—“¹¹For with stammering lips and another tongue will he speak to this people.” Isaiah 28:11 (KJV).

Okay. What is “another tongue”? Different tongues.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Other languages.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Okay. He is going to speak to Adventism with another tongue that is stammering lips.

Verse 12:

“¹²To whom he said, This is the rest wherewith ye may cause the weary to rest; and this is the refreshing: yet they would not hear.” Isaiah 28:12 (KJV).

Who would not hear? There is a group who would not hear. This here, Isaiah 28, is identifying this same shaking. There is a group that refuses to hear the Latter Rain Message.

But, He is going to raise up another tongue to speak to this people, and the other tongue He raises up to speak to this people is identified as the stammering lips.

So, if you are willing to see it, when are the stammering lips raised up? They are raised up when the new wine is cut off from the mouth of those people that are going to oppose them. Joel 1:5. The new wine is cut off from their mouths, and the stammering lips’ mouth is filled with the new wine. Okay? Those are tie-ins there.

Back to our notes,

—“The stammering tongue will be unloosed, and the timid will be made strong to bear courageous testimony to the truth. May the Lord help His people to cleanse the soul temple from every defilement, and to maintain such a close connection with Him that they may be partakers of the latter rain when it shall be poured out.” Review and Herald, July 20, 1886.

This is the Latter Rain Message.

Revelation 10:8-10; Jeremiah 15:16-21; Ezekiel 2:1-3:11; Isaiah 6:5-10; Isaiah 27:1-9

Okay. Revelation 10, verses 8 through 10, describe John eating the Little Book, but it is sweet in his mouth and bitter in his stomach.

“⁸And the voice which I heard from heaven spake unto me again, and said, Go and take the little book which is open in the hand of the angel which standeth upon the sea and upon the earth. ⁹And I went unto the angel, and said unto him, Give me the little book. And he said unto me, Take it, and eat it up; and it shall make thy belly bitter, but it shall be in thy mouth sweet as honey. ¹⁰And I took the little book out of the angel's hand, and ate it up; and it was in my mouth sweet as honey: and as soon as I had eaten it, my belly was bitter.” Revelation 10:8-10 (KJV).

But, when we trace that line through further in the Bible, go to Jeremiah 15. That symbol of eating the Little Book is identifying a shaking among God’s people, a controversy, a debate. John eats the Little Book, but all the prophets agree with one another. And in Jeremiah 15, beginning at verse 16, says,

“¹⁶Thy words were found, and I did eat them;”—

Who found the Words and ate them?

Well, Jeremiah did here, but John does in Revelation 10. He takes the Little Book out of the Angel’s hand and he eats it. Jeremiah and John, this is the same people: it is the Millerites; it is the 144,000.

—“¹⁸Thy words were found, and I did eat them, and thy word was unto me the joy and rejoicing of mine heart: for I am called by thy name, O Lord God of hosts. ¹⁷I sat not in the assembly of the mockers, nor rejoiced; I sat alone because of thy hand: for thou hast filled me with indignation.”—

What does His hand have to do with it?

Why is he sitting alone because of His hand?

Well, in Revelation 10, when the Angel comes down, He has a Little Book open, and where is it at? It is in His hand.

And what does John do? He goes and takes the Little Book out of the hand of Him that came down out of Heaven.

So, this Little Book, this hand that gives the Little Book that John and Jeremiah eat, the fact that they eat this Little Book out of the Angel hand, it causes a what? A separation, a separation.

He says,

—“¹⁷I sat not in the assembly of the mockers, nor rejoiced; I sat alone”—

Okay. This is marking when the Little Book gets eaten, the separation process begins.

Verse 18:

—“¹⁸Why is my pain perpetual, and my wound incurable, which refuseth to be healed? wilt thou be altogether unto me as a liar, and as waters that fail?”—

The separation process begins when the Mighty Angel comes down, with the Little Book opened in His hand. And you take the Little Book and you eat it because of the implications of His hand, a separation begins between the mockers and those that are not the mockers, the two classes.

But, there is a disappointment that comes when the waters fail. What is the disappointment? Verse 18.

What is water? It is a message, right? There is the Latter Rain.

And the message, the message fails. When did the message fail?

Well, right here [pointing to the date of 1843 displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the 1843 Chart], the first disappointment.

Was John representing the Millerites?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmations.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Jeremiah has got to be representing the Millerites, too.

—“¹⁸Why is my pain perpetual, and my wound incurable, which refuseth to be healed? wilt thou be altogether unto me as a liar, and as waters that fail?”—

And what does Habakkuk 2 say about this [1843] Chart? “Though the vision tarry, wait for it, for it will not lie.”

But, they thought it lied. Okay? And it was discouraging, and you can see Jeremiah here, he is discouraged here.

The message failed.

Verse 19:

“¹⁹Therefore thus saith the Lord, If thou return, then will I bring thee again, and thou shalt stand before me: and if thou take forth the precious from the vile, thou shalt be as my mouth: let them return unto thee; but return not thou unto them.”—

What does Jeremiah have to return to?

He thought the vision ended in 1843. He has got to return. He has got to study that out. “Though the vision tarry, wait for it, because it will not lie.”

Okay. From the first disappointment, until October 22, 1844, what were the Millerites doing? They were coming to grips with the starting point of the 2300 Days so that they could calculate out October 22, 1844.

There was a group that—and Sister White talks about it, from the first disappointment. They returned to the study of the prophecies. Jeremiah returned; but, by returning he becomes the Lord’s voice, the Lord’s messenger, the Lord’s mouth.

But, he is told what? “Don’t return to them.”

Do not return to who? To the Protestants; because, you are now in the time period of the Second Angel’s Message, “Babylon is fallen! Come out of her! Don’t return to the Protestants.”

And this has an impact. This has an impact on the story of Jeroboam and Josiah. It is commanded right here, “Don’t return to the Protestants.” There is a separation taking place here.

—“²⁰And I will make thee unto this people a fenced brasen wall: and they shall fight against thee, but they shall not prevail against thee: for I am with thee to save thee and to deliver thee, saith the Lord. ²¹And I will deliver thee out of the hand of the wicked,”—

These are the wicked.

In Daniel 12, who are the wicked contrasted with? The wise. The wise understand the increase of knowledge, but the wicked do not understand. Daniel 12:10.

Okay. The wicked here, “And I will deliver thee out of the hand of the wicked,” what does it mean that you are in someone’s hand?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: That they are in submission?

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Well, it could be submission if you are bowing down to the Pope, or it could be that you are just in agreement. “Can two walk together unless they be agreed?” There is a separation process being marked here.

—“and I will redeem thee out of the hand of the terrible.” Jeremiah 15:16-21 (KJV).

So, in Jeremiah’s story, when he eats the Little Book as John did, you see a separation process begin, a distinction between two classes, the wise and the wicked.

And this is also a part of the story of Ezekiel, Ezekiel, chapter 2.

And what are we doing? We are showing that the controversy over this message is one of the characteristics of this message.

Ezekiel 2,

“^{Chapter 2:1}And he said unto me, Son of man, stand upon thy feet, and I will speak unto thee.”—

When does he stand upon his feet?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: When the breath of life comes.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: When the breath of life comes, Ezekiel 37.

This is Ezekiel. Ezekiel is going to agree with himself, as much as all the prophets are agreeing with one another; and, they stand up on their feet with the Spirit is breathed upon them.

And when did Jesus breathe the Spirit on the Disciples?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: On the Day of Pentecost.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The answer was “On the Day of Pentecost.” Wrong.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: It was in the upper room after He had been resurrected.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: After the resurrection. He is resurrected. He said, “Mary, don’t touch me. I need to ascend to my Father.” That very day He came down out of Heaven, like the Angel of Revelation 10 and the Angel of Revelation 18, and He breathed upon his Disciples the Holy Ghost. He opened their understanding to the prophecies.

Pentecost is still a ways off. This is the sprinkling that precedes the full outpouring. Sister White says that the act of Christ’s breathing upon His Disciples was as a few drops before the great outpouring on the Day of Pentecost.

So, when does Ezekiel stand on his feet? When the Mighty Angel comes down, he stands upon his feet. The Lord has breathed upon him.

Verse 2:

^—“2And the spirit entered into me”—

And that is just what Ezekiel 37 says, that the Spirit enters into the body.

—“²And the spirit entered into me when he spake unto me, and set me upon my feet, that I heard him that spake unto me. ³And he said unto me, Son of man, I send thee to the children of Israel, to a rebellious nation that hath rebelled against me: they and their fathers have transgressed against me, even unto this very day. ⁴For they are impudent children and stiffhearted. I do send thee unto them; and thou shalt say unto them, Thus saith the Lord God. ⁵And they, whether they will hear, or whether they will forbear, (for they are a rebellious house,) yet shall know that there hath been a prophet among them.”—

What is going on here? He has eaten the Little Book, and he is given a message to carry to Adventism; and, the Lord is telling him, “These are a bunch of rebels.”

Okay. You need to know that when you carry this message—and that is what it says—they will know that there has been a prophet among them.

What does that mean to us? They will know that there has been a prophetic message marked that is testing them. They will know it; but, they are a rebellious house; because, there is going to be a shaking. There is going to be a controversy. There is going to be an argument. There is going to be a debate.

Verse 6:

^—6And thou, son of man, be not afraid of them, neither be afraid of their words,”—

So, are they going to say something about this message? “These men are drunk. These men are drunk with new wine.” There is going to be an argument.

—“⁶And thou, son of man, be not afraid of them, neither be afraid of their words, though briers and thorns be with thee, and thou dost dwell among scorpions: be not afraid of their words, nor be dismayed at their looks, though they be a rebellious house. ⁷And thou shalt speak my words unto them, whether they will hear, or whether they will forbear: for they are most rebellious. ⁸But thou, son of man, hear what I say unto thee; Be not thou rebellious like that rebellious house: open thy mouth, and eat that I give thee.

⁹And when I looked, behold, an hand”—an hand—“was sent unto me;”—

What does that hand and have in it?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Little Book.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Little Book, opened.

—“and, lo, a roll of a book was therein; ¹⁰And he spread it before me; and it was written within and without: and there was written therein lamentations, and mourning, and woe.

^{Chapter 3:1}Moreover he said unto me, Son of man, eat that thou findest; eat this roll, and go speak unto the house of Israel. ²So I opened my mouth, and he caused me to eat that roll. ³And he said unto me, Son of man, cause thy belly to eat, and fill thy bowels with this roll that I give thee. Then did I eat it; and it was in my mouth as honey for sweetness.

⁴And he said unto me, Son of man, go, get thee unto the house of Israel, and speak with my words unto them. ⁵For thou art not sent to a people of a strange speech and of an hard language, but to the house of Israel; ⁶Not to many people of a strange speech and of an hard language, whose words thou canst not understand. Surely, had I sent thee to them, they would have hearkened unto thee.

⁷But the house of Israel will not hearken unto thee; for they will not hearken unto me: for all the house of Israel are impudent and hardhearted. ⁸Behold, I have made thy face strong against their faces, and thy forehead strong against their foreheads.”—

So, in the process of carrying this message to Adventism, what does the Lord promise to do?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Strengthen his forehead.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Strengthen your forehead; that is kind of the same place where the Seal of God is applied, is it not?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: This process of this argument, this shaking, this controversy in Adventism, this debate, is part of the sealing process of the 144,000. Only those that sigh and cry for the abominations done in the land will receive the Seal of God.

But, it is not enough just to sit there and sigh and cry. You have been given a message. You have to give the message. And when you give the message, those that are supposed to hear it, they are not going to sit there silently. They are going to argue with you. They are going to malign your character. They are going to point out that you do not have a PhD behind your name. That is part of the process.

Verse 9—verse 8, again:

—“⁸Behold, I have made thy face strong against their faces, and thy forehead strong against their foreheads. ⁹As an adamant harder than flint have I made thy forehead: fear them not, neither be dismayed at their looks, though they be a rebellious house. ¹⁰Moreover he said unto me, Son of man, all my words that I shall speak unto thee receive in thine heart, and hear with thine ears. ¹¹And go, get thee to them of the captivity, unto the children of thy people, and speak unto them, and tell them, Thus saith the Lord God; whether they will hear, or whether they will forbear.” Ezekiel 2:1–3:11 (KJV).

So, what we are saying is, the argument, the debate, the shaking in Adventism that is caused, that begins with the arrival of the First Angel’s Message for this history, which are the events connected with the close of probation, which are the last six verses of Daniel 11, that message causes a shaking in Adventism.

Go to Isaiah 6, which we have already mentioned this, Isaiah 6. You know you can prove things upon two or three, and move on; but, we are taking time to show this in several places, so that we understand that this is part of the story.

Isaiah 6, beginning with verse 5:

⁵Then said I, Woe is me! for I am undone; because I am a man of unclean lips, and I dwell in the midst of a people of unclean lips: for mine eyes have seen the King, the Lord of hosts. ⁶Then flew one of the seraphims unto me, having a live coal in his hand, which he had taken with the tongs from off the altar: ⁷And he laid it upon my mouth, and said, Lo, this hath touched thy lips; and thine iniquity is taken away, and thy sin purged.”—

This takes place in the blotting out of sin. We are purged here, atoned.

Verse 8:

—“⁸Also I heard the voice of the Lord, saying, Whom shall I send, and who will go for us? Then said I, Here am I; send me.”—

So, Isaiah is now being commissioned to carry a message to Adventism.

And if you remember earlier on, if you back up to verse 3, it says, “And one cried unto another, and said, Holy, holy, holy, is the Lord of hosts: the whole earth is full of his glory.” And Sister White ties verse 3 in with Revelation 18. That quote is in your notes.

So, on 9/11 Isaiah just had his lips purified because he is going to carry a message to Adventism.

And in verse 9, it says,

—“⁹And he said, Go, and tell this people, Hear ye indeed, but understand not; and see ye indeed, but perceive not. ¹⁰Make the heart of this people fat, and make their ears heavy, and shut their eyes; lest they see with their eyes, and hear with their ears, and understand with their heart, and convert, and be healed.” Isaiah 6:5-10 (KJV).

So, Isaiah also is portrayed as having to take a message to an unconverted people that by and large will not respond to the message. The argument, the shaking, and debate are part of the prophetic record.

Go to Isaiah 27. Isaiah 27, beginning at verse 1 says,

“¹In that day”—

And you would have to back up further into Isaiah to understand what day that is, but it is the day of the Latter Rain. It is the day when the globalists, the money men of the world, are seeing the financial structure being swept away by an East wind.

—“¹In that day the Lord with his sore and great and strong sword”—His prophetic Word—“shall punish leviathan the piercing serpent,”—

He is going to punish the dragon.

—“even leviathan that crooked serpent; and he shall slay the dragon that is in the sea.

²In that day sing ye unto her, A vineyard of red wine.”—

At the time period when the financial structure of Planet Earth is being brought down through the increasing, escalating crisis of Islam, and the punishment of the rich men of the Earth, the dragon power has begun, and in that time period the experience—(because a song is an experience)—the experience of God’s people is that they are to present the parable of the vineyards to Adventism. And the parable of the vineyard was and is that the vineyard is going to be taken from Adventism and given to a group of people that bear the fruits thereof.

We have not the time to go into that, but that is verse 2.

—“²In that day sing ye unto her, A vineyard of red wine. ³I the Lord do keep it; I will water it every moment: lest any hurt it, I will keep it night and day. ⁴Fury is not in me: who would set the briers and thorns against me in battle? I would go through them, I would burn them together. ⁵Or let him take hold of my strength, that he may make peace with me; and he shall make peace with me.”—

The parable of the vineyard is the last call for Adventism. It is the last opportunity for Seventh-day Adventists to awaken out of their Laodicean condition and make peace with Christ, which He is fully willing to do; but, at the same time, He is telling them, “This is the parable of the vineyard. I am closing up shop. We are in the Judgment of the Living. You either come to the foot of the cross now, or you are going to die.”

And then in verse 6, it says,

—“⁶He shall cause them that come of Jacob to take root: Israel shall blossom and bud,”—

What causes the blossoming and budding in the Scriptures is the Latter Rain.

—“Israel shall blossom and bud, and fill the face of the world with fruit.”—

The fruit takes place in the harvest of the world. Budding out and blossoming out is in the springtime. The harvest, when the fruit is gathered in is in the summertime. This is identifying both phases of the Latter Rain, the spring and summer Latter Rain. But, at a very simple level, it is just emphasizing the Latter Rain: The parable of the vineyard here, when the dragon power is being judged on Planet Earth. Just turn on your televisions, get your newspapers, if you cannot see that the dragon power, the globalists, the economic structure, is on its way down. You need to start looking at the news. That is very easy to see. That is verse 1. The Lord is bringing judgment upon the globalists as we speak.

And at this time in history, the Lord’s last call to Adventism, the parable of the vineyard, is going to be proclaimed by those that are having this experience.

And it is in the time period of the Latter Rain when one of the arguments for Adventism about the Latter Rain is they do not even understand it comes with a sprinkling and a full out-pouring, a springtime Rain and a summer Rain. They do not understand the Latter Rain. They are sleeping Laodiceans.

Verse 7:

—“⁷Hath he smitten him, as he smote those that smote him? or is he slain according to the slaughter of them that are slain by him?”—

This is judgment terminology, letting us know that this story is taking place in the Judgment time.

And in verse 8, it says,

—⁸In measure, when it shooteth forth,”—

This is marking the sprinkling of the Latter Rain when it is being measured, and the buds are just bursting forth.

—“thou wilt debate with it:”—

Now, here is this debate. There is going to be a debate. There is going to be a debate over the Latter Rain. There is going to be a debate over the two phases of the Latter Rain, the sprinkling of the springtime Rain and the full outpouring of the summer Rain. There is going to be a debate in Adventism.

—“⁸In measure, when it shooteth forth,”—

When it begins to sprinkle, when the Mighty Angel comes down and breathes upon the dry bones, and the sprinkling of Adventism begins and the parable of the vineyard becomes present truth, then the debate starts. The new wine is cut off from the mouth, and another mouth (the mouth of stammering tongues) is going to be loosed in this controversy in Adventism.

Verse 8:

—“⁸In measure, when it shooteth forth, thou wilt debate with it: he stayeth his rough wind in the day of the east wind.”—

All of the prophets agree with one another, and this staying of the rough wind, this is the restraining of the rough wind. And the rough wind, according to John in chapter 7 of Revelation, is the Four Winds. This debate begins when the Four Winds of strife are being restrained: “he stayeth his rough wind.” He restrains the Four Winds of strife in the day of the East wind.

When the day of the East wind arrives, the debate begins; and, the angels hold the Four Winds of Revelation 7, identifying that the sealing of the 144,000 has now begun.

—“⁹By this therefore”—

By what? By the argument over 9/11, the day of the East wind, and the Latter Rain, and the parable of the vineyard, and the role of the globalists in end-time Bible prophecy, with those subjects in the first eight verses of Isaiah 27.

Then in verse 9, it says,

—“⁹By this therefore shall the iniquity of Jacob be purged;”—

By what? By this argument in Adventism, by this debate.

Not only is the debate the argument that ensues over the Latter Rain Message beginning in 1989 and then amped up to a new level on 9/11; not only is this a subject of prophecy, it is here identified that this debate has something to do with removing the sins from God’s people. That is what it says.

—“⁹By this therefore shall the iniquity of Jacob be purged, and this is all the fruit to take away his sin; when he maketh all the stones of the altar as chalkstones that are beaten in sunder, the groves and images shall not stand up.” Isaiah 27:1-9 (KJV).

So, what I am wanting us to see here, in advance of our following studies, is that these people that have been opposing this message since it first came into history in 1989, their opposition at some time needs to be publicly presented in order that we can see that the Lord has used this opposition to His glory and honor, in forcing His people to come to conclusions about God’s Word that they would not have come to had they not been thrown into this debate.

The Shaking

Early Writings, beginning on page 269, Sister White comments on this very same topic, and her familiar term for this controversy for this debate, for Jeremiah and Ezekiel carrying this message to the rebellious house, is “the shaking,” the shaking of Adventism.

“I saw some, with strong faith and agonizing cries, pleading with God. Their countenances were pale and marked with deep anxiety, expressive of their internal struggle.”—

If you are not having an internal struggle right now, if you are not sighing and crying, then I guarantee you are not making the right moves in order to receive the Seal of God.

—“Firmness and great earnestness was expressed in their countenances; large drops of perspiration fell from their foreheads. Now and then their faces would light up with the marks of God’s approbation, and again the same solemn, earnest, anxious look would settle upon them.

“Evil angels crowded around, pressing darkness upon them to shut out Jesus from their view, that their eyes might be drawn to the darkness that surrounded them, and thus they be led to distrust God and murmur against Him. Their only safety was in keeping their eyes directed upward. Angels of God had charge over His people, and as the poisonous atmosphere of evil angels was pressed around these anxious ones, the heavenly angels were continually wafting their wings over them to scatter the thick darkness.

“As the praying ones continued their earnest cries, at times a ray of light from Jesus came to them, to encourage their hearts and light up their countenances. Some, I saw, did not participate in this work of agonizing and pleading. They seemed indifferent and careless. They were not resisting the darkness around them, and it shut them in like a thick cloud. The angels of God left these and went to the aid of the earnest, praying ones. I saw angels of God hasten to the assistance of all who were struggling with all their power to resist the evil angels and trying to help themselves by calling upon God with perseverance. But His angels left those who made no effort to help themselves, and I lost sight of them.

“I asked the meaning of the shaking I had seen and was shown that it would be caused by the straight testimony called forth by the counsel of the True Witness to the Laodiceans.”—

Now, Sister White is clear when she says that the message of Jones and Waggoner in 1888, it was the Laodicean message. So, you can take those and you can show that the Laodicean message is the Latter Rain Message, because Jones and Waggoner’s message was the Latter Rain Message. So, this is in reference to the Latter Rain Message being a straight testimony. Okay? The Latter Rain Message is saying, “You think that Jesus is inside you, but He isn’t!” Okay? It is a prophetic message.

Who would say that the Seven Churches is not a prophetic message? All of them, It [the Seven Churches] is prophecy: the Laodicean message is a prophetic message that is a straight testimony message that causes the shaking when it is presented.

—“I asked the meaning of the shaking that I had seen and was shown that it would be caused by the straight testimony called forth by the counsel of the True Witness to the Laodiceans. This will have its effect upon the heart of the receiver, and will lead him to exalt the standard and pour forth the straight truth. Some will not bear this straight testimony. They will rise up against it, and this is what will cause a shaking among God’s people.”—

What causes the shaking among God’s people?

Is it the people that are presenting the truth? Nope! It is those people that hear it and do not like it. They are the ones that cause the shaking.

But, are they going to hear the truth?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Yes.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Yes.

And is it going to be the straight truth? Yes.

And are there going to be people that stand up and fight the straight truth? Yes.

This is a subject of prophecy, one of the characteristics of this prophetic message.

—“I saw that the testimony of the True Witness has not been half heeded. The solemn testimony upon which the destiny of the church hangs”—

WOW!! This prophetic message, this Latter Rain Message, is where the destiny of the Church hangs. This is a pretty serious message.

—“has been lightly esteemed, if not entirely disregarded. This testimony must work deep repentance; all who truly receive it will obey it and be purified.

“Said the angel, ‘List ye!’ Soon I heard a voice like many musical instruments all sounding in perfect strains, sweet and harmonious. It surpassed any music I had ever heard, seeming to be full of mercy, compassion, and elevating, holy joy. It thrilled through my whole being. Said the angel, ‘Look ye!’ My attention was then turned to the company I had seen, who were mightily shaken. I was shown those whom I had before seen weeping and praying in agony of spirit. The company of guardian angels around them had been doubled, and they were clothed with an armor from their head to their feet. They moved in exact order, like a company of soldiers. Their countenances expressed the severe conflict which they had endured, the agonizing struggle they had passed through. Yet their features, marked with severe internal anguish, now shone with the light and glory of heaven. They had obtained the victory, and it called forth from them the deepest gratitude and holy, sacred joy.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: This is in agreement with Ezekiel and Jeremiah informing us that He is going to make their forehead as an adamant stone. This experience is what causes them to be settled in and sealed to the truth.

“The numbers of this company had lessened. Some had been shaken out and left by the way. The careless and indifferent, who did not join with those who prized victory and salvation enough to perseveringly plead and agonize for it, did not obtain it, and they were left behind in darkness, and their places were immediately filled by others taking hold of the truth and coming into the ranks. Evil angels still pressed around them, but could have no power over them.

“I heard those clothed with the armor speak forth the truth with great power. It had effect. Many had been bound; some wives by their husbands, and some children by their parents. The honest who had been prevented from hearing the truth now eagerly laid hold upon it.”—

Here is the separation process of Jeremiah, even in families.

—“All fear of their relatives was gone, and the truth alone was exalted to them. They had been hungering and thirsting for truth; it was dearer and more precious than life. I asked what had made this great change. An angel answered, ‘It is the latter rain, the refreshing from the presence of the Lord, the loud cry of the third angel.’

“Great power was with these chosen ones. Said the angel, ‘Look ye!’ My attention was turned to the wicked, or unbelievers. They were all astir. The zeal and power with the people of God had aroused and enraged them. Confusion, confusion, was on every side.”—

So, do you think there is not going to be a controversy in Adventism, no shaking?

—“I saw measures taken against the company who had the light and power of God. Darkness thickened around them; yet they stood firm, approved of God, and trusting in Him. I saw them perplexed; next I heard them crying unto God earnestly. Day and night their cry ceased not: ‘Thy will, O God, be done! If it can glorify Thy name, make a way of escape for Thy people! Deliver us from the heathen around about us. They have appointed us unto death; but Thine arm can bring salvation.’ These are all the words which I can bring to mind. All seemed to have a deep sense of their unworthiness and manifested entire submission to the will of God; yet, like Jacob, every one, without an exception, was earnestly pleading and wrestling for deliverance.

“Soon after they had commenced their earnest cry, the angels, in sympathy, desired to go to their deliverance. But a tall, commanding angel suffered them not. He said, ‘The will of God is not yet fulfilled. They must drink of the cup. They must be baptized with the baptism.’” Early Writings, 269–272.

We have to have this experience if we are going to receive the Seal of God. We have to have the experience of taking a message to an apostate people.

Not the Present Truth

The shaking is not the present truth. It is just one component of the present truth. Notice what she says in Manuscript Releases, volume 3, beginning at page 335.

“Satan is working in many ways, that the very men who ought to preach the message may be occupied with fine-drawn theories which he will cause to appear of such magnitude and importance as to fill the whole mind; and while they think they are making wonderful strides in experience, they are idolizing a few ideas, and their influence is injured, and tells but little on the Lord’s side.”—

Now, this is a tricky passage. I want you to remember what we have studied this morning.

There is a people that the Lord has selected to give the message, and those people are very clearly marked as another tongue. They are the stammering lips. So, she is going to describe a group here that are on the wrong side of proclaiming the message. This is not a rebuke on those people that are giving the Latter Rain Message; this is about those people that are professing to be the messengers in Adventism, who are not. Okay?

—“Let every minister make earnest efforts to ascertain what is the mind of Christ. There are those who pick out from the Word of God, and also from the Testimonies, detached paragraphs or sentences that may be interpreted to suit their own ideas, and they dwell upon these, and build themselves up in their own positions, when God is not leading them. Now all this pleases the enemy.”—

Do you want to see this technique used? Go to some of the websites in Adventism that are opposing the foundational truths, the 2520, and the Daily, and Islam, and you will see this type of technique: Take a little snippet of the Bible here, and a little snippet of the Spirit of Prophecy here, and tell your listeners, your readers this is what it means, and then build an entire straw man on this false premise. That is what she is talking about here.

—“We should not needlessly take a course that will make differences or cause dissension. We should not give the impression that if our particular ideas are not followed, it is because the ministers are lacking in comprehension. There are in the lessons of Christ subjects in abundance that you can speak upon; and mysteries which neither you nor your hearers can understand or explain might better be left alone. Give the Lord Jesus Christ Himself room to teach; let Him by the influence of His Spirit open to the understanding the wonderful plan of salvation. There is a time of trouble coming to the people of God, but we are not to keep that constantly before the people, and rein them up to have a time of trouble beforehand. There is to be a shaking among God’s people;”—

That is what we are studying here today. There is to be a shaking among God’s people.

—“but this is not the present truth to carry to the churches; it—the shaking—“will be the result of refusing the truth presented.”—

Once again she is saying the shaking is causes by those people that are rejecting the Latter Rain Message; but, she is also saying that even though this controversy, this debate over this message is a component of the prophetic message, this is not supposed to be the all-in-all message, the fact that these apostates are opposing this message.

—“The ministers should not feel that they have some wonderful advanced ideas, and unless all receive these, they will be shaken out, and a people will arise to go forward and upward to the victory. Satan’s object is accomplished just as surely when men run ahead of Christ and do the work He has never entrusted to their hands, as when they remain in the Laodicean state, lukewarm, feeling rich and increased with goods, and in need of nothing. The two classes are equally stumbling-blocks.

“Some zealous ones who are aiming and straining every energy for originality have made a grave mistake in trying to get something startling, wonderful, entrancing, before the people, something that they think others do not comprehend; but often they do not themselves know what they are talking about. They speculate upon God’s word, advancing ideas that are not a whit of help to themselves or to the churches. For the time being they may excite the imagination; but there is a reaction, and these very ideas become a hindrance. Faith is confounded with fancy, and their views may bias the mind in the wrong direction. Let the plain, simple statements of the word of God be food for the mind; this speculating upon ideas that are not clearly presented there is dangerous business.

“Some are naturally combative. They do not care whether they harmonize with their brethren or not. They would like to enter into controversy, would like to fight for their particular ideas; but they should lay this aside, for it is not developing the Christian graces. Work with all your power to answer the prayer of Christ, that His disciples may be one, as He is one with the Father. Not a soul of us is safe unless we learn of Christ daily His meekness and lowliness. In your labor do not be dictatorial, do not be severe, do not be antagonistic. Preach the love of Christ, and this will melt and subdue hearts. Seek to be of one mind and one judgment with your brethren, and to speak the same things. This talking about divisions because all do not have the same ideas as present themselves to your mind, is not the work of God but of the enemy. Talk the simple truths wherein you can agree. Talk of unity; do not become narrow and conceited; let your mind broaden.” Manuscript Releases, volume 3, 33–35.

They Are To Be Met And Opposed

The next quote, from Review and Herald, September 12, 1893, “They are to be Met and Opposed.”

“God speaks through his appointed agencies, and let no man, or confederacy of men, insult the Spirit of God by refusing to hear the message of God’s word from the lips of his chosen messengers. By refusing to hear the message of God, men close themselves in a chamber of darkness.”—

And what are the chambers of darkness? Okay. If you follow that one through, it is Matthew 24. Jesus talks about secret chambers, and Sister White identifies these secret chambers of Matthew 24 as spiritualism. You reject this message, you are going into chambers of darkness. You reject this message, you are going to receive the strong delusion of 2 Thessalonians. You receive spiritualism; because, spiritualism is placing your word above God’s Word. Reject God’s Word, you go into chambers of darkness.

—“They shut their own souls away from vast blessings, and rob Christ of the glory that should come to him, by showing disrespect to his appointed agencies.

“God is not the author of confusion, but of peace. But Satan is a vigilant, unsleeping foe, ever at work upon human minds, seeking a soil in which he can sow his tares. If he finds any whom he can press into his service, he will suggest ideas and false theories, and make them zealous in advocating error. The truth not only converts, but works the purification of its receiver. Jesus has warned us to beware of false teachers.”—

Jesus has warned us to be aware of false teachers. Jesus has warned us to be aware of false teachers.

—“From the beginning of our work, men have arisen from time to time, advocating theories that were new and startling. But if those who claim to believe the truth, would go to those who have had experience,”—

Who has had an experience?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Pioneers.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Pioneers; if you would, go to the Pioneer writings.

—“But if those who claim to believe the truth, would go to those who have had experience, would go to the word of God in a teachable, humble spirit, and examine their theories in the light of truth, and with the aid of the brethren who have been diligent Bible students, and at the same time make supplication unto God, asking, Is this the way of the Lord, or is it a false path in which Satan would lead me? they would receive light, and would escape out of the net of the fowler.

“Let all our brethren and sisters beware of anyone who would set a time for the Lord to fulfill his word in regard to his coming, or in regard to any other promise he has made of special significance. ‘It is not for you to know the times or the seasons, which the Father hath put in his own power.’ False teachers may appear to be very zealous for the work of God, and may expend means to bring their theories before the world and the church; but as they mingle error with truth, their message is one of deception, and will lead souls into false paths. They are to be”—

To be what?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Met and opposed.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“met, and opposed, not because they are bad men, but because they are teachers of falsehood, and are endeavoring to put upon falsehood the stamp of truth. What a pity it is that men will go to such pains to discover some theory of error, when there is a whole storehouse of precious gems of truth by which the people might be enriched in the most holy faith. Instead of teaching truth, they let their imagination dwell upon that which is new and strange, and throw themselves out of harmony with those whom God is using to bring the people up upon the platform of truth. They cast aside all that has been said in regard to unity of sentiment and feeling, and trample upon the prayer of Christ as though the unity for which he prayed was unessential, that there is no necessity for his followers to be one, even as he is one with the Father. They go off on a tangent, and Jehu- like, call to their brethren to follow their example of zeal for the Lord. If their zeal led them to work in the same lines in which their brethren who have carried the heat and burden of the day, are working; if they were as persevering to overcome discouragements and obstacles as their brethren have been, they might well be imitated, and God would accept them. But men are to be condemned who start out with a proclamation of wonderful light, and yet draw away from the agents whom God is leading. This was the way in which Korah, Dathan, and Abiram did, and their action is recorded as a warning to all others. We are not to do as they have done,—accuse and condemn those upon whom God has laid the burden of the work.” Review and Herald, September 12, 1893.

So, from this point in our presentations, from time to time we are going to identify some of the false teachers that are opposing this [Latter Rain] Message, not because they are bad men, not because we just feel like exposing them; but, we will do it in order to understand their false logic and how that false logic created an investigation of the false charge that led to jewels that had not been recognized. We want us to see that the work of the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Dirt Brush Man, includes even this debate, this controversy in Adventism.

Shall we pray?

Benediction: Heavenly Father, we thank you for another day of life. We thank you that we are living in a time when you are offering the Little Book that all who would desire to eat of it and be blessed by it, may. We ask that you give us the courage, the spiritual willingness to fulfill our responsibility in taking the Little Book out of your hand and eating it and digesting it. And then we ask that you would grant us the power that comes with that Little Book that we may be about our business of taking a message to a rebellious house. We want to be part of the solution to this problem. We do not want to put stumbling blocks before people, but we know that we have a message to bear; so, we ask that we do it with a style that only glorifies you. We ask for your continued blessing in this worship series that we are doing; and, as we begin a week of LiveStreaming with Pastor Jamal here tomorrow, we would ask for your continued blessing upon the DVD recordings and the LiveStreaming production that we are doing. And we thank you for all these things in Jesus’s name. Amen.

Habakkuk’s Two Tables #50

PART SIX: 1989

Presented by Jeff Pippenger

Invocation by Brother Jeff Pippenger: Heavenly Father, as we come before you this morning we want to ask that you would watch over this week of work, of service, of recording, broadcasting that we are doing here, that you would bless it, that you would let all that is done during these days be for your glory and honor. So, taking up our worship this morning, we ask for the presence of your Holy Spirit. Guide and direct our thoughts, our understanding. We ask that you would overrule my humanity, forgive my sins, forgive anything that I have done that is preventing me from being used by you at this time; and, likewise, prepare the hearts and minds of those that are hearing these things to receive what you have for us this morning. We want the Latter Rain. We ask that you pour your Latter Rain out upon us at this time by opening our understanding to the glorious land in Daniel 11, verse 41. In Jesus’s name, amen.

Overflow

BROTHER PIPPENGER: Yesterday we spent time identifying that the debate, the controversy, the shaking in Adventism is a subject of prophecy and, therefore, it qualifies as something that needs to be addressed.

We are going to start with another quote concerning the shaking from Review and Herald, April 1, 1850. It says,

“As I viewed poor souls dying for want of the present truth, and some who professed to believe the truth were letting them die, by withholding the necessary means to carry forward the work of God, the sight was too painful, and I begged of the angel to remove it from me. I saw that when the cause of God called for some of their property, like the young man who came to Jesus, [Matthew 19:16–22.] they went away sorrowful; and that soon the overflowing scourge would pass over and sweep their possessions all away, and then it would be too late to sacrifice earthly goods, and lay up a treasure in heaven. . . .”—

Now I am wanting to emphasize “the overflowing scourge” here.

Continuing on.

—“The mighty shaking has commenced, and will go on, and all will be shaken out who are not willing to take a hold and unyielding stand for the truth, and sacrifice for God and his cause. The angel said, ‘Think ye that any will be compelled to sacrifice. No. no. It must be a free-will offering. It will take all to buy the field.’—I cried to God to spare his people, some of whom were fainting and dying. . . .

“Then I saw that the judgments of Almighty God were speedily coming. I begged of the angel to speak in his language to the people. Said he, ‘All the thunders and lightnings of Mount Sinai would not move those who will not be moved by the plain truths of the word of God; neither would an angel’s message awake them.’” Review and Herald, April 1, 1850.

What angel’s message is to awaken them? The Angel of Revelation 18, the Third Angel’s Message.

But, the shaking of Adventism is a subject of prophecy. We dealt with that very thoroughly yesterday, I believe.

But, here, for those that will not come up to the message of the hour, the Latter Rain Message in this time period, what is going to happen to them is they are going to reach the overflowing scourge, and it will be too late to secure salvation, too late to put anything into the Lord’s work. So, I want to deal with the overflowing scourge in connection with Daniel 11:40-41.

We are still dealing with the last six verses of Daniel 11, for they are the events connected with the close of probation. And John the Baptist gave a message that was the events connected with the close of probation; and, William Miller gave a message that was the events connected with the close of probation; and, we are showing that the last six verses of Daniel 11 is a parallel to the messages of John the Baptist and William Miller.

And in those histories, the message of John the Baptist and William Miller began at the Time of the End when the Book of Daniel was unsealed. The message of John the Baptist is derived from Daniel 9, and the message of the Millerites was derived from Daniel 9 (it was an explanation of Daniel 8); and, our message is derived from Daniel 11. So, when we bring these three lines of the prophecy together, we see that this message that is the events connected with the close of probation is derived from Daniel 9 and 11.

And at the Time of the End in 1989, when the Soviet Union was swept away in fulfillment of Daniel 11 and verse 40, the Dirt Brush Man from William Miller’s dream arrived on the scene and began to unseal the Seven Seals of truth that are the increase of knowledge for God’s people here at the end of the world, as He swept out the customs and traditions that have been brought into Adventism, covering up the original truths represented on these two sacred Tables [refers to the 1843 and 1850 Charts].

So, we are dealing with Daniel 11:40-45 from that perspective, 1989, the end of the scattering of William Miller’s dream.

And as we look at the shaking of Adventism, here we add a line of thought to it, that if you wait till the overflowing scourge to try to get right with the Lord, you are going to be swept away.

Enter Also

So, what is the overflowing scourge?

In your notes you have Daniel 11:41, which we are going to begin to discuss now. And it says,

“⁴¹He shall enter also into the glorious land,”—

And what I want you to see there is that in verse 40 the King of the North has just swept away the Soviet Union, and these first few words are saying that the sweeping away that took place in verse 40 continues in verse 41. That is why it says, “He shall enter also . . .”

—“and many countries shall be overthrown: but these shall escape out of his hand, even Edom, and Moab, and the chief of the children of Ammon.” Daniel 11:41 (KJV).

So, you have to ask yourself how did he enter the King of the South’s domain in verse 40, because that is how he is going to enter the glorious land. You need to see these verses as a continual progression of conquering by the King of the North. First he conquers the King of the South. Now he is going to conquer the glorious land; and, thereafter, he will conquer Egypt, and he does so as an overflowing scourge.

Shall Overflow and Pass Over

All right. In your notes you have Daniel 11, verse 40, and the last phrase speaking about how the King of the North conquers. It says,

“⁴⁰And at the time of the end shall the king of the south push at him: and the king of the north shall come against him like a whirlwind, with chariots, and with horsemen, and with many ships; and he shall enter into the countries, and shall overflow and pass over.” Daniel 11:40 (KJV).

Overflow

OVERFLOW: Strong’s Concordance 7857—to gush; by impl. to inundate, cleanse; by anal. to gallop, conquer;- drown, (over-) flow (-whelm), rinse. run. rush. (thoroughly) wash (away).

And we have looked at this before, but this word OVERFLOW means to gush, to inundate, to gallop, conquer, drown, (over) flow (-whelm), rinse. It is a conquering that is portrayed as a flood.

Okay. Now, if you do not think about these things, and perhaps you have not ever thought about it; but, when it comes to the False Prophet (the United States in Bible prophecy), the characteristics of strength that the United States uses as it forces other nations to do what it wants it to do is economics and military. You see that in Revelation 13, where you cannot buy or sell if you do not have the mark of the beast; and, you are put to death if you do not have the mark of the beast. That is economics; that is military might.

You see it in Daniel 11, verse 40, with the chariots and horsemen being military might, and the ships being economic might.

So, what am I saying? I am saying that when it comes to the False Prophet (the United States), their mode of warfare, their type of power is represented by these two horns: economics and military.

Whereas, when it comes to Islam, another power in Bible prophecy, they are represented as a war horse. And when you look closely at how the Bible identifies the strength or the power of Islam, their mode of warfare is not economics and military; their mode of warfare is the type of warfare where the word assassin is derived from. If you remember, we discussed the word assassin comes from Islam. It comes from their practice hundreds of years ago when they were going to assassinate someone, they would first get high on hashish; and, hashish is the root word for assassin. They would get all high, and then they would go kill people; because, they knew they were going to die in doing so. They were “suicide bombers” before they had bombs. Point being, the mode of warfare for Islam has been described in history and in prophecy. They strike suddenly and unexpectedly. They ride on Arabian horses and cut your head off and keep going; whereas, the United States’ mode of warfare is economics and military might. And the United States has been exercising that for many, many years now. If a country does not do what the United States wants, they put an economic embargo on them. If that does not work, they go in with their military.

But, when it comes to the Papacy, their mode of warfare is different. Their mode of warfare is described as a flood. Okay? It is the Euphrates overflowing its banks.

So, when we see these words overflow and pass over in Daniel 11, verse 40, if we are serious students of prophecy, we know that even in this verb, if that is what it is, overflow and pass over, that this is the symbol of the Papacy. This is the symbol of how the Papacy conquers. So, when you get to verse 41 and it says, “He shall also enter into the glorious land,” he is entering by an overflowing flood. The Euphrates is overflowing its banks.

Isaiah 28:14-19; 8:5-8

Go to Isaiah 28. We are dealing with this first quote where Sister White says that those people that do not get straight with the Lord in this period of time are going to find out that when the overflowing scourge passes through that it is too late.

Isaiah 28, beginning at verse 14, says,

“¹⁴Wherefore hear the word of the Lord, ye scornful men, that rule this people which is in Jerusalem. ¹⁵Because ye have said, We have made a covenant with death, and with hell are we at agreement; when the overflowing scourge shall pass through, it shall not come unto us: for we have made lies our refuge, and under falsehood have we hid ourselves: ¹⁶Therefore thus saith the Lord God, Behold, I lay in Zion for a foundation a stone, a tried stone, a precious corner stone, a sure foundation: he that believeth shall not make haste. ¹⁷Judgment also will I lay to the line, and righteousness to the plummet: and the hail shall sweep away the refuge of lies, and the waters shall overflow the hiding place. ¹⁸And your covenant with death shall be disannulled, and your agreement with hell shall not stand; when the overflowing scourge shall pass through, then ye shall be trodden down by it. ¹⁹From the time that it goeth forth it shall take you: for morning by morning shall it pass over, by day and by night: and it shall be a vexation only to understand the report.” Isaiah 28:14-19 (KJV).

So, in the Scriptures, the conquering of the Papacy (the claim I am making) is portrayed as the flood waters of the Euphrates; and, it is a movement that is portrayed in the last six verses of Daniel 11 as this flood that begins in verse 40 and also enters the glorious land, whatever the glorious land may be.

Go to Isaiah 8, verses 5 through 8.

“⁵The Lord spake also unto me again, saying, ⁶Forasmuch as this people refuseth the waters of Shiloah that go softly, and rejoice in Rezin and Remaliah's son; ⁷Now therefore, behold, the Lord bringeth up upon them the waters of the river, strong and many, even the king of Assyria,”—

Who is the king of Assyria? Prophetically he is the King of the North.

—“and all his glory: and he shall come up over all his channels, and go over all his banks: ⁸And he shall pass through Judah; he shall overflow and go over, he shall reach even to the neck; and the stretching out of his wings shall fill the breadth of thy land, O Immanuel.” Isaiah 8:5-8 (KJV).

So, when the King of the North conquers, he conquers as a flood, the flood of the Euphrates.

So, when he is overflowing and passing over in Daniel 11, verse 40, and then in verse 41 it says, “He shall also enter into the glorious land,” this is the overflowing scourge hitting the glorious land, whatever the glorious land may be.

And, of course, let us remind ourselves that this is No. 50 in this worship series, but we also had two summations; so, this is really No. 52. So, we really have to remind ourselves of things way back when sometimes, and one of them is here in Isaiah 8, verses 5 through 8.

In verse 6, when Isaiah is making this pronouncement, “Forasmuch as this people refuseth the waters of Shiloah that go softly,” what are the waters of Shiloah? The waters of Siloam; the waters that represent the sent of God, whether it be Christ, who is the sent of God or the Holy Spirit. Ahaz is here rejecting the outpouring of the Holy Spirit, and in this passage he is rejecting the warning message of the 2520, because this is the starting point for both 2520s; and, he is setting forth a typology in 742BC that plays out in AD1863 with James White, who sets aside the 2520, and sets aside the message of Shiloah for the message of the Euphrates.

Anyway, we have dealt with that; but, I wanted to put that in our memory banks.

And the punishment for Ahaz, or for James White, or for Seventh-day Adventists at the end of the world for rejecting the message of Siloam, is that you will not be able to go to the Pool of Siloam and wash your Laodicean blindness away, and you are going to be overflowed by the overflowing scourge of The Sunday Law. All right?

So, one of the characteristics of the Papacy when it conquers is that it is an overflowing movement. It is the Euphrates; but, it is also the scourge. The overflowing scourge is going to pass through the Earth.

The Scourge

Isaiah 10

What is the scourge?

Go to Isaiah 10.

Somewhere early on in this study we pointed out that Sister White says of Zephaniah and Isaiah 10:1—she says it at the same time—that both of these are The Sunday Law decree. It is in the Manuscript Releases. I have that noted in my other Bible, not this Bible; but, it is in the record already.

Verse 1 of Isaiah 10 is The Sunday Law in the United States. It says,

“¹Woe unto them that decree unrighteous decrees, and that write grievousness which they have prescribed; ²To turn aside the needy from judgment, and to take away the right from the poor of my people, that widows may be their prey, and that they may rob the fatherless! ³And what will ye do in the day of visitation, and in the desolation which shall come from far?”—

What is the desolation that comes from far? It is the overflowing scourge.

—“to whom will ye flee for help? and where will ye leave your glory? ⁴Without me they shall bow down under the prisoners, and they shall fall under the slain. For all this his anger is not turned away, but his hand is stretched out still. ⁵O Assyrian,”—

Who is the Assyrian? That is the King of the North at the end of the world.

—“⁵O Assyrian, the rod of mine anger, and the staff in their hand is mine indignation.”—

Here the Lord is saying that he is using the Papacy, the King of the North, to accomplish a work.

—“⁶I will send him against an hypocritical nation, and against the people of my wrath will I give him a charge, to take the spoil, and to take the prey, and to tread them down like the mire of the streets.”—

And that was one of the things—keep your finger there [in Isaiah 10]—in Isaiah 28 when it came to the overflowing scourge in Isaiah 28, in verse 18, it says, “And your covenant with death shall be disannulled, and your agreement with hell shall not stand; when the overflowing scourge shall pass through, then ye shall be trodden down by it.” (KJV)

So, if you go back over here to Isaiah 10, that is what this King of the North, the Assyrian, is going to do. He is going to tread them down like the mire of the street. This is the overflowing scourge.

But, here, we are trying to deal with him being the scourge.

Verse 7:

—“⁷Howbeit he”—

The King of the North, the Assyrian, the one that has just passed The Sunday Law decree in verse 1.

—“Howbeit he meaneth not so,”—

I know that the United States passes it [The Sunday Law decree], but they are doing the Papacy’s bidding.

—“⁷Howbeit he meaneth not so, neither doth his heart think so; but it is in his heart to destroy and cut off nations not a few. ⁸For he saith, Are not my princes altogether kings? ⁹Is not Calno as Carchemish? is not Hamath as Arpad? is not Samaria as Damascus? ¹⁰As my hand hath found the kingdoms of the idols, and whose graven images did excel them of Jerusalem and of Samaria; ¹¹Shall I not, as I have done unto Samaria and her idols, so do to Jerusalem and her idols? ¹²Wherefore it shall come to pass, that when the Lord hath performed his whole work upon mount Zion and on Jerusalem, I will punish the fruit of the stout heart of the king of Assyria, and the glory of his high looks.”—

Here the King of the North is going to get punished at a certain point in time.

What is a certain point in time? When He has finished his work of Mount Zion and Jerusalem.

And what is His work that He is doing with Mount Zion and Jerusalem? He is gathering His two flocks into that church, first Adventism and then the eleventh-hour workers. When He has finished that—

When has He finished that?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: When probation closes.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: When probation closes. Okay?

When He has finished that, He is going to punish the fruit of the stout heart of the king of Assyria.

Verse 13:

—“¹³For he saith, By the strength of my hand I have done it, and by my wisdom; for I am prudent: and I have removed the bounds of the people, and have robbed their treasures, and I have put down the inhabitants like a valiant man:”—

What are the bounds of the people? Perhaps many things, but one of the things that “the bounds of the people” certainly represents is that in order to enforce a One World Government, which we are on the verge of doing right now, you have to set aside the national sovereignty of every country. You have to remove their bounds. Those are their boundaries, their protections.

Verse 14:

—“¹⁴And my hand hath found as a nest the riches of the people: and as one gathereth eggs that are left, have I gathered all the earth; and there was none that moved the wing, or opened the mouth, or peeped.”—

This is when he [the King of the North] is conquering Egypt. He has conquered the whole world right now.

—“¹⁵Shall the axe boast itself against him that heweth therewith?”—

Now the Lord is talking to him, “You are the axe in my hand, and you are going to act like you’re something special when I am the One using you?”

—“¹⁵Shall the axe boast itself against him that heweth therewith? or shall the saw magnify itself against him that shaketh it? as if the rod should shake itself against them that lift it up, or as if the staff should lift up itself, as if it were no wood. ¹⁶Therefore shall the Lord, the Lord of hosts, send among his fat ones leanness; and under his glory he shall kindle a burning like the burning of a fire. ¹⁷And the light of Israel shall be for a fire, and his Holy One for a flame: and it shall burn and devour his thorns and his briers in one day; ¹⁸And shall consume the glory of his forest, and of his fruitful field, both soul and body: and they shall be as when a standard-bearer fainteth. ¹⁹And the rest of the trees of his forest shall be few, that a child may write them.

“²⁰And it shall come to pass in that day, that the remnant of Israel, and such as are escaped of the house of Jacob, shall no more again stay upon him that smote them; but shall stay upon the Lord, the Holy One of Israel, in truth. ²¹The remnant shall return, even the remnant of Jacob, unto the mighty God. ²²For though thy people Israel be as the sand of the sea, yet a remnant of them shall return: the consumption decreed shall overflow with righteousness. ²³For the Lord God of hosts shall make a consumption, even determined, in the midst of all the land.

“²⁴Therefore thus saith the Lord God of hosts, O my people that dwellest in Zion, be not afraid of the Assyrian: he shall smite thee with a rod, and shall lift up his staff against thee, after the manner of Egypt. ²⁵For yet a very little while, and the indignation shall cease, and mine anger in their destruction.”—

So, what we are saying here is the scourge that the Lord uses against Planet Earth at the end of the world is also the Assyrian (the King of the North). But, the way that the Assyrian (the King of the North) conquers is with the overflowing flood.

—“²⁶And the Lord of hosts shall stir up a scourge for him according to the slaughter of Midian at the rock of Oreb: and as his rod was upon the sea, so shall he lift it up after the manner of Egypt. ²⁷And it shall come to pass in that day, that his burden shall be taken away from off thy shoulder, and his yoke from off thy neck, and the yoke shall be destroyed because of the anointing. ²⁸He is come to Aiath, he is passed to Migron; at Michmash he hath laid up his carriages: ²⁹They are gone over the passage: they have taken up their lodging at Geba; Ramah is afraid; Gibeah of Saul is fled. ³⁰Lift up thy voice, O daughter of Gallim: cause it to be heard unto Laish, O poor Anathoth. ³ Madmenah is removed; the inhabitants of Gebim gather themselves to flee. ³²As yet shall he remain at Nob that day: he shall shake his hand against the mount of the daughter of Zion, the hill of Jerusalem. ³³Behold, the Lord, the Lord of hosts, shall lop the bough with terror: and the high ones of stature shall be hewn down, and the haughty shall be humbled. ³⁴And he shall cut down the thickets of the forest with iron, and Lebanon shall fall by a mighty one.” Isaiah 10 (KJV).

When you put these thoughts together, it is easy to see that the Papacy is the overflowing scourge. And when he conquers the Soviet Union, the next point of conquest for him is the glorious land.

The Glorious Land

Daniel 11:41:

“⁴¹He shall enter also into the glorious land, and many countries shall be overthrown: but these shall escape out of his hand, even Edom, and Moab, and the chief of the children of Ammon.” Daniel 11:41 (KJV).

All right. Now, we have many lines of thoughts going on here; and, one of the lines of thought that I want to remind you of here is that we are claiming—we are positive—that the formula to produce revival in Adventism is the understanding of Daniel 11, verses 40 and 41. Daniel 11, verse 40, with the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1989, is identifying for any Seventh‑day Adventist that chooses to see is the next thing that happens is The Sunday Law in the United States. And at The Sunday Law in the United States, probation closes for Seventh‑day Adventists. And if you understand that your probation is about to close and you bring your life into agreement with that truth, then that produces a revival in your experience. This is the divine formula for producing the revival.

So, the divine formula is the two verses, 40 and 41. So, if there was anything that Satan really wanted to attack, it would be this formula. It would be the understanding that allow Seventh-day Adventists, through the influence of the Holy Spirit, to understand that they either wake up now or they die. So, this is very sacred ground, the correct understanding of the glorious land.

GLORIOUS: Strong’s Concordance 6643—in the sense of prominence; splendor (as conspicuous), beautiful, goodly.

The word GLORIOUS means in the sense of prominence; splendor (as conspicuous), beautiful, goodly.

LAND: Strong’s Concordance H776—From an unused root probably meaning to be firm; the earth (at large, or partitively a land): - X common, country, earth, field, ground, land, X nations, way, + wilderness, world.

LAND means to be firm; the earth.

And, of course, the reason why I spent time yesterday talking about the shaking in Adventism—and I hope you remember the several places that we looked at in the Scriptures where the shaking is noted—because it is noted, because it is a waymark of prophetic history, then it is something that needs to be addressed. So, when it comes to this point on in our study, we will from time to time address some of the foolish arguments that have been raised against this understanding.

One of the foolish arguments is that the glorious land is the Seventh-day Adventist Church, and that argument is loosely based upon the idea that in verse 45 the glorious holy mountain is definitely God’s Church at the end of the world: the glorious holy mountain is God’s Church. So, for a very shallow student, he can say, “Well, we have the glorious holy mountain in verse 45 that is God’s Church; therefore, the glorious land is God’s Church,” as if a land and a mountain are the same thing. It is a lack of familiarity with God’s Word. It is a lack of faith concerning God’s Word. It is an unwillingness to believe that the Lord controlled the words that were put down in His Word.

And I am not talking about verbal inspiration, but I am talking about providential leading of the Lord.

And, therefore, you will find as you study the Book of Daniel that one of the common arguments about this message in the Book of Daniel, it boils down to a technique. All right? And I will tell you what the technique is so you can see what I mean, and then I will come back to this glorious land and glorious holy mountain.

There are certain words in the Book of Daniel that you can either say, “Well, Daniel was a little bit careless,” or you can say, “Daniel was careful.” It depends on how you approach it.

If you want to twist Daniel’s word, then you will act as if Daniel was careless. If you want to see what the Lord is teaching us, then you know that Daniel was careful.

So, from that perspective, when Daniel says “glorious land” in verse 41 and “glorious holy mountain” in verse 45, Daniel was being careful to make sure that we understood that a land and a mountain are two different things, even if they have the word “glorious” associated with them. Okay?

In the study of the Daily in the Book of Daniel, you will find that the Daily is taken away. In Daniel 8:11, Daniel 11:31, and Daniel 12:11 the Daily is taken away; but, in Daniel 11:31 and Daniel 12:11, the Hebrew word that is translated as take away is sur; whereas, in Daniel 8:11, the Hebrew word that is translated as take away is rum. And those people that are on the wrong side of the issue, those people that want to teach that the Daily is Christ’s sanctuary ministry, they insist that the word rum in Daniel 8:11 means the same thing as the word sur does in Daniel 11:31 and Daniel 12:11. They think Daniel is a little bit careless.

I understand; I just believe that he is very careful! Okay?

Those people that are on the wrong side of the issue, they look at Daniel 8:11 and they see the word sanctuary, and in Daniel 8:13 they see the word sanctuary, and in Daniel 8:14 they see the word sanctuary. In four verses the word sanctuary occurs three times. And they say, “Oh, it is always the same word. That is God’s Sanctuary.” But in reality, the word that is translated as sanctuary in Daniel 8:11 is miqdâsh; and the word that is translated as sanctuary in Daniel 8:13 and 14 is qôdesh And qôdesh can only mean God’s Sanctuary, whereas miqdâsh can be a pagan sanctuary. So, here, you have to determine with these two words is Daniel careless or is he careful.

So, what I am saying is as you go through the different points of controversy in this prophetic message from the Book of Daniel, you will often find the question mark raised—although nobody ever thinks like this. This is just how I describe it—“Was he careful or was he careless?”

For instance, the word that is translated as south in Daniel 11:40 can also be translated as Egypt.

So, in Daniel 11:40, the King of the North is conquering the King of the South; and, then two verses later he is conquering Egypt. Why did not the Bible translators just put the king of Egypt in verse 40?

Why did they put the King of the South, when Egypt and the King of the South are so closely related?

Well, I think it was purposeful. I think Daniel was being careful. You are supposed to understand who the King of the South is and who Egypt is, and they are two different entities though closely related.

So, in the stumbling over this message that goes on in Adventism primarily, many times it is from an unwillingness to let God’s Word stand as it is expressed. Okay? This is one of those: “The glorious land is the glorious holy mountain.” No, I am sorry. The “land” is a land, and the “mountain” is a mountain.

Now, the institution, without a doubt—no! Hands down, the institution that has fought this message the hardest and the longest is Hartland Institute in Virginia. I mean, when you get to the point to where you are supposedly training students to be pastors, and when you get sympathetic churches to your ministry would allow your students to come and practice their sermons, when they are learning how to give sermons, and you tell those students, “All right. When you go out and preach your sermon on Sabbath at that church over there, I want you to preach that the glorious land in Daniel 11:41 is the Seventh-day Adventist Church.” When you are at the point of training supposedly pastors and you are instructing them to go teach error over this issue, that they have been doing for years, they are without a doubt the institution that has opposed this message longer and more specifically for many, many moons.

And they have an associate there, Dorado [Ray] Carlo, that has been the primary personality to try to confuse people on what the glorious land is. All right? He says if you teach the glorious land is the United States that that is a Jesuit teaching.

Why is it a Jesuit teaching? Is that just his trying to throw mud at someone in hopes that it sticks? Perhaps; but, his logic is this: The Jesuits, what the Catholic Church came up with is a counterfeit understanding of prophecy. These counterfeit prophetic rules of interpretation, one of them, takes the symbols of prophecy and applies them literally at the end of the world. Okay? So, Ray’s argument is, if you are saying that the glorious land in verse 41 [of Daniel 11] is a literal country, that that is futurism and that is a Jesuit-ism.

What my response to that is, “Well, I think it was 1845 when Loughborough or Andrews”—I forget which—“determined, put in print for the first time, that the lamb-like beast of Revelation 13:11 was the United States; and I am wondering how we can take that symbol there of the lamb-like beast and apply it literally and say it is literally the United States if we are not using Jesuit techniques, because that has the Adventist understanding since 1845.”

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Affirmation.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: That is not futurism. Prophecy is illustrating genuine powers, but the symbols are going to have a spiritual implication for us here at the end of the world; and, they do, they do. So, some of the arguments in these verses are a little bit subtle; but, when you step back from them and look at them, they are ridiculous.

All right. So, we are dealing with the glorious land.

The Glory of All Lands

Ezekiel 20:6 and 15:

“⁶In the day that I lifted up mine hand unto them, to bring them forth of the land of Egypt into a land that I had espied for them, flowing with milk and honey, which is”—

The what?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The glory of all lands.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“the glory of all lands. . . .”—

Verse 15:

—“¹⁵Yet also I lifted up my hand unto them in the wilderness, that I would not bring them into the land which I had given them, flowing with milk and honey, which is the glory of all lands.” Ezekiel 20:6, 15 (KJV).

So, when Daniel is talking about the glorious land in verse 41, he is going to be in agreement with Ezekiel; and, the land that was the glory of all the lands was the land of Palestine.

Daniel 11:16

Okay. Daniel 11:16, you have that marked in your notes.

Daniel 11:16, Daniel himself uses the expression “glorious land” for the first time. The second time he uses it, the last time he uses it, is in verse 41. But, in verse 16, he says,

“¹⁶But he that cometh against him shall do according to his own will, and none shall stand before him: and none shall stand in the glorious land, which by his hand shall be consumed.” Daniel 11:16 (KJV).

Uriah Smith

Now, you have Uriah Smith—remember, Sister White says is God’s helping hand—Uriah Smith commenting on verse 16 in your notes.

“After putting an end to the war, Pompey demolished the walls of Jerusalem, transferred several cities from the jurisdiction of Judea to that of Syria, and imposed tribute on the Jews. For the first time Jerusalem was by conquest placed in the hands of Rome, that power was to hold the ‘glorious land’ in its iron grasp till it had utterly consumed it.” Thoughts on Daniel and the Revelation, 247.

Daniel 11:16 is identifying Palestine as the glorious land, and it is identifying when Rome conquered Palestine (Israel, the land of the literal Israel). So, for Daniel in verse 16, the glorious land is the land of Israel, the land flowing with milk and honey, the glory of all the land, the Promised Land. All right?

So, when you get to verse 41, you would think that Daniel would have the same meaning for it; but, in verse 41 where are you? You are on this side of the cross. So, you are looking for a spiritual application. All right?

But, if I say the glorious land is the United States, is that not a literal application? No, it is a spiritual application; because, the land that was given to Ancient Israel served a specific spiritual purpose for Ancient Israel, and the United States serves a specific spiritual purpose for spiritual Israel. The purpose is the same in either case, whether it is Ancient Israel or modern Israel. It is a spiritual application to identify the United States as the glorious land.

“LAND” AND “MOUNTAIN”

. . . enter also into the glorious land . . . verse forty-one of Daniel 11

. . . between the seas in the glorious holy mountain . . . verse forty-five of Daniel 11

J. N. Andrews

After the disappointment of October 22, 1844, it was necessary, logically, for the Millerites at that time period to explain why they had understood that the sanctuary was the Earth instead of the Sanctuary in Heaven.

Who is J. N. Andrews? He is the guy they named Andrews University after. And the flagship of our seminaries is named after Andrews, and Andrews wrote the classic article explaining the mistake of the sanctuary that the Millerites had; and, it is still the classic article to this very day.

And in that article he goes through and he looks at several entities. He looks at the Earth, the church, the land of Canaan, and the sanctuary, to make a distinction on what they are; and, we have a paragraph here where he summarizes these thoughts. It says,

“We have found that the earth is not the sanctuary, but simply the territory where it will finally be located; that the church is not the sanctuary, but simply the worshipers connected with the sanctuary; and that the land of Canaan is not the sanctuary, but that it is the place where the typical sanctuary was located.” J. N. Andrews, The Sanctuary and the 2300 Days, 45.

Now, if you are willing to see, you will see that J. N. Andrews, without knowing any of the controversy over the glorious land and the glorious holy mountain, that he is isolating these entities to make another point, but in so doing he is showing you that the church and the land are two different entities. They cannot be the same. All right? They are just not the same.

Why is it important to be clear about this? It is important to be clear about this because, if Daniel 11, verse 41, is The Sunday Law in the United States, it is identifying when probation is going to close for Seventh-day Adventists. But, if I can get you to believe that, “Nah, it is something else. That is not really the close of probation,” then you can fall back into your Laodicean sleepiness and find yourself receiving the mark of the beast when the overflowing scourge hits the United States.

So, the idea to undermine the understanding the glorious land in verse 41, it is a satanic attack. It is trying to kill Seventh-day Adventists.

Designed by God

Okay. What does Sister White say about the United States?

Maranatha, page 193, says,

“The Lord has done more for the United States than any other country upon which the sun shines.”

And if you go to the top of your notes there, the word GLORIOUS means: in sense of prominence, conspicuous. Does that not meet what that first sentence in that quote says?

—“The Lord has done more for the United States than any other country upon which the sun shines.:—

Is that not in sense of prominence? The Lord has done more for this country, in sense of prominence.

—“Here He provided an asylum for His people, where they could worship Him according to the dictates of conscience. Here Christianity has progressed in its purity. The life-giving doctrine of the one Mediator between God and man has been freely taught.”—

And I always get struck by these next couple of sentences.

—“God designed”—

He designed the United States. He did not just toss the pilgrims over into a chunk of land. He designed this nation.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: That is pretty prominent.

How many other nations in the world have we have been told that God “designed”?

—“God designed that this country should ever remain free for all people to worship Him in accordance with the dictates of conscience. He designed that its civil institutions, in their expansive productions, should represent the freedom of gospel privileges.” Maranatha, 193.

A Promised Land

In Exodus 32:13, it says,

“¹³Remember Abraham, Isaac, and Israel, thy servants, to whom thou swarest by thine own self, and saidst unto them, I will multiply your seed as the stars of heaven, and all this land that I have spoken of will I give unto your seed, and they shall inherit it forever.” Exodus 32:13 (KJV).

So, the Lord gave a specific land to Ancient Israel, and He gave a land to modern Israel. And the land that He gave to modern Israel, He designed; He designed to fulfill a prophetic role during the end of the world.

This Land that I have Spoken Of

Ancient Israel

Prophets and Kings, page 16, says,

“God brought His chosen people out of the land of Egypt. . . . that He might bring them to a good land, a land which in His providence He had prepared for them”—

That sounds like He designed ancient Palestine, too, if he prepared it for them.

—“as a refuge from their enemies.’—

And that is what she said in the previous quote. He designed this country; He made it as an asylum, a refuge from their enemies.

—‘He would bring them to Himself and encircle them in His everlasting arms; and in return for His goodness and mercy they were to exalt His name and make it”—

What?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Glorious in the earth.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“glorious in the earth.” Prophets and Kings, 16.

That was their purpose.

And in order to make His name glorious in the Earth, he gave them a land flowing with milk and honey that would give them the financial ability to carry the message to the Earth. He placed that land at the crossroads of the ancient world; and, it fulfills the same purpose that the United States fulfills, the crossroads of the modern world, flowing with milk and honey, for the purpose of the Lord’s name being made glorious in the Earth.

Modern Israel

Selected Messages, book 1, page 92:

“Is it in vain that the declaration of eternal truth has been given to this nation to be carried to all the nations of the world?”—

To what nation? The United States.

—“God has chosen a people and made them the repositories of truth weighty with eternal results.”—

Who did He choose as the people? Who did He choose?

A trick question. Watch out.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: (Laughter.)

BROTHER PIPPENGER: He chose the Protestants. The Protestant Reformation brings them out to the United States. He chose the Protestants. He chose this nation; He chose the Protestants; and, then He presented the message of the hour to the Protestants and the Protestants rejected it. So, He set the Protestants aside, and He took the Millerites. Right?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Amen.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: —“Is it in vain that the declaration of eternal truth has been given to this nation to be carried to all the nations of the world? God has chosen a people and made them the repositories of truth weighty with eternal results. To them has been given the light that must illuminate the world. Has God made a mistake? Are we indeed His chosen instrumentalities? Are we the men and women who are to bear to the world the messages of Revelation fourteen, to proclaim the message of salvation to those who are standing on the brink of ruin? Do we act as if we were?” Selected Messages, book 1, 92.

Okay. So, what I am saying is the purpose of ancient Palestine (or Ancient Israel) is identical to the purpose of the United States for the Seventh-day Adventist Church. God designed the United States to fulfill a certain role in Bible prophecy, and a characteristic of the United States is that it is “the land,” and it is the most prominent land in the world. It is the glorious land in sense of prominence.

The Prophetic Role

The Man of Sin

So, let us look at some of the roles that the United States has been identified as fulfilling; because, when we get to closing up our thoughts on Daniel 11:40 and 41, on to 45, we want to see that what we are suggesting about verses 40 to 45, in identifying the United States as the glorious land, we want to see if what we are suggesting these verses represent is in agreement with the testimony of what the role, the prophetic role, of the United States is.

Are our analyses of these verses consistent with what the rest of the prophecies say about the United States?

So, let us look at the prophetic role.

Signs of the Times, June 12, 1893:

“When the land which the Lord provided as an asylum for His people, that they might worship Him according to the dictates of their own consciences, the land over which for long years the shield of Omnipotence has been spread, the land which God has favored by making it the depository of the pure religion of Christ,—when that land shall, through its legislators, abjure the principles of Protestantism, and give countenance to Romish apostasy in tampering with God’s law,—it is then that the final work of the man of sin will be revealed.” Signs of the Times, June 12, 1893.

So, what is “the finale work of the man of sin”?

We read a quote here a couple of times where Sister White says, “The last scenes plainly revealed in this earth’s history have to do with the man of sin.” So, here it is saying, at The Sunday Law in the United States, these last movements of the man of sin are going to be revealed, the King of the North (the Papacy).

And what is his last movement? Well, he sets himself upon the throne of the Earth, causes a blood bath, and he comes to his end in Armageddon with none to help.

When does this sequence of events begin? At The Sunday Law. When the land shall pass a Sunday law, then the final work of the man of sin will be revealed.

The Marvelous Working of Satan

In Testimonies, volume 5, page 451—

So, what I am wanting you to see here is that The Sunday Law in the United States is a prophetic marker in connection with the work of the man of sin. All right?

The next one is a little bit different.

“By the decree enforcing the institution of the Papacy in violation of the law of God, our nation will disconnect herself fully from righteousness. When Protestantism shall stretch her hand across the gulf to grasp the hand of the Roman power, when she shall reach over the abyss to clasp hands with Spiritualism, when, under the influence of this threefold union, our country shall repudiate every principle of its Constitution as a Protestant and republican government, and shall make provision for the propagation of papal falsehoods and delusions, then we may know that the time has come for the marvelous working of Satan and that the end is near.” Testimonies, volume 5, 451.

We have already dealt with this one.

When does Satan begin to personate Christ?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: At The Sunday Law.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: At The Sunday Law in the United States.

How long is he allowed to perform these miracles? Until Michael stands up, until human probation closes. We read that.

So, from The Sunday Law, from the overflowing scourge hitting the glorious land in verse 41, then we have the final movements of the man of sin; and, then we have Satan on the scene personating Christ.

So, the prophetic role of the glorious land of the United States, it has several issues that are connected to it.

National Ruin

The next one, Review and Herald, May 2, 1893:

“The people of the United States have been a favored people; but when they restrict religious liberty, surrender Protestantism, and give countenance to popery, the measure of their guilt will be full, and ‘national apostasy’ will be registered in the books of heaven. The result of this apostasy will be national ruin.” Review and Herald, May 2, 1893.

Okay. The Sunday Law in the United States, the final movements of the Papacy; The Sunday Law in the United States, Satan personates Christ; The Sunday Law in the United States, national ruin, all taking place.

Tyranny

The Spirit of Prophecy, volume 4, page 410:

“Our land is in jeopardy. The time is drawing on when its legislators shall so abjure the principles of Protestantism as to give countenance to Romish apostasy. The people for whom God has so marvelously wrought, strengthening them to throw off the galling yoke of popery, will by a national act give vigor to the corrupt faith of Rome, and thus arouse the tyranny which only waits for a touch to start again into cruelty and despotism. With rapid steps are we already approaching this period.” The Spirit of Prophecy, volume 4, 410.

So, what else starts at The Sunday Law? Persecution, national ruin, Satan personating Christ, the final movements of the Papacy and persecution, and the greatest darkness.

The Greatest Peril and Darkness

Selected Messages, book 3, page 387:

“America, . . . where the greatest light from heaven has been shining upon the people, can become the place of greatest peril and darkness because the people do not continue to practice the truth and walk in the light.” Selected Messages, book 3, 387.

So, the United States at The Sunday Law goes into a darkness that is the greatest darkness of any nation that has ever existed. This is going to be—it is quotes like this leads people to say, “Well, you know, I need to move to the country, so maybe I will move to the country somewhere in South America or the Caribbean because this is going to be a bad place to live.”

Then when you look at The Sunday Law crisis in the time period of Ellen White’s day and age and you realize that the state was the most aggressive on Sunday enforcement was Arkansas, it makes people like me say, “Well, not only do I want to escape the darkness of the United States, but if I am going to be in the United States, maybe I should not be in Arkansas.”

But, the reality of it is, is that at this point in time we have to have an experience where we know for a certainty that we are where the Lord wants us to be. And if we know that is the case, then we can have peace wherever we are at. But, the United States is going to become a very, very dark place at The Sunday Law.

Why? Well, probably for lots of reasons. But, one of the reasons is that darkness is going to be used as the backdrop for the ensign being lifted up, and it is just going to make the ensign that much brighter.

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Amen.

The Glory of the Whole Earth

Review and Herald, May 2, 1893. I have always had a problem with this one here. This quote I have a problem with; but, some people say that I lean too heavily upon the writings of Ellen White. But, that being said, it is because of that leaning so heavily upon the writings of Ellen White that I have a problem with this quote.

People can say that the glorious land of verse 41 [of Daniel] is the Seventh-day Adventist Church, it is not the United States; but, what does Ellen White say?

“The unrivaled mercies and blessings of God have been showered upon our nation,”—

What nation is she talking about?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The United States.

—“it has been a land of liberty, and the”—what?!—“the glory of the whole earth.”—

All right. For me, that ends the discussion. Ellen White just said that the United States is the glorious land, and she is not really quoting Daniel 41 there. She is quoting Ezekiel, “the glory of all the nations.” The United States is the glorious land, according to Ellen White.

It does not matter is someone says it is a Jesuit technique. They do not know what Jesuitism is, obviously.

—“But instead of returning gratitude to God, instead of honoring God and his law, the professed Christians of America have become leavened with pride, covetousness, and self-sufficiency. . . .

“The time has come when judgment is fallen in the streets, and equity cannot enter, and he that departeth from evil maketh himself a prey. But the Lord’s arm is not shortened that it cannot save, and his ear is not heavy that it cannot hear. The people of the United States have been a favored people; but when”—pardon me?—“but when they restrict religious liberty, surrender Protestantism, and give countenance to popery, the measure of their guilt will be full, and ‘national apostasy’ will be registered in the books of heaven. The result of this apostasy will be national ruin.

“The voices of those under the altar who have been slain for the word of God and the testimony of Jesus, are still saying, ‘It is time for thee, O Lord, to work: for they have made void thy law.’” Review and Herald, May 2, 1893.

Now, this is outside what we are looking at here today, but do you realize what she was just referencing? Because, if you remember back in our worship service when we dealt with “How long?” and we went through and found the various places in the Scriptures where the expression, “How long?” is marked and we were doing that to show that the history of Ancient Israel is governed by the Seven Churches of Revelation 2 and 3, just as the history of the Seven Churches is all repeated in the history of Laodicea, when we were in that part of our worship study, those under the altar, which she just referenced, in the Fifth Seal that asked, “How long until you deal with the Papacy?” and they were then told, “Rest in your graves for a little while until another group is doing to die as you died,” and we brought two quotes in where Sister White places that in Revelation 18, verse 4, here, if you understand that, and what I am saying is, is the martyrs that the Papacy murdered during the 1260 years in the Fifth Seal, they asked the question to the Lord, “How long until you punish the Papacy for murdering us?” And the answer is, “You wait in your graves. There is going to be another group of people that die from Papal persecution.” And Sister White places that at Revelation 18, verse 4, which says, “Come out of her, my people,” which is The Sunday Law.

And in here, if you can see it, she is going back into that subject and is giving you another argument that this is The Sunday Law; because, when she talks in this final paragraph about the voices under the altar, that is the Sixth Seal asking, “How long until you punish the Papacy?” and here she throws in David’s statement about, “It is time for thee, O Lord, to work: for they have made void thy law.” They make void the Law at The Sunday Law in Revelation 18, verse 4.

That is not really what we are dealing with here; but, it is what we are dealing with in the worship service.

So, the United States is the glory of the whole Earth, according to the Spirit of Prophecy.

The Glory Defined

What makes the United States glorious? This is something that needs to be understood.

The Great Controversy, page 352

“In the seventeenth century thousands of pastors were expelled from their positions. The people were forbidden, on pain of heavy fines, imprisonment, and banishment, to attend any religious meetings except such as were sanctioned by the church. Those faithful souls who could not refrain from gathering to worship God were compelled to meet in dark alleys, in obscure garrets, and at some seasons in the woods at midnight. In the sheltering depths of the forest, a temple of God’s own building, those scattered and persecuted children of the Lord assembled to pour out their souls in prayer and praise. But despite all their precautions, many suffered for their faith. The jails were crowded. Families were broken up. Many were banished to foreign lands. Yet God was with His people, and persecution could not prevail to silence their testimony. Many were driven across the ocean to America and here laid the foundations of civil and religious liberty which have been the bulwark and glory of this country.” The Great Controversy, 252.

What is the glory of the glorious land?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Religious liberty.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Constitution, the Constitution of the United States.

So, we know that at The Sunday Law the Constitution is overturned, done away with; so, that fits with what we are saying.

Now, in an attempt to undermine the understanding that the glorious land is the United States, the verse that is used to say that the United States cannot be the glorious land, that the glorious land is the Seventh-day Adventist Church, this is Malachi 3:12. It says, “¹²And all nations shall call you blessed: for ye shall be a delightsome land, saith the Lord of hosts.” Malachi 3:12 (KJV): “Now, just right there it is saying that God’s people are a delightsome land. There is the glorious land.” There is your one verse that is sounded over and over and over again saying that the glorious land is the Seventh-day Adventist Church.

Of course, you have got to take things in context, right? The context of this passage does not justify that kind of application.

Let me show you something here real quickly and come back to this. In your notes, I will just point to it.

You see from Webster’s Dictionary, the definition of inherit. And if you read that definition, you will find that to inherit requires two things. And you can take the various words. I have done this before, and in these notes I just have inherit, because I intend just to explain it. But, if you take Webster’s Dictionary of 1828 and you look up inheritor, inherit, or inheritance, you will find that those are legal technical terms. They are legal technical terms. Okay? And the Bible specifically says repeatedly that the Promised Land was the inheritance of those that held the possession of the covenant. And an inheritance is different than the inheritor.

I am the one that is going to inherit this thing; but, what I am going to inherit is a thing. And this is a very technical, legal theme in the Bible that God’s people were to inherit the Promised Land. It is an inheritance.

An inheritor cannot be the inheritance. They are two different things. So, we will look at this a little bit tomorrow, and you will see in your notes—because I am already out of time, but we are not done—you will see in your notes that all of the covenant promises are fulfilled upon Ancient Israel, and the three primary covenant promises are that you and I can have the mind of Christ right here, right now, at the foot of the cross, if we will meet the conditions of the Gospel. And if you do not have the mind of Christ this morning, you should do that.

The other covenant promise is if we are faithful we are going to be given a glorified body at the Second Coming of Christ.

The third covenant promise, which is one that is mentioned far more than the other two covenant promises put together in the Bible is that the Lord would give His people a land. And all the covenant promises are fulfilled in spiritual modern Israel; so, there has to be a land that was given to the Seventh-day Adventist Church. So, from that argument, we will probably look at a little bit tomorrow.

That argument came to the surface because of the person that was out there in Adventism using Malachi 3:12, saying, “This proves that God’s people are the land.” And it was from this argument that students of prophecy were forced to dig deeper into what the glorious land was, to understand the fact that the Bible teaches that the land was the inheritance, that the inheritors were to receive. It cannot be; the people and the land cannot be the same thing Biblically.

But, let us go to Malachi 3 and see if the context justifies the argument that what is being taught here is that this verse is a proof text to prove that the Church is the land.

Okay. So, let us go to Malachi 1. All right?

Is everyone there?

Verse 1:

“^{chapter 1:1}The burden of the word of the Lord to Israel by Malachi. ²I have loved you, saith the Lord, Yet ye say, Wherein hast thou loved us? Was not Esau Jacob’s brother? Saith the Lord: yet I loved Jacob.”—

What is He saying? He is saying, “I make distinction between people. There are two classes of people.” This is what the Lord is saying.

“I have loved you.”

“How have you loved us?”

“Well, you know my love is based upon two classes of people.”

Verse 3:

—“³And I hated Esau, and laid his mountains and his heritage waste for the dragons of the wilderness. ⁴Whereas Edom saith, We are impoverished, but we will return and build the desolate places; thus saith the Lord of hosts, They shall build, but I will throw down; and they shall call them, The border of wickedness, and, The people against whom the Lord hath indignation for ever.”—

Who is going to get called “The people against whom the Lord hath indignation for ever”? Esau; Edom: Esau is Esau; Edom is his nation. And the Lord is putting them in a category, and the category is that they are the wicked.

And He is contrasting them with whom?

Next verse.

—“⁵And your eyes shall see, and ye shall say, The Lord will be magnified from the border of Israel.”—

So, you have one class that is going to be magnified from the border of Israel, and then you have a class that their border is the border of wickedness, the border of the people that the Lord is going to have indignation forever.

So, what do you have there: with these two borders, what do you have? Two classes of people. Okay?

And this is the Lord’s argument about who He loves. He loves one class; He does not love the other class, He hates them. All right?

Verse 6:

“⁶A son honoureth his father, and a servant his master: if then I be a father, where is mine honor? And if I be a master, where is my fear? Saith the Lord of hosts unto you, O priests, that despise my name. And ye say, Wherein have we despised thy name? ⁷Ye offer polluted bread upon mine altar; and ye say, Wherein have we polluted thee? In that ye say, The table of the Lord is contemptible.”—

So, Malachi begins by introducing the Everlasting Gospel: “I demonstrate my love my accomplishing the Everlasting Gospel producing two classes of worshippers, one on the border of wickedness, one on the border of Israel.”

Now He is going to go in and He is going to talk about the priests of Adventism—all the prophets are speaking about the end of the world, right?—the priests of Adventism. And what is the problem with the priests of Adventism? They offer polluted bread.

Okay. What is the polluted bread that they offer? Well, in William Miller’s dream, in William Miller’s dream you remember we took a great deal of time to show what the casket was. What was the casket?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Bible.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: The Bible.

And what did they do with this casket in William Miller’s dream?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: They tore it up.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: They tore it up.

So, offering polluted bread may be talking about the fact that at the beginning of the 20^th Century that the Seventh-day Adventist Church began introducing these Catholic bibles that are now used commonly in Adventism.

Or, maybe it is the Omega teaching to counter the true prophetic message. That would be bread, too. Right? Bad bread.

And what is the table; what is the table here? In verse 7, “Ye offer polluted bread upon mine altar; and ye say, Wherein have we polluted thee? In that ye say, The table of the Lord is contemptible.” What is the table of the Lord here where you are going to eat, you know, what is feeding you?

What table are we supposed to be eating from?

But, this is contemptible, the priests say: “This table is contemptible.”

Okay. So, they invent their own table, right?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Hmm.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: When did they invent their own table? At the beginning of William Miller’s dream. I want you to see that this is about William Miller’s dream here, Malachi is.

Verse 8:

“⁸And if ye offer the blind for sacrifice, is it not evil? And if ye offer the lame and sick, is it not evil? Offer it now unto thy governor; will he be pleased with thee, or accept thy person? Saith the Lord of hosts. ⁹And now, I pray you, beseech God that he will be gracious unto us: this hath been by your means: will he regard your persons? Saith the Lord of hosts. ¹⁰Who is there even among you that would shut the doors for nought? Neither do ye kindle fire on mine altar for nought. I have no pleasure in you, saith the Lord of hosts, neither will I accept an offering at your hand.”—

“Everything that you are doing is for money, is for your own personal gain; and, your offerings are corrupted.” And all the prophets are speaking about the end of the world.

Verse 11:

—“¹¹For from the rising of the sun even unto the going down of the same my name shall be great among the Gentiles; and in every place incense shall be offered unto my name, and a pure offering: for my name shall be great among the heathen, saith the Lord of the hosts.

“¹²But ye have profaned it, in that ye say, The table of the Lord is polluted; and the fruit thereof, even his meat, is contemptible [Brother Jeff gestures towards the 1843 and 1850 Charts].”—

What is He talking about?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: Hmm.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: He is talking about these Charts!

—“¹³Ye said also, Behold, what a weariness is it! And ye have snuffed at it, saith the Lord of hosts; and ye brought that which was torn, and the lame, and the sick; thus ye brought an offering: should I accept this of your hand? Saith the Lord. ¹⁴But cursed be the deceiver, which hath in his flock a male, and voweth, and sacrificeth unto the Lord a corrupt thing: for I am a great King, saith the Lord of hosts, and my name is dreadful among the heathens.”

“^{chapter 2:1}And now, O ye priests, this commandment is for you. ²If ye will not hear, and if ye will not lay it to heart, to give glory unto my name, saith the Lord of hosts, I will even send a curse upon you, and I will curse your blessings: yea, I have cursed them already, because ye do not lay it to heart.”—

What do they not lay to heart; what do they not lay to heart?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: His warning.

BROTHER PIPPENGER: His warning.

What?

FROM THE AUDIENCE: The Tables.